< +HMI

CNC Operation Screen

OPERATOR'S MANUAL

B-64644EN-1/09

© FANUC CORPORATION, 2016

- No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
- The design and specifications of this product are subject to change without notice.

The products in this manual are controlled based on Japan's "Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law".
Further, re-export to another country may be subject to the license of the government of the country from
where the product is re-exported. Furthermore, the product may also be controlled by re-export regulations
of the United States government. Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please contact
FANUC for advice.

In this manual, we endeavor to include all pertinent matters.

There are, however, a very large number of operations that must not or cannot be performed, and if the
manual contained them all, it would be enormous in volume.
It is, therefore, requested to assume that any operations that are not explicitly described as being possible
are "not possible".

Program and device names belonging to companies other than FANUC in this manual include registered
trademarks of their respective companies.
However, the ® and ™ marks may be omitted for some of those names.
 B-64644EN-1/09
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, NOTE, AND MEMO

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1

When using a device equipped with the FANUC iHMI CNC Operation Screen, you must comply with 2
the instructions written in "Safety Precautions".

3
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, 4
NOTE, AND MEMO
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing
5
damage to the machine.Precautions are classified into “ ! Warning" and
“ ! Caution" according to the degree of the risk or severity of damage.
6
Also, supplementary information is described as "Note" and "Memo".
Read these indications thoroughly before using this product.
7
! Used if a danger resulting in the death or serious injury of the user is
WARNING expected to occur if he or she fails to observe the approved procedure.
8
Used if a danger resulting in the minor or moderate injury of the user or
!
CAUTION
equipment damage is expected to occur if he or she fails to observe
the approved procedure.
A1

 Used if points to keep in mind not related to WARNING or CAUTION

are to be indicated.
A2
NOTE

Z
 Used if supplementary explanations for operation or useful information
not related to WARNING or CAUTION are to be indicated.
MEMO

* Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

s-1
 B-64644EN-1/09
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
The following warnings and cautions provide information to be noted when

1 handing the iHMI CNC Operation Screen for safer use of the machine equipped
with the iHMI CNC Operation Screen.

2 • Carefully check that data you want to enter is correctly entered before
performing the next machining. Machining with incorrect data may
cause unexpected behavior of the machine, resulting in damage to the
3 work or machine or injury.
• When using the tool offset function, carefully check the offset direction
and value, and make sure that the tool does not collide with the
4 workpiece or machine before you start the machine. Collision may
cause damage to the tool or machine, or lead to injury.
• When using the uniform peripheral speed control, set values allowed

5 by the workpiece and workpiece retention device for the data items
used for maximum spindle speed. Setting unsuitable values may
cause the workpiece or retention device to fly off by centrifugal force

6 ! resulting in machine damage or injury.

• All required parameters and data must be set before you start any
WARNING
operation using the iHMI CNC Operation Screen. Specifying

7 unsuitable cutting conditions for the workpiece may cause damage to

the tool or lead to injury.
• When you create a machining program with the function provided by

8 the iHMI CNC Operation Screen, do not immediately start machining

using that program. Instead, check each step of the program one by
one to make sure that all of the tool tracks and machining movements

A1 are correct and that the tool does not collide with the workpiece or
machine. Before you start production machining, operate the machine
without the workpiece set to check that the tool does not collide with

A2 the workpiece or machine.

• Collision may cause damage to the tool or machine, or lead to injury.

s-2
 B-64644EN-1/09
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

After pressing the power-on button, do not touch any button, soft key, or
the display panel until the Home screen appears. Otherwise, it may
cause unexpected behavior.
Emergency Shutdown Switch (EMO)
• The iHMI CNC Operation Screen is equipped with an Emergency
1
Shutdown Switch near the operating section. Press this switch as
soon as you find an abnormality in the system.
In Case of an Accident Causing Physical Injury
2
! • When you encounter an accident that may cause physical injury while
CAUTION the device is in operation, inform the situation to other workers nearby
without delay, evacuate any injured persons to a safe location, and
3
provide proper treatment. The supervisor must assess the situation
and identify the cause of the accident.
In Case of Fire
4
• In case of a fire, immediately press the Emergency Shutdown Switch
(EMO) to stop the system. If the device is energized, electric leakage
may occur during fire extinguishing activities or may lead to secondary
5
accidents by electric shock.

6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

s-3
 B-64644EN-1/09
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

1
2

3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

s-4
 B-64644EN-1/09
PREFACE 
DESCRIPTION IN THIS MANUAL

PREFACE 1
This manual describes the general operations of the iHMI CNC Operation Screen. 2
The actual operations will vary depending on the operation panels and functions
provided by each machine manufacturer, so refer to those specific manuals as
well. 3
0.1

1 DESCRIPTION IN THIS MANUAL 4

You will operate the iHMI CNC Operation Screen using the MDI keyboard, soft
keys, and the touch panel (if equipped). 5
Description of MDI keys
Key names are enclosed by brackets (< >). 6
Example: <INPUT> key

Description of soft keys 7

Soft key names are enclosed by square brackets ([ ]).
Example: [OK] soft key
8
To indicate the operation of the MDI keyboard and touch panel using common
descriptions, some of the MDI key and soft key operations are described as
follows in this manual. A1
Description example in this manual: Press [XXX].
Actual operation with the MDI keys A2
Select the [XXX] soft key with the cursor keys <←> <→> <↑> <↓> and press
the <INPUT> key.
Actual operation with the touch panel Z
Press the [XXX] soft key.

1.1 Abbreviations
In some sections of this manual, the following descriptions (abbreviations) are
used to indicate the different types of path controls used for the operation.
T-type: for lathes
M-type: for machining centers

p-1
 B-64644EN-1/09
PREFACE 
MANUALS RELATED TO iHMI

0.2

2 MANUALS RELATED TO iHMI

The table below lists manuals related to iHMI CNC operation screen.

1 Table 2 Related Manuals List

Manual name Specification

2 number
FANUC iHMI Home Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL B-64644EN
FANUC iHMI CNC Operation Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL (this B-64644EN-1

3 document)
FANUC iHMI Machining Cycle OPERATOR'S MANUAL B-64644EN-2
FANUC iHMI Set-up Guidance OPERATOR'S MANUAL B-64644EN-3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

p-2
 B-64644EN-1/09

CHAPTER CONTENTS

1 iHMI CNC OPERATION SCREEN OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 1

2 BASIC OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 2
3 MANAGING PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 3
4 EDITING PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 4
5 SETUP FOR MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 5
6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 6
7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 7
8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
8
A APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
A

c-1
 B-64644EN-1/09

1
2

A1

A2

c-2
 B-64644EN-1/09

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1
2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s-1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, NOTE, AND MEMO ...........s-1 3
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS ................................................................s-2
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p-1
1 DESCRIPTION IN THIS MANUAL .............................................p-1
4
1.1 Abbreviations .................................................................................. p-1
2 MANUALS RELATED TO iHMI ..................................................p-2 5
1 iHMI CNC OPERATION SCREEN OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
1.1 iHMI CNC OPERATION SCREEN FEATURES ............................2
1.2 WORK MODES .............................................................................3
6
1.2.1 Switch the Work Mode ..................................................................... 3
2 BASIC OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 7
2.1 BASIC OPERATION ......................................................................6
2.2 NAME OF EACH PART ON THE BASE SCREEN .......................7
2.2.1 Common Display on the Base Screen ............................................. 8
8
2.2.1.1 Current position display tile ....................................................... 8
2.2.1.2 Spindle information display tile ............................................... 10 A1
2.2.1.3 Tiles in the customized area ................................................... 11
2.2.1.4 Program display tile ................................................................ 14
2.3 LEARNING COMMON OPERATIONS USED ON THE A2
OPERATION SCREEN ...............................................................16
2.3.1 Soft Key Operations ....................................................................... 16
2.3.1.1 Switching show/hide of soft keys ............................................ 16 Z
2.3.2 Calling Up Frequently Used Information and Setting Screens
from the Slide ................................................................................. 17
2.3.3 Windows ......................................................................................... 22
2.3.4 Operating Functions with the Soft Keys ......................................... 22
2.3.5 Entering Characters ....................................................................... 22
2.3.5.1 Key input buffer area .............................................................. 23
2.3.6 Changing Screens .......................................................................... 24
2.4 USING OPERATION ASSISTANCE FUNCTIONS .....................25
2.4.1 Help Display ................................................................................... 25
2.4.2 Guidance Display ........................................................................... 25
2.5 SETTING SLIDE ..........................................................................26
2.5.1 Opening/Closing the Setting Slide .................................................. 26

c-3
 B-64644EN-1/09

2.5.1.1Opening the setting slide ........................................................ 26

2.5.1.2Closing the setting slide .......................................................... 26
2.5.1.3Displayed contents on the setting slide .................................. 27
2.5.1.4Configuring the settings on the setting window/NC setting
screen ..................................................................................... 27
1 2.5.1.5 Overview of setting items ....................................................... 28
2.5.2 Misoperation Prevention Function Setting ..................................... 29
2 2.5.2.1 Setting the operation confirmation of misoperation
prevention ............................................................................... 29
2.5.2.2 Setting the valid offset data input range ................................. 30
2.5.3 Operation Guidance/Warning Messages ....................................... 41
3 2.5.3.1 Guidance messages ............................................................... 41
2.5.3.2 Warning messages ................................................................. 44
2.5.4 Machining Time and Sequence Number Display Setting ............... 45
4 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
3.1 PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE OVERVIEW .............................. 48
5 3.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF THE PROGRAM MANAGER
SLIDE .......................................................................................... 49
3.2.1 Displaying the Program Manager Slide ......................................... 49
6 3.2.2 Program Manager Slide ................................................................. 50
3.2.2.1 Program manager slide information in each mode ................. 51

7 3.2.2.2 Displaying the machining time in the program list .................. 52

3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER
SLIDE .......................................................................................... 53
8 3.3.1 Selecting Programs and Folders .................................................... 53
3.3.1.1 When the cursor is on the folder tree ..................................... 53
3.3.1.2 When the cursor is on the program list ................................... 53
A1 3.3.1.3 Selecting multiple programs ................................................... 54
3.3.2 Opening Programs ......................................................................... 55
3.3.2.1 Operations in each mode when program is opened ............... 56
A2 3.3.3 Creating New Programs and Folders ............................................. 56
3.3.4 Confirm Overwrite .......................................................................... 57
3.3.4.1 Confirm overwrite window ...................................................... 57
Z 3.3.4.2 Rename confirmation window ................................................ 59
3.3.5 Copying/Moving Programs and Copying Folders .......................... 60
3.3.6 Deleting Programs and Folders ..................................................... 62
3.3.7 Changing Program and Folder Names .......................................... 63
3.3.8 Editing Comments for Programs .................................................... 64
3.3.9 Searching for Programs ................................................................. 65
3.3.10 Setting a Program to Read Only .................................................... 67
3.3.11 Linking an Image to a Program ...................................................... 68
3.3.12 Inputting Programs ......................................................................... 71
3.3.12.1 Inputting programs individually ............................................... 71
3.3.12.2 Inputting all programs ............................................................. 72
3.3.13 Outputting Programs ...................................................................... 74

c-4
 B-64644EN-1/09

3.3.13.1 Outputting programs individually ............................................. 74

3.3.13.2 Outputting all programs ........................................................... 77
3.3.14 Checking Program Capacity ........................................................... 78
3.3.15 Sorting Programs in the Program List ............................................ 79
3.3.16 Creating Program Storage Files ..................................................... 80
3.3.17 Setting the M198 Operation Folder ................................................ 81 1
3.3.18 Changing the Host PC .................................................................... 83
3.3.19 Folder Expansion in the Host PC ................................................... 83
3.3.20 Using a Multi-path Program Template ............................................ 84
2
3.3.20.1 Overview of creating machining data based on a template .... 84
3.3.20.2 Details on creating machining data ......................................... 85
3.4 MANAGING PROGRAM STORAGE FILES ................................95
3
3.4.1 Program Storage Files ................................................................... 95
3.4.2 Mounting/Unmounting Large-Capacity Memory HDD/SSDs .......... 95 4
3.4.3 Mounting/Unmounting the Memory Card ....................................... 96
4 EDITING PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
4.1 OVERVIEW OF PROGRAM EDIT ..............................................98
5
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN ......99
4.2.1 Displaying the Program Edit Screen .............................................. 99 6
4.2.1.1 Changing the program display/edit area size .......................... 99
4.2.2 EDIT Mode Base Screen .............................................................. 101
4.2.2.1 Program path display area .................................................... 102 7
4.2.2.2 Program display/edit area ..................................................... 102
4.2.2.3 EDIT mode base screen message area ............................... 106
4.2.2.4 Key input buffer area ............................................................ 107 8
4.2.2.5 Changing the program edit method setting ........................... 107
4.2.2.6 Enabling the sequence number automatic insert function .... 108
4.2.3 Creating New Programs ............................................................... 117
A1
4.2.4 Searching Programs ..................................................................... 118
4.2.5 Moving the Cursor ........................................................................ 119
4.2.5.1 Reset key operations ............................................................ 119
A2
4.2.5.2 Touch panel operations ........................................................ 119
4.2.6 Searching Strings ......................................................................... 121
4.2.6.1 String search conditions ........................................................ 123
Z
4.2.6.2 Search above the cursor position ......................................... 123
4.2.6.3 Search below the cursor position .......................................... 124
4.2.6.4 Consecutive search .............................................................. 125
4.2.7 Rewind and End Search ............................................................... 126
4.2.8 Changing Screens ........................................................................ 126
4.2.9 Inserting M Codes ........................................................................ 126
4.2.10 Inserting Fixed Sentences for Machining ..................................... 127
4.2.10.1 Fixed sentence information tile ............................................. 128
4.2.10.2 Registering fixed sentences for machining ........................... 129
4.2.10.3 Changing fixed sentences for machining .............................. 130
4.2.10.4 Deleting fixed sentences for machining ................................ 131

c-5
 B-64644EN-1/09

4.2.10.5 Sorting fixed sentences for machining .................................. 132

4.2.10.6 Outputting fixed sentences for machining ............................ 132
4.2.10.7 Inputting fixed sentences for machining ............................... 133
4.2.11 Creating Drawing Commands ...................................................... 134
4.2.12 Creating Free Figure Blanks ........................................................ 136
1 4.2.12.1 Element input window ........................................................... 136
4.2.12.2 Restrictions on creating free figure blanks ........................... 139
2 4.2.12.3 Displaying help about input items ......................................... 139
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS ............................................................. 141
4.3.1 Insert, Change, and Delete .......................................................... 141

3 4.3.1.1 Insert ..................................................................................... 141

4.3.1.2 Change ................................................................................. 144
4.3.1.3 Delete ................................................................................... 147
4 4.3.2 Copy, Cut, Delete, and Paste ...................................................... 147
4.3.2.1 Select Range ........................................................................ 149
4.3.2.2 Copy ..................................................................................... 151
5 4.3.2.3 Cut ........................................................................................ 152
4.3.2.4 Delete ................................................................................... 152
4.3.2.5 Paste .................................................................................... 153
6 4.3.3 Undo and Redo ............................................................................ 153
4.3.3.1 Undo ..................................................................................... 154
4.3.3.2 Redo ..................................................................................... 154
7 4.3.4 Paste Key-in ................................................................................. 155
4.3.5 Insert Cycle Time ......................................................................... 155
4.3.6 Replace and Replace All .............................................................. 157
8 4.3.6.1 Restrictions on strings that can be specified ........................ 158
4.3.6.2 Replace operation ................................................................ 159

A1 4.3.7 Program Character Edit ............................................................... 161

4.3.7.1 Screen displayed during program character edit .................. 162
4.3.7.2 Program display/edit area ..................................................... 163
A2 4.3.7.3 Editing programs .................................................................. 165
4.3.7.4 Copy, cut, delete, and paste ................................................. 166
4.3.8 Highlighting the Program Being Edited with Specified Colors ..... 169
Z 4.3.9 Cutting Condition Calculation Function ........................................ 177
4.3.9.1 Calculating the cutting condition ........................................... 178
4.3.9.2 Editing the program using cutting condition calculation ........ 179
4.3.9.3 Cutting condition calculation tile ........................................... 180
4.3.9.4 Cutting condition calculation tile when selecting estimated
spindle output ....................................................................... 185
4.3.9.5 Graph compare window ........................................................ 187
4.4 EDITING MULTIPLE PROGRAMS
SIMULTANEOUSLY ................................................................. 189
4.4.1 Program Multi-edit Screen ........................................................... 189
4.4.2 Edit Area when Edit Screen is Divided ........................................ 190
4.4.3 Adding Edit Areas ........................................................................ 191
4.4.4 Deleting Edit Areas ...................................................................... 192

c-6
 B-64644EN-1/09

4.4.5 Switching Modes While Editing Multiple Programs

Simultaneously ............................................................................. 192
4.5 EDITING MULTI-PATH PROGRAMS SIMULTANEOUSLY ......194
4.5.1 Conditions for Using the Multi-path Edit Function ........................ 194
4.5.2 Starting Multi-path Edit ................................................................. 195
4.5.3 Ending Multi-path Edit .................................................................. 196 1
4.5.4 Switching the Target Edit Area ..................................................... 197
4.5.5 Screen transition when switching between the EDIT and
MEM modes ................................................................................. 199 2
4.6 USING THE CYCLE INPUT ......................................................200
4.6.1 Starting the Cycle Input ................................................................ 200
4.6.2 Changing the Cycle Input ............................................................. 200
3
4.7 BACKGROUND EDIT ................................................................201
4.7.1 Background Edit Screen ............................................................... 201 4
4.7.2 Starting and Ending Background Edit .......................................... 202
4.7.3 Selecting the Program to Edit ....................................................... 203
4.7.4 Editing Programs .......................................................................... 204 5
4.8 CREATING CONTOURING PROGRAMS ................................205
4.8.1 Displaying the Contouring Figure Base Screen ........................... 205
4.8.2 Contouring Figure Base Screen ................................................... 206 6
4.8.2.1 Contouring program information display ............................... 207
4.8.2.2 Soft keys ............................................................................... 207
4.8.3 Operations on the Contouring Figure Base Screen ..................... 208 7
4.8.3.1 Adding an element to the contouring program ...................... 209
4.8.3.2 Changing an element in the contouring program .................. 209
4.8.3.3 Deleting an element from the contouring program ................ 209
8
4.8.3.4 Saving the Contouring Program ............................................ 210
4.8.4 Entering Elements in the Contouring Program ............................. 210
4.8.4.1 Element input window ([Start Point]) ..................................... 211
A1
4.8.4.2 Element input window (Line) ................................................. 212
4.8.4.3 Element input window (Arc (CW)) ......................................... 213 A2
4.8.4.4 Element input window (Arc (CCW)) ...................................... 214
4.8.4.5 Element input window (Corner R) ......................................... 215
4.8.4.6 Element input window (Chamfer) .......................................... 216 Z
4.8.5 Adjusting the Contouring Figure Drawing ..................................... 216
4.8.6 Copying the Contouring Figure .................................................... 218
4.8.6.1 Figure copy screen (parallel) ................................................ 220
4.8.6.2 Figure copy screen (Rotation) ............................................... 221
4.8.6.3 Figure copy screen (Mirror) ................................................... 222
4.8.6.4 Copy result preview window ................................................. 223
4.8.7 Operations in the Element Input Window ..................................... 224
4.8.7.1 Adding an element to the contouring program ...................... 224
4.8.7.2 Changing an element in the contouring program .................. 226
4.8.8 Saving the Contouring Program ................................................... 227
4.8.8.1 Save contouring program window ......................................... 227
4.8.8.2 Saving the contouring program to the selected program ...... 227

c-7
 B-64644EN-1/09

4.8.8.3 Saving the contouring program to a subprogram ................. 228

4.8.9 Changing the Contouring Program .............................................. 229
4.9 ALL-MODE PROGRAM EDIT ................................................... 230
4.9.1 Starting/Ending All-mode Program Edit ....................................... 230

1 4.9.1.1 Starting editing ...................................................................... 230

4.9.1.2 Ending editing ....................................................................... 231
4.9.2 Switching between Edit Programs ............................................... 232
2 4.9.3 Adding Edit Programs (Editing Multiple Programs) ...................... 233
4.9.4 Checking a Program in a Simulation ............................................ 235
4.9.5 Setting the Main Program ............................................................ 236

3 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239

5.1 BASICS FOR SETUP FOR MACHINING ................................. 240
5.1.1 Switching Information Displayed on the Base Screen ................. 240
4 5.1.1.1 To switch display of current position/distance display tile .... 240
5.1.1.2 To switch the axis displayed on current position/distance
display tile ............................................................................. 241
5 5.1.2 Presetting Workpiece Coordinates .............................................. 242
5.1.3 Presetting Current Position (Relative Coordinates) ..................... 243

6 5.1.4 3D Manual Feed .......................................................................... 244

5.1.4.1 Displaying the 3D manual feed screen ................................. 244
5.1.4.2 3D manual feed screen ........................................................ 245
7 5.1.4.3 Clearing the 3D manual feed pulse amount ......................... 250
5.1.5 Switching the Control Axis between Paths (Arbitrary Axis
Switching Function) ...................................................................... 252
8 5.2 MDI MODE ................................................................................ 253
5.2.1 MDI Mode Overview .................................................................... 253
5.2.2 Displaying the MDI Mode Base Screen ....................................... 253
A1 5.2.3 MDI Mode Base Screen ............................................................... 254
5.2.4 Switching Display of Modal Information Display Tile ................... 255
5.2.5 Editing MDI Programs .................................................................. 255
A2 5.2.5.1 To move the program cursor ................................................ 255
5.2.5.2 MDI mode state and display of program display tile ............. 256
5.2.5.3 Editing programs during execution ....................................... 256
Z 5.2.5.4 MDI program delete conditions (display O0000 and %
only) ...................................................................................... 257
5.2.6 Adding Fixed MDI to Favorites ..................................................... 257
5.2.6.1 Selecting favorite fixed MDIs ................................................ 258
5.2.7 Editing Favorite Fixed MDIs ......................................................... 259
5.2.7.1 Renaming favorite fixed MDIs .............................................. 259
5.2.7.2 Deleting favorite fixed MDIs .................................................. 259
5.2.8 Outputting Favorite Fixed MDIs ................................................... 260
5.2.9 Inputting Favorite Fixed MDIs ...................................................... 261
5.2.10 Displaying Histories ..................................................................... 263
5.3 JOG MODE ............................................................................... 264
5.3.1 Displaying the JOG Mode Base Screen ...................................... 264

c-8
 B-64644EN-1/09

5.3.2 JOG Mode Base Screen .............................................................. 265

5.4 HND MODE ...............................................................................268
5.4.1 Displaying the HND Mode Base Screen ...................................... 268
5.4.2 HND Mode Base Screen .............................................................. 269
5.5 INC MODE .................................................................................272
5.5.1 Displaying the INC Mode Base Screen ........................................ 272
1
5.5.2 INC Mode Base Screen ................................................................ 273
5.6 REF MODE ................................................................................276
5.6.1 Displaying the REF Mode Base Screen ....................................... 276
2
5.6.2 REF Mode Base Screen ............................................................... 277
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION .......................................................280 3
5.7.1 Displaying the Machining Simulation Screen ............................... 282
5.7.2 Machining Simulation Screen ....................................................... 283
5.7.2.1 Soft keys on the machining simulation screen ...................... 284 4
5.7.2.2 Switching the display between one screen and two
screens ................................................................................. 287
5.7.2.3 Switching the operable graphic display between two screens 5
(left and right) ........................................................................ 289
5.7.2.4 Current position/modal information display tile ..................... 290
5.7.2.5 Machining program display tile ............................................. 296 6
5.7.2.6 Thread real display ............................................................... 297
5.7.3 Performing Machining Simulation ................................................. 297
5.7.4 Operations on the Machining Simulation Screen ......................... 299 7
5.7.4.1 Rewinding a machining program .......................................... 299
5.7.4.2 Initializing the machining blank ............................................. 299
5.7.4.3 Moving the displayed position of machining blank
8
graphics ................................................................................ 300
5.7.4.4 Switching the drawing coordinates ....................................... 301
5.7.4.5 Rotating the graphics of the machining blank ....................... 302
A1
5.7.4.6 Zooming in/out the graphics of the machining blank ............. 303
5.7.4.7 Automatic scaling of the graphics of the machining blank .... 303
5.7.4.8 Switching the display between the blank cutting surface
A2
and cylinder blank/hollow cylinder blank ............................... 304
5.7.4.9 MDI key operations on the machining simulation screen ...... 307
5.7.4.10 Switching the blank color ...................................................... 307
Z
5.7.4.11 Switching the display direction of graphics ........................... 307
5.7.4.12 Operating graphics using the touch panel ............................ 308
5.7.4.13 Interference check ................................................................ 310
5.7.4.14 Switching the drawing speed ................................................ 311
5.7.5 Tool Track Drawing ...................................................................... 312
5.7.5.1 Switching the drawings ......................................................... 313
5.7.5.2 Deleting the tool track drawing .............................................. 315
5.7.5.3 Specifying paths for the tool track drawing ........................... 315
5.7.5.4 Enabling/disabling the tool track drawing .............................. 316
5.7.5.5 Changing the selected tool path ........................................... 317
5.7.5.6 Checking the program contents by selecting a tool path ...... 318

c-9
 B-64644EN-1/09

5.7.5.7 Changing the drawing settings ............................................. 321

5.7.6 Converting the Machining Simulation Results into an NC
Program ....................................................................................... 322
5.7.6.1 Displaying the machining simulation screen when the NC
program conversion mode is enabled .................................. 323
1 5.7.7 Changing Settings for Machining Simulation ............................... 324
5.7.7.1 Setting the advanced function .............................................. 325
2 5.7.8 Configurable Blank Figures .......................................................... 330
5.7.9 Configurable Tool Figures ............................................................ 338
5.7.10 Settings for Machining Simulation in Command
Synchronization between Multiple Paths ..................................... 341
3 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) . . . . . . . . . . .345
6.1 TOOL SLIDE OVERVIEW ........................................................ 346
4 6.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF TOOL SLIDE .................................. 347
6.2.1 Opening/Closing the Tool Slide ................................................... 347
6.2.2 Displayed Contents on the Tool Slide .......................................... 348
5 6.2.2.1 Table display and coordinate values display ........................ 348
6.2.2.2 Checking tool offset information ........................................... 350
6.2.2.3 Tool slide soft keys ............................................................... 357
6 6.2.2.4 Display for multi-path systems .............................................. 359
6.2.3 Selecting Cells ............................................................................. 359

7 6.2.4 Searching by Tool Number .......................................................... 360

6.2.5 Geometry/Wear Filtering .............................................................. 360
6.2.6 Undoing/Redoing Operations on the Tool Slide ........................... 361

8 6.3 UPDATING OFFSET DATA ...................................................... 363

6.3.1 By Direct Input ............................................................................. 363
6.3.2 Adding/Deducting the Fine Tune Amount .................................... 365
A1 6.3.3 By Entering the Difference (+ Input) ............................................. 367
6.3.4 By Entering Relative Coordinate Values (Input Counter) ............. 368
6.3.5 By Entering with Absolute Coordinate Values (Measure) ............ 369
A2 6.3.6 By Directly Entering the Tool Offset Measured Value (Tool
Offset Measured Value Direct Input B) ........................................ 370
6.3.7 Inputting Tool Offset Data ............................................................ 371
Z 6.3.8 Outputting Tool Offset Data ......................................................... 371
6.3.9 Changing Tools ............................................................................ 372
6.3.9.1 Opening the tool change window ......................................... 372
6.3.9.2 Displayed contents on the tool change window .................... 373
6.3.9.3 Changing tools ...................................................................... 374
6.3.9.4 Moving to the exchange position .......................................... 375
6.3.9.5 Input prohibition when a change in the input value amount
exceeds the limit ................................................................... 375
7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
7.1 WORKPIECE COORDINATES OVERVIEW ............................ 380
7.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF WORKPIECE COORDINATES ...... 381
7.2.1 Opening and Closing the Workpiece Coordinates Slide .............. 381

c-10
 B-64644EN-1/09

7.2.2 Displayed Contents of Workpiece Coordinates ............................ 382

7.2.2.1 Soft keys ............................................................................... 382
7.2.2.2 Display for multi-path systems .............................................. 383
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE .........384
7.3.1 Visually Checking the Workpiece Origin Offset ............................ 384
7.3.1.1 Rotating the workpiece coordinates graphic ......................... 386
1
7.3.1.2 Parallel shifting the workpiece coordinates graphic .............. 387
7.3.1.3 Zooming the workpiece coordinates graphic ........................ 388
7.3.2 Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Amount ................................ 389
2
7.3.3 Setting the Workpiece Coordinates Shift Amount (for Lathes) ..... 395
7.3.4 Protecting the Workpiece Origin Offset Amount from Being
Edited ........................................................................................... 395
3
7.3.5 Inputting Using Measured Values ................................................ 395
7.3.6 Inputting the Results of the Corrected Value Added to the
Current Value ............................................................................... 398
4
7.3.7 Switching the Coordinates to Be Displayed in the Current
Position ......................................................................................... 400
7.3.8 Switching Control Axes to Be Displayed in the Current
5
Position ......................................................................................... 400
7.3.9 Presetting the Relative Coordinate Values ................................... 400
7.3.10 Inputting a Workpiece by Measuring ............................................ 402
6
7.3.10.1 Inputting a workpiece by measuring the face ........................ 402
7.3.10.2 Inputting the center by measuring two points ....................... 406 7
7.3.10.3 Inputting the circle center by measuring the hole or
column .................................................................................. 409
7.3.11 Undoing/Redoing Operations on the Workpiece Coordinates 8
Slide ............................................................................................. 412
8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
8.1 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) OVERVIEW ..............416
A1
8.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EXECUTION
SCREEN ....................................................................................417
8.2.1 Displayed Contents of the Program Execution Screen ................ 417
A2
8.2.1.1 Soft keys ............................................................................... 418
8.2.2 Current Position/Distance Display Tile ......................................... 419 Z
8.2.3 Servo Load Meter Display Tile ..................................................... 421
8.2.4 Modal Information Display Tile ..................................................... 422
8.2.5 Feed Information Display Tile ....................................................... 425
8.2.6 Spindle Information Display Tile ................................................... 427
8.2.7 Status Display Tiles ...................................................................... 432
8.2.8 Machining Program Display Tile ................................................... 434
8.2.9 Machining Time/Remaining Time Display Tile ............................. 435
8.2.10 Machining Scheduled End Time Display Tile ............................... 436
8.3 OPERATING THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN ............437
8.3.1 Switching the Displayed Contents of Modal Information .............. 437
8.3.2 Switching Control Axes to Be Displayed in the Current Position .. 438
8.3.3 Searching for Any Machining Program ......................................... 439

c-11
 B-64644EN-1/09

8.3.4 Rewinding a Machining Program ................................................. 440

8.3.5 Searching for Sequence Number in a Machining Program .......... 441
8.3.6 Switching Coordinate Values to Be Displayed in the Current
Position ........................................................................................ 442
8.3.7 Switching to Overall Display of Current Position Information
1 (Absolute Coordinates, Relative Coordinates, Machine
Coordinates, Remaining Travel Distance) ................................... 443
2 8.3.8 Presetting Workpiece Coordinates .............................................. 444
8.3.9 Presetting Relative Coordinates .................................................. 446
8.3.10 Sequence No. Title Stop Function ............................................... 449
8.3.11 Displaying and Setting Machining Information ............................. 450
3 8.4 MULTI-PATH INFORMATION DISPLAY .................................. 452
8.4.1 Displaying Multi-path Information ................................................. 453
8.4.1.1 Switching between the single and multi-path screens .......... 453
4 8.4.1.2 Changing the operation target and the screen by changing
the path (The paths and display order are set to "fixed") ..... 456
8.4.1.3 Changing the operation target and the screen by
5 changing the path (The paths and the display order are
set to "depending on the parameters") ................................. 458
8.5 REMOTE MACHINING ............................................................. 461
6 8.5.1 Name of Each Part ....................................................................... 461
8.5.2 Selecting a DNC Machining Program .......................................... 462

7 8.5.3 Displaying a Program Running DNC Machining .......................... 462

8.6 OPERATING THE CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE LIST
SLIDE ........................................................................................ 464
8 8.6.1 Opening/Closing the Custom Macro Variable List Slide .............. 464
8.6.1.1 Opening the custom macro variable list slide ....................... 464
8.6.1.2 Closing the custom macro variable list slide ......................... 464
A1 8.6.1.3 Displayed contents on the custom macro variable list
slide ...................................................................................... 465
8.6.2 Displaying the Custom Macro Variables as a List ........................ 465
A2 8.6.3 Searching for Custom Macro Variables ....................................... 466
8.6.3.1 Searching by number ........................................................... 466
8.6.3.2 Searching by name ............................................................... 467
Z 8.6.4 Showing/Hiding the Custom Macro Variable Names ................... 468
8.6.5 Inputting a Custom Macro Variable File ....................................... 470
8.6.6 Outputting a Custom Macro Variable File .................................... 470
8.7 RESTARTING PROGRAMS ..................................................... 472
8.7.1 Opening/Closing the Utility Slide .................................................. 472
8.7.1.1 Opening the utility slide ........................................................ 472
8.7.1.2 Closing the utility slide .......................................................... 472
8.7.1.3 Displayed contents on the utility slide ................................... 473
8.7.2 Opening the Program Restart Window ........................................ 473
8.7.2.1 Displayed contents on the program restart window .............. 474
8.7.3 Operation Flow of Program Restart ............................................. 475
8.7.4 Performing Dry Run to the Restart Block ..................................... 475

c-12
 B-64644EN-1/09

8.7.4.1 Saving the block counter ....................................................... 478

8.7.5 Restoring the Auxiliary Function ................................................... 478
8.7.5.1 Displayed contents on the Restore Aux. Function screen .... 478
8.7.5.2 Executing MDI programs ...................................................... 479
8.7.6 Moving to the Program Restart Position ....................................... 479
8.7.6.1 Displayed contents on the move to restart position screen .. 480 1
8.7.6.2 Executing the MSTB code in overstore ................................. 480
8.7.6.3 Setting the moving axis ......................................................... 481
8.7.6.4 Setting the arbitrary axis approach ....................................... 482
2
8.7.6.5 Moving to the restart position ................................................ 483
8.8 RESTARTING PROGRAMS - QUICK PROGRAM RESTART
FUNCTION ................................................................................484
3
8.8.1 Operation Flow of Quick Program Restart ................................... 484
8.8.2 Quick Program Restart Window ................................................... 485 4
8.8.2.1 Name and Function of Each Part on the Quick Program
Restart Window ..................................................................... 486
8.8.3 Multi-path quick program restart ................................................... 498 5
8.9 DISPLAYING TOOL TRACKS DURING MACHINING ..............499
8.9.1 Showing/Hiding the Machining Drawing Function ........................ 499
8.9.2 Machining Drawing Tile ................................................................ 500 6
8.9.3 Operations in the Machining Drawing Tile .................................... 500
8.9.3.1 Automatic scaling of the graphics of the tool track ................ 502
8.9.3.2 Zooming in/out the graphics of the tool track ........................ 502 7
8.9.3.3 Moving the displayed position of tool track graphics ............. 503
8.9.3.4 Switching the drawing coordinates ....................................... 504
8.9.3.5 Rotating the graphics of the tool track .................................. 505
8
8.9.3.6 Delete, start, and stop the tool track drawing ........................ 507
8.9.3.7 Specifying paths for the tool track drawing ........................... 508
A1
A APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
A.1 XY PLANE GEOMETRY ...........................................................510
A.2 YZ PLANE GEOMETRY ............................................................513 A2
A.3 XC PLANE GEOMETRY ...........................................................516
A.4 ZC PLANE GEOMETRY ...........................................................519 Z
A.5 ZX PLANE GEOMETRY ............................................................522

c-13
 B-64644EN-1/09

1
2

3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

c-14
 iHMI CNC 1

OPERATION 2

1
SCREEN 3

OVERVIEW 4
5
The iHMI CNC Operation Screen is operated through the EDIT/MDI/MEM/
JOG/HND/REF/INC/RMT mode screens and common slides provided for all
modes.
6
1.1 iHMI CNC Operation Screen Features ................................................... 2
1.2 WORK MODES ...................................................................................... 3
7
8
A

1
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 1 iHMI CNC OPERATION SCREEN OVERVIEW 
1.1 iHMI CNC OPERATION SCREEN FEATURES

1.1

1.1 iHMI CNC OPERATION SCREEN FEA-

TURES
1 The features of the iHMI CNC Operation Screen are as follows:

2  Screens and operations well-suited for the flow and objectives of the
work site
Based on the concept of supporting the PDCA (Plan Do Check Action) cycle at
3 production sites, the iHMI CNC Operation Screen is designed in consideration of
the operability of each operation screen. Most daily operations including
machining program editing, MDI program operation, production machining,
4 manual machining with the handle and jog switch can be performed in accordance
with the actual work flow.
 Intuitive operations that provide graphics with high-level visibility
5 The soft keys are displayed as graphical icons to allow intuitive understanding. In
addition, image linking to allow better search of programs, load meter display
6 through MEM mode graphics, and graphical rendering of workpiece coordinates
are also provided to aid in increasing your production work efficiency.
 Help function that can be called up as required

7 The help function is provided to assist you when you have difficulties with an
operation by displaying additional information related to the operation. Guidance
is also displayed at the bottom of the screen including warnings and operation

8 status, so you can check any required information during an operation.

 Advanced machining program editing function
Machining programs can be easily edited through search, copy and paste, word/
A1 character/block selection operations.
 MDI program favorites function

A2 You can register any MDI program as "favorite" programs to be called up at any
time. You can also edit favorite programs and reregister them.

Z  • Touch panel operations are only available on models equipped with a

touch panel. On models without the touch panel, you must use the
MEMO keys to operate the iHMI CNC Operation Screen.

2
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 1 iHMI CNC OPERATION SCREEN OVERVIEW 
1.2 WORK MODES

1.2

1.2 WORK MODES

All work required for machining including machining program editing, setup, and
executing can be performed on the iHMI CNC Operation Screen.
1
1.2.1 Switch the Work Mode 2
1.2.1

You can switch work modes depending on what you want to do, such as editing,
setup, or machining. The specific procedure to select the work modes will vary
according to the model you use. 3
Editing Machining Programs
EDIT Mode
This mode is for editing and creating programs.
4
The program can be created using the text editor as well as entering machining and
measurement cycles using the conversational method.
5
6
Setup Before Machining
MDI/JOG/HND/REF/INC Mode
These modes allow preparation of tools and workpieces before machining.
7
• Setup (MDI) Mode
This mode allows the execution of a simple program to perform setup prior to
machining. It is also used to check the behavior of the programs.
8
• JOG Mode
This mode allows continuous travel of the axis through manual operation. Preset the
jog feedrate to allow continuous travel of the axis at the preset feedrate through manual A1
operation.
• Handle (HND) Mode
This mode allows continuous travel of the axis through manual operation. The manual A2
pulse generator rotates to move the axis by automatic handle feed a distance that
corresponds to the rotation amount. The axis that travels is selected with the manual
handle feed axis selection signal.
• Reference Point Return (REF) Mode
Z
This mode allows manual reference point return which moves the axis to the reference
point through manual operation. Preset the reference point return speed to allow the
axis to travel to the reference point in this preset speed.
• Incremental (INC) Mode
This mode moves the control axis one step at a time through manual operation. You
can set a manual handle feed axis selection signal and change the move distance of
one step.

3
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 1 iHMI CNC OPERATION SCREEN OVERVIEW 
1.2 WORK MODES

Machining
MEM/RMT Mode
This mode is related to executing programs and production machining programs.
• Machining (MEM) Mode

1 This mode is used to command the execution of machining. You can command the
execution of machining with an NC program.
• DNC (RMT) Mode
2 Select the RMT mode to perform machining by DNC (Direct Numerical Control). This is
executed by reading in programs from an external device. Memory cards and data
servers can be used as external devices.
Fig. 1.2.1 Switch the Work Mode
3
4
5
6

7
8
A1
A2
Z

4
2
1

BASIC OPERATIONS 2
3
4
5
This chapter describes the basic operations of the iHMI CNC Operation
Screen.
Most settings and operations required for machining can be accomplished in
6
the three major work modes (EDIT, MDI, and MEM) and the common slides
used in each of these modes. 7
2.1 BASIC OPERATION ............................................................................... 6
2.2 NAME OF EACH PART ON THE BASE SCREEN ................................. 7 8
2.3 LEARNING COMMON OPERATIONS USED ON THE OPERATION
SCREEN ............................................................................................... 16
2.4 USING OPERATION ASSISTANCE FUNCTIONS ............................... 25 A
2.5 SETTING SLIDE ................................................................................... 26

5
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.1 BASIC OPERATION

2.1

2.1 BASIC OPERATION

Operation is performed using the touch panel.

1 Soft key operation

Tap the soft keys to operate the touch panel.

2
3
4
5
6
7
8 Fig. 2.1 Touch Panel

A1
 • If the display unit is not equipped with a touch panel, use the soft keys
on the hardware to operate.
MEMO
A2
Z

6
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.2 NAME OF EACH PART ON THE BASE SCREEN

2.2

2.2 NAME OF EACH PART ON THE BASE

SCREEN
Upon start, the following base screen will appear first. In this screen, the operator 1
will perform various works including machining, edit, and setup. Base screens are
provided for each work mode.
The base screen is divided into smaller screens (called "tiles" in this manual) for 2
each function; required information for each mode will be displayed.

Tile 3
4
5
Soft keys
6

Contents 7
Indicator

8
Soft keys A1
Fig. 2.2 Base Screen (MEM Mode Example)
Table 2.2 Name and Function of Each Part on the Base Screen A2
Name Description
Tile Displays a summary of information required in each mode
including current position and program information.
Z
Contents Displayed when multiple contents exist on the base screen. The
Indicator indicator that corresponds to the currently selected screen will be
highlighted.
Soft keys Provides a set of soft keys (on the right side of the screen) to
display the slides to call up frequently used functions and settings
and another set of soft keys (on the bottom of the screen) to
perform operation in each mode.
You can select to display or hide the soft keys on the right side.

7
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.2 NAME OF EACH PART ON THE BASE SCREEN

2.2.1 Common Display on the Base Screen

2.2.1

Information displayed on all base screens in each mode, except for the EDIT
mode base screen, is explained in the following sections.

1 2.2.1.1
2.2.1.1
Current position display tile
The current position display tile displays information related to the current
coordinate position of each axis.
2 Coordinate positions

3
4
Fig. 2.2.1.1 (a) Current Position Display Tile Example

5  Displayed content switching

In the current position display tile, you can change the displayed content as
6 follows:
• Absolute coordinates (including the remaining travel distance)

7 • Relative coordinates (including the remaining travel distance)

• Machine coordinates (including the remaining travel distance)

8 • Overall display (displaying the relative coordinates, absolute coordinates,

machine coordinates, and remaining travel distance simultaneously)
Text size: Small (*1)
A1 Text size: Large
(*1) Only when the edit area is displayed in the reduced view for EDIT mode

A2 To change the displayed content, perform the following:

<1> Press the [Layout] soft key.
Z

The set of soft keys for the menu to change the display type appears.
<2> Press the soft key corresponding to the target displayed content.

8
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.2 NAME OF EACH PART ON THE BASE SCREEN

Soft key Displayed content Screen display example

[Absolute] Displays the selected
[Relative] type of coordinates
[Machine] along with the
remaining travel
distance.
1
2
3
[Reduce Displays the relative 4
All] coordinates, absolute
coordinates, machine
coordinates, and
remaining travel
5
distance simultaneously
(Text size: Small).
6
7
[Expand Displays the relative 8
All] coordinates, absolute
coordinates, machine
coordinates, and
remaining travel
A1
distance simultaneously
(Text size: Large).
A2
Z

9
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.2 NAME OF EACH PART ON THE BASE SCREEN

2.2.1.2 Spindle information display tile

The spindle information display tile displays the following information.
2.2.1.2

Spindle Smart Load Meter Display

B
1 A

2 J

3 C
E
D
4
F
5 H

6 I

Fig. 2.2.1.2 Spindle Information Tile Example

7 Table 2.2.1.2 List of Items in Spindle Information Display Tile
Name Description
8 A Spindle name Displays the spindle name (S) and extension
spindle name/index.
B Actual spindle speed Displays the actual spindle speed.
A1 C Spindle rotation direction icon Displays an icon indicating the spindle rotation
direction.

A2 D Uniform peripheral speed

control mode icon
Displays an icon indicating the uniform peripheral
speed control mode.
E Actual spindle speed meter Displays the actual spindle speed in a circular

Z F Spindle smart load meter

chart.
Displays the spindle load ratio (%) in a bar chart.
G Normal spindle load meter Displays the spindle load ratio (%) in a bar chart.
H Current load ratio Displays the current spindle load ratio in %.
I Duration time Displays the machining available duration (in
seconds) with a time limit.
J Spindle speed override (*1) Displays the spindle speed override (%).

(*1) This is displayed only when the parameter No. 3106#5 (SOV) is 1.

10
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.2 NAME OF EACH PART ON THE BASE SCREEN

2.2.1.3 Tiles in the customized area

This area can be customized to display specific information.
2.2.1.3

Information that can be displayed for each work mode is as follows:

Table 2.2.1.3 (a) Information That Can Be Displayed on Tiles in the Customized
Area
1
Work mode
Information
EDIT/MDI/JOG/HND MEM/RMT 2
Servo axis load information 4 4
Modal information 4 4 3
Tool information 4 4
(Only for the machine type: M-type)
Workpiece coordinates information 4 4 4
Machining status ― 4

5
The following shows an information display example in this area:

Table 2.2.1.3 (b) Information Display Example in the Customized Area 6

Information Screen
(1) Servo axis load information/Modal 7
information
(Conventional display specifications)
8
(2) Detailed modal information A1
(Conventional display specifications)

A2
Z

11
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.2 NAME OF EACH PART ON THE BASE SCREEN

Information Screen
(3) Servo axis load information/Modal
information

1
2 Tool information/Workpiece coordinates
information

3
4 Machining status/Modal information

5
6
 Display type switching

7 <1> Press the [Layout] soft key.

8
A1  • A set of soft keys containing the [Layout] soft key varies depending
on the work mode.
MEMO

A2
The set of soft keys to change the display type for the tile customized area on

Z the base screen appears.

<2> Press one of the following soft keys on the second page.
• [Load + Modal]: See (1) in the table above.
• [Modal Detail]: See (2) in the table above.
• [2 Tiles Display]: See (3) in the table above. To change the displayed
information, perform " Displayed information switching in a two-tile display"
in the next section.

12
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.2 NAME OF EACH PART ON THE BASE SCREEN

 • The setting is retained even when the device is turned off.

MEMO

1
 Displayed information switching in a two-tile display
<1> Press the [Select Left] or [Select Right] soft key depending on whether to
display the target information on the left or right.
2
3
<2> Press the soft key corresponding to the target information. 4
5
The displayed information corresponding to the selected soft key is set in the
tile specified in step <1>, and the screen returns to the first page of soft keys. 6

 • The [Machining Status] soft key is displayed only when the work
mode is MEM or RMT.
7
MEMO • The setting is retained even when the device is turned off.
8
A1
A2
Z

13
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.2 NAME OF EACH PART ON THE BASE SCREEN

2.2.1.4 Program display tile

The program display tile displays the following information:
2.2.1.4

1 B D

2 C

3
4
When the sequence number and the machining time are hidden

5
6 E F

7
8
A1 When the sequence number and the machining time are shown

A2 Fig. 2.2.1.4 Program Display Tile

Table 2.2.1.4 (a) Items Displayed on the Program Display Tile
Name Description
Z A Folder path Displays the folder path where the selected
program is stored.
B Program name Displays the name of the selected program.
C Program Displays the selected program.
D Comment for program Displays the comment for program containing up
to 48 characters inside the parentheses.
This display function is enabled when bit 4 of
parameter No. 11354 is "0".
If you cannot tell the content of the program only
by its name, enter a comment that describes the
content and enable this function for more efficient
work.

14
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.2 NAME OF EACH PART ON THE BASE SCREEN

Name Description
E Sequence No. Displays the machining time and the sequence
F Machining Time number on the program display tile depending on
the setting in the MEM or RMT mode base
screen.
For details on the setting, see "2.5.4 Machining 1
Time and Sequence Number Display Setting".

2
 Screens That Display the Comment for Program
The screens that display the comment for program are as shown in the table
below. 3
Table 2.2.1.4 (b) Screens That Display the Comment for Program
4
Screen name
MDI Mode Base Displayed screen by subprogram calls
Screen 5
MEM mode base Debug operation screen (single path display)
screen
Debug operation screen (2-path display) 6
Debug operation screen (3-path display)
Continuous machining screen 7
Background edit screen
Machining simulation screen (1-screen display)
Machining simulation screen (2-screen display) 8
EDIT Mode Base Program edit screen (single)
Screen
Program edit screen (divide to 2)
A1
Program edit screen (divide to 3)
Program edit screen (divide to 4) A2
Program edit screen (multi path)
Machining simulation screen (1-screen display)
Machining simulation screen (1-screen, 2-screen (1-path display))
Z
Machining simulation screen (1-screen, 2-screen (2-path display))
Machining simulation screen (1-screen, 2-screen (2-path display))
Program restart Move to Restart Position screen
screen

15
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.3 LEARNING COMMON OPERATIONS USED ON THE OPERATION SCREEN

2.3

2.3 LEARNING COMMON OPERATIONS

USED ON THE OPERATION SCREEN
1
2.3.1 Soft Key Operations
2
2.3.1

Soft keys are provided on the right and bottom side of the base screen. Most
operations can be performed with these soft keys.

3
4
5 Soft keys

6
7
8
Soft keys

A1 Fig. 2.3.1 Position of Soft Keys

2.3.1.1 Switching show/hide of soft keys

A2 2.3.1.1

When you want to expand the display area for the 10.4" PANEL iH, you can
temporarily hide the vertical soft keys.

Z <1> Press [>] to hide the vertical soft keys.

To redisplay the keys, press [<].

Fig. 2.3.1.1 Switching Show/Hide of Vertical Soft Keys

16
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.3 LEARNING COMMON OPERATIONS USED ON THE OPERATION SCREEN

2.3.2 Calling Up Frequently Used Information and Setting

Screens from the Slide
2.3.2

The slide function is provided to allow switching of frequently referred information

and various setting screens through a single touch. Slides can be called up from
any work mode. Pressing a soft key on the right side of the screen will cause the 1
slide to slide in from the right (just like a sliding door) onto the base screen. When
you tap a soft key in the displayed slide, the screen returns to the base screen. If
you tap a soft key in a slide other than the displayed one, the screen will switch to 2
the corresponding slide.

3
Information Center

4
Tap the
soft key. Setting Slide
5

Workpiece coordinates 6
Slide

7
Tool Change
Slide
8
Program Edit
Manager
Slide
Program
Slide
A1
Custom macro
variable list slide
A2
Z
Utility Slide

Fig. 2.3.2 (a) Calling Up Slides

 • To use the Edit Program slide, the all-mode program edit function
must be enabled.
MEMO

17
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.3 LEARNING COMMON OPERATIONS USED ON THE OPERATION SCREEN

 Information Center
The Information Center notifies the user of an NC alarm or other information
whichever iHMI application is running.
A notification mark appears in the application icon on the Home screen, informing
the user that there is information (notification) from that application.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Fig. 2.3.2 (b) Information Center
7  Setting Slide
This slide is used to configure the display and operation settings for the CNC
8 operation screen and functions.

A1
A2
Z

Fig. 2.3.2 (c) Setting Slide

18
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.3 LEARNING COMMON OPERATIONS USED ON THE OPERATION SCREEN

 Workpiece Coordinates Slide

This slide is used to set the workpiece coordinates.
You can display and set information related to the coordinates and check the
display of coordinates in 3D graphics.

1
2
3
4
5
6
Fig. 2.3.2 (d) Workpiece Coordinates Slide
 Tool Slide
This slide is used to configure the settings for tool offset data and other tool data.
7
8
A1
A2
Z

Fig. 2.3.2 (e) Tool Slide

19
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.3 LEARNING COMMON OPERATIONS USED ON THE OPERATION SCREEN

 Program Manager Slide

This slide is used to manage programs and folders including selecting of
programs and creating, deleting, and renaming of folders. You can also press the
soft key to switch to the Edit Program slide, which allows program editing and
checking.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Fig. 2.3.2 (f) Program Manager Slide
7
8  • To use the Edit Program slide, the all-mode program edit function
must be enabled.
MEMO

A1
A2
Z

20
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.3 LEARNING COMMON OPERATIONS USED ON THE OPERATION SCREEN

 Custom Macro Variable List Slide

This slide is used to display the custom macro variables as a list.

1
2
3
4
5
Fig. 2.3.2 (g) Custom Macro Variable List Slide
 Utility Slide
6
This slide is used to perform various operations, such as restarting a machining
program.
7
8
A1
A2
Z

Fig. 2.3.2 (h) Utility Slide

21
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.3 LEARNING COMMON OPERATIONS USED ON THE OPERATION SCREEN

2.3.3 Windows
2.3.3

Windows are displayed to operate various functions. The window will close when
you complete or end the operation. Windows will also appear to call the user's
attention indicating information required for that specific operation.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Fig. 2.3.3 Window Display Example

7
2.3.4 Operating Functions with the Soft Keys
8 2.3.4

Use the soft keys on the bottom of the screen to execute each function displayed
on the screen.
When there are many functions, [<] and [>] appear at both ends of the soft keys to
A1 indicate that there are additional soft keys provided on the next page as well. A
page indicator appears below the [>] with the currently displayed page highlighted.

A2
Fig. 2.3.4 Soft Keys on the Bottom of the Screen
Z
2.3.5 Entering Characters
2.3.5

Characters and numerical values are entered with MDI keys. Move the cursor to
the input field to switch the mode to character edit mode. Input fields without a
cursor are for information display only; you cannot enter any data in these fields.
<1> Press <←> or <→>, or tap an input field you want to move to.
The cursor moves to the target.
<2> Press the MDI key.
Characters and/or numeric values will be entered in the input field.

22
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.3 LEARNING COMMON OPERATIONS USED ON THE OPERATION SCREEN

<3> Press <INPUT>.

The entered contents will be confirmed.

2.3.5.1 Key input buffer area

The key input buffer function copies a string you select to a temporary buffer and
1
2.3.5.1

inserts that string to a position you specify. You can also edit the string and insert it
into another position. This function is also used for searches such as N search.

<1> Select a string you want to edit in the program display/edit area.
2
<2> Enter a command or value in the input field.
<3> Press <INPUT>.
3
The selected program is executed.
4
5
6
7
8
Input
Field
A1
Fig. 2.3.5.1 Key Input Buffer
A2
 • You can also change a certain portion of long comments or a portion
MEMO
of a block in a custom macro program. Z

23
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.3 LEARNING COMMON OPERATIONS USED ON THE OPERATION SCREEN

2.3.6 Changing Screens

2.3.6

On the EDIT or MEM mode base screen, you can change screens with the
[Change Screen] soft key.

1 <1> The screen will change each time you press the [Change Screen] soft key.

2
Screen 1 Screen 2

3
4
5
Screen 4 Screen 3
6
7 Fig. 2.3.6 (a) Example of Selecting Screen

8  Display of selected screen

You can see the indicator display position to check which screen is currently
A1 displayed.

A2
Z

Indicator

Fig. 2.3.6 (b) Indicator for Selected Screen

24
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.4 USING OPERATION ASSISTANCE FUNCTIONS

2.4

2.4 USING OPERATION ASSISTANCE

FUNCTIONS
The operation assistance function is provided to display help and guidance that 1
show any information required when you have difficulties with the operation.

2
2.4.1 Help Display
3
2.4.1

The help function can be called up when you are having difficulties with the
operation or would like to know about a certain function or operation.

<1> Press <HELP>. 4

The help items are displayed.
<2> Select the help item you want to check. 5
The help information is displayed.

6
 • You can use the cursor keys to switch between simultaneous display
of help item and body text, and display of body text only.
MEMO
7
2.4.2 Guidance Display 8
2.4.2

A message that will assist operations and guide you through the screens and
operations will be displayed. A warning will also be displayed when the operation
you performed is not correct. A1
A2
Z

Fig. 2.4.2 Guidance Display

25
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.5 SETTING SLIDE

2.5

2.5 SETTING SLIDE

The setting slide is used to configure the display and operation settings for the

1 CNC operation screen and functions.

You can configure the settings all at once, such as machining conditions and
measurement operations.

2
2.5.1 Opening/Closing the Setting Slide
3
2.5.1

2.5.1.1 Opening the setting slide

2.5.1.1

4 <1> On the operation screen, press the Setting Slide soft key.
The setting slide appears.

5
6
7
8
A1
A2
2.5.1.2 Closing the setting slide
Z
2.5.1.2

<1> Press the [>] soft key.

The setting slide closes and returns to the operation screen.

26
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.5 SETTING SLIDE

2.5.1.3 Displayed contents on the setting slide

2.5.1.3

A B 2
3

C
4
5
Fig. 2.5.1.3 Utility Slide
Table 2.5.1.3 Item List
6
Name Description
A Group tile Displays the setting groups.
B Category Displays setting items belonging to the selected group. 7
C Guidance message Displays an operation description or warning.
display tile
8
2.5.1.4 Configuring the settings on the setting window/NC setting screen
A1
2.5.1.4

<1> Select the group and then the category and press the [Select] soft key.
The setting window or the conventional NC setting screen appears.

A2
Z

27
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.5 SETTING SLIDE

<2> Configure the settings on the setting window or NC setting screen.

• The [Setup] setting items are optional functions.

1  • Hold down <HOME> on the NC setting screen to return to the setting

slide.
MEMO • The group and the item of the category vary depending on the
machine configuration.

2
2.5.1.5 Overview of setting items
3 The items that can be configured on the setting slide are as shown in the table
2.5.1.5

below.

4 Table 2.5.1.5 Items That Can be Configured on the Setting Slide

Group Category Note

5 Program Program Edit Method Reference: "4.2.2.5 Changing the program

edit method setting"
Sequence No. Auto Insert Reference: "4.2.2.6 Enabling the sequence
6 number automatic insert function"
Setup Measurement Cycle (Basic) • Optional functions
Measurement Cycle • The setting window appears.
7 (Measurement)
Measurement Cycle (After
Measurement)
8 Measurement cycle • Optional functions
Select Cutting Condition • The conventional NC setting screen
appears.
A1 Adjust Quality Level of
Machining Surface
5-axis Machining Condition
A2 Chopping
High Precision Oscillation

Z Chuck/Tailstock Barrier
Misoperation Prevention –
(Confirm Operation)
Misoperation Prevention
(Valid Range)
Operation Set Base Screen Reference: "2.5.4 Machining Time and
Sequence Number Display Setting"
Others Setting Parameter The conventional NC setting screen
appears.

28
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.5 SETTING SLIDE

 • Displayed items are different depending on whether the optional

functions are used or not.
MEMO For details, contact the machine manufacturer.

1
2.5.2 Misoperation Prevention Function Setting
2.5.2

You can set the misoperation prevention function to prevent operators from 2
performing unintended operations.
This section describes the following misoperation prevention function settings.
• Operation confirmation
3
• Valid offset data input range
4
2.5.2.1 Setting the operation confirmation of misoperation prevention
On the setting slide operation confirmation screen, you can display and change
2.5.2.1

the setting status for the following misoperation prevention functions. 5

• Setting data update reconfirmation
• Axis status display of mirror image ON and interlock ON 6
• Block start reconfirmation in the middle of the program
• Notification of modal information change at reset during program operation 7
• Notification of mode change at the restart of automatic operation

<1> On the setting slide, select [Setup] in Group and [Misoperation Prevention
8
(Confirm Operation)] in Category.
The Misoperation Prevention (Confirm Operation) window appears. A1
A2
Z

<2> Set items on the Misoperation Prevention (Confirm Operation) window.

29
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.5 SETTING SLIDE

2.5.2.2 Setting the valid offset data input range

On the screen to set the valid offset data input range for the setting slide, you can
2.5.2.2

display and change the valid range setting status for the following items.

1 Table 2.5.2.2 (a) Items Displayed on the Misoperation Prevention (Valid Range)
Window
Displayed tab item Description
2 (Soft key)
Tool Offset/Tool Displays the setting range for tool offset (*1)or tool offset
(Geometry) (geometry).
3 Tool (Wear) Displays the setting range for the tool offset (wear).
Y-Axis Offset Displays the setting range for the Y-axis tool offset.

4 Workpiece Shift Displays the setting range for the workpiece shift.
Coordinate System Displays the setting range for the workpiece origin offset and
external workpiece origin offset.
5 (*1)This is shown when the geometry/wear display conditions are met in the tool slide.

6  Tab types and conditions

The tab types and conditions displayed on the Misoperation Prevention (Valid

7 Range) window are as follows.

Up to five tabs are displayed.

8 Table 2.5.2.2 (b) Tool Offset-related Tab Display

pattern Display condition Displayed tab

A1 Geometry/
wear
Y-Axis
Offset
Tool
offsets
Tool
(Geometry)
Tool
(Wear)
Y-Axis
Offset
display

A2 1
2
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
×
×
○
○
○
○
○
×
3 Disabled Enabled ○ × × ○
Z 4 Disabled Disabled ○ × × ×

• Geometry/wear is enabled on tool offset memory B, but only one tab is

 displayed.
Table 2.5.2.2 (e) will also have three large categories accordingly:
MEMO
range, geometry, and wear.

30
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.5 SETTING SLIDE

Table 2.5.2.2 (c) Workpiece Offset-related Tab Display

pattern Display condition Displayed tab
Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece Shift Coordinate
coordinates shift origin System
1 Enabled Enabled ○ ○ 1
2 Enabled Disabled ○ ×
3 Disabled Enabled × ○
4 Disabled Disabled × ×
2

 Tool offset-related display items

3
The items displayed on the tool offset-related screens are as follows.
• Offset value (including geometry/wear) for offset data on each axis (X axis, Y 4
axis, Z axis)
• Offset value for tip R
• Offset value for corner R
5
The displayed contents (table titles) and settings in the Misoperation Prevention 6
(Valid Range) window are as follows.

Table 2.5.2.2 (d) For M-type: Tool Offset Memory A 7

Displayed screen Displayed content Note
Large category Small 8
category
Tool offsets Range Start -
End - A1
Offset Value Lower Limit -
Upper Limit - A2
Table 2.5.2.2 (e) For M-type: Tool Offset Memory B Z
Displayed screen Displayed content Note
Large category Small
category
Tool (Geometry) Range Start -
End -
Offset Value Lower Limit -
Upper Limit -
Tool (Wear) Same as Tool (Geometry)

31
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.5 SETTING SLIDE

Table 2.5.2.2 (f) For M-type: Tool Offset Memory C

Displayed screen Displayed content Note
Large category Small
category
1 Tool (Geometry) Range Start -
End -
Offset Value Lower Limit -
2 Upper Limit -
Tool Radius Lower Limit Large category shows one
3 Upper Limit of the following depending
on the settings. (*1)
• Tool Radius

4 • Tool Diameter
• Tool Radius/Corner R
• Tool Diameter/Corner R

5 Tool (Wear) Same as Tool (Geometry)

(*1) The display conditions are as follows:

•Tool Radius: When all the following conditions are met
6  Bit 2 (ODI) of parameter No. 5004 = 0
 Cutting point command: Disabled
 High-speed smooth TCP: Disabled

7 •Tool Diameter: When all the following conditions are met

 Bit 2 (ODI) of parameter No. 5004 = 1
 Cutting point command: Enabled or high-speed smooth TCP: Enabled, or both
enabled
8 •Tool Radius/Corner R: When all the following conditions are met
 Bit 2 (ODI) of parameter No. 5004 = 0
 Cutting point command: Disabled
A1  High-speed smooth TCP: Disabled
•Tool Diameter/Corner R: When all the following conditions are met
 Bit 2 (ODI) of parameter No. 5004 = 1
A2  Cutting point command: Enabled or high-speed smooth TCP: Enabled, or both
enabled

Z Table 2.5.2.2 (g) For T-type: Without Geometry/Wear Options

Displayed screen Displayed content Note
Large category Small
category
Tool offsets Range Start -
End -

32
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.5 SETTING SLIDE

Displayed screen Displayed content Note

Large category Small
category
X Axis Lower Limit The displayed axis names
Upper Limit are based on the settings.
1
Y Axis Lower Limit
Upper Limit
Tip R Lower Limit
2
Upper Limit
Y-Axis Offset Range Start - 3
End -
Offset Value Lower Limit -
Upper Limit -
4

Table 2.5.2.2 (h) For T-type: With Geometry/Wear Options 5

Displayed screen Displayed content Note
Large category Small
category
6
Tool (Geometry) Range Start -
End - 7
X Axis Lower Limit The displayed axis names

Y Axis
Upper Limit
Lower Limit
are based on the settings.
8
Upper Limit
Tip R Lower Limit A1
Upper Limit
Tool (Wear)
Y-Axis Offset Range Start
Same as Tool (Geometry)
-
A2
End -
Geometry Lower Limit - Z
Upper Limit -
Wear Lower Limit -
Upper Limit -

33
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.5 SETTING SLIDE

Table 2.5.2.2 (i) Complex machining tool offset

Displayed screen Displayed content Note
Large category Small
category
1 [Tool (Geometry)] Range Start -
End -
X Axis Lower Limit The displayed axis names
2 Upper Limit are based on the settings.

Y Axis Lower Limit

3 Upper Limit
Tip R Lower Limit Large category shows one
Upper Limit of the following depending
4 on the settings. (*1)
• Tip R [Radius]
• Tip R [Diameter]
5 • Corner R
• Tip R [Radius]/Corner R
• Tip R [Diameter]/

6 Tool (Wear)
Corner R
Same as [Tool (Geometry)]
Y-Axis Offset Range Start -
7 End -
Geometry Lower Limit -

8 Wear
Upper Limit
Lower Limit
-
-
Upper Limit -
A1 (*1) The display conditions are as follows:
• [Tip R [Radius]]: When all the following conditions are met
 Bit 2 (ODI) of parameter No. 5004 = 0
A2  Tool diameter/Nose R compensation: Enabled
 High-speed smooth TCP: Disabled
 Cutting point command: Disabled
Z • [Tip R [Diameter]]: When all the following conditions are met
 Bit 2 (ODI) of parameter No. 5004 = 1
 Tool diameter/Nose R compensation: Enabled
 High-speed smooth TCP: Disabled
 Cutting point command: Disabled
• Corner R: When all the following conditions in Condition 1 or Condition 2 are met
<Condition 1>
 Tool diameter/Nose R compensation: Disabled
 High-speed smooth TCP: Enabled
 Cutting point command: Disabled
<Condition 2>
 Tool diameter/Nose R compensation: Disabled
 High-speed smooth TCP: Disabled
 Cutting point command: Enabled

34
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.5 SETTING SLIDE

• [Tip R [Radius]/Corner R]: When all the following conditions are met
 Bit 2 (ODI) of parameter No. 5004 = 0
 Tool diameter/Nose R compensation: Enabled
 Cutting point command: Enabled or high-speed smooth TCP: Enabled, or both
enabled
• [Tip R [Diameter]/Corner R]: When all the following conditions are met
 Bit 2 (ODI) of parameter No. 5004 = 1
1
 Tool diameter/Nose R compensation: Enabled
 Cutting point command: Enabled or high-speed smooth TCP: Enabled, or both
enabled 2
 Workpiece offset-related display items
The items displayed on the workpiece offset-related screens are as follows.
3
• Workpiece coordinates shift
• External workpiece origin offset
4
• Workpiece origin offsets (G54 to G59)
• 48 additional workpiece origin offsets (G54.1P1 to G54.1P48)
5
• 300 additional workpiece origin offsets (G54.1P1 to G54.1P300)
6
The displayed contents (table titles) and settings in the Misoperation Prevention
(Valid Range) window are as follows.
7
Table 2.5.2.2 (j) Displayed Contents (Table Titles) and Settings
Displayed screen Displayed content Note 8
Large category Small
category
Tool offsets Range Start - A1
End -
X Axis (*1) Lower Limit
Upper Limit
The displayed axis names
are based on the settings.
A2
(*2)
Workpiece Shift X Axis (*1) Lower Limit
Upper Limit Z
(*1)As many same items as the number of axes displayed on the workpiece coordi-
nates slide are shown.
(*2)The displayed contents are different depending on the settings.

 • The workpiece offset-related axis display order is based on the setting

of parameter No. 3134.
MEMO

35
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.5 SETTING SLIDE

<1> On the setting slide, select [Setup] in Group and [Misoperation Prevention
(Valid Range)] in Category.
The Misoperation Prevention (Valid Range) window appears.

1
2
3
4
5
6
<2> Press the soft key for the item you want to display.
7 One of the following screens appears according to the pressed soft key.
• Tool (Geometry)

8
A1
A2
Z

36
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.5 SETTING SLIDE

• Tool (Wear)

1
2
3
4
5
• Y-Axis Offset
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

37
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.5 SETTING SLIDE

• Workpiece Shift

1
2
3
4
5
6 • Coordinate System (with external workpiece origin offset)

7
8
A1
A2
Z

38
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.5 SETTING SLIDE

• Coordinate System (without external workpiece origin offset)

1
2
3
4
5
<3> Enter a value in each cell to set the valid offset data range.
6
• You cannot select header cells, such as Start, End, Upper Limit, and
Lower Limit, in the table with the cursor. 7
• When the table does not fit on one page, it can be scrolled
horizontally. At this time, the range columns (Start, End) are pinned.
• The cursor moves between the fixed area and movable area as 8
follows:
You can move the cursor in the same row with <←> and <→>.
If you try to move the cursor from the fixed area to the movable area
when the table is already scrolled horizontally in the movable area,
A1
the cursor moves to the left most of the movable area.
If you try to move the cursor from the movable area to the fixed area
when the table is already scrolled horizontally in the movable area, A2
the cursor moves first to the left most of the movable area and then
 to the fixed area.
MEMO Example: When the Coordinate System tab is displayed Z

• Operations of selection of each cell, cursor move, and touch operation

other than the above are the same as for the tool slide and the
workpiece coordinates slide.

39
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.5 SETTING SLIDE

 Tool offset related

The misoperation prevention function target items are as shown in the table below.

Table 2.5.2.2 (k) Tool Offset-related Target Items for the Misoperation Prevention
1 Function
Item Maximum number of pairs for the valid
range setting
2 Tool Offset (including geometry/wear) 20
Y-Axis Offset 4

3

4 MEMO
• The operation to enter values in cells is the same as for the tool slide.

5  Workpiece offset related

The misoperation prevention function target items are as shown in the table below.

6 Table 2.5.2.2 (l) Workpiece Offset-related Target Items for the Misoperation
Prevention Function
7 Item Maximum number of pairs for the valid
range setting
Workpiece origin offset 6
8 Workpiece coordinates shift 1
External workpiece origin offset 1

A1
• You cannot combine normal workpiece coordinates (G54 to G59) and
A2 additional workpiece coordinates (G54.1P or above) into one group.
If set, all coordinates in the range are regarded as incorrect.
• For the range fields, manually enter the command formats of

Z workpiece coordinates (G54 to G59) or additional workpiece

 coordinates (G54.1P or above).

To set G54 to G58: Start "G54", End "G58"
MEMO To set G54.1P10 to P300: Start "G54.1P10", End "G54.1P300"
• If both Start and End are "0" in a range field, the range setting for the
misoperation prevention function is reset.
When you enter "0" and confirm it, "(None)" is displayed.
• Operations of entering values in cells other than the above are the
same as for the workpiece coordinates slide.

40
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.5 SETTING SLIDE

2.5.3 Operation Guidance/Warning Messages

2.5.3

If you enter an incorrect setting value, a guidance message or warning message

appears, prompting you to correct the value.
A displayed message varies depending on the type or condition of the selected
cell.
1
2.5.3.1
2.5.3.1
Guidance messages
2
• Even if there are multiple incorrect setting values in one row, the
guidance message appears for only one error as follows: 3
 Setting value judged incorrect first from the left
• If a parameter value is changed by G10, signal operation, or another
MEMO
application, the guidance message is updated at the same time when
the cell value is updated.
4

 Guidance Messages When the Cell Is Selected

5
When you select a cell, a message appears according to the setting target shown
in the table below. 6
Table 2.5.3.1 (a) Guidance Messages When the Cell Is Selected
Setting target Cell type Message Character
7
color
Tool offset
related
Start
End
Input a numeric value as "Start  End". Guidance
message
8
Upper Input a numeric value as "Lower Limit < Upper color
Limit Limit". A1
Lower
Limit
Workpiece Start When there are Input range: 0, G54-G59 Guidance A2
offset related End no additional message
workpiece color
coordinates
Z
When there are Input Range: 0, G54-G59,
48 additional G54.1P1-G54.1P48
workpiece
coordinates
When there are Input Range: 0, G54-G59,
300 additional G54.1P1-G54.1P300
workpiece
coordinates
Upper Input a numeric value as "Lower Limit < Upper
Limit Limit".
Lower
Limit

41
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.5 SETTING SLIDE

 Guidance Messages When a Setting Value Is Incorrect (1)

If an entered setting value meets one of the following conditions, a message
appears according to the table below.
• The tool offset number is duplicated.
1 • The workpiece coordinates are duplicated.

2 Table 2.5.3.1 (b) Guidance Messages When a Setting Value Is Incorrect (1)
Setting target Cell type Setting status Message Character
color
3 Tool offset Start When tool offset number is The Start and Warning
related End duplicated in different pairs End ranges are color
(Setting example: first pair overlapping.
4 1-10, second pair 5-15)
Workpiece Start (*1) When workpiece The Start and
offset related End (*1) coordinates are duplicated End ranges are
5 in different pairs (Setting overlapping.
example: first pair
G54-G54.1P40, second
6 pair G59-G54.1P10)
(*1)Excluding the external workpiece origin offset

7  Guidance Messages When a Setting Value Is Incorrect (2)

If an entered setting value meets one of the following conditions, a message
appears according to the table below.
8 • Setting value for tool offset number: Start > End
• Setting value for tool offset: Lower Limit > Upper Limit
A1 • Setting value for workpiece coordinates offset number: Start > End
• Setting value for workpiece coordinates offset: Lower Limit > Upper Limit

A2
Table 2.5.3.1 (c) Guidance Messages When a Setting Value Is Incorrect (2)

Z Setting target Cell type Message Character

color
Tool offset Start Input a numeric value as "Start  End". Warning
related End color
Upper Limit Input a numeric value as "Lower Limit <
Lower Limit Upper Limit".
Workpiece Start Input a numeric value as "Start  End". (*1) Warning
offset related End color
Upper Limit Input a numeric value as "Lower Limit <
Lower Limit Upper Limit".
(*1)Workpiece coordinates command formats in ascending order: G54 < G59 <
G54.1P1 < G54.1P300

42
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.5 SETTING SLIDE

 Guidance Messages When a Setting Value Is Incorrect (3)

If an entered setting value meets one of the following conditions, a message
appears according to the table below.
• Tool offset number: The setting value for Start or End is "0".
• Workpiece coordinates offset: The setting value for Start or End is "None". 1
Table 2.5.3.1 (d) Guidance Messages When a Setting Value Is Incorrect (3)
2
Setting target Cell type Message Character
color
Tool offset Start Input a range other than "0". Warning 3
related End color
Workpiece
offset related
Start
End
Input a range other than "None". Warning
color 4

 Guidance Messages When a Setting Value Is Incorrect (4) 5

If an entered setting value meets one of the following conditions, a message
appears according to the table below.
• When a value greater than the number of offset pairs is set to Start or End of the
6
tool offset number or Y-axis offset number in the parameter
• When a value greater than the number of workpiece coordinates offset pairs is 7
set to Start or End of the workpiece origin offset number in the parameter

Table 2.5.3.1 (e) Guidance Messages When a Setting Value Is Incorrect (4)
8
Setting target Cell type Message Character
color A1
Tool offset Start The setting value exceeded the number of Warning
related End offsets that can be used in the entire system. color
(*1) A2
Workpiece Start The setting value exceeded the number of Warning
offset related End workpiece coordinates that can be used. color
(*1)The number of offsets that can be used refers to the number of offsets that can be
Z
used in the entire system.
Even if a setting value exceeds the maximum number of tool offsets that can be
used on each path, it is not regarded as incorrect unless it exceeds the number of
offsets that can be used in the entire system.

43
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.5 SETTING SLIDE

2.5.3.2 Warning messages

2.5.3.2

 • If a parameter value is changed by G10, signal operation, or another

application, the warning message is updated at the same time when
1 MEMO the cell value is updated.

2  Warning messages when an entered setting value is out of range

If an entered setting value is out of range, a message appears according to the
table below.
3
Table 2.5.3.2 (a) Warning Messages When an Entered Setting Value Is Out of
Range (1)
4 Setting target Cell type Message Character
color

5 Tool offset
related
Start
End
Data is out of range (range: 0-999) (*1) Warning
color
Upper Data is out of range (range: -999999.999-
6 Limit
Lower
999999.999) (*2)

Limit
7 Workpiece
offset related
Start
End
Data is out of range (range: 0, G54-G59,
G54.1P1-G54.1P300) (*3)
Warning
color
Upper Data is out of range (range: -999999.999-
8 Limit
Lower
999999.999) (*4)

Limit
A1 (*1)The input range varies depending on the number of tool offset pairs.
(*2)The input range varies depending on the setting unit of tool offset value.

A2 (*3)The input range varies depending on the number of workpiece origin offset pairs.
(*4)The input range varies depending on the minimum setting unit of each axis.

Z
Table 2.5.3.2 (b) Warning Messages When an Entered Setting Value Is Out of
Range (2)
Setting target Cell type Message Character
color
Tool offset Start Format error (range: 0-999) (*1) Warning
related End color
Upper Format error (range: -999999.999-
Limit 999999.999) (*2)
Lower
Limit

44
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.5 SETTING SLIDE

Setting target Cell type Message Character

color
Workpiece Start Format error (range: 0, G54-G59, G54.1P1- Warning
offset related End G54.1P300) (*3) color
Upper
Limit
Format error (range: -999999.999-
999999.999) (*4)
1
Lower
Limit
(*1)The input range varies the number of offsets that can be used in the entire system.
2
(*2)The input range varies depending on the setting unit of tool offset value.
(*3)The input range varies depending on the number of workpiece origin offset pairs. 3
(*4)The input range varies depending on the minimum setting unit of each axis.

4
2.5.4 Machining Time and Sequence Number Display Set-
2.5.4
ting 5
Set whether to show or hide the machining time and the sequence number on the
program display tile in the base screen when the mode is MEM or RMT.
6
 • For an example of showing the machining time and the sequence
number, see "2.2.1.4 Program display tile". 7
MEMO

<1> On the setting slide, select [Operation] in Group and [Set Base Screen] in
8
Category.
The Set Base Screen window appears.
A1
<2> Select items you want to display and press the [Check] soft key or the
<SPACE> key.
To show an item, select the corresponding check box. To hide it, unselect the A2
corresponding check box.

45
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS 
2.5 SETTING SLIDE

<3> Restart the CNC device.

The setting change is applied.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

46
3
MANAGING 1

PROGRAMS 2
3
4
5
Use the Program Manager slide to create, edit, and list the programs, as well
as handling folders and memory card input/output.
6
3.1 PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE OVERVIEW ........................................ 48
3.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE .......... 49
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER
7
SLIDE ................................................................................................... 53
3.4 MANAGING PROGRAM STORAGE FILES ......................................... 95 8
A

47
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.1 PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE OVERVIEW

3.1

3.1 PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE OVER-

VIEW
1 The program manager slide allows you to perform the operations shown in the
table below for the operation targets.

2 Table 3.1 Functions That Can be Executed on the Program Manager Slide
Operation target Function
3 Programs registered in the program • List display
memory (*1) • Display detailed information
• Display the status (with the main program
4 selected)
• Select the main program
• Search
5 • Delete
• Copy
• Move
6 • Rename
• Link an image to a program
Program memory (*1) • Display the folder tree
7 •
•
Display the free space
Create a new program
• Create a new folder

8 •
•
Delete a folder
Copy a folder
• Rename a folder

A1 External memory devices below

• Memory card on the indicator
• Input a program
• Output a program
• USB flash drive
• Data server host
A2
(*1)The following program memory devices are supported on the program manager
slide.
Z • CNC_MEM
• Data server (storage mode, text format)
• Memory card on the main unit (FANUCPRG.BIN)
• Memory card on the indicator (FANUCPRG.BIN, PANEL iH)
• Large-capacity memory HDD/SSD (NCPROG.BIN, PANEL iH Pro)

48
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

3.2

3.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF THE PRO-

GRAM MANAGER SLIDE
1
3.2.1 Displaying the Program Manager Slide
2
3.2.1

The Program Manager slide is displayed by the following operations.

<1> Press the [Program Manager Slide] soft key.

The Program Manager slide is displayed.
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Fig. 3.2.1 Displaying the Program Manager Slide
Z

49
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

3.2.2 Program Manager Slide

3.2.2

The structure of the Program Manager slide is explained in this section.

A B
1
C D

2
3
4
E
5 F

6 Fig. 3.2.2 Program Manager Slide

7 Table 3.2.2 Name and Function of Each Part on the MDI Mode Base Screen
Name Description
A Slide title Displays the title name of the slide.
8 B [Program Manager] tile (folder name) Displays the folder name shown in the
program list.

A1 C [Program Manager] tile (folder tree) Displays the registered folders and
devices with icons and names. The
vertical and horizontal scroll bars can be

A2 D [Program Manager] tile (program list)

used.
Displays the programs with icons and
list titles. The vertical scroll bar can be

Z used.
Any comments for the program will be
displayed under the program name.
E Guidance message display tile Displays a warning message.
F Soft keys Creates, copies, moves, and deletes
programs and folders.
Use the [<] and [>] soft keys to switch
the pages.

50
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

• In the folder tree of the [Program Manager] tile, the program memory
devices are displayed as follows:
CNC_MEM: CNC memory
DATA_SV: data server
MEMCARD: memory card (FANUCPRG.BIN) 1
HDD_SSD: Large-capacity memory (NCPROG.BIN)
 • In the folder tree of the [Program Manager] tile, the external memory
devices are displayed as follows: 2
MEMO
M_CARD: memory card
USB_MEM: USB flash drive
• The structures of the screen and soft keys vary depending on the
parameter settings.
3
• The screen structure (folder tree) changes by setting bit 6 of
parameter No.11302 and bit 7 of parameter No.11304.
4
3.2.2.1
3.2.2.1
Program manager slide information in each mode
The display and operation of the Program Manager slide will vary as follows
5
depending on the work mode.
6
Table 3.2.2.1 Work Mode and Program Manager Slides
Mode Update
Screen
Slide
Title
Input/
output
[Open] -
display
[Open] -
operation
7
and

MEM Debug screen Program ○

Copy
Open Selects the
8
Manager machining program
BG Edit Program
Manager
○ Open
BG Edit
Selects the BG edit
program
A1
(BG Edit)
EDIT Edit Program
Manager
○ Open Selects the
program for editing
A2
MDI Program ○ (not shown) –
Manager Z
RMT DNC Program × Open Selects the DNC
Operation Manager DNC Operation operation program
(DNC
Operation)
JOG Program ○ (not shown) –
Manager
HND Program ○ (not shown) –
Manager
REF Program ○ (not shown) –
Manager

51
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

 • Changing the mode will close the Program Manager slide.

MEMO

1
3.2.2.2 Displaying the machining time in the program list

2 If the machining time is recorded in a program, it can be displayed in the program

3.2.2.2

list in the following devices:

• CNC_MEM
3 • DATA_SV
• MEMCARD
4 • HDD_SSD

5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Fig. 3.2.2.2 Displaying the Machining Time

Z
To display the machining time in the program list, press the [Machining Time] soft
key.
Every time you press it, the machining time is toggled between shown and hidden.

52
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

3.3

3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE

PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE
1
3.3.1 Selecting Programs and Folders
2
3.3.1

To select a folder in the folder tree or a program from the program list, perform the
following.

3.3.1.1
3.3.1.1
When the cursor is on the folder tree 3
 To select a folder
<1> Press <↑> or <↓>, or <PAGE UP> or <PAGE DOWN>. 4
The cursor moves to the target.

 To open/close a folder 5
<1> Press <INPUT>.
The selected folder opens or closes. 6
 To move the cursor to the program list
<1> Press <→>.
7
The cursor moves to the program list.
8
 To move to a higher folder hierarchy
<1> Press <←> or <CAN>. A1
The cursor moves to a folder in a higher hierarchy.

3.3.1.2
3.3.1.2
When the cursor is on the program list A2
 To select a program
<1> Press <↑> or <↓>, or <PAGE UP> or <PAGE DOWN>. Z
The cursor moves to the target.

 To move the cursor to the folder tree

<1> Press <←>.
The cursor moves to the folder tree.

53
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

3.3.1.3 Selecting multiple programs

When operating multiple programs at once (copying, deleting, outputting, etc.),
3.3.1.3

select multiple programs beforehand.

1 <1> Press the [Select Multiple] soft key.

Another set of soft keys appears.

2
3 <2> Select a program and press the [Select] soft key.
The program appears selected, and its background color changes.

4
5
6
7
8
A1
<3> Repeat step 2 to select multiple programs.

A2
Z

54
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

• When the cursor is on a selected program, you can deselect it by

pressing the [Cancel] soft key.
• To select programs in a range, select the first program and press
 the [Select Range] soft key, and then select the last program and
press the [End Select] soft key. 1
MEMO
• To select all programs in a folder, press the [Select All] soft key.
To deselect all programs, press the [Cancel All] soft key.
• If one or more programs are selected, you cannot move a folder. 2

3.3.2 Opening Programs 3

3.3.2

To open a program, perform the following:

4
<1> Select a program.
<2> Press the [Open] soft key or <INPUT>.
The selected program is displayed.
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
 • The Program Manager slide will close when the program is displayed.
MEMO

55
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

3.3.2.1 Operations in each mode when program is opened

The operations performed in each mode when the [Open] soft key is pressed are
3.3.2.1

as follows:

1 Table 3.3.2.1 Work Mode and Program Display

Mode Update Operation
Screen
2 MEM Debug Sets the selected program as the main program and closes the
screen slide.

3 BG Edit Sets the selected program as the BG edit program and closes
the slide.
EDIT Edit Sets the selected program as the main program and closes the

4 MDI
slide.
–
RMT DNC Sets the selected program as the DNC machining program and
5 Machining closes the slide.
JOG –
HND –
6 REF –

7 3.3.3 Creating New Programs and Folders

3.3.3

You can create new programs and folders.

8 This operation is available for the following program memory devices.
• CNC memory

A1 • Data server (only creating folders is possible in the RMT mode)

• Large-capacity memory HDD/SSD (NCPROG.BIN)

A2 • Memory card (FANUCPRG.BIN)

<1> Select the folder where the program will be created (when creating a program).
Z <2> Press the [Create New] soft key.
The Create New window is displayed.

<3> Use <←> or <→> to select either [Program] or [Folder].

<4> Enter the name.
<5> Press the [OK] soft key or <INPUT>.
A new program or a folder is created.

56
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

1
2
3
4
5
• To cancel any operation in the Create New window, press the [Cancel]
soft key.
• You may enter a maximum of 32 alphanumeric characters. 6
• You may create up to six hierarchies of folders.
 • You cannot create a program and a folder with the same name (except
for the CNC memory and large-capacity memory HDD/SSD 7
MEMO
(NCPROG.BIN)).
• You cannot create new programs or folders when there are no free
spaces, no allowed programs, or no allowed folders.
• You cannot create programs or folders within read only folders.
8
A1
3.3.4 Confirm Overwrite
A2
3.3.4

3.3.4.1 Confirm overwrite window

When you copy, move, or input/output folders or programs, if a folder or program
3.3.4.1

with the same name already exists, the Confirm Overwrite window will appear.
The following functions can be selected on the Confirm Overwrite window.
Z
Table 3.3.4.1 Functions That Can Be Selected on the Confirm Overwrite Window
Operation Confirm Overwrite window function
Overwrite Rename Do Not [Repeat]
Overwrite soft key
Copy/move a program ○ ○ ○ ○
Copy/move a folder (in the case of the ○ ○ (*1) ○ ×
same folder name)
Copy/move a folder (in the case of the ○ × ○ ○
same program name or subfolder name
within the folder)

57
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

Operation Confirm Overwrite window function

Overwrite Rename Do Not [Repeat]
Overwrite soft key
Copy (from CNC_MEM to CNC_MEM) ○ ○ ○ ×

1 Output a program
Input a program
○
○ (*2)
○
○ (*3)
○
○
×
○
Link an image ○ ○ ○ ×
2 (*1)You cannot rename a folder when copying/moving it from CNC_MEM to HDD_SSD or from
DATA_SV to HDD_SDD.
(*2)You cannot overwrite protected programs.

3 (*3)"Skip" is displayed for protected programs.

4
5
6
7 Fig. 3.3.4.1 Overwrite Confirmation Window
 To overwrite

8 <1> Use <↑> or <↓> to select [Overwrite].

<2> Press the [OK] soft key or <INPUT>.
Overwrite will be performed.
A1
A2  • To cancel the process, press the [Cancel] soft key. The process will
also be canceled if you close a slide or window.
MEMO

Z  To rename
<1> Use <↑> or <↓> to select [Rename].
<2> Enter the name and press the [OK] soft key.
The rename process will be executed with the entered name.

 • To cancel the process, press the [Cancel] soft key. The process will
also be canceled if you close a slide or window.
MEMO • You may enter a maximum of 32 alphanumeric characters.

58
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

 To avoid overwrite
<1> Use <↑> or <↓> to select [Do Not Overwrite].
<2> Press the [OK] soft key or <INPUT>.
The overwrite process will not be executed for the original folder/program but
will be executed for the next folder/program. 1

 • To cancel the process, press the [Cancel] soft key. The process will 2
also be canceled if you close a slide or window.
MEMO

3
 To repeat the same process
<1> Use <↑> or <↓> to select [Overwrite] or [Do Not Overwrite].
4
<2> Press the [Repeat] soft key.
The selected process is repeated without displaying the Confirm Overwrite
window. 5
• If two or more files with the same name exist during input, the 6
 check box appears.
• When you select [Rename], the check box is displayed in gray.
MEMO
• To cancel the process, press the [Cancel] soft key.
7
3.3.4.2 Rename confirmation window
When you copy, move, or input/output folders or programs, if a protected program
8
with the same name already exists, the Rename Confirmation window will appear.
Select one of the following processes.
A1
A2
Z
Fig. 3.3.4.2 Rename Confirmation Window

 To rename
<1> Use <↑> or <↓> to select [Rename].
<2> Enter the name and press the [OK] soft key.
The rename process will be executed with the entered name.

59
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

 • To cancel the process, press the [Cancel] soft key. The process will
also be canceled if you close a slide or window.
MEMO • You may enter a maximum of 32 alphanumeric characters.

1
 To avoid overwrite

2 <1> Use <↑> or <↓> to select [Do Not Overwrite].

<2> Press the [OK] soft key or <INPUT>.

3 The overwrite process will not be executed for the original folder/program but
will be executed for the next folder/program.

4  • To cancel the process, press the [Cancel] soft key. The process will
also be canceled if you close a slide or window.
MEMO

5
 To repeat the same process
6 <1> Use <↑> or <↓> to select [Do Not Overwrite].
<2> Press the [Repeat] soft key.

7 The selected process is repeated without displaying the Rename Confirmation

window.

8 • If two or more files with the same name exist during input, the

 check box appears.

• When you select [Rename], the check box is displayed in gray.
A1 MEMO • To cancel the process, press the [Cancel] soft key. The process will
also be canceled if you close a slide or window.

A2
3.3.5 Copying/Moving Programs and Copying Folders
Z
3.3.5

You can operate the following to a program or folder within the program memory
inside the memory:
• Program: copy and move
• Folder: copy
The following program memory devices can be selected as a copy or move
destination.
• CNC memory
• Data server (storage mode, text format)
• Large-capacity memory HDD/SSD (NCPROG.BIN)
• Memory card (FANUCPRG.BIN)

60
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

 • To copy a folder, you need to set the machine manufacturer setting file
(setting_data.txt) so that it can be copied.
MEMO

1
<1> Select the program to be copied/moved or folder to be copied.

2
 • You can select multiple programs to copy or move. See "Selecting
multiple programs" on page 54.
MEMO
3
<2> Press the [Copy] or [Move] soft key on the second page (only copying is
supported for folders).
4
5
<3> Select the folder from [Copy To] or [Move To].
Specify the destination folder from the folder tree of the copy or move
6
destination.
<4> Press the [OK] soft key. 7
The program will be copied/moved or the folder will be copied.

8
A1
A2
Z

61
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

• If a program with the same name already exists in the copy or

move destination, the Confirm Overwrite window will appear. To
copy or move the program by overwriting it, select [Overwrite]. To

1 copy or move the program by changing its name, select [Rename].

When copying a folder, you can change the folder name if there is
another one with a same name at the copy destination. However,
you cannot change the folder name when the name of the program
2 in the folder is the same as the name of the subfolder.

 • If a protected program with the same name already exists in the

copy or move destination, the Rename Confirmation window will
3 MEMO appear.
• To copy or move the program by changing its name, select
[Rename].

4 • "Executing..." is displayed during the copy or move process.

If you select multiple programs, pressing the [Cancel] soft key
during copy or move cancels the operation.

5 In case of copying a folder, it cannot be canceled.

• You cannot copy/move a program or copy a folder to read only
folders.

6
3.3.6 Deleting Programs and Folders
7
3.3.6

You can delete programs and folders.

This operation is available for the following program memory devices.
• CNC memory
8 • Data server
• Large-capacity memory HDD/SSD (NCPROG.BIN)
A1 • Memory card (FANUCPRG.BIN)

A2 <1> Select the program or folder to be deleted.

Z  • You can select multiple programs. See “3.3.1.3 Selecting multiple

programs”.
MEMO

<2> Press the [Delete] soft key on the second page.

The delete confirmation window is displayed.

62
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

<3> Press the [Yes] soft key.

The selected program or folder is deleted.

1
2
3
4
5
6
 • The memory or device itself cannot be deleted.
• You cannot delete protected programs or folders.
MEMO
7
3.3.7
3.3.7
Changing Program and Folder Names 8
You can rename the program or folder that is already registered in each device.
This operation is available for the following program memory devices.
• CNC memory
A1
• Data server
• Large-capacity memory HDD/SSD (NCPROG.BIN) A2
• Memory card (FANUCPRG.BIN)
Z
<1> Select the program or folder to be renamed.
<2> Press the [Rename] soft key on the second page.
The Rename window is displayed.

63
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

<3> Enter the name and press the [OK] soft key or <INPUT>.
The selected program or folder will be renamed. The Rename window will
close when the process is completed.

1
2
3
4
5
6

7 MEMO
• You cannot specify a name that already exists in the same folder.

8 3.3.8 Editing Comments for Programs

3.3.8

You can edit comments for programs.

A1 The edit comment function can only be used in the following devices.
• CNC memory

A2 • Data server
• Large-capacity memory HDD/SSD (NCPROG.BIN)

Z • Memory card (FANUCPRG.BIN)

<1> Select the program for the comment you want to edit.
<2> Press the [Edit Comment] soft key.
The Edit Comment window appears.

64
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

<3> Enter the comment and press the [OK] soft key.
The comment for the program you selected is changed. The Edit Comment
window will close when the process is completed.

1
2
3
4
5
6
 • Comments should only include 1-byte alphanumeric characters and

MEMO
symbols (" # $ & ' * , / : < = > ? @ [ ] - + _ .).
• You can enter up to 48 characters. 7
8
3.3.9 Searching for Programs
3.3.9

Search for programs in the program list.

A1
<1> Press the [Search Program] soft key.
A2
Z
The Search Program window appears.

65
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

<2> Enter the program number or name in the search keyword input field.

• You may enter up to 32 characters including alphabets (uppercase/

lowercase), numbers, and symbols (- + _ .).
1 • The conditions and operations for program number search are as
follows:

 Exact match search

2 MEMO
If the search target is "O00001234", you can search by a character
string with zeros suppressed, such as "O1234".
• The conditions and operations for program name search are as
follows:
3 No case sensitive
Partial match search using a wildcard "*"

4
<3> Perform one of the following according to the search target:
To search for main programs: Press the [Main Program] soft key.
5 The matched main programs are displayed, and the Search Program window
closes.

6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

66
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

To search for programs: Press the [Search] soft key.

The matched programs are displayed, and the Search Program window closes.

1
2
3
4
5
6
3.3.10 Setting a Program to Read Only
3.3.10

You can protect the selected program or folder within the CNC memory by setting 7
it to read only.
When a program/folder is set as read only, you cannot copy between program
memories, as well as perform input, delete, move, link/cancel link image for the 8
program/folder.

<1> Select the program or folder to be set as read only.

A1
<2> Press the [Edit Protect] soft key.
Read only is set. A2
Z

• To cancel read only, select the protected program or folder and press
the [Edit Protect] soft key.

 • Protected programs such as programs protected by parameters

(program numbers O8xxx and O9xxx) cannot be set as read only.
MEMO • You cannot set folders or programs stored in the memory card
(FANUCPRG.BIN) or large-capacity memory (NCPROG.BIN) as read
only.

67
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

3.3.11 Linking an Image to a Program

3.3.11

When an image file is linked to a program, the image preview will be displayed as
the icon for the program. To link an image file to a program, follow the steps below.
For example, you can link an image of a machined workpiece. The image will be
1 displayed in the Program Manager Slide, so you can quickly find the relevant
program.

2
3 Fig. 3.3.11 Preview Example

4 • Images that can be linked to a program are sample images prepared

beforehand or images read in from an external memory. Files read in
from external memories are automatically saved in the internal

5 memory.
• You cannot use images from the external memory when there is no
drive in the external memory. In such a case, you can only use sample
images.
6  • The main program can be linked with an image in EDIT mode only.
• The file format that can be linked to a program image is as follows:
MEMO
The file name should only include 1-byte alphanumeric characters
7 and symbols (# $ & ' + , - . = @ [ ] _! ; ~).
BMP or PNG format (JPEG format is not supported).
The preview image may not be displayed when the size is 3000 x

8 3000 px or larger. Decrease the size of the image file and relink the
file.
The recommended image file size is 128 x 128 px.

A1
 To link an image file with a program

A2 <1> Connect the external memory (USB flash drive or memory card) to the
machine.

Z
 • This operation is required only when you are reading in images from
an external memory.
MEMO

<2> Select the program to be linked with the image file.

<3> Press the [Link Image] soft key on the second page.
The Link Image window is displayed.

68
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

<4> Press the soft key that corresponds to the memory displayed in the Link Image
window.
To display folders for program images
Press the [Internal Memory] soft key.
To display the contents inside the USB flash drive
Press the [USB Memory] soft key. 1
To display the contents inside the memory card
Press the [Memory Card] soft key.
2
3
4
5
6
7
<5> Select the image file to be linked to the program.
8
<6> Press the [OK] soft key.
The image file name is written to the program, and the image file is linked to the
program. A1
A2
• The following icon will be displayed for a program without a linked
image file.
Z

 • When you link an image in an external memory, if a file with the

MEMO same name already exists, the Confirm Overwrite window will
appear. To overwrite the image file, select [Overwrite]. To load the
image file by changing its name, select [Rename].
• If the program is protected from being edited, the message
"Protected" appears, preventing you from linking the image file.

69
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

 Canceling the link between the program and image file

<1> Select the program to cancel the link.
<2> Press the [Link Image] soft key on the second page.
The Link Image window is displayed.
1
2 <3> Select the [No Image] soft key.
<4> Press the [OK] soft key.
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
 • Canceling the link between the program and image file will not
delete the image file itself.
A2 MEMO

Z  Sample image
You can also use a sample image registered beforehand to the iHMI as the image
to be linked.
Sample image icons are as follows:

70
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

3.3.12 Inputting Programs

3.3.12

You can input data for each program or each folder inside external memory to
program memory. You can input programs and folders inside the external memory
all at once to the CNC memory.
The combinations of input source devices and input destination devices available
for this operation are as shown in the table below.
1
Table 3.3.12 Combinations of Input Source Devices and Input Destination Devices 2
Available for Input Operation
Input destination
device
CNC memory Data server
(storage mode,
Large-capacity
memory 3
text format) HDD/SSD
Input source device (NCPROG.BIN)
Memory card on the indicator Available Available Unavailable 4
(PANEL iH) (normal)
Memory card on the indicator
(PANEL iH Pro) (normal)
Available Available Available
5
USB (normal) Available Available Available

6
3.3.12.1 Inputting programs individually
3.3.12.1

Input an individually exported program. 7

<1> Select the input destination folder from the folder list. 8
<2> Press the [File Import] soft key.
The program input window is displayed.
A1
A2
<3> Select a file to input (an individually exported program).
Z

71
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

 • Only files output individually can be input individually.

• [Import From] shows folders displayed in the program list when the
MEMO [Input] soft key is pressed.

1
<4> Press the [OK] soft key.

2 Input of the program starts.

• If a program with the same name already exists in the input

3 destination, the Confirm Overwrite window will appear. To input and
overwrite the program, select [Overwrite]. To input the program by
changing its name, select [Rename].
4  • If a protected program with the same name already exists in the input
destination, the Rename Confirmation window will appear.
MEMO
To input the program by changing its name, select [Rename].
5 • You cannot specify a memory card in [Import To].
• "Executing..." is displayed during the input process.
• To cancel input, press the [Cancel] soft key.

6
7

NOTE
• If you cancel the input, only a portion of the program will be input. Pay
careful attention when you are planning to use the program after input.

8
3.3.12.2 Inputting all programs
A1 Input all programs and folders in a file exported using [Export All].
3.3.12.2

<1> Press the [File Import] soft key.

A2 The program input window is displayed.

Z
<2> Press the [Import All] soft key.

72
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

• Pressing the [Sort] soft key will sort the programs in the program
list.
For details, see "3.3.15 Sorting Programs in the Program List".
 • Pressing the [Change Host] soft key will change the host PC to
which you are connected via Ethernet. 1
MEMO
For details, see "3.3.18 Changing the Host PC".
• Pressing the [Update] soft key will update the programs displayed
in the program list to their latest state. 2
<3> Select a file to input (an exported file using [Export All]). 3
4
5
6
7

 • Only files output using [Export All] (files with a name starting with
8
"ALL-FLDR") can be input using [Import All].
MEMO
A1
<4> Press the [OK] soft key.
Input of the program starts. A2
• If a program with the same name already exists in the input
destination, the Confirm Overwrite window will appear. To input and Z
overwrite the program, select [Overwrite]. To input the program by
changing its name, select [Rename].
• When you input a program output using the subprogram output
 function, if a subprogram with the same name already exists in [Import
From], the Confirm Overwrite window or the Rename Confirmation
MEMO
window will appear. If you change the name, you also need to rename
the program which is the call source of the subprogram.
• You cannot specify a memory card in [Import To].
• "Executing..." is displayed during the input process.
• To cancel input, press the [Cancel] soft key.

73
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE


NOTE
• If you cancel the input, only a portion of the program will be input. Pay
careful attention when you are planning to use the program after input.

1
3.3.13 Outputting Programs
2 3.3.13

You can output data for each program or each folder inside program memory to
external memory. You can output programs and folders inside the external
memory all at once from the CNC memory.
3 The combinations of output source devices and output destination devices
available for this operation are as shown in the table below.

4 Table 3.3.13 Combinations of Output Source Devices and Output Destination

Devices Available for Output Operation

5 Output destination Memory card on Memory card on

device the indicator the indicator
USB (normal)

(PANEL iH) (PANEL iH Pro)

6 Output source device

CNC memory
(normal)
Available
(normal)
Available Available
Data server (storage mode, Available Available Available
7 text format)
Memory card on the main unit Unavailable Unavailable Available
(PANEL iH Pro)
8 (FANUCPRG.BIN)
Memory card on the indicator Unavailable Available Available
(PANEL iH Pro)
A1 (FANUCPRG.BIN)
Memory card on the main unit Unavailable Unavailable Available
(PANEL iH) (FANUCPRG.BIN)
A2 Memory card on the indicator Available Unavailable Available
(PANEL iH) (FANUCPRG.BIN)

Z Large-capacity memory HDD/

SSD (NCPROG.BIN)
Unavailable Available Available

3.3.13.1 Outputting programs individually

Output only one selected program or folder.
3.3.13.1

<1> Select the program or folder to output from the program list.

 • You can select multiple programs. See "3.3.1.3 Selecting multiple

programs".
MEMO

74
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

<2> Press the [File Export] soft key.

The program output window is displayed.

1
<3> Select the folder from [Export To].

2
3
4
5
6
7
<4> Press the [OK] soft key.
The output selection window appears. 8
<5> To change the name of the output file, enter the name in the input field.

A1
 • You cannot use the string "ALL-FLDR" for the beginning of the file
name.
MEMO
A2
Z

75
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

<6> Press the [OK] soft key.

Output of the program starts.

1
2
3
4
5
6 • Pressing the [Export Subprog.] soft key also outputs subprograms
stored in the following folders that were called by M98.

7 Folder containing programs to be output

LIBRARY folder
• If a program with the same name already exists in the output
destination, the Confirm Overwrite window will appear. To output and
8  overwrite the program, select [Overwrite]. To output the program by
changing its name, select [Rename].
MEMO
• If a protected program with the same name already exists in the output
A1 destination, the Rename Confirmation window will appear.
To output the program by changing its name, select [Rename].
• "Executing..." is displayed during the output process.
A2 • To cancel output, press the [Cancel] soft key.
• You cannot output protected programs.

Z
• If you change the screen during output or remove the destination


NOTE
device, the output is canceled.
• If you cancel the output, only a portion of the program will be output.
Pay careful attention when you are planning to use the file after
output.

76
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

3.3.13.2 Outputting all programs

Output all programs and folders inside the CNC memory.
3.3.13.2

<1> Select the folder to output from the program list.

1

NOTE
• You can output only programs and folders inside the CNC memory
using [Export All]. 2
<2> Press the [File Export] soft key. 3
The program output window is displayed.

<3> Press the [Export All] soft key. 5

6
7
 • Pressing the [Change Host] soft key will change the host PC to
which you are connected via Ethernet.
MEMO For details, see "3.3.18 Changing the Host PC".
8
<4> Select the folder from [Export To].
<5> Press the [OK] soft key.
A1
The output selection window appears.
<6> To change the name of the output file, enter the name in the input field. A2

 • You cannot change the string "ALL-FLDR", which is the beginning of Z

the file name.
MEMO

77
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

<7> Press the [OK] soft key.

Output of the program starts.

1
2
3
4
5
6 • Program information and folder information are output together to one
file.

7 • If a program with the same name already exists in the output

destination, the Confirm Overwrite window will appear. To output and

 overwrite the program, select [Overwrite]. To output the program by

changing its name, select [Rename].
8 MEMO • If a protected program with the same name already exists in the output
destination, the Rename Confirmation window will appear.
To output the program by changing its name, select [Rename].
A1 • "Executing..." is displayed during the output process.
• To cancel output, press the [Cancel] soft key.

A2
Z • You cannot output protected programs.
• If you change the screen during output or remove the destination


NOTE
device, the output is canceled.
• If you cancel the output, only a portion of the program will be output.
Pay careful attention when you are planning to use the file after
output.

78
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

3.3.14 Checking Program Capacity

3.3.14

You can check the capacity of the program.

<1> Select the program for which you want to check capacity.
<2> Press the [Check Capacity] soft key.
1
The Check Capacity window appears.
2
3
Program Area
The capacity used by the program is indicated with a bar chart; free space for
the program is indicated with a numerical value. 4
Number of Programs/Folders
The number of registered programs/folders is indicated with a bar chart; the
number of remaining register slots available for programs/folders is indicated 5
with a numerical value.

6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

• You cannot check the capacity of the program in RMT mode.

• If you remove any of the devices (data server, MEMCARD

 (FANUCPRG.BIN), HDD_SSD (NCPROG.BIN)) while the Check

Capacity window is displayed, information in the Check Capacity
MEMO window will not be updated.
• Any image linked with the link image function will not be reflected to
the capacity.

79
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

3.3.15 Sorting Programs in the Program List

3.3.15

Sort programs in the program list.

<1> When the cursor is on the program list, press the [Sort] soft key.
1 Another set of soft keys appears.

2
<2> Press the soft keys to sort programs.
3 To change the sort type
Press the [Name], [Comment], [Update Date], or [Size] soft key. When the soft
key is pressed, the programs are sorted in the current sort order.
4 To change the sort order
Press the [Sort] soft key. When the soft key is pressed, the programs are sorted
in ascending/descending order.
5
6
• The sort type and sort order on the Program Manager slide are not
7 synchronized with those on the Input window.

 • The same sort type and sort order settings are applied to the
program list for all folders.
8 MEMO • Folders displayed in the program list can be sorted in ascending or
descending order only by sort type "Name". Even if other sort type
is selected, folders are not sorted.

A1
3.3.16 Creating Program Storage Files
A2 Newly create program storage files (FANUCPRG.BIN) in the memory card.

Z  • You cannot create program storage files (NCPROG.BIN) in large-

capacity memory HDD/SSD.
MEMO

<1> Switch to the EDIT mode.

<2> Insert a memory card into the machine.
<3> Press the [Memory Card] soft key on the third page.

80
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

<4> Press the [Create PG File] soft key.

The Create Program Storage File window is displayed.

1
<5> Specify the file size.

2
 • Enter an integer between 2 and 2048 according to the free space
in the memory card to be used.
MEMO
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
<6> Press the [Execute] soft key.

Z
3.3.17 Setting the M198 Operation Folder
3.3.16

Set the folder path to call up subprograms for M198 operations.

<1> Press the [M198 Setting] soft key on the third page.
The M198 Setting window appears.

81
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

<2> In the folder tree, select the folder you want to set.

1
2
3
4
5
<3> Press the [Setting] soft key.
6
7
The folder path you have set appears in the M198 Operation Folder path field.
8
A1
A2
Z

 • Pressing the [Change Host] soft key will change the host PC to which
you are connected via Ethernet.
MEMO For details, see "3.3.18 Changing the Host PC".

82
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

3.3.18 Changing the Host PC

3.3.17

You can change the following host PC to which you are connected via Ethernet.
• Host PC connected via a Fast Ethernet board.
• Host PC connected via integrated Ethernet.
1
• Host PC connected via multifunction Ethernet.

<1> Select the destination in the folder tree.

2
To change the host PC connected via Fast Ethernet board
Select "DTSVR_HOST".
To change the host PC connected via integrated Ethernet
3
Select "EMB_ETHER".
To change the host PC connected via multifunction Ethernet 4
Select "FTP_HOST".
<2> Press the [Change Host] soft key on the third page.
5
6
 • The [Change Host] soft key will also appear on the program input
window, program output window, and M198 Setting window.
7
MEMO

8
<3> Press the [Host 1], [Host 2], or [Host 3] soft key to change the host PC to which
you are connected.
A1
A2
3.3.19 Folder Expansion in the Host PC
When the login folder is set in the host PC (DTSVR_HOST, EMB_ETHER, or
Z
FTP_HOST), just selecting the host PC displays the list of programs with the login
folder expanded as the current folder.
The current folder of the displayed host PC varies depending on the conditions
shown in the table below.

83
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

Table 3.3.19 Current Folder of the Host PC That Varies Depending on the Conditions
Folder tree display/operation Login folder setting Current folder
• When only the host PC is Enabled Expanding up to the login folder
displayed (displaying the list of programs)

1 • When the host PC and other

devices are displayed and the
Disabled Root of the host PC
(not displaying the list of programs)
host PC is selected

2 The folders of the host PC are expanded as shown above when one of the
following operations is performed:

3 • Opening the Program Manager slide

• Opening the Input/Output window from the Program Manager slide

4 • Opening the M198 Setting window from the Program Manager slide
• Switching from the Select Program window for the Quick Program Restart
window to the display for selecting the M198/DNC operation program
5
 • For details on the login folder setting, contact the machine
6 MEMO
manufacturer.

7 3.3.20 Using a Multi-path Program Template

3.3.20 3.3.20

8 3.3.20.1 Overview of creating machining data based on a template

Manage all the following machining data programs required for part machining in
3.3.20.1 3.3.20.1

the machining data folder:

A1 • Machining program (main program, subprogram)
• Tool offset program
A2 • Workpiece coordinates program
• Workpiece coordinates shift program
Z • Macro variable program

Creating a machining data template beforehand allows you to efficiently create

similar custom machining data based on the template.

• Parameter setting and the optional function are required to enable this
function.

 • When this function is enabled, the TEMPLATE folder and the WORKS
folder are created under the following folder:
MEMO TEMPLATE folder: //CNC_MEM/SYSTEM/
WORKS folder: //CNC_MEM/USER/
• The TEMPLATE folder and the WORKS folder cannot be deleted.

84
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

3.3.20.2 Details on creating machining data

3.3.20.2 3.3.20.2

 Creating a machining data template folder

Create a folder that stores machining data templates under the TEMPLATE folder.
<1> Use the soft key to display the Program Manager slide.
<2> Move the cursor to the TEMPLATE folder.
1
2
3

<3> Press the [Create New] soft key.

4
The Create New window appears.
5
6
7
<4> Enter a folder name.

8
A1

<5> Press the [OK] soft key.

A2
The folder is created, and the Create New window closes.
Z
 Creating new machining data
Use one of the following procedures to create the main program or subprogram,
which will be a machining program.
• Input a program into CNC_MEM from an external flash drive, such as a USB
flash drive or CF card. For details, see "3.3.12 Inputting Programs".
• Create a program in the CNC operation screen. For details, see "3.3.3 Creating
New Programs and Folders".

85
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

• To manage all machining data with this function, you need to name the
main program according to the following rules:
"MAIN.P-n"

1 MAIN.P is a fixed value. -n is a path number between 1 and 15. For

 path numbers 10 to 15, no hyphen (-) is required.

(Example) Path 1: MAIN.P-1
MEMO Path 2: MAIN.P-2
2 ...
Path 10: MAIN.P10
...
3 Path 15: MAIN.P15

4  Saving data
Save the following data as a G10-format program:
• Tool offsets
5 • Workpiece coordinates
• Workpiece coordinates shift
6 • Macro variables

7 • Whether data can be saved or not varies depending on the CNC

system type as follows:

8 CNC system type Complex system

Lathe Machining Machining
system center type Lathe
center type
A1 
Data type system (*)
(*)
Tool offsets ○ ○ ○ ○
MEMO
Workpiece coordinates
A2
△ △ △ △

Workpiece coordinates
○ × ○ ×
shift

Z Macro variables △ △ △ △

(○: Can be saved, △: Can be saved, but the option is required to output
data, ×: Cannot be saved, *: Path control type)

86
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

<1> Switch all the paths to EDIT mode.

<2> Use the soft key to display the Program Manager slide.
<3> Move the cursor to a folder under the TEMPLATE folder or the WORKS folder.

1
2
3
4
5
<4> Press the [Save Data] soft key on the second page.
The Save Machining Data window appears. 6
7
8
<5> Move the cursor to data you want to save and press the [Select] soft key.
A1
 • You can select the target data by pressing <SPACE> as well. A2
MEMO

Z
<6> Press the [Execute] or [All Paths] soft key.

• Pressing the [Execute] soft key saves data only on the current

 path.
• Pressing the [All Paths] soft key saves data on all the paths.
MEMO • When you save data, the program name changes to the default.
To change the name, press the [Change Name] soft key.

87
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

 Setting the protect level

Change the change protect level and output protect level of a folder or program
file in the device on the program memory.

Setting the protect level of a folder

1 <1> Use the soft key to display the Program Manager slide.
<2> In the folder tree, select a folder of which you want to change the protect level.
2
3
4
5
6
7 <3> Press the [Protect Setting] soft key on the third page.
The Machining Data Protect Setting window appears.
8
A1
A2 <4> Enter a new protect level.

<5> Press the [OK] soft key.

The protect level is changed, and the Machining Data Protect Setting window
closes.

88
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

Setting the protect level of a program file

<1> Use the soft key to display the Program Manager slide.
<2> In the program list, select a program file of which you want to change the
protect level.
1
2
3
4
5

<3> Press the [Protect Setting] soft key on the third page. 6
The Machining Data Protect Setting window appears.
7
8

<4> Enter a new protect level.

A1
A2
Z
<5> Press the [OK] soft key.
The protect level is changed, and the Machining Data Protect Setting window
closes.

89
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

Setting the protect level of multiple program files

<1> Use the soft key to display the Program Manager slide.
<2> In the folder tree, select a folder that stores program files of which you want to
change the protect level.
1 <3> Press the [Select Multiple] soft key on the first page.
<4> Use the [Select], [Select Range], or [Select All] soft key to select program files
2 to be protected from the program list.

3
4
5
6
7
8  • For details on the [Select], [Select Range], and [Select All] soft
keys, see "3.3.1.3 Selecting multiple programs".
MEMO

A1
<5> Press the [Protect Setting] soft key on the third page.
The Machining Data Protect Setting window appears.
A2
Z

<6> Enter a new protect level.

90
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

<7> Press the [OK] soft key.

The protect level is changed, and the Machining Data Protect Setting window
closes.

 Creating custom machining data

Create custom machining data under the WORKS folder based on a machining
1
data template.
<1> Use the soft key to display the Program Manager slide. 2
<2> Move the cursor to the WORKS folder.
3
4
5
6
7
<3> Press the [Create Data] soft key on the first page.
The Select Machining Data Template window appears.
8
<4> Select a machining data template.

A1
A2
Z

<5> Press the [Create] soft key.

The Create Custom Machining Data window appears.

91
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

<6> Enter a custom machining data name.

1
2 <7> Press the [Create] soft key.
The custom machining data is created, and the Create Custom Machining Data
window and the Select Machining Data Template window close.
3
 Setting protection for each "(R)" block of a program

4 Set protection for each block of a machining data program under the TEMPLATE
folder or the WORKS folder.Setting protection for a block as (R) prevents the
following operations:

5 • Insertion, change, and deletion into an (R) block

• Insertion, change, deletion, or replacement that changes the start of a block to
"(R)"
6 • Copy, cut, and paste of an (R) block

7
 • To use this function, the 8 level data protection function must be
enabled.
MEMO
8
Setting the (R) block level
A1 <1> Switch to MDI mode.
<2> Press <HOME>.
A2 <3> Press <MAINTENANCE DISPLAY>.
<4> Press <Function>.
Z <5> Press <Continue Menu> a few times to display [Data Protection].
<6> Press the [Change Protect Level] soft key.
<7> Change the protect level of (R) BLOCK IN PROGRAM and press the [Input]
soft key.

92
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

Changing the (R) block level

<1> Set the change protect level of (R) BLOCK IN PROGRAM lower than the
operation level.
<2> Switch from the CNC standard screen to iHMI.
<3> Switch to EDIT mode. 1
<4> Use the soft key to display the Program Manager slide.
<5> In the folder tree, select machining data under the TEMPLATE folder or the 2
WORKS folder.
<6> Select the target program from the program list.
3
<7> Press the [Open] soft key.
The EDIT mode base screen appears.
<8> Modify the start of the target program to (R).
4
5
6
7
8
A1
 • For details on modification, see "4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS". A2
MEMO

Z
<9> Set the change protect level of the (R) block of the program back to the original.

 Selecting machining data

Select all the paths of programs named "custom machining data name.P-n" (n:
Path number) in the custom machining data as the main program.

 • A program on a path with parameter MPC (No. 11352#3) set to 1

cannot be selected.
MEMO

93
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.3 MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE

<1> Switch all the paths to EDIT mode.

<2> Use the soft key to display the Program Manager slide.
<3> In the folder tree, select custom machining data under the WORKS folder.

1
2
3
4
5
6 <4> Press the [Select Data] soft key on the second page.
The Program Manager slide closes, and the EDIT mode base screen appears.
7
8
A1
A2
Z

94
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.4 MANAGING PROGRAM STORAGE FILES

3.4

3.4 MANAGING PROGRAM STORAGE

FILES
The large-capacity memory program operation function allows you to perform 1
automatic operation with the programs stored in a program storage file
(NCPROG.BIN) on the PANEL iH Pro or your PC.
2
 • This function can only be used when the "large-capacity memory
program operation function" option is used. 3
MEMO

4
3.4.1 Program Storage Files
3.4.1

The program storage file is a file that stores folders and programs that can be
accessed directly from the iHMI CNC. 5
• Maximum size of a program storage file: 40 GB
6
• Maximum size per program: 2 GB
• Maximum number of folders and programs that can be stored: total of 1000 (for
folders and programs combined)
7

3.4.2 Mounting/Unmounting Large-Capacity Memory 8

HDD/SSDs
3.4.2

Mount or unmount large-capacity memory HDD/SSDs when program storage files A1

(NCPROG.BIN) are stored in those HDD/SSDs.

 To mount a large-capacity memory HDD/SSD

A2
<1> Press the [HDD/SSD] soft key.
<2> Press the [Mount] soft key.
Z
The "HDD/SSD" device appears in the folder tree.

 To unmount a large-capacity memory HDD/SSD

<1> Press the [HDD/SSD] soft key.
<2> Press the [Unmount] soft key.
The "HDD/SSD" device disappears from the folder tree.

95
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 3 MANAGING PROGRAMS 
3.4 MANAGING PROGRAM STORAGE FILES

3.4.3 Mounting/Unmounting the Memory Card

3.4.3

To mount/unmount a memory card (FANUCPRG.BIN), perform the following:

 To mount a memory card

1 <1> Insert a memory card into the machine.
<2> Press the [Memory Card] soft key on the third page.
2 <3> Press the [Mount] soft key.
The MEMCARD device appears in the folder tree.

3
 To unmount a memory card
<1> Press the [Memory Card] soft key on the third page.
4 <2> Press the [Unmount] soft key.
<3> Remove the memory card from the machine.
5 The MEMCARD device disappears from the folder tree.

6 !
• When you unmount the memory card from the machine, make sure
that "MEMCARD" is not displayed in the folder tree before you pull
CAUTION out the card.
7
8
A1
A2
Z

96
4
EDITING 1

PROGRAMS 2
3
4
5
You can edit programs for machining.

4.1 OVERVIEW OF PROGRAM EDIT.......................................................... 98

6
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN ................. 99
4.3
4.4
EDITING PROGRAMS ......................................................................... 141
EDITING MULTIPLE PROGRAMS SIMULTANEOUSLY..................... 189
7
4.5 EDITING MULTI-PATH PROGRAMS SIMULTANEOUSLY................. 194
4.6 USING THE CYCLE INPUT ................................................................. 200 8
4.7 BACKGROUND EDIT........................................................................... 201
4.8 CREATING CONTOURING PROGRAMS............................................ 205
4.9 ALL-MODE PROGRAM EDIT............................................................... 230 A

97
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.1 OVERVIEW OF PROGRAM EDIT

4.1

4.1 OVERVIEW OF PROGRAM EDIT

You can edit programs in the EDIT mode base screen or even in all modes by

1 using the Edit Program slide.

 EDIT mode program edit

2 In EDIT mode, you can perform basic editing of programs in the following devices.
• CNC_MEM: CNC storage memory

3 • MEM CARD: Program storage file (FANUCPRG.BIN)

• Data server: Data server built-in memory card

4 • HDD_SSD: Large-capacity memory (HDD/SSD (NCPROG.BIN))

 All-mode program edit

5 In all-mode program edit, you can edit programs in all work modes. Switching from
the Program Manager slide to the Edit Program slide allows program editing and

6 checking in all modes.

7  • To use the Edit Program slide, the all-mode program edit function
must be enabled.
MEMO

8
A1
A2
Z

98
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

4.2

4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PRO-

GRAM EDIT SCREEN
1
4.2.1 Displaying the Program Edit Screen
2
4.2.1

To display the program edit screen (EDIT mode), perform the following:

<1> Switch to EDIT mode.

The EDIT mode base screen is displayed.
2
Switch to EDIT mode
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
4.2.1.1 Changing the program display/edit area size
In the EDIT mode base screen, you can switch the program display/edit area
Z
between the expanded view and the reduced view.
To switch the screen between the expanded view and the reduced view, press the
[Expand->Reduce] or [Reduce->Expand] soft key on the fifth page.

99
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

 Expanded view
The program display/edit area fills to the entire screen.

1
2
3
4
5
6 Fig. 4.2.1.1 (a) Expanded View of the Program Display/Edit Area

7  Reduced view
The program display/edit area is reduced to one-fourth of its original size at the
bottom right of the screen, with the same layout as the debug operation screen in
8 the MEM mode.

A1
A2
Z

Fig. 4.2.1.1 (b) Reduced View of the Program Display/Edit Area

100
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

4.2.2 EDIT Mode Base Screen

4.2.2

This section describes the structure of the EDIT mode base screen.

A
1
2

B
2
4
C D

E
5
Fig. 4.2.2 EDIT Mode Base Screen 6
Table 4.2.2 Name and Function of Each Part on the EDIT Mode Base Screen

A
Name
Program path display area
Description
Displays the path and name of the selected
7
program.
B Program display/edit area Displays the contents of the selected program. 8
C Message area Displays operation warnings and guidance.
D
E
Key input buffer area
Soft keys
Displays the string entered with the MDI keys.
Operations including create new, copy, and delete
A1
of programs and folders can be performed.
Use the [<] and [>] soft keys to switch the pages.
A2
• You can press the [Change Screen] soft key to switch between the edit
screen and simulation screen. Z
• The maximum characters allowed in a single block are 200
characters.

 • If you perform the following operations right after editing, the edit
operation may not be completed with the original cursor position
MEMO remaining.
Switch the mode
Press <RESET>
Turn on the RRW signal
Emergency stop

101
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

4.2.2.1 Program path display area

The program path display area displays the following information for the currently
4.2.2.1

displayed program.

B
1
A
2
C

3 Fig. 4.2.2.1 EDIT Mode Base Screen (Multi-path Systems)

Table 4.2.2.1 Name and Function of Each Part on the Program Path Display Area
4 Name Description
A Path number icon For multi-path systems, the selected path number
5 icon is displayed.
For a one-path system, the icon is not displayed.
B Program path Displays the path of the selected program. The
6 right side of the path that cannot be displayed
within the area will be omitted and indicated as
"...".

7 C Program name/number Displays the program name/number of the

selected program.

8 4.2.2.2 Program display/edit area

The program display/edit area displays the program and a cursor that indicates
4.2.2.2

the position where you can edit.

A1 The cursor selection target varies depending on the program edit method as
follows:

A2 • Word
• Character
• Block
Z
• You can switch between word edit and character edit in the program
 edit method setting.
For details, see "4.2.2.5 Changing the program edit method setting".
MEMO
• For details on character edit, see "4.3.7 Program Character Edit".

102
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

1
2

Fig. 4.2.2.2 (a) Program display/edit area

2
In word-selected state
Displays each word separated by a space. 4
Any omitted word in a custom macro statement will remain omitted when
displayed.
• The cursor in word-selected state will select one word at a time. 5
Fig. 4.2.2.2 (b) In Word-selected State 6
In block-selected state
• The cursor in block-selected state will select the whole block up to the end of the
program display area.
7
When the text of block spans multiple lines, any 1-byte spaces in the second or
subsequent lines will also be included in the selected range.
8
Fig. 4.2.2.2 (c) In Block-selected State A1
Cursor display specifications
• When the focus is on the program display area, the cursor is displayed as
follows (for both word-selected and block-selected states):
A2
Fig. 4.2.2.2 (d) When the Cursor Is Focused Z
• When the focus is not on the program display area, the cursor is displayed as
follows (for both word-selected and block-selected states):

Fig. 4.2.2.2 (e) When the Cursor Is Not Focused

 Selecting block or word
The target to be edited, in program editing for example, is where the string is
selected.
There are mainly two selected states: block-selected and word-selected. Although
you can select on a per-character basis, you will normally select a block or word
for program editing.

103
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

The selected part is the target to be edited when a string is entered from the key
input buffer as well.
 Cursor position display
You can see the indicator to check the location of the block currently containing
1 the cursor relative to the entire program.
Indicator

2
3
4
5 Fig. 4.2.2.2 (f) Indicator of Cursor Position
The indicator position represents the position of the block with the cursor relative
6 to the total number of blocks.

Scrolling programs
7 You can perform the following operations to scroll programs.

MDI keys
8 • <↑>
• <↓>
A1 • <←>
• <→>
A2 • <PAGE UP>
• <PAGE DOWN>

Z Soft keys
• [Search Up]
• [Search Down]
• [Replace]
• [Rewind]
• [End Search]

104
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

 Text color and text background color settings

Depending on settings made by the machine manufacturer, you can change the
color of the text and background of the program display/edit area.
The text color and text background color can be individually set for the following
items.
• Search strings
1
• String (1) specified by the machine manufacturer
• String (2) specified by the machine manufacturer 2
• String (3) specified by the machine manufacturer
• Data with undefined value "?" 2
• Comments
• Axis name 4
• Subprogram calls
• Macro calls 5
• Macro variables
• Macro sentences 6
• Sequence No.
• G code commands
7
• Auxiliary functions
• Tool offset commands
• Spindle commands
8
• Feedrate commands
• Second auxiliary functions
A1
A2
 • For details on the text color and text background color settings,
contact the machine manufacturer.
MEMO
Z

105
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

1
2
3
4
5 Fig. 4.2.2.2 (g) Setting Example of Text Color and Text Background Color

4.2.2.3 EDIT mode base screen message area

6 4.2.2.3

The following messages are displayed in this message area:

Warning messages : messages for operations performed by the
operator.
7 Guidance messages : messages to prompt the selection of range for
copy, cut, or delete operations.
Program guidance messages : meaning of the word where the cursor is
8 positioned during program editing.

A1
A2
Z
Fig. 4.2.2.3 Message area

106
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

4.2.2.4 Key input buffer area

When you press an alphabet or number key, the alphanumeric character is
4.2.2.4

displayed in the key input buffer area. You can enter up to 128 characters.

1
2
2
Fig. 4.2.2.4 Key input buffer area
To delete the character you entered, perform the following:
4
<CAN>: Deletes the previous character.
<SHIFT> + <CAN>: Deletes all characters.
5
4.2.2.5 Changing the program edit method setting
You can switch program edit between word-selected state and character-selected 6
4.2.2.5

state in the setting slide.

 • Any changes you make to the settings will be reflected the next time
7
the program edit screen displays.
MEMO
8
<1> Press the [Setting Slide] soft key.
The setting slide appears. A1
<2> Press [Program] in [Group] and then press [Program Edit Method] in
[Category].
The Program Edit Method window is displayed.
A2
Z

107
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

1
2
3
4
5
<3> Change the settings with <←> and <→>.

6
7
8 <4> Press the [Close] soft key.

4.2.2.6 Enabling the sequence number automatic insert function

A1 If the sequence number automatic insert function is enabled, when a line is broken
4.2.2.6

(EOB is inserted) with the MDI key during program preparation, a sequence
number is automatically inserted at the start of the block after the line break.
A2 However, if a sequence number already exists at the start of the insert target
block, it is not inserted.

Z An inserted sequence number is calculated by adding the incremental value to the

numerical value of address N at the start of the block where the EOB insert
operation was performed.
A sequence number is inserted at the start of the block following the block where
EOB was inserted.

After a sequence number is inserted, the cursor is placed on the last word of the
block where the sequence number is inserted (the same cursor position as when a
sequence number is inserted manually with the MDI key).

Example: When the incremental value is 10, if ";" is inserted at the following cursor
position, "N20" is inserted at the start of the next block.

108
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

Insert ";"

1
When the word of address N is inserted together with EOB at the start of the block,
a sequence number, where the incremental value is added to the value following 2
address N, is inserted following the word of address N.

Example: When the incremental value is 10, if ";N100;" is inserted at the following 2
cursor position, the entered "N100" is inserted into the next block, and "N110" is
inserted at the start of the following block because a value to which the
incremental value is added is 100. 4
O0001 ;
Insert
「；N100；」
O0001 ; 5
N10 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; N10 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ;
";N100;"
を挿入
% N100 ;
N110 ;
6
%
7
If a value with the incremental value added exceeds the maximum number of
digits (eight) for the sequence number, sequence number 0 (N0) is inserted
instead. If there is no word of address N where the incremental value is added, a 8
sequence number equivalent to the incremental value is inserted.

If the number following address N contains a decimal point, it is truncated to an A1

integer and then the incremental value is added to it before being inserted.
If a value equal to or smaller than 0, 9-or-more digit value, or non-numerical value
(macro variable "#" or data with undetermined value "?") is specified for the A2
number following address N, a sequence number equivalent to the incremental
value is inserted.
Z
You can enable/disable the sequence number automatic insert function and
change the incremental value of the sequence number in the Setting Slide.
The sequence number automatic insert function can be used on the following
screens:
• EDIT Mode Base Screen
• Background edit screen
• MDI mode base screen (during edit)
• Program restart screen (restore auxiliary function)

109
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

• To enable the sequence number automatic insert function on the MDI

 base mode screen (during edit) and program restart screen (restore
auxiliary function), bit 5 of parameter ISQ (No. 11303) must be set to 1
MEMO
1 (enabled).

2 <1> Press [Program] in [Group] and then press [Sequence No. Auto Insert] in
[Category].
The Sequence No. Auto Insert window appears.
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

110
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

<2> Select "Enable" or "Disable" by using <←> or <→>.

1
2
2
4
5
6
<3> Enter the incremental value of the sequence number and press <INPUT>.

7
• If you change the setting item without pressing <INPUT> to confirm
the entered incremental value, the value is discarded. In such a case,
the value set in parameter No. 3216 is displayed.
• The incremental value range varies according to the value range set in
8
parameter No. 3216. The valid range of parameter No. 3216 is 0 to
99999999, but a value can be entered between -999999999 and
999999999.
A1
 • Under the following conditions, the incremental value is treated as 0:
A negative value is set.
MEMO A value between 100000000 and 999999999 is set. A2
• If you try to enter and confirm a value outside the range between -
999999999 and 999999999, the value is discarded, displaying the
"The value is out of range." in the message area. Z
• The incremental value must be an integer.
If you try to enter and confirm a non-integer value (such as a decimal
number or alphabet), the value is discarded, displaying the "The value
is out of range." in the message area.

<4> Press the [Close] soft key.

111
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

 Automatically inserting sequence numbers

When the incremental value of the sequence number is set to "1", you can
automatically insert sequence numbers by performing the following procedure:

1 <1> Input "O0001" in the key input buffer and press <INSERT>. (Create a new
program)

2
3
4
5
6
7
8 <2> Input ";" in the key input buffer and press <INSERT> or <INPUT>.
The sequence number (N1) is automatically inserted into the block after the line
A1 break.

A2
Z

112
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

<3> Input one-block data and block end EOB ("G92X0Y0;" in this example) and
press <INSERT> or <INPUT>.
The sequence number (N2) is automatically inserted into the block after the line
break.

1
2
2
4
5
6
7
• If you use a special macro call with an M code of the custom macro
function, do not use the sequence number automatic insert function.


NOTE
If bit 0 of parameter MSM (No. 6009) is set to 1, an M code to call a
macro can be specified to any position other than the start in a special
8
macro call with the M code, which treats the word of address N before
the M code to call a macro as the argument of the macro call.
A1
(Example)
When bit 0 of parameter MSM (No. 6009) is set to 1, if
A2
the second block is executed, the words of address N
and address T are treated as arguments, setting macro
variable #14 to "10" and macro variable #20 to "123".
Z
Limit the use of the function because a sequence number (word of address N)
automatically inserted into the block of a special macro call with an M code may
be treated as the argument of the macro call.

 Examples of sequence number automatic insert

The following are examples of sequence number automatic insert (a word in sky
blue indicates the cursor position):

113
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

Table 4.2.2.6 Examples of sequence number automatic insert

Automatic insert Input string and Screen image before Screen image after
pattern incremental value automatic insert automatic insert
Basic pattern Input string ;G92X0;Y0
1 (when a line is
broken (EOB is
Incrementa 10
l value
inserted))
<When the first EOB is
2 inserted>
Since no sequence number
exists at the first block
3 (program number), the
sequence number (N10) of the
incremental value is inserted

4 into the second block.

<When the second EOB is

5 inserted>
Since the sequence number
(N10) exists at the second
block, the sequence number
6 (N20), where incremental
value 10 was added to 10, is
inserted into the third block.
7 <Cursor position after
insertion>

8 The cursor is placed on the

last inserted word Y0.
If a sequence Input string ;

A1 number exceeds Incrementa 10

the maximum l value
number of digits
after the <When EOB is inserted>
A2 incremental value Since adding 10 to 99999999
is added exceeds the maximum
number of digits (eight) for the
Z sequence number, sequence
number 0 (N0) is inserted into
the second block.

114
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

Automatic insert Input string and Screen image before Screen image after
pattern incremental value automatic insert automatic insert
If a sequence Input string ;N5;
number already Incrementa 1
exists at the
insert target block
l value
1
<When the first EOB is
inserted>
Since the sequence number
(N5) exists at the start of the
2
second block, a sequence
number is not inserted into the
second block.
2
<When the second EOB is
inserted> 4
Since the sequence number
(N5) exists at the second
block, the sequence number 5
(N6), where incremental value
1 was added to 5, is inserted
into the third block. 6
If a line is broken Input string ;
(only EOB is Incrementa 1
inserted) when
the cursor is
l value 7
placed on EOB
<When EOB is inserted>
Since the sequence number 8
(N10) exists at the second
block, the sequence number
(N11), where incremental A1
value 1 was added to 10, is
inserted.

When the cursor is placed on

A2
EOB, a sequence number is
inserted into the next block, so
EOB is inserted into the third
Z
block, and a sequence number
is inserted into the fourth
block.

115
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

Automatic insert Input string and Screen image before Screen image after
pattern incremental value automatic insert automatic insert
If a line is broken Input string X100; O0001 ; O0001 ;
when the cursor Incrementa 1
N10 G92 X0 Y0 ; N10 G92 X0 Y0 ;

1 is placed on EOB l value

(word of an
% X100 ;
N11 %
address other
than N and EOB <When EOB is inserted>
2 are inserted) Since the sequence number
(N10) exists at the second
block, the sequence number
3 (N11), where incremental
value 1 was added to 10, is
inserted.
4 When the cursor is placed on
EOB, a sequence number is
inserted into the next block, so

5 X100 and EOB are inserted

into the third block, and a
sequence number is inserted
into the fourth block.
6 If a line is broken Input string N100; O0001 ; O0001 ;
when the cursor Incrementa 1
N10 G92 X0 Y0 ; N10 G92 X0 Y0 ;
is placed on EOB l value
7 (word of an
% N100 ;
N101 %
address other
than N and EOB <When EOB is inserted>
8 are inserted) The sequence number (N10)
exists at the second block, and
the input string contains the
A1 sequence number (N100)
(inserted into the third block),
so the sequence number

A2 (N101), where incremental

value 1 was added to 100, is
inserted.
When the cursor is placed on
Z EOB, a sequence number is
inserted into the next block, so
N100 and EOB are inserted
into the third block, and a
sequence number is inserted
into the fourth block.

116
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

Automatic insert Input string and Screen image before Screen image after
pattern incremental value automatic insert automatic insert
If the incremental Input string ;
value is 0 or Incrementa 0
invalid l value Negative
value
1
100000000 <When EOB is inserted>
to
999999999
The increment value is 0, and
the sequence number (N1),
2
where incremental value 0
was added to 10, is inserted
into the third block. 2
If the word of Input string ;
address N exists
at any position
Incrementa 1
l value
4
other than the
start of a block <When EOB is inserted>
where the cursor Since the word of address N
does not exist at the start of
5
is placed
the block, the sequence
number (N1), where
incremental value 1 was
6
added to 0, is inserted into the

If a non- Input string ;

second block.
7
O0001 ; O0001 ;
numerical value Incrementa 10 N1? G92 X0 Y0 ; N1? G92 X0 Y0 ;
is specified for
the numeric part
l value % N10 ; 8
%
of the integer
<When EOB is inserted>
Since the non-numerical value A1
"?" is specified, the sequence
number (N10) equivalent to
the incremental value is A2
inserted into the third block.

Z
4.2.3 Creating New Programs
4.2.3

You can create new programs.

Specify a program in the key input buffer or in a window to create a new program
in the current folder, and select it as the main program.

The current folder is the first folder that meets the following conditions:
 • The folder that contains the program that is currently edited
• The folder that contains the last edited program
MEMO
• Individual path folders (//CNC_MEM/USER/PATHx)

117
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

 To specify the program name

You can specify the program name from the program specification window or key
input buffer.

To specify the program name in the window

1 Use one of the following methods:
- Specify the program name (created as a program name)

2 <1> Press the [Create New] soft key.

A window is displayed.
3
4 <2> Enter one of the followings:
• Program name
5 • O + numerical value
• o + numerical value
6
7
8 <3> Press the [OK] soft key or <INPUT>, <INSERT>.
The new program is created in the current folder.

A1 To specify the program name from the key input buffer

Use one of the following methods:
• Specify O + numerical value (created as a program number)
A2 • Specify o + numerical value (created as a program name)

Z • When you complete the program creation, the [Create New] window
closes.
 • If an error is found in the input, a message will appear in the message
display area.
MEMO
• If you display a slide while creating a program, the [Create New]
window will close.

4.2.4 Searching Programs

4.2.4

Search the program specified in the key input buffer from the current folder and
open it as the main program.

The following searches can be performed.

118
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

• Specify the program name: Searches the program name.

• Specify O + numerical value: Searches the program number.
• Specify the numerical value only: Searches the program name first, and if the
program does not exist then searches the program number.
• No specification: Searches the next registered program. 1
<1> Enter one of the followings in the key input buffer: 2
• Specify the program name
• Specify O + numerical value 2
• Specify a numerical value only
<2> Press the [Search Program] soft key.
The searched program opens as the main program.
4
5
6
7
8
• If you press the [Search Program] soft key without entering anything in
the key input buffer, the program search window appears. Enter a

 program name/O + number/o + number you want to search for and A1

press the [OK] soft key or <INPUT> and <INSERT> to start the
MEMO search.
Pressing the [Next Program]/[Previous Program] soft key displays the
program after/before the currently displayed program.
A2
Z
4.2.5 Moving the Cursor
4.2.5

When you are creating a program, you can move the cursor by operating the
cursor keys, page switch keys, or touch panel.

4.2.5.1 Reset key operations

When you press <RESET>, the cursor moves to the first word in the program.
4.2.5.1

4.2.5.2 Touch panel operations

When you are operating the touch panel, the word you tap will be in selected state.
4.2.5.2

119
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

If you tap a word displayed in the top end block while the entire top end block in
the program display area is not displayed, the entire top end block that contains
the word will be displayed.

Example: When you tap the word "Z-381." in the top end displayed as follows,
1
2
3
Fig. 4.2.5.2 (a) Tap Example (1)
4
the entire block that contains the tapped word "Z-381." will be displayed.
5 The cursor will be placed at the word "Z-381.".

6
7
8 Fig. 4.2.5.2 (b) Tap Example (2)

If you tap a word displayed in the bottom end block while the entire bottom end
A1 block in the program display area is not displayed, the entire bottom end block
that contains the word will be displayed.

A2 Example: When you tap the word "T15.24" in the bottom end displayed as
follows,

Fig. 4.2.5.2 (c) Tap Example (3)

the entire block that contains the tapped word "T15.24" will be displayed.
The cursor will be placed at the word "T15.24".

120
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

1
Fig. 4.2.5.2 (d) Tap Example (4) 2

4.2.6 Searching Strings 2

4.2.6

Enter a string in the key input buffer to search for that string within the program.
4
 Enabling per-word base string search and replace
When the program edit method is word edit, you can operate the following
functions in string search. 5
Table 4.2.6 Per-Word Base String Search and Replace Function
6
Function Example of search/replace
Search Replace Example of Replace
strings strings strings to be results 7
searched
Search and replace words that X10 Y20 X10 Y20
completely matches with the input strings 8
Search words that match with the input X Y X1 Y1
strings and address parts, and replace X20 Y20
address parts of the words X300. Y300. A1
• You can use this function in the following devices.
 CNC_MEM: CNC storage memory
A2
 MEMCARD: Program storage file (FANUCPRG.BIN)

  HDD_SSD: Large-capacity memory HDD/SSD (NCPRG.BIN)

• Per-word base string search is not supported in the following devices. Z
MEMO Therefore, you can only use partial match search.
 DATA_SV: Data server built-in memory card
• For how to select "word edit" as the program edit method, see "4.2.2.5
Changing the program edit method setting".

<1> Press the Setting Slide soft key.

The setting slide appears.
<2> Press [Program] in [Group] and then press [String Search and Replacement
Method in Word Edit] in [Category].
The String Search/Replacement Method in Word Edit window appears.

121
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

1
2
3
4
5
<3> Press the [Check] soft key or the <SPACE> key.
6 “Search and Replace by Word” is selected and checked.

7
8
A1
A2
Z

<4> Press the [Close] soft key.

122
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

4.2.6.1 String search conditions

Search strings
4.2.6.1

You can specify the following search strings.

• Search by partial string in a word
Specify a portion of a word or the entire word. 1
• Search by multiple words
Enter a single space between search words.
* You may only enter one space between words.
2
• Search by multiple words containing EOB (;)
• Search by program name/number 2
Allowed number of search characters
You may search a string up to 128 characters.
4

 • During a search, you cannot perform any operations on programs to 5

be edited. You also cannot open programs from the Program Manager
MEMO slide.
6
4.2.6.2 Search above the cursor position
4.2.6.2

You can search for strings located above the cursor position. 7
<1> Enter the search string in the key input buffer.
8
<2> Press the [Search Up] soft key.
The search starts, and if the searched string is found, the cursor will move to
that word. A1
If you specified multiple words, the cursor will move to the first word.

A2
Z

123
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

1
2
3
4
5
6
• The program display area will be scrolled so that the cursor is
7 displayed in the center of the area. However, the program display area
will not be scrolled for cases in which the line prior to the program
name/number will be a blank line.

8  • When the searched string cannot be found, "Searched string not

found." is displayed in the message area and the cursor will not be
MEMO moved.
• If you press the [Search Up] soft key without entering anything in the
A1 key input buffer, the string search window appears. Enter a string you
want to search for and press the [OK] soft key or <INPUT> and
<INSERT> to start the search.
A2
4.2.6.3 Search below the cursor position
Z 4.2.6.3

You can search for strings located below the cursor position.

<1> Enter the search string in the key input buffer.

<2> Press the [Search Down] soft key.
The search starts, and if the searched string is found, the cursor will move to
that word.
If you specified multiple words, the cursor will move to the first word.

124
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

• The program display area will be scrolled so that the cursor is

displayed in the center of the area. However, the program display area
will not be scrolled for cases in which the line prior to the program
name/number will be a blank line.
1
 • When the searched string cannot be found, "Searched string not
found." is displayed in the message area and the cursor will not be
MEMO moved.
• If you press the [Search Down] soft key without entering anything in 2
the key input buffer, the string search window appears. Enter a string
you want to search for and press the [OK] soft key or <INPUT> and
<INSERT> to start the search. 2
4.2.6.4 Consecutive search 4
You can search consecutively for strings located above or below the cursor
4.2.6.4

position.
5
<1> Enter the search string in the key input buffer.
<2> Press the [Search Up] or [Search Down] soft key. 6
The search starts, and if the searched string is found, the cursor will move to
that word.
If you specified multiple words, the cursor will move to the first word. 7
8
<3> Then, press the [Search Up] or [Search Down] soft key.
If you continue to search the same string, and the searched string is found, the A1
cursor will move to that word.

• The program display area will be scrolled so that the cursor is

A2
displayed in the center of the area. However, the program display area
will not be scrolled for cases in which the line prior to the program
name/number will be a blank line. Z
 • When the searched string cannot be found, "Searched string not
found." is displayed in the message area and the cursor will not be
MEMO
moved.
• If you press the [Search Up] or [Search Down] soft key without
entering any search string, the search is performed with the last
search string you entered.

125
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

4.2.7 Rewind and End Search

4.2.7

You can perform program rewind and end search.

 Rewind

1 <1> Press the [Rewind] soft key on the first page.

The cursor moves to the first word in the first block of the program (= program
name).
2
3
 End search

4 <1> Press the [End Search] soft key on the second page.
The cursor moves to the EOR of the last block of the program.

5
6
4.2.8 Changing Screens
7
4.2.8

You can switch between the program edit screen and simulation screen.

<1> Press the [Change Screen] soft key on the first page.
8 The screen will change each time you press this key.

A1
A2 4.2.9 Inserting M Codes
4.2.9

You can insert M codes that you select into the program.
Z
<1> Move the cursor to the position where you want to insert the M code.
<2> Press the [M Code] soft key.
The Insert M Code window appears.

126
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

<3> Use <←>, <→>, or <TAB> to change the tab to be displayed.

1
2
2

<4> Use <↑> or <↓> to select the M code to be inserted.

4
<5> Press the [Insert] soft key/<INPUT>/<INSERT> or [Insert +;] soft key.
If you press the [Insert] soft key/<INPUT>/<INSERT>, the M code you have 5
selected will be inserted.
If you press the [Insert +;] soft key, the M code you have selected along with ";"
will be inserted. 6

4.2.10 Inserting Fixed Sentences for Machining 7

4.2.10

You can insert, change, and delete fixed sentences registered for machining, such
as turning and milling, into the program.
8
<1> Move the cursor to the position where you want to insert the fixed sentence for
turning machining. A1
<2> Press the [Fixed Sentence] soft key.

A2

<3> Select the fixed sentence you want to insert. Z

 • If an insert window for turning or milling is set to appear in the setting

file, a soft key to select turning or milling is displayed.
MEMO

127
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

1
2
3
<4> Press the [OK] soft key or <INPUT>.
The selected operation is executed for the selected fixed sentence.
4
4.2.10.1 Fixed sentence information tile
The fixed sentence information tile displays a list of fixed sentences (registered
4.2.10.1

5 names) on each tab. When you select a fixed sentence (registered name), the
corresponding fixed sentence (registered sentence) is displayed.

6
7
8
A1
Fig. 4.2.10.1 Fixed Sentence Information Tile

A2
Table 4.2.10.1 List of Items in Fixed Sentence Information Tile

Z A User tab
Name Displayed information
Displays the user name.
B Fixed sentence group Displays the fixed sentence group name on each tab. Up to
tab seven tabs can be displayed.
C Fixed sentence Displays the fixed sentence (registered name).
(registered name)
D Fixed sentence Displays the fixed sentence (registered sentence) that
(registered sentence) corresponds to the selected fixed sentence (registered
name).
E Guidance message Displays operation guidance and warning messages.
display tile

128
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

4.2.10.2 Registering fixed sentences for machining

You can register new fixed sentences for machining.
4.2.10.2

 • Fixed sentences can be registered to user tabs only. You cannot 1

register them to other tabs.
NOTE

2
<1> Press the [Fixed Sentence] soft key.

<2> Select a user tab with <←>, <→>, and <TAB>.

4
<3> Pressing the [New] soft key.
The fixed sentence update screen (Register New Fixed Sentence) is displayed. 5
6
<4> Enter a registered name and sentence you want to register.
7
8
A1
A2
Z

 • To display the registered name and sentence on the fixed sentence

group tab, select the fixed sentence group name to be displayed
MEMO from "fixed sentence group name".

129
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

<5> Press the [Add] or [Insert] soft key.

When you pressed the [Add] soft key
A sentence is added to the end of the registration name list in the user tab.
When you pressed the [Insert] soft key

1 A sentence is added to below the focus of the registration name list in the user
tab.

2
3 • You can register up to 200 fixed sentences for machining.
• Only alphabet characters can be used for registered names.
• The input character limit for registered names and sentences is as
4 follows:
 Registered name: 32
Registered sentence: 256
5 MEMO
• When you press the [Paste] soft key, a string saved in the clipboard is
pasted to the position of the selected focus. However, if you try to
paste a string containing 257 characters or more, 257th and
6 subsequent characters are discarded.

7 4.2.10.3 Changing fixed sentences for machining

You can change fixed sentences registered to user tabs.
4.2.10.3

8 <1> Press the [Fixed Sentence] soft key.

A1
A2 <2> Select a user tab with <←>, <→>, and <TAB>.
<3> Select a fixed sentence for machining to change with <↑> and <↓>.
<4> Press the [Change] soft key.
Z The fixed sentence update screen (Change Fixed Sentence) is displayed.

130
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

<5> Change the registered name or sentence.

1
2
2
4
5

 • To display the registered name and sentence on the fixed sentence

group tab, select the fixed sentence group name to be displayed
6
MEMO from "fixed sentence group name".

7
<6> Press the [OK] soft key.
The selected fixed sentence for machining is changed. 8
4.2.10.4 Deleting fixed sentences for machining
You can delete fixed sentences registered to user tabs. A1
4.2.10.4

<1> Press the [Fixed Sentence] soft key.

A2
Z
<2> Select a user tab with <←>, <→>, and <TAB>.
<3> Select a fixed sentence for machining to delete with <↑> and <↓>.
<4> Press the [Delete] soft key.
The confirmation window is displayed.

<5> Press the [Yes] soft key.

The selected fixed sentence for machining is deleted.

131
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

4.2.10.5 Sorting fixed sentences for machining

You can sort fixed sentences registered to user tabs.
4.2.10.5

<1> Press the [Fixed Sentence] soft key.

1
2
<2> Press the [Sort ↑] or [Sort ↓] soft key.

3
4 4.2.10.6 Outputting fixed sentences for machining
Output registered fixed sentences for machining to an external device.
4.2.10.6

5
<1> Press the [Fixed Sentence] soft key.

6
7 <2> Select a user tab with <←>, <→>, and <TAB>.
<3> Press the [File Export] soft key.
8 The external output window appears.

A1
<4> Select the output destination in the folder tree and press the [OK] soft key.
A2
Z

The output file name input window is displayed.

132
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

<5> Enter the name of the file to be output and press the [OK] soft key.
All registered fixed sentences for machining are output, and the window closes.

1
2
• If a file with the same name already exists in the output destination,
the Confirm Overwrite window will appear. 2
 Select [Overwrite] or [Rename].
• All registered fixed sentence data (turning data/milling data/turning
MEMO
and milling common data) for machining will be output to a single file.
• An output file cannot be input as an MGi fixed sentence.
4
5
4.2.10.7 Inputting fixed sentences for machining
Input registered fixed sentences for machining from an external device.
4.2.10.7

6
<1> Press the [Fixed Sentence] soft key.

<2> Select a user tab with <←>, <→>, and <TAB>.

8
<3> Press the [File Import] soft key.
The external input window appears A1
A2
Z

133
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

<4> Select an external device from where you want to input and the fixed sentence
file to input.

1
2
3
4
5 <5> Press the [OK] soft key.
The selected fixed sentence for machining is input, and the window closes.

6
 • All registered fixed sentence data (turning data/milling data/turning and
milling common data) for machining will be deleted, and data in the

7 NOTE input file will be registered.

8
• If the data in the input file exceeds the maximum allowed number of
registered fixed sentences (200) for machining, all data up to the
A1 maximum will be input.
• If the data set as the input data registration name exceeds the valid
number of characters (32 characters), all data up to the maximum will
A2  be input.
• In the following cases, the input process will be canceled, and the data
MEMO prior to the input process will remain.

Z When any data that exceeds the valid number of characters (256
characters) is set in the input data registered sentence
When any invalid character (prohibited character) or value is
included in the input data
When an invalid format is used for the input data

4.2.11 Creating Drawing Commands

4.2.11

You can create drawing commands for machining simulation in the EDIT mode
base screen and background edit screen. The shape of the blank is memorized by
adding a drawing command. The memorized blank is drawn when the next
machining simulation is displayed.

134
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

<1> Press the [Drawing Command] soft key.

The type of the drawing command is displayed.

1
<2> Press the soft key of the drawing command you want to edit.
Select lathe or milling.
<3> Press the [Blank Definition] or the [Tool Definition] soft key.
2
Specify the type of definition.
2
4
5
6

<4> Select the command. 7

8
A1
A2
Z
 Changing drawing commands
To change the created drawing command, perform the following:
<1> Select the drawing command in the EDIT mode base screen or background
edit screen.
<2> Press the <INPUT> key or the [Change] soft key.
The drawing command create window for the selected machining type is
displayed.
For how to edit the command, see the above step <3> and after.

135
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

4.2.12 Creating Free Figure Blanks

4.2.12

Specify a free figure blank on a plane with Z axis on the first axis and X axis on the
second axis.
This function supports creation of the following free figure blanks:
1 • Free cylinder with a turning drawing command
• Free cylinder around Z axis with a milling drawing command

2 To newly create/edit a free cylinder blank, perform one of the following:

3 Newly create
Select "Free Cylinder" in step <4> in the previous section "4.2.11 Creating
Drawing Commands".
4 Edit
In the EDIT mode base screen or background edit screen, select a free cylinder
5 blank figure program and press the <INPUT> key or the [Change] soft key.

4.2.12.1 Element input window

6 4.2.12.1

To open the element input window, press the corresponding soft keys on the free
cylinder blank base screen.
7
 Start point
The start point input window can be displayed by pressing the [Start Point] soft
8 key on the free cylinder blank base screen.

A1 Table 4.2.12.1 (a) Name and Function of Each Part on the Start Point Input
Window
Name Description
A2 Element tab
Start Point DX First coordinate value of the start point of the free blank
figure (positive value)
Z Start Point Z Second coordinate value of the start point of the free
blank figure
Work Origin Z(Spn 2) Blank back side face thickness (Z-axis distance between
back side face and workpiece origin)
Program Coordinate Data for switching program coordinates
Work tab
Material Blank material
Start Point DX First coordinate value of the start point of the free blank
figure (positive value)
Start Point Z Second coordinate value of the start point of the free
blank figure

136
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

Name Description
Work Origin Z(Spn 2) Blank back side face thickness (Z-axis distance between
back side face and workpiece origin)
Program Coordinate [Coord1]: Program coordinates 1
[Coord2]: Program coordinates 2
1
 Line
The line input window can be displayed by pressing the [Line] soft key on the
2
free cylinder blank base screen.

2
Table 4.2.12.1 (b) Name and Function of Each Part on the Line Input Window
Name
Element tab
Description
4
Linear Direction Select the direction of the straight line displayed on the
soft keys.
Alternatively, select the direction of the straight line with
5
the numeric key pad.
[Right]: Enter a "right" linear direction
[Right-up]: Enter an "upper right" linear direction 6
[Up]: Enter an "up" linear direction
[Left-up]: Enter an "upper left" linear direction
[Left]: Enter a "left" linear direction 7
[Left-down]: Enter a "lower left" linear direction
[Down]: Enter a "down" linear direction
[Right-down]: Enter a "lower right" linear direction 8
End Point Coordinate DX Second coordinate value of the end point of the straight
line (diameter value)
End Point Coordinate Z First coordinate value of the end point of the straight line A1
Angle Angle of the straight line
Last Connection [Tangent]: Tangent to the preceding figure
[Nothing]: Not tangent to the preceding figure (Default)
A2
Next Connection [Tangent]: Tangent to the following figure
[Nothing]: Not tangent to the preceding figure
Z

137
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

 Arc CW/CCW
The arc CW/CCW input window can be displayed by pressing the [Arc CW] or
[Arc CCW] soft key on the free cylinder blank base screen.

1 Table 4.2.12.1 (c) Name and Function of Each Part on the Arc CW/CCW Input
Window
Name Description
2 Element tab
End Point Coordinate DX Second coordinate value of the arc end point (diameter

3 End Point Coordinate Z

value)
First coordinate value of the arc end point
Arc Radius Radius of the arc
4 Center Point CDX Second coordinate value of the arc center
Center Point Coord. CZ First coordinate value of the arc center

5 Last Connection [Tangent]: Tangent to the preceding figure

[Nothing]: Not tangent to the preceding figure (Default)
Next Connection [Tangent]: Tangent to the following figure

6 Path Type
[Nothing]: Not tangent to the preceding figure
[Long]: Create the arc with long path
[Short]: Create the arc with short path

7
 Corner R
8 The corner R input window can be displayed by pressing the [Corner R] soft
key on the free cylinder blank base screen.

A1 Table 4.2.12.1 (d) Name and Function of Each Part on the Corner R Input Window
Name Description

A2 Element tab
Corner R radius Corner R radius

Z
 Chamfer
The chamfer input window can be displayed by pressing the [Chamfer] soft key
on the free cylinder blank base screen.

Table 4.2.12.1 (e) Name and Function of Each Part on the Chamfer Input Window
Name Description
Element tab
Chamfering Chamfering amount (radius value, positive value)
Amount

138
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

4.2.12.2 Restrictions on creating free figure blanks

4.2.12.2

• The end point and start point of a free cylinder blank figure must be the same.
• The series of free figures must be positioned between the start point and end
point.
• You cannot specify a figure on the face. The face must have vertical lines only.
1
2
2
4
• A figure in Z-axis direction from the face must be monotone increasing or
decreasing. 5
6
7
8
4.2.12.3 Displaying help about input items
4.2.12.3

You can display help corresponding to the displayed element input window as
A1
guidance for input operation.
<1> Press <HELP>. A2
The help window corresponding to the displayed element input window
appears.
Z

139
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN

1
2
3
4
5
6 <2> See the input item description in the help window as necessary.
<3> To enter values in the items, press the [Switch Focus] soft key.

7 The focus moves to the element input window.

<4> Set values in the input items according to the description in help.

8
A1
A2
Z

140
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

4.3

4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

You can use the MDI keys and soft keys to edit on a per-word basis (smallest unit
of NC machining programs; consists of an address and numerical value).
1
4.3.1 Insert, Change, and Delete 2
4.3.1

4.3.1.1 Insert
4.3.1.1

One of the following that you entered in the key input buffer area will be inserted 2
into the cursor position.
• Single word
4
• Single block
• Multiple words
• Multiple blocks
5

<1> Enter in the key input buffer area a word or block that you want to insert. 6
<2> Press <INSERT> or <INPUT>.
If there are no errors, a word of block is entered to the cursor position and the 7
cursor is moved as shown in the table below.

Original cursor position Operation 8

Word-select a program name/ Inserted immediately after the program name/
number number.
The cursor is moved to the last word after the insert A1
operation.
Block-select a block that
contains a program name/
Inserted at the start of the next block.
The cursor is moved to the last word after the insert A2
number operation.
Word-select EOR (%) Inserted immediately before EOR.
The cursor is moved to the last word after the insert
Z
operation.
Block-select a block that Inserted immediately before EOR.
contains EOR The cursor is moved to the last word after the insert
operation.
All others Inserted immediately after the cursor.
The cursor is moved to the last word after the insert
operation.

 • If an error is found, nothing will be inserted into the program, and the
cursor will not move.
MEMO

141
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

 Error check
A check is performed for the characters that you entered in the key input buffer
area. Possible causes of error are as follows:
Identified as an error when the following does not exist

1 Table 4.3.1.1 (a) Input Check 1

No. Target Identified as an error when the Operation warning
following character does not message
2 exist
1 Character ) Missing parenthesis
following "("
3 2 Character ( Missing parenthesis
preceding ")"

4 3 Character
following "<"
> Missing parenthesis

4 Character < Missing parenthesis

5 5
preceding ">"
Character ] Missing parenthesis
following "["

6 6 Character
preceding "]"
[ Missing parenthesis

7 Program name No character between "<" and ">" Incorrect format

7
Identified as an error based on number of digits

8 Table 4.3.1.1 (b) Input Check 2

No. Target Identified as an error when Operation warning message
the input value exceeds the
A1 following digits
8 The first The numerical value following Exceeding eight digits.
character in the "N" is nine digits or more
A2 key input buffer is
"N"
9 Numerical value (When a maximum of four (When a maximum of four
Z following "O" digits is set) digits is set)
The numerical value is five Exceeding four digits.
digits or more (When a maximum of eight
(When a maximum of eight digits is set)
digits is set) Exceeding eight digits.
The numerical value is nine
digits or more

142
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

Identified as an error when the following is included

Table 4.3.1.1 (c) Input Check 3
No. Target Identified as an error when Operation warning message
the character is included
10 All target % A prohibited character is 1
characters included.
11 Within a (, ), ;, !, %, \, ^, `, {, |, }, ~ A prohibited character is
comment included. 2
12 Other than a !, ", $, ', \, ~, ^, `, {, |, } A prohibited character is
comment included.
13 The first Any character other than the A prohibited character is
2
character in a following: included.
word A to Z, a to z, ;, #, /, =, *, +, -, [,
(except for < 4
comments)
14 Numerical value Any character other than the A prohibited character is
following "N" following: included. 5
#, ?, 0 to 9
The character following the
numerical value after N is N or 6
n.
15 Between "<" and <, > A prohibited character is
">" included. 7
16 Any character other than the A prohibited character is
following: included.
(CPD(No.3233#4)=0) 8
A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, -, +, _, .
(CPD(No.3233#4)=1)
A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, -, +, _, ., / A1
17 Consists of only "O" and A prohibited character is
numbers included.
+, - A2
18 Between [ and ] ; A prohibited character is
included.
Z
• Nesting of comments will be identified as an error due to the following
reason.
During execution, the text following the first ")" will not be regarded
! as a comment but will be executed as a normal NC statement.
CAUTION (Example)
In the following comment, "X100." will be executed as an NC
statement.
((X POSITION)X100.)

143
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

Identified as an error based on character count restriction

Table 4.3.1.1 (d) Excess Character Check
No. Condition Operation warning message
1 If the number of characters in a single More than 200 characters are used.
1 block exceeds the maximum allowed
count when you attempt to edit

2 Identified as an error based on memory size restriction

Table 4.3.1.1 (e) Excess Memory Size Check
3 No. Condition Operation warning message
1 If the program memory size is exceeded Program memory is full.

4 when you attempt to edit

4.3.1.2 Change
5 The single word/single block you select with the cursor will be changed to the
4.3.1.2

characters you enter in the key input buffer.

Operation will vary depending on the target to be changed.
6
 Changing the address numerical value only (including signs and "?")
When the word selected with the cursor is one of the following, only the numerical
7 value (including signs and "?") will be changed.
Table 4.3.1.2 (a) Target Words
8 No. Word type
1 "A" to "N" + numerical value, "P" to "Z" + numerical value

A1 2
3
"=" + numerical value
"#" + numerical value
4 "=" + #numerical value
A2 5 Extended axis name (alphabet) + numerical value
6 Extended axis name (alphanumeric) = + numerical value

Z
The following characters can be changed.
Table 4.3.1.2 (b) Characters that can be Changed
No. Character type
1 Numerical values (0 to 9)
2 Signs used with numerical values (".", "+", "-")
3 '?'

144
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

<1> Select the word to be changed with the cursor.

<2> Enter the numerical value in the key input buffer.
<3> Press <ALTER>.
An error check is performed. If no error is found, the word or block will be
changed and the cursor will be moved to the last word. 1

 • If an error is found, nothing will be changed, and the cursor will not 2
move.
MEMO

2
 To change a single word/single block
The single word/single block you select with the cursor will be changed to the
single word/single block/multiple words/multiple blocks you enter in the key input 4
buffer.
<1> Select the word or block to be changed with the cursor. 5
<2> Enter a word or block in the key input buffer.
<3> Press <ALTER>.
An error check is performed. If no error is found, the word or block will be
6
changed and the cursor will be moved to the last word.
7
 • If an error is found, nothing will be changed, and the cursor will not
MEMO
move.
8
 Changing the program name/number to a different program number A1
The program name/number you select with the cursor will be changed to the
program number you enter in the key input buffer.
<1> Select the program name/number to be changed with the cursor. A2
<2> Enter the program number in the key input buffer.
<3> Press <ALTER>. Z
An error check is performed. If no error is found, the selected program name/
number will be changed (at the cursor position) to the entered program number.

 • If an error is found, nothing will be changed, and the cursor will not
move.
MEMO

145
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

 Error check
A check is performed for the characters that you entered in the key input buffer
area. Possible causes of error are as follows:

1  • For details on input check or error check on character count restriction

and memory count restriction, see "Error check" in "4.3.1.1 Insert".
MEMO

2
Input Check

3 Table 4.3.1.2 (c) Input Check

No. Target Identified as an error when Operation warning
the character is included message
4 1 Changing the Any character other than the A prohibited character is
address numerical following: included.
value only (including 0 to 9, ., +, -, ?
5 signs and "?")
2 Changing the Any character other than "O + Program name cannot be
program name/ numerical value" changed.
6 number to a different
program number

7 Changed position check

Table 4.3.1.2 (d) Cursor Position Check
8 No. Condition Operation warning message
1 When you attempt to change a range that Program name cannot be changed.

A1 contains a program name/number

(while a range that contains the program
name/number is selected with the cursor)

A2 2 When you attempt to change EOR

(cursor position is at EOR)
% cannot be changed.

3 When you attempt to change a range % cannot be changed.

Z containing EOR
(while a range that contains EOR is
selected with the cursor)

Protection check when changing the program name/number

Table 4.3.1.2 (e) Protection Check during Change
No. Condition Operation warning message
1 Program number after change operation Protected
is protected
2 Program already exists The program name already exists.

146
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

4.3.1.3 Delete
The single word/single block you select with the cursor will be deleted.
4.3.1.3

<1> Select the single word/single block to be deleted with the cursor.
<2> Do not enter anything in the key input buffer and press <DELETE>. 1
An error check is performed. If no error is found, the selected section is
deleted, and the cursor will be moved to the next word/block.
2
 • If an error is found, nothing will be deleted, and the cursor will not
move. 2
MEMO

 Error check
4
A check is performed for the delete target you select. Possible causes of error are
as follows:
5
Table 4.3.1.3 Delete Target Check
No.
1
Condition
When you attempt to delete the program
Operation warning message
Program name cannot be deleted.
6
name/number
(cursor position is at the program name/
number)
7
2 When you select and attempt to delete a Program name cannot be deleted.
section that contains a program name/
number
8
(while a range that contains the program
name/number is selected with the cursor)
3 When you attempt to delete EOR % cannot be deleted.
A1
(cursor position is at EOR)
4 When you select and attempt to delete a
section that contains EOR
% cannot be deleted.
A2
(while a range that contains EOR is
selected with the cursor)
Z
4.3.2 Copy, Cut, Delete, and Paste
4.3.2

You can copy, cut, delete, and paste a string in the program.
You can switch the range selection of strings in a program between the per-block
basis and per-word basis.

 Enabling per-word base range selection

When the program edit method is word edit, you can set in the setting slide
whether to use per-word base range selection only or switch range selection
between per-block basis and per-word basis.

147
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

 • Any changes you make to the settings will be reflected the next time
the program edit screen displays.
MEMO

1
<1> Press the Setting Slide soft key.

2 The setting slide appears.

<2> Press [Program] in [Group] and then press [Select Range of Word Edit (Block/
Word)] in [Category].
3 The Select Range of Word Edit (Block/Word) window appears.

4
5
6
7
8
A1 <3> Select [Switch between word and block].

A2
Z

148
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

If the edit method is word edit, you can select one of the following
options from [Cursor Position after Range Selection when Fixing
Block Unit] as the cursor position after copying and when canceling
 range selection:
1
MEMO • Block where range selection started (Range Selection Start
Position)
• Block that was last selected in range selection (Range Selection
End Position) 2

<4> Press the [Close] soft key. 2

4.3.2.1 Select Range
Select the range of a string you want to copy, cut, or delete. 4
You can first select the range and then specify the operation (copy, cut, or delete),
or vice versa. This example shows the procedure to select the range first.
In word edit, you can use the search function to specify the end position of range 5
selection.
<1> Move the cursor to the selection start position.
6
<2> Press the [Select Range] soft key.
The soft keys that can be used during range selection appear.
7
8
<3> To switch the range selection basis, press the [Word -> Block] or [Block ->
Word] soft key.
The range selection basis (per-word basis or per-block basis) changes. A1
A2
• The [Word -> Block] soft key changes from per-word basis to per-
block basis and selects an entire block where the cursor is
Z
 positioned.
• The [Block -> Word] soft key changes from per-block basis to per-
MEMO
word basis and selects the first word of a block where the cursor is
positioned.

149
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

<4> Move the cursor to the selection end position.

The cursor moves with the range selected on per-word or per-block basis.

Example of range selection on per-block basis

1
2
3 Example of range selection on per-word basis

4
5
6 • You can specify the end position of range selection by moving the
cursor or quickly search for it with the following four soft keys:
[Rewind]: Selects the range from the start position to the
7 beginning of the program.
[End Search]: Selects the range from the start position to the last
block (EOR).
8 [Search Up]: Searches for the string specified in the key input
buffer area toward the beginning and selects only the text found
from the start position in a range.
A1 [Search Down]: Searches for the string specified in the key input
buffer area toward the end and selects only the text found from
the start position in a range.

A2 • For details on search operations, see "4.2.6 Searching Strings".

 • During per-word base selection, you can change the range with the
following MDI keys:
MEMO <←> <→>: Moves one word to the left/right. If this is used at the
Z start/end of the block, the selection moves the upper/lower block.
<↑> <↓>: Moves to a position having the same number of words
in the upper/lower block.
<HOME>: Moves to the first word of the same block.
<END>: Moves to the last word (EOB) of the same block.
<PAGE DOWN> <PAGE UP>: Moves to the previous/following
display page.
• If the edit method is word edit and the selection basis is per-block
only, you can select the cursor position after copying and when
canceling range selection on the Select Range of Word Edit (Block/
Word) window.
For details on the setting, see " Enabling per-word base range
selection".

150
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

Then, when you press the [Copy], [Cut], or [Delete] soft key, the corresponding
operation is performed.
For details on copying, cutting, and deleting, see "4.3.2.2 Copy", "4.3.2.3 Cut",
and "4.3.2.4 Delete", respectively.

4.3.2.2
4.3.2.1
Copy 1
If the edit method is word edit, you can select one of the following
options from [Cursor Position after Range Selection when Fixing Block
2
 Unit] as the cursor position after copying and when canceling range
selection:
2
MEMO • Block where range selection started (Range Selection Start Position)
• Block that was last selected in range selection (Range Selection End
Position)
4
You can copy a string in a program on per-word or per-block basis.
5
<1> Move the cursor to the selection start position.
<2> Press the [Copy] soft key.
The string selection range change and search soft keys appear.
6
7
<3> Specify the selection end position.
Specify the end position of range selection by moving the cursor or quickly
8
search for it with the soft keys:
You can also select per-word basis or per-block basis for the range selection
basis.
A1
For details, see steps <3> and <4> in "4.3.2.1 Select Range".
A2

<4> Press the [OK] soft key or <INPUT>. Z

The string in the selected range is copied to the clipboard.

• In word edit, per-character basis is not available.

• You cannot copy a string exceeding the clipboard size (The clipboard
is common to all the paths).

 • When a program name/number or EOR is contained in the range to be

copied, an operation warning will be displayed in the message area,
MEMO and copy operation will not be performed.
• To cancel the copy operation, press the [Cancel] soft key.
• You can first select the range and then copy. For details, see "4.3.2.1
Select Range".

151
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

4.3.2.3 Cut
You can cut a string in a program on per-word or per-block basis.
4.3.2.2

<1> Move the cursor to the selection start position.

<2> Press the [Cut] soft key.
1 The string selection range change and search soft keys appear.

2
<3> Specify the selection end position.
3 Specify the end position of range selection by moving the cursor or quickly
search for it with the soft keys:

4 You can also select per-word basis or per-block basis for the range selection
basis.
For details, see steps <3> and <4> in "4.3.2.1 Select Range".

5
6 <4> Press the [OK] soft key or <INPUT>.
The string in the selected range is copied to the clipboard, and the selected
string in the program is deleted.
7
• In word edit, per-character basis is not available.
8 • You cannot cut a string exceeding the clipboard size (The clipboard is
common to all the paths).

 • When a program name/number or EOR is contained in the range to be

A1 MEMO
cut, an operation warning will be displayed in the message area, and
cut operation will not be performed.
• To cancel the cut operation, press the [Cancel] soft key.
• You can first select the range and then cut. For details, see "4.3.2.1
A2 Select Range".

Z 4.3.2.4 Delete
You can delete a string in a program on per-word or per-block basis.
4.3.2.3

<1> Move the cursor to the selection start position.

<2> Press the [Delete] soft key.
The string selection range change and search soft keys appear.

<3> Specify the selection end position.

Specify the end position of range selection by moving the cursor or quickly
search for it with the soft keys:

152
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

You can also select per-word basis or per-block basis for the range selection
basis.
For details, see steps <3> and <4> in "4.3.2.1 Select Range".

1
<4> Press the [OK] soft key or <INPUT>.
The string in the selected range is deleted. 2
The cursor moves to the word or block following the selection end position.

• In word edit, per-character basis is not available. 2

• When a program name/number or EOR is contained in the range to be

 deleted, an operation warning will be displayed in the message area,

and delete operation will not be performed. 4
MEMO • To cancel the delete operation, press the [Cancel] soft key.
• You can first select the range and then delete.
For details, see "4.3.2.1 Select Range". 5
4.3.2.5 Paste 6
Paste the per-word or per-block base string copied by the copy or cut operation.
4.3.2.4

<1> Move the cursor to the paste position.

7
<2> Press the [Paste] soft key.
The copied or cut string is pasted at the cursor position. 8
A1

4.3.3 Undo and Redo

A2
4.3.3

You can undo the program edit operation. You can also redo the program edit
operation that you have just canceled with undo. Z
Undo and redo are supported for the following operations.
Table 4.3.3 Supported Operations
Operation Undo operation Redo operation
Insert (<INPUT>, <INSERT>) (*1) ○ -
Change (<ALTER>) ○ -
Delete (<DELETE>) ○ -
Copy - -
Cut ○ -
Delete (delete selected range) ○ -

153
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

Operation Undo operation Redo operation

Paste ○ -
Creating new programs - -
Program search - -
1 Move program cursor - -
String search - -

2 Rewind
End search
-
-
-
-
Rewind with RESET - -
3 Undo - ○
Redo ○ -

4 Change text size

Insert cycle from the cycle input window
-
○
-
-
Change cycle from the cycle input window ○ -
5 Insert cycle time ○ -
Replace ○ -

6 Replace All
Cutting Condition Calculation
○
○
×
×
Insert Fixed Sentence ○ ×
7 Insert M Code ○ ×
(*1) The automatically inserted sequence number and insert operation are reset
8 due to the sequence number automatic insert function.
○: Supported/-: Not supported

4.3.3.1 Undo
A1 4.3.3.1

<1> Press the [Undo] soft key on the second page.

The most recent edit operation is canceled, and the cursor moves to the
A2 position where it was prior to that canceled edit operation.

Z
4.3.3.2 Redo
4.3.3.2

<1> Press the [Redo] soft key on the second page.

The edit operation canceled using [Undo] is performed again, and the cursor
moves to the position where it was after the edit operation was re-performed.

154
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

4.3.4 Paste Key-in

4.3.4

The contents of the range selected with the cursor in the program being edited can
be copied into the key input buffer.
Pasting key-in can be performed in the EDIT mode base screen and background
edit screen.
1
<1> Move the cursor to the contents that you want to copy into the key input buffer.
<2> Press the [Paste Key-in] soft key on the second page. 2
2
Copy the contents of the range selected with the cursor in the program edit area 4
into the key input buffer. If you perform paste key-in in the block-selected state, the
spaces used to separate words in the block will also be copied.
If there are characters already exists entered in the key input buffer, the selected 5
contents will be inserted before the cursor in the key input buffer.

You can move the cursor in the key input buffer using <←>, <→>, <↓>, and <↑>. 6
You can input characters entered with the MDI keys immediately before the
cursor. You can also delete the left of the cursor using <CAN>.
7
Strings that can be used in the key input buffer are the same as regular edit
operations. For example, you can use <ALTER> to replace the selected contents
in the program edit area with contents in the key input buffer. Use <INSERT> to
insert the contents immediately after the cursor.
8
If you press <SHIFT> and then <CAN>, you can clear the contents in the key input
buffer. A1
4.3.5
4.3.5
Insert Cycle Time A2
Cycle time (actual performance value) can be inserted as comments into the
program being edited.
Inserting cycle time can be performed in the EDIT mode base screen and Z
background edit screen.


NOTE
To use this function, cycle time stamp (option function) is required.

The cycle time is the amount of time for which the target program was operated
(actual performance value).
To insert cycle time, you must operate the target program.

155
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

<1> Operate the target program for the cycle time you want to insert.
<2> After the operation is completed, display the EDIT mode base screen.
<3> Press the [Insert Cycle Time] soft key on the third page.

1
2 Insert the cycle time as a comment in the following format after the program name
in the program being edited. Note that when a comment already exists after the

3 program name, the cycle time will be inserted as the second comment.
Also note that, when a cycle time already exists after the program name, the
inserted cycle time will overwrite the existing cycle time. If multiple cycle times

4 already exist, the inserted cycle time will overwrite the first cycle time immediately
after the program name.
Even if the cursor is not at the first block (program name block), the cycle time will

5 be inserted immediately after the program name.

After the cycle time is inserted, the cursor moves to the cycle time.

6 Format: (xxxHyyMzzS)
xxx: hours expressed in three digits. When the actual value is two or less digits, 0
will be prepended to form three digits.
yy: minutes expressed in two digits. When the actual value is one digit, 0 will be
7 prepended to form two digits.
zz: seconds expressed in two digits. When the actual value is one digit, 0 will be
prepended to form two digits.
8
When no comment exists after the program name (red string: inserted cycle time/
blue background: cursor)
A1
Insert cycle time
A2
Fig. 4.3.5 (a) Insert Cycle Time Example 1
Z When comments exist after the program name (red string: inserted cycle time/blue
background: cursor)

Insert cycle time

Fig. 4.3.5 (b) Insert Cycle Time Example 2

156
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

When cycle time is already inserted (red string: new cycle time/blue background:
cursor)

Insert cycle time

1
Fig. 4.3.5 (c) Insert Cycle Time Example 3
2
Insert cycle time 2
Fig. 4.3.5 (d) Insert Cycle Time Example 4 4
If the cycle time for the program currently selected is not recorded when you press
the [Insert Cycle Time] soft key, an operation warning will be displayed in the 5
message area, and the insert cycle time operation will not be performed.

6
4.3.6 Replace and Replace All
7
4.3.6

Search a word that includes the specified string and replace it with a specified
word.

When you press the [Replace] soft key, the Replace window is displayed. 8
A1
A A2
B Z

Fig. 4.3.6 Replace Window

157
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

Table 4.3.6 Name and Function of the Replace Window

Name Description
A String input area Enter the original string to be replaced (before
replace) and the new string to replace with (after
1 replace).
You may enter a string up to 128 characters.
If the entire string cannot be displayed within the

2 B Message area
display area, you can scroll the area vertically.
Displays operation warnings and guidance.

3
 • To cancel the replace operation, press the [Cancel] soft key.

4
MEMO

4.3.6.1 Restrictions on strings that can be specified

5 4.3.6.1

Strings that can be specified as original strings to be replaced

You can specify the following strings.
6 • Search by partial string in a word
Specify a portion of a word or the entire word.

7 • Search by multiple words

Specify multiple words by placing a single space between words.
* You may only enter one space between words.
8 • Search by multiple words containing EOB (;)

Strings that can be specified as new strings to replace with

A1 You can specify the following strings.
• Replace a string in a word
A2 Specify one word or a value except address.
• Replace multiple words

Z Specify multiple words.

* Space between words is not required.
• Replace multiple words containing EOB (;)

Strings to be replaced when the [Replace] soft key is pressed

When you press the [Replace] soft key, the Replace window appears with the
following contents entered as the string to be replaced.
• For word-selected state, the selected word is displayed as the string to be
replaced.
• For block-selected state or when the following string is selected with the cursor,
the string to be replaced will not be displayed; the field will be empty.
• A string of "O" + program number

158
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

• A string containing "%" (EOR)

• A string containing 129 characters or more

4.3.6.2 Replace operation

1
4.3.6.2

<1> Press the [Replace] soft key on the third page.

The Replace window appears.

2
<2> Enter the original string to be replaced. 2
4

<3> Press <INPUT>. 5

The original string to be replaced will be confirmed.
<4> Enter the new string to replace with. 6

 • If an error is found in the input of the original string to be replaced/new

string to replace with, a message will appear in the message display
7
MEMO area.

8
<5> Press <INPUT>.
The new string to replace with will be confirmed. A1
<6> Press the [Search Down] or [Search Up] soft key.

A2
The search starts, and if the searched string is found, the block that contains
that string will be displayed as the first block in the edit area, and the cursor will
Z
move.

• When the searched string cannot be found, "Searched string not

found." is displayed in the message area and the cursor will not be
 moved.
• After you enter the original string to be replaced, if you press the
MEMO
[Search Up] or [Search Down] soft key without pressing <INPUT>,
search is performed with the last string you entered.

159
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

<7> Press the [Replace] or [Replace All] soft key.

When you press the [Replace] soft key
The word at the cursor position will be replaced with the new string.
When you press the [Replace All] soft key

1 The Replace All Confirmation window appears. If you press the [Yes] soft key,
all words identical to the word at the cursor position will be replaced with the
new string.

2
3
4
5
6
7
8 • If you do not press <INPUT> and use the following operations to
switch between items to be entered, the string that is being entered
will be discarded, and the string that was last confirmed will be

A1 displayed. If no string has been confirmed, the display will be blank.

<↑>
<↓>

A2  Tapping the input box after replace.

• After you enter the original string to be replaced or the new string to
MEMO replace with, if you perform the replace operation without pressing
<INPUT>, the entered string will be confirmed, and the replace
Z operation will be performed.
• To change the original string to be replaced or the new string to
replace with, change the input target with <↑> or <↓>, enter the string,
and press <INPUT>.
• To cancel the search or replace operation, press the [Abort] soft key.

 Behavior of replace operation

The following shows patterns and examples where you can perform replace. The
behavior of the replace operation is the same as the change operation performed
with <ALTER>.

160
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

Table 4.3.6.2 Replace Patterns and Examples

Replace patterns Original New Word at cursor Replace
string to string to position results
be replace

Original string before replace: X10.

replaced with
Z20. X10. Z20.
1
entire word
New string to replace with:
arbitrary 2
Original string before replace: X1 Z20. X10. Z20.
portion of a word
New string to replace with: 2
arbitrary
Original string before replace: G0 X10.
multiple words
G1 Z20. G0 G1 Z20.
X10. 4
New string to replace with:
arbitrary
Original string before replace: X10. X20. Z30. X10. X20. Z30. 5
arbitrary
New string to replace with:
multiple words 6
Original string before replace: COMMEN Z20. (COMMENT) Z20.
string within comment T
New string to replace with: 7
arbitrary
Original string before replace: ; Z20.; ; Z20.;
EOB 8
New string to replace with:
arbitrary
Original string before replace: X10. 20 X10. X20. A1
arbitrary
New string to replace with:
value A2

4.3.7 Program Character Edit Z

4.3.7

In the EDIT mode base screen or background edit screen, you can recognize
characters in a program and edit the program in units of one character.
In program character edit, characters input without using the key input buffer are
written directly to the program
You can switch program edit between word-selected state and character-selected
state in the program editing method slide.
For details on the program edit method setting, see "4.2.2.5 Changing the
program edit method setting".

In program character edit, you can perform the following edit operations like word
edit:
• Creating new programs

161
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

• Program search
• String search
• Rewind and end search
• Rewind with reset
1 • Program edit restrictions when automatic operation is stopped
• Insert/change/delete
2 • Copy/cut/delete/paste
• Undo/redo
3 • Insert cycle time
• Replace and replace all
4 • Multi-edit
• Multi-path edit
5 • Insert cycle
• Change cycle

6 • Insert fixed sentence

• Insert M code

7 • Cutting condition calculation function

• Line number search

8 • Program character edit is not available in the MDI mode base screen.
• In program character edit, the key input buffer is hidden.
A1 The following operations, which use the key input buffer for word edit,
cannot execute program character edit:

 Create a new program by typing an O number (program name) in

A2 MEMO
the key input buffer and pressing <INPUT>
Search for a program by typing an O number (program name) in the
key input buffer and pressing the [Search Program] soft key
Search by typing a string in the key input buffer and pressing the
Z [Search Up] or [Search Down] soft key
• Program character edit does not support the paste key-in function.

4.3.7.1 Screen displayed during program character edit

The screen displayed during program character edit contains the following
4.3.7.1

information:

162
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

1
B 2
2
C 4

Fig. 4.3.7.1 Program Character Edit

5

Table 4.3.7.1 Names and Functions on Program Character Edit 6

Name Description
A Program path display area Displays the path and name of the selected 7
program.
B Program display/edit area Displays the contents of the selected program.
C Message area Displays operation warnings and guidance. 8
4.3.7.2
4.3.7.2
Program display/edit area
The program display/edit area for program character edit displays the program
A1
and a cursor that indicates the edit unit.
There are two types of cursor states: character-selected state and block-selected
state.
A2
Z

Fig. 4.3.7.2 (a) Program display/edit area

163
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

Program display
In a program during character edit, words are separated each by a space.
If one block does not fit in one line and spans multiple lines, word break is applied.

Display when one block does not fit in one line and spans multiple lines
1
Fig. 4.3.7.2 (b) Word break
2
3 Fig. 4.3.7.2 (c) Word wrap during word edit

4 Selecting a block means that it selects a range including a character on which the
cursor is positioned.

Edited block display

5 An edited block shows an underline that indicates the edited area.
While an underline is shown, it means that the edit is not yet saved.
After the edit is saved, the underline disappears.
6
Cursor display
There are two input mode for program edit: Insert mode and overwrite mode.
7 The cursor display varies depending on the input mode.

8 Table 4.3.7.2 Cursor Display by Mode

Mode Target area Cursor display

A1 Area to be edited

The cursor flashes.

Insert mode
Area not to be
A2 edited
The cursor lights up.
Area to be edited
Z One character is displayed in dark blue (same color as
Overwrite for word edit).
mode Area not to be
edited
One character is displayed in light blue (same color as
for word edit).

Scrolling programs
You can perform the following operations to scroll programs similarly to word edit.
Even if the entire span of one block cannot be displayed in the edit area, it moves
on to the next block like word edit.

164
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

• MDI keys
<↑>/<↓>/<←>/<→>
<PAGE UP>/<PAGE DOWN>
• Soft keys
[Search Up]/[Search Down]
[Replace]
1
[Rewind]
[End Search]
2
Program guidance message
An unedited block shows the program guidance message of a word on which the
cursor is positioned. 2
When the cursor is placed on a block being edited (block showing an underline),
no program guidance message is displayed. After the edit is confirmed, a program
guidance message is displayed. 4
If the cursor is placed on a space between words, a program guidance message is
not displayed.
5
Color display
An unedited block is displayed in a color.
A block being edited (block showing an underline) is not displayed in a color. After 6
the edit is confirmed, the block is colored.

Line number display 7

Line numbers are shown/hidden every time you press the [Display Line Number]
soft key.
8
4.3.7.3 Editing programs
Character edit can be performed in units of one character. In character edit,
4.3.7.3

characters input without using the key input buffer are written directly to the A1
program.

Block A2
An area separated by EOB (;) is treated as one block, and any edit you make to
each block is saved in character edit.
If one block contains many characters in a program, it spans multiple lines but is Z
counted as one program block.

Dividing a block
During line edit, if you press <INPUT> when the cursor is positioned in the middle
of the line, EOB (;) is inserted into the line, which is divided into two blocks: string
before the cursor and string after the cursor.
Pressing <CAN> right after dividing a block will revert to the original one block.
Alternatively, move the cursor to EOB (;) of the divided first block and then press
<DELETE> to revert to the original one block.

165
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

Merging blocks
If you delete EOB (;) of a block, the next block will be merged into the first block to
become one.

Maximum characters allowed in a single block

1 The maximum characters allowed in a single block are 200 characters.
If you enter more than 200 characters, a warning message appears, and the 201th
and subsequent characters are not entered.
2 These 200 characters include spaces in the comment but not spaces between
words.

3 Input mode for edit

There are two input mode for program edit: Insert mode and overwrite mode.
The character input behavior varies depending on the input mode.
4 • Insert mode: Inserts an input character in between the current cursor position
and the character before the position.

5 • Overwrite mode: Replaces a character on which the cursor is positioned with an

input character.
To switch the input mode, press the [Insert -> Overwrite] or [Overwrite -> Insert]
6 soft key. The default is the insert mode.
Pressing the [Insert -> Overwrite] soft key changes from the insert mode to the
overwrite mode.
7 Pressing the [Overwrite -> Insert] soft key changes from the overwrite mode to the
insert mode.

8 Edit restrictions
EOR (%) cannot be deleted.

A1 Editing a line and automatically saving it

An edited line shows an underline indicating that the line has been edited.
While an underline is shown, it means that the edit is not yet saved.
A2 If you move the cursor to before or after the line being edited, the edit is
automatically saved, and the underline disappears.
You can also press the [Fix] soft key to save the edit.
Z After the edit is saved, the screen changes to the program display like word edit.
When you save the edit, an error check is performed similarly to word edit.
If the edit has an error, a warning message appears, and the edit is not saved.

4.3.7.4 Copy, cut, delete, and paste

You can copy, cut, delete, and paste a string in the program.
You can switch the selection range of strings in a program between the per-
character basis or per-block basis.

166
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

 Copy
<1> Move the cursor to the selection start position.
<2> Press the [Copy] soft key.
The soft keys to switch the string selection appear.
1
2
<3> Press the [Character -> Block] or [Block -> Character] soft key and then the
[OK] soft key.
The string selection will switch. 2
4
<4> Move the cursor to the selection end position.
Keep the cursor in character-selected state or block-selected state while 5
moving.
<5> Press the [OK] soft key or <INPUT>.
The string in the selected range is copied to the clipboard.
6

• You cannot select words. 7

• If the string length exceeds the clipboard size, the string will not be

 copied (the clipboard is common for all paths).

• When a program name/number or EOR is contained in the range to 8
MEMO be copied, an operation warning will be displayed in the message
area, and copy operation will not be performed.
• To cancel the copy operation, press the [Cancel] soft key. A1
 Cut A2
<1> Move the cursor to the selection start position.
<2> Press the [Cut] soft key.
The soft keys to switch the string selection appear.
Z

<3> Press the [Character -> Block] or [Block -> Character] soft key and then the
[OK] soft key.
The string selection will switch.
<4> Move the cursor to the selection end position.
Keep the cursor in character-selected state or block-selected state while
moving.

167
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

<5> Press the [OK] soft key or <INPUT>.

The string in the selected range is copied to the clipboard, and the selected
string in the program is deleted.

1 • You cannot select words.

• If the string length exceeds the clipboard size, the string will not be

2  copied (the clipboard is common for all paths).

• When a program name/number or EOR is contained in the range to
MEMO be cut, an operation warning will be displayed in the message area,
and cut operation will not be performed.

3 • To cancel the cut operation, press the [Cancel] soft key.

 Delete
4 <1> Move the cursor to the selection start position.
<2> Press the [Delete] soft key.
5 The soft keys to switch the string selection appear.

6
<3> Press the [Character -> Block] or [Block -> Character] soft key and then the
7 [OK] soft key.
The string selection will switch.

8 <4> Move the cursor to the selection end position.

Keep the cursor in character-selected state or block-selected state while
moving.
A1 <5> Press the [OK] soft key or <INPUT>.
The string in the selected range is deleted, and the cursor moves to the
A2 character or block that follows the selection end position.

• You cannot select words.

Z  • When a program name/number or EOR is contained in the range to
be deleted, an operation warning will be displayed in the message
MEMO area, and delete operation will not be performed.
• To cancel the delete operation, press the [Cancel] soft key.

 Paste
The string that was copied or cut can be pasted.
<1> Move the cursor to the paste position.
<2> Press the [Paste] soft key.
The copied or cut string is pasted at the cursor position.

168
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

4.3.8 Highlighting the Program Being Edited with Speci- 1

fied Colors
4.3.8

In the program edit area, you can display comments, specific address characters, 2
and background colors for the program being edited with specified colors.
The highlight settings can be configured in the setting file.
The items can be highlighted on the following screens: 2
• EDIT Mode Base Screen
• Background edit screen 4
• MDI mode base screen (during edit)
• Program Restart Window 5
6
7
8
A1
A2

You can change the text color and background color for the following highlight
Z
target items:

Table 4.3.8 (a) List of Highlighted Items

Highlighted object
Priority
Item Different for Example
No. string
each path
1 Search String specified in string × Searching for "199"
strings search (Each edit area) with background
color: yellow

169
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

Highlighted object
Priority
Item Different for Example
No. string
each path
2 Comments String enclosed in "(" × Text color: green
1 and ")" (All paths)

3 MTB MTB specified string ○ Specifying "G01"

2 specified
strings
(string that is one word
and completely
(All paths or
individual path)
with text color: pink

matched)
* Specified for all paths
3 or an individual path
4 Data with "?" (question mark) × Text color: red
undetermine (All paths)
4 d value "?"
5 Macro (1) # and numeric part × Text color: brown
variables following # (#1, #100, (All paths)
5 etc.)
(2) Macro variable name
(#** of [#**])
6 * The macro name
specified at the macro
command SETVN block
7 6 Macro
is not to be highlighted.
Reserved word string × Text color: brown
sentences (See Table 4.3.8 (c) List (All paths)
8 of Reserved Words.)

A1
A2
Z

170
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

Highlighted object
Priority
Item Different for Example
No. string
each path
7 Axis names (1)Axis name set in ○ Text color: blue
(including
extension
parameter No. 1020 and
numeric part (word)
1
axis names) following the axis name
(2)Axis name of the
incremental command 2
UVWH (relative
coordinates) in lathe G
code system A and 2
numeric part (word)
following the axis name
(3)Axis name of the
incremental command
4
UVWH (relative
coordinates) when bit 4
(UVW) of parameter No.
5
3400 is 1 in lathe G code
system B/C and numeric
part (word) following the 6
axis name
(4)Indirect axis
command AX 7
* The index (parameter
No. 3131) is not to be
highlighted because it is
not an axis name to be
8
specified (only used to
display the current
position). A1
8 Subprogram (1)M98 ○ Text color: orange
call
commands
(2)External subprogram
call (M code specified in A2
parameter No. 6030)
M198 if it is not specified
(when it is 0) Z
(3)G72.1 (Figure copy)
(4)G72.2 (Parallel copy)
9 Macro call G65 × Text color: orange
commands (All paths)

10 G code Address G and numeric × Text color: purple

commands part following G (word) (All paths)

11 Auxiliary Address M and numeric × Text color: purple

functions part following M (word) (All paths)

171
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

Highlighted object
Priority
Item Different for Example
No. string
each path
12 Tool offset (1)Address T and ○ Text color: purple
1 commands numeric part following T
(word)
(2)Address D and

2 numeric part following D

(word)
(3)Address H and
numeric part following H
3 (word)
* Address H is to be
highlighted only for the
4 M-type (Not to be
highlighted for the T-
type).

5 13 Spindle
commands
Address S and numeric
part following S (word)
○ Text color: light
blue
(including * The index (parameter

6 extension
spindle
Nos. 3718 and 3719) is
not to be highlighted
names) because it is not an axis

7 name to be specified
(only used to display the
current position).

8 14 Feedrate
commands
Address F and numeric
part following F (word)
×
(All paths)
Text color: light
blue

A1 15 Second Address set in ○ Text color: purple

auxiliary parameter No. 3460 and
functions numeric part (word)
A2 following the address
16 Sequence Address B if this × Text color: green
No. parameter is not set (All paths)
Z (when it is 0)
Address N and numeric
part following N (word)

• To highlight the following items, the custom macro function option is

required:
Macro variables
 Macro sentences
Macro call commands
MEMO
Indirect axis command AX (axis name)
• To highlight the second auxiliary functions, the second auxiliary
function option is required.

172
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

If the Different for each path field in "Table 4.3.8 (a) List of Highlighted Items"
shows "○", the following policies are applied to the target item:
Table 4.3.8 (b) Policies to Be Applied When the Different for Each Path Field for
Highlight Shows "○"
Item Policy 1
Edit area in the single-edit or multi- Displayed with the specified colors according to the
edit main program path select signal.
Multi-path edit Displayed with the specified colors according to the 2
path corresponding to the edit area.
Edit area in a program other than
the single-edit or multi-edit main
• When the program path is not an individual path
folder 2
program (//CNC_MEM/USER/PATHn)
Displayed with the specified colors according to
PATHn. 4
• When the program path is not an individual path
folder, the target items are not highlighted.
However, the following strings are displayed with
each color specified for the corresponding item:
5
M98, G72.1, and G72.2 in subprogram call
commands
Addresses T and D in tool offset commands
6
The following reserved words are to be highlighted in No. 6 macro sentences.
7
Table 4.3.8 (c) List of Reserved Words
Category Reserved word 8
Function ABS ACOS ADP ASIN ATAN ATN AXNUM BCD BIN
(PEWK_F_FUNC) COS EXP FIX FUP LN POW PRM RND ROUND
SIN SQRT TAN USR
A1
Statement BPRNT CALL CLOSE DFA DO DPRNT ELSE END ENDIF
(PEWK_F_STATEME FCLOS FDEL FGEN FOPEN FPSET FREAD FWRIT GOTO IF
NT)
A2
OPEN PCLOS POPEN READ SCRN SETVN THEN WHILE WRITE
ZDO ZEDGE ZEND ZONCE ZWHILE
Operator AND EQ GE GT LE LT MOD NE OR
Z
(PEWK_F_MCR_OP) XOR

173
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

• The reserved words are not highlighted in string search across blocks.
• One word after a comma "," is not highlighted.
• If the extension axis name or extension spindle name contains = in a

1 command, the numeric part (= word) is not highlighted.

• If an address used as different meaning for an argument in a G code

2

NOTE
command matches the highlight target string in Table 4.3.8 (a) List of
Highlighted Items, it is displayed with the color specified for the
corresponding item. (Example: Argument in a Gxxxx cycle)
• Even if the custom macro function option is disabled, # and the
numeric part following # (only #, #100, etc.) are displayed with the
3 color specified in the macro variable. (The macro variable name (#**
of [#**]) and the variable name specified at the macro command
SETVN block are not highlighted.)

4
 Priorities for highlighting items
5 If there is a duplicate highlight target item, it is displayed with the specified color
according to the priorities.
The priorities are in descending order from No. 1 (highest) to No. 16 (lowest) in
6 Table 4.3.8 (a) List of Highlighted Items.
The following table shows examples when there is a duplicate highlight target
item:
7
Table 4.3.8 (d) Examples When There Is a Duplicate Highlight Target Item

8 When the numeric part of the axis name contains a search string
Searching for Searching Searching for Searching for "COS"
"12" for "?" "#10"

A1 Before
search
After
A2 search
When the numeric part of the axis name contains "?"

Z
When the numeric part of the axis name contains a macro variable

When the numeric part of the axis name contains a macro sentence

 Special highlight conditions

When highlighting an item with a higher priority is disabled and highlighting an
item with a lower priority is enabled, an item is displayed with the color based on

174
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

the enabled highlight setting (lower priority), excepting for some special conditions
("●" shown in the table below).

Table 4.3.8 (e) Specify Highlight Conditions

No. Combination 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1
1 Search strings - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2
3
Comments
MTB specified
○
○
-
●
●
-
●
○
●
○
●
○
●
○
●
○
●
○
●
○
●
○
●
○
●
○
●
○
●
○
●
○
2
strings
4 Data with
undetermined value
○ ● ○ - ○ × ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2
"?"
5 Macro variables ○ ● ○ ○ - × ○ × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4
6 Macro sentences ○ ● ○ × × - × × × × × × × × × ×
7 Axis name ○ ● ○ ○ ○ × - × × × × × × ● ×
8 Subprogram calls ○ ● ○ × × × × - × × × × × × × 5
9 Macro calls ○ ● ○ × × × × × - × × × × × ×
10 G code ○ ● ○ ○ ○ × × ○ ○ - × × × × × ×
6
11 Auxiliary functions ○ ● ○ ○ ○ × × ○ × × - × × × × ×
12 Tool offsets ○ ● ○ ○ ○ × ○ × × × × - × × × ×
13 Spindle name ○ ● ○ ○ ○ × × × × × × × - × × × 7
14 Feedrate ○ ● ○ ○ ○ × × × × × × × × - × ×
15 Second auxiliary
functions
○ ● ○ ○ ○ × ● × × × × × × × - ×
8
16 Sequence No. ○ ● ○ ○ ○ × × × × × × × × × × -

○: Duplicated (in accordance of priorities) A1

●: Duplicated (special condition)
×: Not duplicated
A2
Special condition 1
Combination of comments and other items (Example: When "?" exists in the
comment) Z
• Highlighting comments is disabled.
• Highlighting data with determined value "?" is enabled.
• "?" exists in the comment.
Even if a character with a lower priority (No. 3 to No. 16) than comments is found
in the comment, it is not highlighted.

175
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

Special condition 2
Combination of axis names and second auxiliary functions (Example: When the
second auxiliary function address is B)
• Highlighting axis names is disabled.

1 • Highlighting second auxiliary functions is enabled.

• There is B axis in the configuration.

2 If B axis exists, the second auxiliary functions are not highlighted because B is
treated as the axis name.

3
4
You can specify which second auxiliary function address to use, A, B, C, U, V, or
5 W, in parameter No. 3460.
If the axis name is duplicated to an address other than B, the same policy is
applied.
6
 Highlighting a search string

7 In string search, you can display only text that matches the search string with the
specified color for the program displayed on the screen.
String search only for a space displays spaces between words and comments with
8 the specified color.

Highlighting a search string shows the search results in the direction from the start
A1 to the end of the program displayed on the screen with the specified color
regardless of the search direction.
Example: Searching for "00" in the upper direction

A2
Z
Even in upper-direction search, search results in the direction from the start to the
end of the program are displayed with the specified color.

The searched string is unhighlighted at the following timings:

• The system is turned off.
• The edit area is closed (the closed edit area is highlighted).
• The text no longer matches the searched string after edit operation (the target
text is highlighted).

176
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

 Highlighting the range selected with the cursor

The text color and background color in an area selected with the cursor are
displayed with the text color and background color of the cursor.

1
2
 Highlighting []
[] specified in macro variables, macro sentences, and address numeric parts are
not highlighted. 2
Macro variables
4
5
Macro sentences 6
7
Address + numerical value (Example: Axis name)
8
A1
A2
4.3.9 Cutting Condition Calculation Function
Z
4.3.9

You can calculate the recommended cutting condition by selecting the tool or
workpiece material.

177
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

1
2
3
4
5 Fig. 4.3.9 Cutting Condition Calculation Screen

6 Table 4.3.9 Name and Function of the Cutting Condition Calculation Screen
Name Description

7 A Program tile
B Cutting condition
Displays the contents of the selected program.
Calculates the cutting conditions.
calculation tile

8 4.3.9.1 Calculating the cutting condition

Select the tool and calculation target value to calculate the cutting condition.
4.3.9.1

A1
<1> In the EDIT mode base screen or background edit screen (MEM mode base
screen), press the [Calculate Condition] soft key.
A2 The Cutting Condition Calculation screen is displayed.

Z
<2> Set the calculation conditions.
The calculation results are displayed.
Setting items are different for T-type and M-type.

For T-type
In [Calculation Target], select the calculation target item. The items available for
the input fields and calculation results will vary according to the selected
calculation target. For details, see " Cutting Condition Calculation tile for T-
type" in "4.3.9.3 Cutting condition calculation tile".

178
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

Calculation target
Input Field 1
Calculation results

2
2
4
For M-type
In [Tool] and [Calculation Target], select the calculation target tool and item.
The items available for the input fields and calculation results will vary 5
according to the selected tool and calculation target. For details, see " Cutting
Condition Calculation tile for M-type" in "4.3.9.3 Cutting condition calculation
tile". 6
Tool and 7
calculation target

Input Field 8
Calculation results

A1
A2
Z

 • For M-type, when [Estimated Spindle Output] is selected for

[Calculation Target], the setting items will vary according to the
MEMO settings made by the machine manufacturer.

4.3.9.2 Editing the program using cutting condition calculation

You can insert set values and calculation results of the cutting condition
4.3.9.2

calculation into the program. You can also replace the contents of a program with
those set values and calculation results.

179
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

Fig. 4.3.9.2 Cutting Condition Calculation Screen Soft Keys

1
Table 4.3.9.2 Description of the Soft Keys

2 Name Description
Switches the tile being edited.

3
[Select Target]
Inserts the displayed pitch (P) value into the program tile cursor
4 position in the format "F***".

[Insert P] (*1)
5 Replaces the displayed pitch (P) value into the program tile cursor
position in the format "F***".

6 [Replace P] (*1)
Inserts the displayed feedrate (F) value into the program tile cursor
position in the format "F***".
7
[Insert F] (*2)
Replaces the displayed feedrate (F) value into the program tile
8 cursor position in the format "F***".

[Replace F] (*2)
A1 Inserts the displayed spindle speed (S) value into the program tile
cursor position in the format "S***".

A2 [Insert S] (*3)
Replaces the displayed spindle speed (S) value into the program
tile cursor position in the format "S***".
Z
[Replace S] (*3)
(*1)Applies only when [Pitch] (P) is displayed on the Cutting Condition Calculation
screen.
(*2)Applies only when [Speed] (F) is displayed on the Cutting Condition Calculation
screen.
(*3)Applies only when [Spindle Speed] (S) is displayed on the Cutting Condition Calcu-
lation screen.

4.3.9.3 Cutting condition calculation tile

Items displayed on the Cutting Condition Calculation tile are different for T-type
4.3.9.3

and M-type.

180
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

 Cutting Condition Calculation tile for T-type

A
1
B
C 2
2
4

Fig. 4.3.9.3 (a) Cutting Condition Calculation Tile (T-type) 5

Table 4.3.9.3 (a) Cutting Condition Calculation For T-type 6

A B C Formula used
Calculation target Input Field Calculation results
(non-editable)
7
Feedrate [mm/min] fn: Feed per Rotation F: Feedrate [mm/ F = fn*S
[mm]
S: Spindle Speed
min] 8
[min-1]
Spindle Speed [min- F: Feedrate [mm/ S: Spindle Speed S = F/fn A1
1] min] [min-1]
(Feedrate [mm/min]) fn: Feed per Rotation
[mm]
A2
Spindle Speed [min- Vc: Cutting Speed S: Spindle Speed S = (1000*Vc)/(π*D)
1] [m/min] [min-1] (*1)
(Cutting Speed [m/
min])
D: Workpiece
Diameter [mm]
Z
Cutting Speed [m/ D: Reference Work Vc: Cutting Speed Vc = (π*D*S)/1000
min] Diameter [mm] [m/min]
S: Spindle Speed
[min-1]
Feed per Rotation F: Feedrate [mm/ fn: Feed per Rotation fn = F/S
[mm] min] [mm]
S: Spindle Speed
[min-1]
(*1)Number of significant figures for the circumference ratio (π)

181
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

 Cutting Condition Calculation tile for M-type

1 B
C

2 D

3
4
5 Fig. 4.3.9.3 (b) Cutting Condition Calculation Tile (M-type)

6 Table 4.3.9.3 (b) Cutting Condition Calculation For M-type

A B C D Formula used
7 Tool Change Calculation Input Field Calculation
target results
(non-editable)
8 Drill Feedrate [mm/ fn: Feed per F: Feedrate F = fn*S
min] Rotation [mm] [mm/min]
S: Spindle
A1 Speed [min-1]
Drill Spindle Speed F: Feedrate S: Spindle S = F/fn
[min-1] [mm/min] Speed [min-1]
A2 (Feedrate [mm/
min])
fn: Feed per
Rotation [mm]
Drill Spindle Speed Vc: Cutting S: Spindle S = (1000*Vc)/
Z [min-1]
(Cutting Speed
Speed [m/min]
D: Workpiece
Speed [min-1] (π*D)
(*1)
[m/min]) Diameter [mm]
Drill Cutting Speed D: Workpiece Vc: Cutting Vc = (π*D*S)/
[m/min] Diameter [mm] Speed [m/min] 1000
S: Spindle
Speed [min-1]
Drill Feed per F: Feedrate fn: Feed per fn = F/S
Rotation [mm] [mm/min] Rotation [mm]
S: Spindle
Speed [min-1]
Drill (*2) Estimated - - -
Spindle Output

182
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

A B C D Formula used
Tool Change Calculation Input Field Calculation
target results
(non-editable)
Face Mill
End Mill
Feedrate [mm/
min]
fn: Feed per
Rotation [mm]
F: Feedrate
[mm/min]
F = fn*S*z
1
S: Spindle
Speed [min-1]
z: Flutes 2
Face Mill Spindle Speed F: Feedrate S: Spindle S = F/(fn*z)
End Mill [min-1]
(Feedrate [mm/
[mm/min]
fn: Feed per
Speed [min-1]
2
min]) Rotation [mm]
z: Flutes
Face Mill Spindle Speed Vc: Cutting S: Spindle S = (1000*Vc)/ 4
End Mill [min-1] Speed [m/min] Speed [min-1] (π*D)
(Cutting Speed D: Workpiece (*1)
[m/min]) Diameter [mm] 5
Face Mill Cutting Speed D: Workpiece Vc: Cutting Vc = (π*D*S)/
End Mill [m/min] Diameter [mm] Speed [m/min] 1000
S: Spindle 6
Speed [min-1]
Face Mill Feed per Tool F: Feedrate fn: Feed per fn = F/(S*z)
End Mill [mm] [mm/min] Tool [mm] 7
S: Spindle
Speed [min-1]
z: Flutes 8
Face Mill Estimated - - -
End Mill (*2) Spindle Output
Tap Feedrate [mm/ S: Spindle F: Feedrate F = S*P A1
(Metric Thread, min] Speed [min-1] [mm/min]
in mm) (*3) P: Pitch [mm]
Tap Spindle Speed F: Feedrate S: Spindle S = F/P A2
(Metric Thread, [min-1] [mm/min] Speed [min-1]
in mm) (*3) (Feedrate [mm/ P: Pitch [mm]
min]) Z
Tap Spindle Speed Vc: Cutting S: Spindle S = (1000*Vc)/
(Metric Thread, [min-1] Speed [m/min] Speed [min-1] (π*D)
in mm) (*3) (Cutting Speed D: Workpiece (*1)
[m/min]) Diameter [mm]
Tap Cutting Speed D: Workpiece Vc: Cutting Vc = (π*D*S)/
(Metric Thread, [m/min] Diameter [mm] Speed [m/min] 1000
in mm) (*3) S: Spindle
Speed [min-1]
Tap Pitch [mm] n: Number of P: Pitch [mm] P = 25.4/n
(Metric Thread, (From Threads) Threads
in mm) (*3)

183
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

A B C D Formula used
Tool Change Calculation Input Field Calculation
target results
(non-editable)

1 Tap
(Metric Thread,
Estimated
Spindle Output
- - -

in mm) (*2) (*3)

2 Tap Feedrate [mm/

(Inch Thread, in min]
S: Spindle
Speed [min-1]
F: Feedrate
[mm/min]
F = S/n

mm) (*3) n: Number of

3 Tap Spindle Speed

Threads
F: Feedrate S: Spindle S = F*n
(Inch Thread, in [min-1] [mm/min] Speed [min-1]

4 mm) (*3) (Feedrate [mm/

min])
n: Number of
Threads
Tap Spindle Speed Vc: Cutting S: Spindle S = (1000*Vc)/

5 (Inch Thread, in [min-1]

mm) (*3) (Cutting Speed
Speed [m/min]
D: Workpiece
Speed [min-1] (π*D)
(*1)
[m/min]) Diameter [mm]

6 Tap Cutting Speed

(Inch Thread, in [m/min]
D: Workpiece
Diameter [mm]
Vc: Cutting
Speed [m/min]
Vc = (π*D*S)/
1000
mm) (*3) S: Spindle
Speed [min-1]
7 Tap Threads P: Pitch [mm] n: Number of n = 25.4/P
(Inch Thread, in (From Pitch Threads
mm) (*3) [mm])
8 Tap Estimated - - -
(Inch Thread, in Spindle Output
mm) (*2) (*3)
A1 Tap Feedrate [inch/ S: Spindle F: Feedrate F = S*P
(Metric Thread, min] Speed [min-1] [inch/min]

A2 in inches) (*3) P: Pitch [mm]

*Unit for pitch is
[mm] even if unit
for thread is
Z [inch].
Tap Spindle Speed F: Feedrate S: Spindle S = F/P
(Metric Thread, [min-1] [mm/min] Speed [min-1]
in inches) (*3) (Feedrate [inch/ P: Pitch [mm]
min]) *Unit for pitch is
[mm] even if unit
for thread is
[inch].
Tap Spindle Speed Vc: Cutting S: Spindle S = (12*Vc)/
(Metric Thread, [min-1] Speed [m/min] Speed [min-1] (π*D)
in inches) (*3) (Cutting Speed D: Workpiece (*1)
[feet/min]) Diameter [mm]

184
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

A B C D Formula used
Tool Change Calculation Input Field Calculation
target results
(non-editable)
Tap
(Metric Thread,
Cutting Speed
[feet/min]
D: Workpiece
Diameter [mm]
Vc: Cutting
Speed [feet/min]
Vc = (π*D*S)/12
1
in inches) (*3) S: Spindle

Tap Pitch [mm]

Speed [min-1]
n: Number of P: Pitch [mm] P = 25.4/n
2
(Metric Thread, (From Threads) Threads
in inches) (*3)
Tap Estimated - - -
2
(Metric Thread, Spindle Output
in inches) (*2)
(*3) 4
Tap Feedrate [inch/ S: Spindle F: Feedrate F = S/n
(Inch Thread, in min]
inches) (*3)
Speed [min-1]
n: Number of
[inch/min]
5
Threads
Tap Spindle Speed
(Inch Thread, in [min-1]
F: Feedrate
[mm/min]
S: Spindle
Speed [min-1]
S = F*n
6
inches) (*3) (Feedrate [inch/ n: Number of
min]) Threads
Tap Spindle Speed Vc: Cutting S: Spindle S = (12*Vc)/
7
(Inch Thread, in [min-1] Speed [m/min] Speed [min-1] (π*D)
inches) (*3) (Cutting Speed D: Workpiece (*1)
[feet/min]) Diameter [mm] 8
Tap Cutting Speed D: Workpiece Vc: Cutting Vc = (π*D*S)/12
(Inch Thread, in [feet/min] Diameter [mm] Speed [feet/min]
inches) (*3) S: Spindle A1
Speed [min-1]
Tap Threads
(Inch Thread, in (From Pitch
P: Pitch [mm] n: Number of
Threads
n = 25.4/P
A2
inches) (*3) [mm])
Tap Estimated
(Inch Thread, in Spindle Output
- - -
Z
inches) (*2) (*3)
(*1)Number of significant figures for the circumference ratio (π)
(*2)Varies according to the settings made by the machine manufacturer.
(*3)Switching between mm and inch units.

4.3.9.4 Cutting condition calculation tile when selecting estimated spindle

output
For M-type, when [Est. Spindle Output] is selected for [Calculation Target], the
4.3.9.4

setting items and available soft keys will vary according to the settings made by
the machine manufacturer.

185
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

1
2
3
4 Fig. 4.3.9.4 Cutting Condition Calculation Tile (Estimated Spindle Output)

5 Table 4.3.9.4 Item List

Name Description
6 A Calculation Target The displayed contents for B and C will be updated based on
combo box what is selected in combination with the Tool combo box.
B Workpiece material Select the material of the workpiece to be machined. The
7 combo box displayed contents for C will change according to the
selected workpiece material.
C Input/calculation results Enter the numerical values for machining. The calculation
8 fields results are displayed according to the entered numerical
values.

A1
A2
Z

186
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

Name Description
D Soft keys
Switches the tile being edited.

[Select Target] 1
Displays the Graph Compare window.

2
[Graph Compare] (*1)
Inserts the displayed feedrate (F) value into the program tile
cursor position in the format "F***".
2
[Insert F] (*2)
Replaces the displayed feedrate (F) value into the program
4
tile cursor position in the format "F***".

[Replace F] (*2)
5
Inserts the displayed spindle speed (S) value into the
program tile cursor position in the format "S***".
6
[Insert S] (*2)
Replaces the displayed spindle speed (S) value into the
program tile cursor position in the format "S***".
7
[Replace S] (*2)
(*1)Displayed when a graph exists.
8
(*2)The state of display/hide changes according to the settings made by the machine
manufacturer. A1
4.3.9.5 Graph compare window
4.3.9.5

When you press the [Graph Compare] soft key in the Cutting Condition A2
Calculation tile (estimated spindle output), the Graph Compare window is
displayed.
The Graph Compare window can be displayed only when a graph exists. Z
The display pattern of the Graph Compare window is as follows.

187
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.3 EDITING PROGRAMS

1
2
3
4
5
6 Fig. 4.3.9.5 Graph Compare Window

7 Table 4.3.9.5 Item List

Name Description
A Screen overview Displays the operation overview.
8 description
B Spindle output graph The contents set by the machine manufacturer are displayed
in a graph.
A1 The spindle output information that is calculated in the
Cutting Condition Calculation tile (estimated spindle output)
is shown with a red circle.
A2 C Torque output graph The contents set by the machine manufacturer are displayed
in a graph.
The torque output information that is calculated in the Cutting
Z Condition Calculation tile (estimated spindle output) is shown
with a red circle.
D Graph legend Displays the legend ("N min rating" (where N is an arbitrary
numerical value) and "Continuous rating") for the displayed
graph.
E Soft keys
Changes the output graph.
Displayed when two or more spindles exist.

[Change Spindle]

188
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.4 EDITING MULTIPLE PROGRAMS SIMULTANEOUSLY

4.4

4.4 EDITING MULTIPLE PROGRAMS

SIMULTANEOUSLY
You can divide the program edit area into a maximum of four areas and then 1
display and edit multiple programs simultaneously.

<1> Press the [Divide] soft key on the third page.

2
Another set of soft keys appears.
2
4
<2> Press the soft key that corresponds to the number of divided areas you want to
display.
The program multi-edit screen appears. 5
6

 • Pressing the [Single] soft key will display a single edit area in full 7
screen.
MEMO

8
4.4.1 Program Multi-edit Screen
4.4.1

A1
A
A2

B
Z

Fig. 4.4.1 Program Multi-edit Screen (Example of Screen Divided into Two Areas)

189
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.4 EDITING MULTIPLE PROGRAMS SIMULTANEOUSLY

Table 4.4.1 Item List

Name Description
A Edit area title Displays the program path and program name/number
1 selected in the edit area.
B Edit area Displays the selected program.

2
 • The target edit area can be switched by pressing the [Select Target]
3 MEMO
soft key or <TAB>, or tapping the edit area title or edit area itself.

4 4.4.2 Edit Area when Edit Screen is Divided

4.4.2

When you change the number of divided areas for the edit screen, the area where
5 you are allowed to edit (shown in gray in the following figures) will change as
follows:

6 When the [Divide to 2], [Divide to 3], or [Divide to 4] soft key is pressed while the
screen was displayed as [Single]
The added area (by dividing the screen) will be the edit area.
7
Program (1) Program Empty Empty Empty
(1)

8
A1
Fig. 4.4.2 (a) Dividing Example 1

A2 When the [Single] soft key is pressed while the screen was displayed as [Divide to
2], [Divide to 3], or [Divide to 4]
The area selected as the area allowed to be edited will be displayed in a [Single]
Z screen.

Program Program Program Program Program (1)

(1) (2) (3) (4) (Path 1 Main Program)
(Path 1
Main
Program)

Fig. 4.4.2 (b) Dividing Example 2

190
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.4 EDITING MULTIPLE PROGRAMS SIMULTANEOUSLY

 • During background edit, the program displayed at the left end of the
edit area will be displayed.
MEMO

1
When the [Divide to 2], [Divide to 3], or [Divide to 4] soft key is pressed while the
screen was displayed as [Multi Path]
The maximum number of divided areas is four. 2

Path 2 Main Program Path 1

Main
Path 2
Main
Path 3
Main
Path 4
Main
2
Program Program Program Program

Fig. 4.4.2 (c) Dividing Example 3

5

4.4.3 Adding Edit Areas

6
4.4.3

You may add edit areas for the program multi-edit screen.
7
<1> Press the [Add] soft key on the third page.
A blank edit area will be added to the right of the original target edit area and
becomes the new target edit area.
8
A1
A2
Z
Program (1) Program (2) Program Empty Program
(1) (2)

• For the program that is currently edited, the block containing the

 cursor will be displayed as the first block with the cursor positioned at
the first word.
MEMO • You can press the [Select Target] soft key or <TAB> to change the
target edit area.

191
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.4 EDITING MULTIPLE PROGRAMS SIMULTANEOUSLY

4.4.4 Deleting Edit Areas

4.4.4

You may delete edit areas from the program multi-edit screen.

<1> Select the edit area to be deleted and press the [Close] soft key on the third
1 page.
The selected edit area is deleted, and the remaining edit areas will shift to the
left.
2
3
4 Program Program Program Program Program Program Program
(1) (2) (3) (4) (2) (3) (4)

5
6
7 • When the selected edit area is a main program of a path selected with
the path select signal, then the selected edit area cannot be deleted.
 • The cursor will be positioned at the first word of the first block of the
8 MEMO
program that becomes the new target edit area.
• You can press the [Select Target] soft key or <TAB> to change the
target edit area.
A1
4.4.5 Switching Modes While Editing Multiple Programs
A2 Simultaneously
4.4.5

Switching modes while editing multiple programs simultaneously will not cause the
Z edit area to be changed.

When you switch from MEM mode to EDIT mode while the screen was displayed
as [Divide to 3]

MEM
Program Program Program Program Program Program
(1) (2) (3) (1) (2) (3)

Fig. 4.4.5 Switching Modes

192
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.4 EDITING MULTIPLE PROGRAMS SIMULTANEOUSLY

• For the program that is currently edited, the block containing the

 cursor will be displayed as the first block with the cursor positioned at
the first word.
MEMO • During background edit, this operation will not cause the target edit
area to be changed. 1
2
2
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

193
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.5 EDITING MULTI-PATH PROGRAMS SIMULTANEOUSLY

4.5

4.5 EDITING MULTI-PATH PROGRAMS

SIMULTANEOUSLY
1 The multi-path edit screen displays the main programs of paths separately in
multiple edit areas and allows you to edit them simultaneously.

2 There are the following two methods to specify the layout of each path, which can
be switched in the machine manufacturer setting file:
• The number of paths that can be edited simultaneously and the path order are
3 fixed.
• The number of paths that can be edited simultaneously and the path order
depend on the parameters.
4
• You may edit the programs the same way as you do when editing
5  multiple programs simultaneously.
• For a path with the main program not selected, a blank edit area will
MEMO be displayed.

6 • For details on the setting, contact the machine manufacturer.

7 4.5.1
4.5.1
Conditions for Using the Multi-path Edit Function
The multi-path edit function can be used when all of the following conditions are
met:
8 • The system is configured to have two to ten paths.
• The machine has all paths used in the same operation mode.
A1 • The items required in the machine manufacturer setting file are set.
However, the number of paths that can be edited simultaneously and the path
A2 order/combination (assigned groups) vary depending on the layout specification
method of each path as shown in the table below.

Z Table 4.5.1 Number of Paths That Can Be Edited Simultaneously and the Path
Order/Combination Depending on the Layout Specification Method
Number of paths that can be edited simultaneously and path order/combination
Indicator
Layout specification method:
size Layout specification method: Fixed
Depending on the parameters
10.4" • 2-path system: Path 1, 2 from left to right Up to 2 paths The combination (assigned
• 3-path system: Path 1, 2, 3 from left to groups) of paths depends
15" right Up to 3 paths on the setting.
• 4-path system: Path 1, 2, 3, 4 from left to
19" Up to 3 paths
right

194
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.5 EDITING MULTI-PATH PROGRAMS SIMULTANEOUSLY

• When the layout specification method is "fixed", you can edit up to four

 paths simultaneously.
To edit five or more paths simultaneously, you need to change the
MEMO layout specification method to "depending on the parameters".
For details, contact the machine manufacturer. 1

4.5.2 Starting Multi-path Edit

2
4.5.2

To start multi-path edit, perform the following:

 When the layout specification method is "fixed"
2
<1> Press the [Divide] soft key on the third page.
Another set of soft keys appears. 4
5
<2> Press the [Multi Path] soft key.
The screen will be divided into multi-edit areas for each path currently present 6
in the system (maximum of four).

7
8
A1
Path 2 Main Program Path 1 Path 2 Path 3 Path 4
Main Main Main Main

A2
Program Program Program Program

Z
• For systems with five or more paths, the screen will be divided into
four areas (for Path 1 to 4).
• When the selected path is a path from 1 to 4, the edit area for the
selected path will be the target edit area.
• When the selected path is a path 5 or above, the leftmost edit area on
 the screen (Path 1) will become the target edit area.
• You can press the [Change Screen] soft key to switch between the edit
MEMO
screen and simulation screen.
• To change the target edit area, press the [Select Target] soft key or
<TAB> or tap the area.
• The [Multi Path] soft key becomes disabled if an unconfirmed block is
found during character edit.

195
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.5 EDITING MULTI-PATH PROGRAMS SIMULTANEOUSLY

 When the layout specification method is "depending on the parameters"

<1> Press the [Single -> Multi] soft key on the third page.
The multi-path group where the path selected with the path select signal
belongs is displayed in the multi-path edit screen.
1 The edit target is the area to which the path selected with the path select signal
is assigned.

2
3
4 Path 2 main program Path 1 Path 2 Path 3
main main main
pro- pro- pro-

5
gram gram gram

6
• To change the target edit area, press the [Select Target] soft key or
<TAB> or tap the area.
7 • The [Single -> Multi] soft key is not displayed under the following
 conditions:
When the path selected with the path select signal is not set in a
MEMO
8 multi-path group that displays two or more paths simultaneously
When the program multi-edit screen or multi-path edit screen is
displayed

A1
4.5.3 Ending Multi-path Edit
A2 4.5.3

To end multi-path edit, perform the following:

 When the layout specification method is "fixed"
Z <1> Select the edit area of the path you want to keep displayed.
<2> Press the [Divide] soft key on the third page.
Another set of soft keys appears.

<3> Press the [Single] or the soft key that corresponds to the number of divided
areas.
The edit area of the path you selected will remain displayed, and the screen will
be divided into the number of areas you selected.

196
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.5 EDITING MULTI-PATH PROGRAMS SIMULTANEOUSLY

 • When you select two or more divided areas, all edit areas other than 1
the one for the selected path will be a blank edit area.
MEMO

2
 When the layout specification method is "depending on the parameters"
<1> Select the edit area of the path you want to keep displayed. 2
<2> Press the [Multi -> Single] soft key on the third page.
The screen changes to the single path edit screen with the edit area of the
selected path remaining.
4
5
6
4.5.4 Switching the Target Edit Area
7
4.5.4

When you change the path while editing multi-path programs simultaneously, the
selection of the target edit area will change as follows:

 When the layout specification method is "fixed" 8

Changing from Path 2 to Path 3
The selection of the target edit area changes without changing the screen.
A1
Path 1 Path 2 Path 3 Path 4 Path 1 Path 2 Path 3 Path 4
Main Main Main Main Main Main Main Main
Pro-
gram
Pro-
gram
Pro-
gram
Pro-
gram
Pro-
gram
Pro-
gram
Pro-
gram
Pro-
gram A2
Z
Fig. 4.5.4 (a) Selection of the Target Edit Area When the Path Is Changed

• When the changed path is a path from 1 to 4, the edit area for the path
selected with the path select signal will become the target edit area.
• When the changed path is a path 5 or above, the leftmost edit area on

 the screen (Path 1) will become the target edit area.

• For the program that is currently edited, the block containing the
MEMO cursor will be displayed as the first block with the cursor positioned at
the first word.
• Switching modes while editing multi-path programs simultaneously will
not cause the edit area to be changed.

197
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.5 EDITING MULTI-PATH PROGRAMS SIMULTANEOUSLY

 When the layout specification method is "depending on the parameters"

Changing the path in the same group (Path 2 -> Path 3)
The selection of the target edit area changes without changing the screen.

1 Path 1
main
Path 2
main
Path 3
main
Path 1
main
Path 2
main
Path 3
main
pro- pro- pro- pro- pro- pro-
gram gram gram gram gram gram

2
3 Fig. 4.5.4 (b) Selection of the Target Edit Area When the Path Is Changed to One
in the Same Group

4 Changing to a path in another group (Path 2 -> Path 4)

The screen changes to the one for another group, and the specified path is
selected as the target edit area.
5
Path 1 Path 2 Path 3 Path 4 Path 5
main main main main main
6 pro-
gram
pro-
gram
pro-
gram
program program

7
Fig. 4.5.4 (c) Selection of the Target Edit Area When the Path Is Changed to One

8 in Another Group

Changing to a path in another group (Path 2 -> Path 6)

A1 The screen changes to the one for another group, and the specified path is to be
edited.
The example below shows the single path edit screen because there is only one
A2 path set in the group.

Z Path 1
main
pro-
Path 2
main
pro-
Path 3
main
pro-
Path 6 main program

gram gram gram

Fig. 4.5.4 (d) Edit Target When the Path Is Changed to One in Another Group

198
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.5 EDITING MULTI-PATH PROGRAMS SIMULTANEOUSLY

Changing to a path not belonging to a group (Path 2 -> Path 7)

The screen changes to the single path edit screen, and the specified path is the
edit target.

Path 1
main
pro-
Path 2
main
pro-
Path 3
main
pro-
Path 7 main program
1
gram gram gram

2
Fig. 4.5.4 (e) Edit Target When the Path Is Changed to One Not Belonging to a
Group
2

4.5.5 Screen transition when switching between the EDIT

4
and MEM modes
A screen transition between the multi-path edit screen in the EDIT mode and the 5
multi-path display screen in the MEM mode varies depending on the following
conditions:
• Multi-path system
6
• The paths to be edited simultaneously and the display order depend on the
parameters. 7
• The multi-path edit function is enabled.
• The multi-path display function is enabled. 8
If you change the mode from a screen other than the multi-path edit screen in the
EDIT mode and the multi-path display screen in the MEM mode, the last displayed A1
screen appears in the target mode, regardless of the conditions.

When all conditions are met

When the mode is switched to the MEM mode from the multi-path edit screen in
A2
the EDIT mode, the multi-path display screen in the MEM mode appears.
Meanwhile, when the mode is switched to the EDIT mode from the multi-path
display screen in the MEM mode, the multi-path edit screen in the EDIT mode
Z
appears.
The multi-path edit screen is now displayed by default in the EDIT mode.

When at least one of the conditions are not met

The last displayed screen appears in the target mode.

199
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.6 USING THE CYCLE INPUT

4.6

4.6 USING THE CYCLE INPUT

You can input programs easily by using the following cycle function. This is an

1 optional function.
• Machining cycle
• Figure cycle
2 • Coordinate conversion cycle
• Measurement cycle
3
4.6.1 Starting the Cycle Input
4 4.6.1

In the EDIT mode base screen, start cycle input as follows:

5 <1> Press the soft key in the fourth page that corresponds to the cycle function you
want to edit.
The cycle type is displayed.
6
7
<2> Press the soft key for the function you want to edit.

8
A1
 • For function details of each cycle input, see the operation manual for

A2 MEMO
each function.

Z 4.6.2 Changing the Cycle Input

4.6.2

To change the created cycle input, perform the following:

<1> Select the cycle input in the EDIT mode base screen or background edit
screen.
<2> Press the <INPUT> key or the [Change] soft key.
The corresponding cycle input screen is displayed.
For how to edit the cycle input, see the operation manual for each function.

200
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.7 BACKGROUND EDIT

4.7

4.7 BACKGROUND EDIT

You can edit other programs during machining.
The same edit operations as in the EDIT mode base screen can be used.
1
 • When the all-mode editing function is enabled, the background edit
screen cannot be used. 2
MEMO

2
4.7.1 Background Edit Screen
4.7.1

The background edit screen is mostly the same as the EDIT mode base screen.
4
A
5
B

6
7
8
D
C
E
A1
Fig. 4.7.1 Background edit screen
A2
Table 4.7.1 Item List

A
Name
Program path display area
Description
Displays the path of the program in
Z
which background edit is performed.
B Program display/edit area Displays the contents of the program in
which background edit is performed.
You can switch this display between the
expanded view and the reduced view,
like the EDIT mode base screen.
For details, see "4.2.1.1 Changing the
program display/edit area size".
C Message area Displays operation warnings and
guidance.
D Key input buffer area Displays the string entered with the MDI
keys.

201
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.7 BACKGROUND EDIT

Name Description
E Soft keys The operations that can be performed
are almost the same as EDIT mode.

1
4.7.2 Starting and Ending Background Edit
2 4.7.2

To start and end background edit, perform the following:

3  To start background edit

<1> Press the [Change Screen] soft key on the MEM mode base screen to display
the background edit screen.
4
5
 To end background edit

6 <1> Press the [Change Screen] soft key on the background edit screen to change
the display to a different screen.

7
8
A1
A2
Z

202
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.7 BACKGROUND EDIT

4.7.3 Selecting the Program to Edit

4.7.3

Selecting the program to be edited is performed in the Program Manager slide.

<1> Use the soft key to display the Program Manager slide.
<2> In the Program Manager slide, select the program with the cursor and press the
[Open BG Edit] soft key. 1
2
2
4
5
6
7
• You can open the program by tapping the program on the touch panel
as well.
• When you attempt to open the main program on the Program
8
Manager slide or a program that is background edited in another path,
the warning message "Protected" will be displayed in the message
area.
A1
 • Only editable devices will be displayed.
MEMO CNC_MEM Storage memory A2
MEM CARD Program storage file (FANUCPRG.BIN)
Data server Data server built-in memory card

• In the initial state, the folder that contains the main program will be
Z
open.

203
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.7 BACKGROUND EDIT

4.7.4 Editing Programs

4.7.4

In background edit, you can use the following edit operations that are also
provided in EDIT mode.
• Moving the cursor (per-word/per-block/per-page basis)
1 • Scrolling the displayed program (per-block/per-page basis)
• Creating new programs
2 • Program search
• Rewind and end search
3 • String search
• Insert/change/delete
4 • Changing only the numerical value in a word
• Copy/cut/delete/paste

5 Note that the following operations are different from those provided in the EDIT
mode base screen.

6 • When you move the cursor, the execution pointer will not move.
• You cannot perform rewind with <RESET>. (The execution will stop.)

7 • You cannot cancel the arbitrary string search with <RESET>.

• When you create a new program, the created program will not be set as the
main program.
8 • The program you opened with program search will not be set as the main
program.

A1 • You cannot edit/reference the main program.

A2  Slide display during background edit

When you close the slide, the background edit screen will be displayed and you
can resume editing.

Z
 To switch modes during background edit
When you change modes, the screen that corresponds to that mode will appear.
When you return back to MEM/RMT mode, the background edit screen will be
displayed.

 To switch paths during background edit

When you switch paths, the debug execution screen/background edit screen will
be displayed according to the state of the path you switched to.
If the mode changes by switching paths, the operation behavior will conform to the
switched mode.

204
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.8 CREATING CONTOURING PROGRAMS

4.8

4.8 CREATING CONTOURING PRO-

GRAMS
Create a contouring program by entering a free figure composed of circles and 1
straight lines in the contouring figure base screen.

2
 • To use this function, the contouring programming function must be
enabled.
MEMO
2
4.8.1
4.8.1
Displaying the Contouring Figure Base Screen 4
To display the contouring figure base screen, perform the following:

<1> Press the [G Contour] soft key.

5
Another set of soft keys appears.
6
7
<2> Press the soft key that corresponds to the coordinates for contouring
programming.
The contouring figure base window appears. 8
A1
A2
Z

205
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.8 CREATING CONTOURING PROGRAMS

4.8.2 Contouring Figure Base Screen

4.8.2

In the contouring figure base screen, you can select a plane to use for contouring
programming and create a contouring program.

1 A

2 C

3
4
5 D

E
6 Fig. 4.8.2 Contouring Figure Base Screen

7 Table 4.8.2 Structure of the Contouring Figure Base Screen

Name Description
8 A Title Displays the title of the free figure creation screen being
displayed.
B Free figure element Displays figure elements such as straight lines and arcs
A1 icon display with their icons. The icon for the selected element is
indicated with a red boundary.
C Contouring program Displays the information of the contouring program that is
A2 information display entered.
D Message area Displays operation warnings and guidance.

Z E Soft keys Displays the soft keys required for operations.

206
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.8 CREATING CONTOURING PROGRAMS

4.8.2.1 Contouring program information display

The contouring program information display shows information about the
4.8.2.1

contouring program that is entered.

Table 4.8.2.1 Contouring Program Information 1

Item Information color and figure
Contouring program that Origin: fixed (circle with cross, light gray)
is entered Start point: (double circle, pink) 2
Element currently selected: light blue (color selected in iHMI;
solid/dash lines change according to defined/undefined state)
Undefined element: red dash line 2
Element not currently selected - white solid line
End point coordinate Displays the end point coordinate of the element currently
selected. When the end point coordinate is undefined, "******" 4
will be displayed.

5
4.8.2.2 Soft keys
6
4.8.2.2

Fig. 4.8.2.2 Contouring Figure Base Screen Soft Keys 7

Table 4.8.2.2 Description of the Soft Keys 8
Name Description
Displays the screen to enter straight lines. A1
[Line] A2
Displays the screen to enter clockwise arcs.

Z
[Arc CW]
Displays the screen to enter counterclockwise arcs.

[Arc CCW]
Displays the screen to enter corner Rs.

[CR]

207
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.8 CREATING CONTOURING PROGRAMS

Name Description
Displays the screen to enter chamfering.

1 [CC]
Displays the screen to change the selected element.
Changes the contouring program that is entered.
2
[Alter]

3 Deletes the selected element.

4 [Delete]
Calculates the entered contouring program up to the last element. The
free figure will be displayed using the results obtained by calculating up
5 to the last element.

[Recalc]

6 Displays the Save Contouring Program window.

See "4.8.8 Saving the Contouring Program".

7 [Create]
Cancels editing.

8
[Cancel]
Displays the submenu to adjust drawing.
A1
A2 [View]
Displays the soft keys for the submenu to enter the copy conditions.

Z [Copy]

4.8.3 Operations on the Contouring Figure Base Screen

4.8.3

The following operations are available in the contouring figure base screen.
• Add an element to the contouring program
• Change an element in the contouring program
• Delete an element from the contouring program
• Save the contouring program

208
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.8 CREATING CONTOURING PROGRAMS

4.8.3.1 Adding an element to the contouring program

You can add an element to the contouring program.
4.8.3.1

<1> Use <→> and <←> to move the cursor to the element you want to add (will be
added after the selected element). 1
<2> Press the soft key that corresponds to the element you want to add.
The element input window appears.
2
2
<3> In each screen, enter the value and press the [OK] soft key.

4
• For operations on the element input window, see "4.8.7 Operations
 in the Element Input Window".
MEMO • You can add up to 300 elements for the contouring program. 5
• To cancel add, press the [Cancel] soft key.

6
4.8.3.2 Changing an element in the contouring program
You can change an element in the contouring program.
4.8.3.2

7
<1> Use <→> and <←> to move the cursor to the element you want to change.
<2> Press the [Alter] soft key or <INPUT>. 8
The element input window appears.

A1

<3> In each screen, enter the value and press the [OK] soft key. A2

 • For operations on the element input window, see "4.8.7 Operations Z

in the Element Input Window".
MEMO • To cancel change, press the [Cancel] soft key.

4.8.3.3 Deleting an element from the contouring program

You can delete an element from the contouring program.
4.8.3.3

<1> Use <→> and <←> to move the cursor to the element you want to delete.
<2> Press the [Delete] soft key.
The confirmation window appears.

209
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.8 CREATING CONTOURING PROGRAMS

<3> Press the [OK] soft key or <INPUT>.

1 The selected element is deleted, and the window closes.

2  • To cancel delete, press the [Cancel] soft key.

MEMO

3
4.8.3.4 Saving the Contouring Program
4 You can save the contouring program that you created. For operation details, see
4.8.3.4

"4.8.8 Saving the Contouring Program".

5 4.8.4 Entering Elements in the Contouring Program

4.8.4

In the element input window, follow the steps below to enter elements into the
6 contouring program.

Enter the start point

7 ↓
Select the contouring program element

8 ↓
Enter the contouring program element data
↓
A1 Change the contouring program element data
↓

A2 Add and insert new contouring program element

↓
Delete unnecessary contouring program element
Z ↓
Write the entered contouring program to the machining program
Fig. 4.8.4 Operation Steps for the Element Input Window

The element input window can be displayed by pressing the corresponding soft
keys.

210
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.8 CREATING CONTOURING PROGRAMS

4.8.4.1 Element input window ([Start Point])

The window to enter the start point can be displayed by selecting the start point on
4.8.4.1

the contouring figure base screen.

1
A
2

B
2
4
C
5
6
Fig. 4.8.4.1 Element Input Window ([Start Point])

7
Table 4.8.4.1 Functions on the Element Input Window ([Start Point])
Function
8
A The title [Start Point - Insert] is displayed.
B Items to enter data for the start point are each displayed on the [Data], [Face Pos.],
and [Thickness] tabs. A1
C Displays guidance and warning messages.

A2
Z

211
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.8 CREATING CONTOURING PROGRAMS

4.8.4.2 Element input window (Line)

The window to enter straight lines can be displayed by pressing the [Line] soft key
4.8.4.2

on the contouring figure base screen.

1
A
2
3 B

4
C
5
6
Fig. 4.8.4.2 Element Input Window (Line)

7
Table 4.8.4.2 Functions on the Element Input Window (Line)

8 Function
A The title Line - Insert is displayed.
B Items to enter data for straight lines are displayed.
A1 For details on items that can be set, see "APPENDIX".
C Displays guidance and warning messages.

A2
Z

212
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.8 CREATING CONTOURING PROGRAMS

4.8.4.3 Element input window (Arc (CW))

The window to enter clockwise arcs can be displayed by pressing the [Arc CW]
4.8.4.3

soft key on the contouring figure base screen.

1
A
2

B
2
4
C
5
6
Fig. 4.8.4.3 Element Input Window (Arc (CW))

7
Table 4.8.4.3 Functions on the Element Input Window (Arc (CW))
Function
8
A The title Arc (CW) - Insert is displayed.
B Items to enter data for clockwise arcs are displayed.
For details on items that can be set, see "APPENDIX". A1
C Displays guidance and warning messages.

A2
Z

213
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.8 CREATING CONTOURING PROGRAMS

4.8.4.4 Element input window (Arc (CCW))

The window to enter counterclockwise arcs can be displayed by pressing the [Arc
4.8.4.4

CCW] soft key on the contouring figure base screen.

1
A
2
3 B

4
C
5
6
Fig. 4.8.4.4 Element Input Window (Arc (CCW))

7
Table 4.8.4.4 Functions on the Element Input Window (Arc (CCW))

8 Function
A The title [Arc (CCW) - Insert] is displayed.
B Items to enter data for counterclockwise arcs are displayed.
A1 For details on items that can be set, see "APPENDIX".
C Displays guidance and warning messages.

A2
Z

214
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.8 CREATING CONTOURING PROGRAMS

4.8.4.5 Element input window (Corner R)

The window to enter corner Rs can be displayed by pressing the [CR] soft key on
4.8.4.5

the contouring figure base screen.

1
A
2

B
2
4
C
5
6
Fig. 4.8.4.5 Element Input Window (Corner R)

7
Table 4.8.4.5 Functions on the Element Input Window (Corner R)
Function
8
A The title [CR - Insert] is displayed.
B Items to enter data for corner Rs are displayed.
For details on items that can be set, see "APPENDIX". A1
C Displays guidance and warning messages.

A2
Z

215
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.8 CREATING CONTOURING PROGRAMS

4.8.4.6 Element input window (Chamfer)

The window to enter chamfering can be displayed by pressing the [CC] soft key on
4.8.4.6

the contouring figure base screen.

1
A
2
3 B

4
C
5
6
Fig. 4.8.4.6 Element Input Window (Chamfer)

7
Table 4.8.4.6 Functions on the Element Input Window (Chamfer)

8 Function
A The title [CC - Insert] is displayed.
B Items to enter data for chamfering are displayed.
A1 For details on items that can be set, see "APPENDIX".
C Displays guidance and warning messages.

A2
4.8.5 Adjusting the Contouring Figure Drawing
Z
4.8.5

Drawing of contouring figure can be adjusted and displayed as follows:

• Automatically scale the drawing
• Zoom in to or out from the drawing
• Move the displayed position of the drawing
• Move to the drawing to the center

<1> Press the [View] soft key.

The soft keys to adjust contouring figure drawing appear.

216
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.8 CREATING CONTOURING PROGRAMS

Table 4.8.5 Types of Soft Keys

Name Description
Auto scales the contouring figure to fit inside the window. The
contouring figure is positioned and displayed in the center of the
drawing area.
1
[Auto]

2
2
4
Increases the drawing magnification (vertical and horizontal
directions are both increased by the same ratio). The center of
zoom in is set at the center of the drawing area. 5
[Zoom In]

6
Reduces the drawing magnification. The center of zoom out is set
at the center of the drawing area.
7

[Zoom Out] 8

Moves the contouring figure upward.

A1
A2
[Upper]

Z
Moves the contouring figure downward.

[Lower]

Moves the contouring figure leftward.

[Left]

217
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.8 CREATING CONTOURING PROGRAMS

Name Description
Moves the contouring figure rightward.

1 [Right]

Moves the contouring figure to the center of the window.

2 • No scaling

3 [Center]

4 • Zoomed in figure

5
• Zoomed out figure
6
7
8 4.8.6 Copying the Contouring Figure
4.8.6

In the contouring program input screen, you can copy a figure within a specified
A1 range to add it as a new figure.
The following types of copy are available.
• Parallel copy
A2 • Mirror Copy
• Rotational Copy
Z
<1> Press the [Copy] soft key on the contouring figure base screen.
The soft keys to copy the contouring figure appear.

<2> Press the [Parallel], [Rotation], or [Mirror] soft key.

The corresponding figure copy screen is displayed.

218
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.8 CREATING CONTOURING PROGRAMS

<3> Enter the copy conditions and press the [OK] soft key.
The Select Copy Target window appears.

1
2
2
4
5
<4> Use <←> and <→> to select the element you want to copy.
6
<5> Press the [OK] soft key.
Confirm the copy target to copy the contouring figure according to the type of
copy you specified. 7
8
A1
A2
Z

• You can press the [Preview] soft key on the Select Copy Target

 window to check the copied results.

• To cancel any operation in the Select Copy Target window, press the
MEMO [Cancel] soft key.
The screen returns to the figure copy screen.

219
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.8 CREATING CONTOURING PROGRAMS

4.8.6.1 Figure copy screen (parallel)

The figure copy screen (parallel) can be displayed by pressing the [Parallel] soft
4.8.6.1

key in the submenu that appears when you press the [Copy] soft key on the
contouring figure base screen.

1
2
3
4
5
6
Fig. 4.8.6.1 (a) Figure Copy Screen (Parallel)

7
Table 4.8.6.1 Functions on the Figure Copy Screen (Parallel)

8 A Displays the title "Parallel Copy".

Function

B Displays the items to enter the copy conditions.

A1 For details on items that can be set, see "APPENDIX".
C Displays guidance and warning messages.

A2 The contouring figure within the range you specify is copied after the selected
range. You can specify the number of times to repeat the copy process.
Z

Fig. 4.8.6.1 (b) Parallel copy

220
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.8 CREATING CONTOURING PROGRAMS

4.8.6.2 Figure copy screen (Rotation)

The figure copy screen (rotation) can be displayed by pressing the [Rotation] soft
4.8.6.2

key in the submenu that appears when you press the [Copy] soft key on the
contouring figure base screen.

1
2
2
4
5
6
Fig. 4.8.6.2 (a) Figure Copy Screen (Rotation)

7
Table 4.8.6.2 Functions on the Figure Copy Screen (Rotation)
Function 8
A Displays the title "Rotational Copy".
B Displays the items to enter the copy conditions.
For details on items that can be set, see "APPENDIX". A1
C Displays guidance and warning messages.

A2
The contouring figure within the range you specify is copied with its center set to
the coordinates you specify. Alternatively, you can copy the contouring figure
within the range you specify along the radius and rotation direction you specify.
You can specify the number of times to repeat the copy process.
Z

Fig. 4.8.6.2 (b) Rotational Copy

221
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.8 CREATING CONTOURING PROGRAMS

4.8.6.3 Figure copy screen (Mirror)

The figure copy screen (mirror) can be displayed by pressing the [Mirror] soft key
4.8.6.3

in the submenu that appears when you press the [Copy] soft key on the contouring
figure base screen.

1
2
3
4
5
6
Fig. 4.8.6.3 (a) Figure Copy Screen (Mirror)
7
Table 4.8.6.3 Functions on the Figure Copy Screen (Mirror)

8 Function
A Displays the title "Mirror Copy".
B Displays the items to enter the copy conditions.
A1 For details on items that can be set, see "APPENDIX".
C Displays guidance and warning messages.

A2
The contouring figure within the range you specify is mirror copied with respect to
the symmetry axis with coordinates you specify. Alternatively, you can copy the
Z contouring figure within the range you specify with respect to the symmetry axis
with the angle you specify.

Fig. 4.8.6.3 (b) Mirror Copy

222
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.8 CREATING CONTOURING PROGRAMS

4.8.6.4 Copy result preview window

You can press the [Preview] soft key on the Select Copy Target window to display
4.8.6.4

the Copy Result Preview window where you can check beforehand how the figure
will be copied.
Press the [OK] soft key and confirm the copy target. The contouring figure will be
copied according to the type of copy you specified. 1
2
2
4
5
6

Fig. 4.8.6.4 Copy Result Preview Window 7

Table 4.8.6.4 Structure of the Copy Result Preview Window 8

Function
A Displays the window title "Copy Result Preview". A1
B Displays the elements of the contouring figure that was entered, with small icons.
C Displays the information of the contouring figure that was entered.
D Displays guidance and warning messages.
A2
Z
 • To cancel any operation in the Copy Result Preview window, press the
[Cancel] soft key. The screen returns to the figure copy screen.
MEMO

223
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.8 CREATING CONTOURING PROGRAMS

4.8.7 Operations in the Element Input Window

4.8.7

The element input window can be displayed by pressing the corresponding soft
keys on the contouring figure base screen.
You can add/change elements in the element input window.
1
 • For details on the element input window, see "4.8.4 Entering Elements

2 MEMO in the Contouring Program".

3 4.8.7.1 Adding an element to the contouring program

You can add each element to the contouring program.
4.8.7.1

4 <1> Use <→> and <←> to select the tab for the input item you want to enter.
<2> Use <↑> and <↓> to select the input item you want to enter.
5 <3> Enter the text for each item and press <INPUT>.
<4> Use the following soft keys to select the items you want to add.
6 • [Right Side], [Left Side]: Open figure used in contouring
• [+ Face], [- Face]: Face position

7 • [Coordinate 1], [Coordinate 2]: Program coordinates

• [Right], [R-up], [Up], [L-up], [Left], [L-down], [Down], [R-down]: Straight line
(linear) direction
8 • [C], [E], [A], [B]: Rotation axis name
• [Tangent], [None]: Whether the item is tangent or not to the prior/next
A1 elements
• [Part], [Blank]: Element type
A2 • [Long Path], [Short Path]: Whether the arc element is structured by a long
path or short path
• [Auxcalc]: Automatically calculates the end point coordinate of the arc based
Z on the angle, start point coordinate, and center point coordinate.
<5> After you enter all required data, press the [OK] soft key.

 • To cancel add, press the [Cancel] soft key.

MEMO

224
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.8 CREATING CONTOURING PROGRAMS

 Automatic calculation of the end point coordinate of the arc

In the element input screen for arcs, the end point coordinate of the arc can be
automatically calculated based on the angle, start point coordinate, and center
point coordinate.

<1> In the contouring figure base screen, select the arc element.
1
<2> Press the [Auxcal] soft key.
The Auxcalc window appears. 2
2
<3> Enter the numerical values for the input items.
4
5
6
7
8
A1
<4> Press the [Arc CW] or [Arc CCW] soft key.
The rotation direction is displayed. A2
Z
<5> Press the [OK] soft key.
The calculation results are reflected onto the end point coordinate in the
element input screen.

225
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.8 CREATING CONTOURING PROGRAMS

 Incremental input of the end point coordinate

When you specify the end point coordinate, you can enter the difference from the
start point coordinate to determine the end point coordinate.

1 <1> Display the element input window.

<2> Select the input item for the end point coordinate.

2 <3> Press the [St.P+I] or [St.P-I] soft key.

3
<4> Enter the difference from the start point.
4 <5> Press the [OK] soft key.
The calculation results are reflected onto the end point coordinate.

5 4.8.7.2 Changing an element in the contouring program

You can change an element in the contouring program.
4.8.7.2

6 <1> Use <→> and <←> to select the tab for the input item you want to change.
<2> Use <↑> and <↓> to select the input item you want to change.
7 <3> Enter the numerical values for the input items.
• Use <CAN> to clear the values already entered.
8 • Use <Text> to enter text.
• Use <INPUT> to confirm input.
A1 <4> Select the item you want to change.
• [Surface], [Convex], [Concave], [Groove], [Open]: Figure type of the start
A2 point element (when opened for changing the entire free figure)
• [Right Side], [Left Side]: Open figure used in contouring

Z • [+ Face], [- Face]: Face position

• [Coordinate 1], [Coordinate 2]: Program coordinates
• [Right], [R-up], [Up], [L-up], [Left], [L-down], [Down], [R-down]: Straight line
(linear) direction
• [C], [E], [A], [B]: Rotation axis name
• [Tangent], [None]: Whether the item is tangent or not to the prior/next
elements
• [Part], [Blank]: Element type
• [Long Path], [Short Path]: Whether the arc element is structured by a long
path or short path

226
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.8 CREATING CONTOURING PROGRAMS

• [Auxcalc]: Automatically calculates the end point coordinate of the arc based
on the angle, start point coordinate, and center point coordinate.
<5> After you enter all required data, press the [OK] soft key.

 1
• To cancel change, press the [Cancel] soft key.
MEMO
2
4.8.8 Saving the Contouring Program
4.8.8

The Save Contouring Program window allows you to save the contents added/
2
changed in the contouring figure base screen to a program.
4
4.8.8.1 Save contouring program window
To display the Save Contouring Program window, press the [Create] soft key. 5
4.8.8.1

6
A
7
B

C 8
Fig. 4.8.8.1 Save Contouring Program Window

A1
Table 4.8.8.1 Functions on the Save Contouring Program Window
Function A2
A Displays the title for the contouring program save method.
B Specify the location where the program will be saved.
When you are saving the program to a subprogram, enter the subprogram name Z
and figure name and select the folder to which the program is saved.
C Displays guidance and warning messages.

4.8.8.2 Saving the contouring program to the selected program

You can save the contouring program to a program that is currently selected.
4.8.8.2

<1> Press the [Create] soft key.

The Save Contouring Program window appears.

227
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.8 CREATING CONTOURING PROGRAMS

<2> Use <↑>, <↓>, and <INPUT> to select the program to be saved.
1 <3> Press the [OK] soft key.

2 • When you save a new contouring program to the main program, it

will be inserted in the next block that follows the cursor position in

3  the selected program.

• When you change a contouring program and save it to the main
MEMO program, it will be substituted with the G code that will be changed
in the contouring program.

4 • To cancel save, press the [Cancel] soft key.

5 4.8.8.3
4.8.8.3
Saving the contouring program to a subprogram
You can save the contouring program to a subprogram.

6 <1> Press the [Create] soft key.

The Save Contouring Program window appears.

7
8 <2> Use <↑>, <↓>, and <INPUT> to set the program to be saved as the
subprogram.

A1 <3> Enter the program name.

Use <↑> and <↓> to select the input item and then enter the subprogram name.
<4> Enter the subprogram figure name.
A2 Use <↑> and <↓> to select the input item and then enter the subprogram figure
name.

Z <5> Select the folder for the subprogram.

Use <↑> and <↓> to select the folder selection radio button and then use <←>
and <→> to select the subprogram folder.
<6> After you enter all required data, press the [OK] soft key.

 • To cancel save, press the [Cancel] soft key.

MEMO

228
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.8 CREATING CONTOURING PROGRAMS

4.8.9 Changing the Contouring Program

4.8.9

To change the created contouring program, perform the following:

<1> Select the contouring program in the EDIT mode base screen or background
edit screen. 1
<2> Press the <INPUT> key or the [Change] soft key.
The contouring figure base window appears.
For how to edit the program, see "4.8.3 Operations on the Contouring Figure
2
Base Screen".
2
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

229
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.9 ALL-MODE PROGRAM EDIT

4.9

4.9 ALL-MODE PROGRAM EDIT

You can edit programs in all work modes using the same edit operation as the

1 EDIT mode base screen.

2  • To use this function, the all-mode program edit function must be

enabled.
MEMO

3
4.9.1 Starting/Ending All-mode Program Edit
4.9.1

4 4.9.1.1 Starting editing

4.9.1.1

<1> Use the soft key to display the Program Manager slide.
5 <2> Use the cursor to select a program you want to edit.

6  • You can open the target program by tapping it on the touch panel
as well.
MEMO

7
<3> Press the [Start Edit] soft key or <INPUT>.
8 The selected program is displayed on the Edit Program slide.

A1
A2
Z

230
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.9 ALL-MODE PROGRAM EDIT

• The selected program will become just an editable target but not be
set as the main program.
• If the selected program is the main program or not editable, it is

 displayed in read-only mode.

• To switch to the Program Manager slide without stopping editing, 1
MEMO such as when inputting/outputting a program during program edit,
press the [Edit -> List] soft key.
To return from the Program Manager slide, press the [List -> Edit] 2
soft key.

2
4.9.1.2 Ending editing
4.9.1.2

<1> Use the [Select Target] soft key to select a tile you want to finish editing.
4
 • You can open the target tile by tapping it on the touch panel as well. 5
MEMO

6
<2> Press the [Close] or [End All Edit] soft key.
• When you press the [Close] soft key:
The selected edit tile closes. 7
• When you press the [End All Edit] soft key:
The Confirm End of All Program Edit window appears. When you press the
[Yes] soft key, all the edit tiles close, and the Program Manager slide appears.
8
A1
A2
Z
 • Closing the last tile with the [Close] soft key switches to the
Program Manager slide.
MEMO

231
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.9 ALL-MODE PROGRAM EDIT

4.9.2 Switching between Edit Programs

<1> If multiple edit tiles are displayed, use the [Select Target] soft key to select one
for an edit program you want to change.

1
 • You can open the target tile by tapping it on the touch panel as well.
MEMO
2
<2> Press the [Select Program] soft key.
3 The Select Program window appears.
<3> Use the cursor to select a program you want to edit.
4
5
6
7
8
A1 • You can open the target program by tapping it on the touch panel
as well.

 • You can move a folder by selecting it and pressing the [Select] soft

A2 MEMO
key or <INPUT>.
• To sort programs in the list on the Select Program window, press
the [Sort] soft key first and then one of the following soft keys:
[Name], [Comment], [Update Date], [Size], [Sort]
Z
<4> Press the [Select] soft key.
The program is displayed in the selected edit tile.

232
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.9 ALL-MODE PROGRAM EDIT

1
2
2
4
5
6
4.9.3
4.9.2
Adding Edit Programs (Editing Multiple Programs) 7
<1> If multiple edit tiles are displayed, use the [Select Target] soft key to select one
of them.
8
 • You can open the target tile by tapping it on the touch panel as well. A1
MEMO

A2
<2> Press the [Add Edit Program] soft key.
The Select Program window appears.
Z

233
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.9 ALL-MODE PROGRAM EDIT

<3> Use the cursor to select a program you want to edit.

1
2
3
4
• You can open the target program by tapping it on the touch panel
5 as well.

 • You can move a folder by selecting it and pressing the [Select] soft
key or <INPUT>.
6 MEMO • To sort programs in the list on the Select Program window, press
the [Sort] soft key first and then one of the following soft keys:
[Name], [Comment], [Update Date], [Size], [Sort]

7
<4> Press the [Select] soft key.
8 The program is displayed to the right of the selected edit tile.

A1
A2
Z

234
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.9 ALL-MODE PROGRAM EDIT

4.9.4 Checking a Program in a Simulation

4.9.3

Switch to the simulation screen.

<1> If multiple edit tiles are displayed, use the [Select Target] soft key to select one
for a program you want to check in a simulation.
1
 • You can open the target tile by tapping it on the touch panel as well.
2
MEMO

<2> Press the [Simulation] soft key. 2

The Edit Program slide closes, and the machining simulation screen appears.
4
• If the current mode base screen is any other mode than MEM and

 EDIT, "Change to MEM mode or EDIT mode." appears, preventing

the screen from switching to the machining simulation screen. 5
MEMO • For details on the machining simulation screen, see "5.7
MACHINING SIMULATION".
6
<3> Press the [Close Simulation] soft key.
The screen returns to the Edit Program slide. 7
 Executing a simulation on the Program Manager slide
Directly switch from the Program Manager slide to the simulation screen.
8
<1> Use the cursor to select a program of which you want to check the details in a A1
simulation.

A2
 • You can open the target program by tapping it on the touch panel
as well.
Z
MEMO

<2> Press the [Simulation] soft key.

The Program Manager slide closes, and the machining simulation screen
appears.

• If the current mode base screen is any other mode than MEM and

 EDIT, "Change to MEM mode or EDIT mode." appears, preventing

the screen from switching to the machining simulation screen.
MEMO • For details on the machining simulation screen, see "5.7
MACHINING SIMULATION".

235
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.9 ALL-MODE PROGRAM EDIT

<3> Press the [Close Simulation] soft key.

The screen returns to the Program Manager slide.

4.9.5 Setting the Main Program

1 4.9.4

Set the program that is currently being edited as the main program.
<1> If multiple edit tiles are displayed, use the [Select Target] soft key to select one
2 for a program you want to set as the main program.

3  • You can open the target tile by tapping it on the touch panel as well.
MEMO

4
<2> Press the [Main Program] soft key.

5 The Set Main Program window appears.

6
7
8
• In a system with two or more paths, you can select the path where
A1 you want to set the main program.

A2

MEMO
Z

• The selected path is displayed by default.

<3> Press the [OK] soft key.

The selected program is set as the main program, and the Confirm End of All
Program Edit window appears.

236
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.9 ALL-MODE PROGRAM EDIT

1
 • If the current mode base screen is any other mode than MEM and
EDIT, "Change to MEM mode or EDIT mode." appears, preventing 2
MEMO the program from being set as the main program.

2
<4> If there is no problem with finishing editing, such as when performing debug
operation in MEM mode, press the [Yes] soft key.
The Confirm End of All Program Edit window closes, and the Edit Program 4
slide switches to the Program Manager slide.

5
 • To continue editing, press the [No] soft key in the Confirm End of
All Program Edit window to return to the Edit Program slide.
MEMO
6
 Setting the main program on the Program Manager slide
<1> Use the cursor to select a program you want to set as the main program.
7
8
 • You can open the target program by tapping it on the touch panel
as well.
MEMO
A1
<2> Press the [Main Program] soft key.
The Set Main Program window appears. A2
Z

237
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 4 EDITING PROGRAMS 
4.9 ALL-MODE PROGRAM EDIT

• In a system with two or more paths, you can select the path where
you want to set the main program.

1

2 MEMO

3
• The selected path is displayed by default.

4
<3> Press the [OK] soft key.
The selected program is set as the main program, and the Set Main Program
5 window closes.

6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

238
5
SETUP FOR 1

MACHINING 2
3
4
5
This chapter describes the setup performed prior to machining, including MDI
program creation and machining simulation.
6
5.1 BASICS FOR SETUP FOR MACHINING ........................................... 240
5.2
5.3
MDI MODE .........................................................................................
JOG MODE .........................................................................................
253
264
7
5.4 HND MODE ........................................................................................ 268
5.5 INC MODE .......................................................................................... 272 8
5.6 REF MODE ......................................................................................... 276
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION ................................................................ 280
A

239
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.1 BASICS FOR SETUP FOR MACHINING

5.1

5.1 BASICS FOR SETUP FOR MACHIN-

ING
1 Along with the MDI mode that allows you to create the program (MDI program)
and execute it prior to production machining, the JOG/HND/INC/REF modes are

2 provided for you to perform setup prior to machining. Machining simulation also
allows you to check how machining will be performed through graphical drawings
before you proceed to production machining. For structures of the base screen in
each mode, see the description pages for each mode.
3
5.1.1 Switching Information Displayed on the Base
4 Screen
5.1.1

You can switch the information displayed on the base screen for each mode. This
5 example shows the operation in MDI mode, but the same operation can be
applied to other modes.

6
5.1.1.1 To switch display of current position/distance display tile
You can switch the information displayed on the current position/distance display
5.1.1.1

7 tile.
<1> Press the [Current Position] soft key.
8 Another set of soft keys appears.

A1
<2> Press the soft key for the information you want to display.
A2 The display of the current position/distance display tile switches.

Z
Name Description
Relative coordinates Displays the relative coordinates.
display tile
Absolute coordinates Displays the absolute coordinates.
display tile
Machine coordinates Displays the machine coordinates.
display tile
Overall display tile You can check relative coordinates, absolute coordinates,
machine coordinates, and remaining distance simultaneously.

240
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.1 BASICS FOR SETUP FOR MACHINING

 • For details of each display, see "Chapter 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM

EXECUTION)".
MEMO

1
5.1.1.2 To switch the axis displayed on current position/distance display tile
When the total number of axes displayed on the current position/distance display
2
5.1.1.2

tile is greater than the maximum number of concurrent displayed axes, you can
switch the axes to be displayed to check information for all axes.

3
<1> Press the [Current Position] soft key.
Another set of soft keys appears.
4
5
<2> Press the [Show Next Axis] soft key.
The displayed axis will change.
6
7
• Displayed control axis (Axis 1 to 5) • Displayed control axis (Axis 6)

8
A1
• To return back to the previous axis, press the [Show Next Axis] soft A2
key again.

 • Control axis information to be switched is as follows.

Axis name (extended axis name) Z
MEMO Coordinate values
Remaining travel
Servo load meter

 When a control axis is hidden

When one of the following is set by the machine manufacturer, the target control
axis becomes hidden:
• Parameter No.3115#0=1
• Axis hide signal NPOS1 to NPOS8<Gn198>=1

241
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.1 BASICS FOR SETUP FOR MACHINING

1
Fig. 5.1.1.2 Example of a control axis not being displayed

2
 Changing the display order of control axes
When one of the following is performed, the display order of control axes changes:
3 • Parameter No.3130 setting change
• Control axis switch by the arbitrary axis switching function
4
5.1.2 Presetting Workpiece Coordinates
5 5.1.2

You can preset manually shifted workpiece coordinates to workpiece coordinates

which were offset by the workpiece origin offset amount from the machine origin

6 before the shift. This example shows the operation in MDI mode, but the same
operation can be applied to other modes.

7 <1> Press the [Preset] soft key.

Another set of soft keys appears.

8
A1 <2> Press the [Preset Workpiece] soft key.
The Work Coordinate Preset window appears.

A2
Z

242
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.1 BASICS FOR SETUP FOR MACHINING

<3> Enter the workpiece coordinate values and press the [OK] soft key or
<INPUT>.
The entered workpiece coordinate values are reflected, and the window closes.

1
2
3
4
5
6

MEMO
• To cancel preset, press the [Cancel] soft key.
7

5.1.3 Presetting Current Position (Relative Coordinates)

8
5.1.3

You can reset the current position of the relative coordinates to zero or preset it to
a specified value. A1
<1> Press the [Preset] soft key.
Another set of soft keys appears.
A2
Z
<2> Press the [Preset Relative] soft key.
The Preset Relative Coordinates window appears.

243
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.1 BASICS FOR SETUP FOR MACHINING

<3> Enter the relative coordinates for each axis and press the [OK] soft key or
<INPUT>.
The entered relative coordinate values are reflected, and the window closes.

1
2
3
4
5
6
 • To cancel preset, press the [Cancel] soft key.
7 MEMO
• For five or more axes, the list can be scrolled to show the data.

8 5.1.4 3D Manual Feed

5.1.4

In the 3D manual feed screen, you can check information displayed in JOG/HND/
A1 INC mode along with various information about tools, machining axes, and table
references. You can also clear the pulse amount on this screen.

A2
 • 3D manual feed is a function for JOG, HND, and INC mode.
MEMO
Z
5.1.4.1 Displaying the 3D manual feed screen
To display the 3D manual feed screen, perform the following:
5.1.4.1

<1> Press the [Change Screen] soft key on the JOG/HND/INC mode base screen.
The screen will switch between the regular manual feed screen and 3D manual
feed screen each time you press the [Change Screen] soft key.

244
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.1 BASICS FOR SETUP FOR MACHINING

• Regular manual feed screen • 3D Manual Feed Screen

1
2
3
Indicator

4
 You can check which screen is currently displayed using the indicator.
MEMO 5
5.1.4.2 3D manual feed screen 6
The structure of the 3D manual feed screen is explained below.
5.1.4.2

A B C D 7
8

E F G H A1
A2
K
I J L M Z

Fig. 5.1.4.2 (a) 3D Manual Feed Screen

Table 5.1.4.2 (a) Name and Function of Each Part on the 3D Manual Feed Screen
Name Description
A Tool Tip Position Display Tile Displays the tool tip position.
B Pulse Amount (Tool Tip Center) Displays the pulse amount (tool tip center).
Display Tile
C Machining Axis Travel Distance Displays the machining axis travel distance of
Display Tile each axis.

245
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.1 BASICS FOR SETUP FOR MACHINING

Name Description
D Current position (absolute Displays the current position of each axis in
coordinates) display tile absolute coordinates.
E Pulse Amount (Tool Axis Displays the pulse amount (tool axis reference).
1 F
Reference) Display Tile
Pulse Amount (Table Reference) Displays the pulse amount (table reference).
Display Tile
2 G Current position (machine
coordinates) display tile
Displays the current position of each axis in
machine coordinates.
H Manual feed modal display tile Displays the modal for auxiliary function only.
3 I Feed information display tile Displays the feed information.
J Spindle information display tile Displays the spindle information.

4 K
L
Status display tile
Tool Length Offset Display Tile
Displays the status information.
Displays the tool length offset value.
M Guidance message display tile Displays operation guidance and warning
5 messages.

6 Information displayed on the tiles other than those explained in the

 subsequent sections are the same as the tiles provided in the MEM
mode base screen. For details, see "Chapter 8 MACHINING
MEMO
7 (PROGRAM EXECUTION)".

8
 Tool Tip Position Display Tile
Information displayed in the tool tip position display tile is as follows.
A1 A

A2
B C

Fig. 5.1.4.2 (b) Tool Tip Position Display Tile

246
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.1 BASICS FOR SETUP FOR MACHINING

Table 5.1.4.2 (b) Item List

Name Description
A Title area Displays the tool tip position display title.
B Axis name Displays the axis name with one letter.
The extended axis name is displayed with a maximum of
two letters.
1
Displays the index with a maximum of one letter.
C Current position Displays the tool tip current position. 2
 Pulse Amount (Tool Tip Center) Display Tile 3
Information displayed in the pulse amount (tool tip center) display tile is as follows.

A
4
B D
5
C E

6
7
Fig. 5.1.4.2 (c) Pulse Amount (Tool Tip Center) Display Tile
Table 5.1.4.2 (c) Item List
8
Name Description
A Title area Displays the tool tip center display title.
B Tool tip center Displays the tool tip center rotational feed first rotation axis A1
rotational feed first (C1) title.
rotation axis
C Tool tip center Displays the tool tip center rotational feed second rotation A2
rotational feed axis (C2) title.
second rotation axis
D Tool tip center Displays the tool tip center rotational feed first rotation axis Z
rotational feed first (C1) pulse amount.
rotation axis pulse
amount
E Tool tip center Displays the tool tip center rotational feed second rotation
rotational feed axis (C2) pulse amount.
second rotation axis
pulse amount

247
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.1 BASICS FOR SETUP FOR MACHINING

 Machining Axis Travel Distance Display Tile

Information displayed in the machining axis travel distance display tile is as
follows.
A
1
2
B C

3
4 Fig. 5.1.4.2 (d) Machining Axis Travel Distance Display Tile
Table 5.1.4.2 (d) Item List
5 Name Description
A Title area Displays the machining axis travel distance display title.

6 B Axis name Displays the axis name with one letter.

The extended axis name is displayed with a maximum of
two letters.
Displays the index with a maximum of one letter.
7 C Travel distance Displays the sum of travel distance by 3D manual feed of
each axis.

8
 Pulse Amount (Tool Axis Reference) Display Tile

A1 Information displayed in the pulse amount (tool axis reference) display tile is as
follows.
A
A2
B E
Z C F
D G

Fig. 5.1.4.2 (e) Pulse Amount (Tool Axis Reference) Display Tile
Table 5.1.4.2 (e) Item List
Name Description
A Title area Displays the tool axis reference display title.
B Tool axis direction Displays the tool axis direction feed (TD) title.
feed (TD)

248
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.1 BASICS FOR SETUP FOR MACHINING

Name Description
C Tool axis orthogonal Displays the tool axis orthogonal direction feed first axis
direction feed first direction (R1) title.
axis direction (R1)
D Tool axis orthogonal Displays the tool axis orthogonal direction feed second
direction feed second axis direction (R2) title.
1
axis direction (R2)
E Tool axis direction
feed pulse amount
Displays the tool axis direction feed (TD) pulse amount.
2
F Tool axis orthogonal Displays the first axis direction (R1) pulse amount by tool
direction feed first
axis direction pulse
axis orthogonal direction feed.
3
amount
G Tool axis orthogonal Displays the second axis direction (R2) pulse amount by
direction feed second tool axis orthogonal direction feed.
4
axis direction pulse
amount
5
 Pulse Amount (Table Reference) Display Tile
Information displayed in the pulse amount (table reference) display tile is as 6
follows.
A 7
B E
8
C F

D G A1
A2
Fig. 5.1.4.2 (f) Pulse Amount (Table Reference) Display Tile
Table 5.1.4.2 (f) Item List
Z
Name Description
A Title area Displays the table reference display title.
B Table reference Displays the table reference vertical direction feed (VR)
vertical direction feed title.
(VR)
C Table reference Displays the table reference horizontal direction feed first
horizontal direction axis direction (H1) title.
feed first axis
direction (H1)

249
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.1 BASICS FOR SETUP FOR MACHINING

Name Description
D Table reference Displays the table reference horizontal direction feed
horizontal direction second axis direction (H2) title.
feed second axis

1 E
direction (H2)
Table reference Displays the table reference vertical direction feed (VR)
vertical direction feed pulse amount.

2 F
pulse amount
Table reference Displays the first axis direction (H1) pulse amount by table
horizontal direction reference horizontal direction feed.

3 feed first axis

direction pulse
amount

4 G Table reference
horizontal direction
Displays the second axis direction (H2) pulse amount by
table reference horizontal direction feed.
feed second axis
direction pulse
5 amount

6  Tool Length Offset Display Tile

Information displayed in the tool length offset display tile is as follows.

7 A B

8 Fig. 5.1.4.2 (g) Tool Length Offset Display Tile

Table 5.1.4.2 (g) Item List
A1 Name Description
A Title area Displays the tool length offset title.
A2 B Tool length offset
value
Displays the tool length offset value.

Z
5.1.4.3 Clearing the 3D manual feed pulse amount
The following pulse amount from traveling by 3D manual feed can be cleared.
5.1.4.3

Tool tip center (C1, C2)

Tool axis reference (TD, R1, R2)
Table reference (VR, H1, H2)

<1> Press the [Clear Pulse] soft key on the 3D manual feed screen.
The Clear Pulse Amount window is displayed.

250
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.1 BASICS FOR SETUP FOR MACHINING

<2> Select the pulse amount you want to clear.

1
2
Tab Selected Pulse Amount

Tool tip center

C1 3
C2

Tool axis reference

TD
R1
4
R2
VR 5
Table reference H1
H2
6
<3> Press the [Clear Selected] soft key.
The selected pulse amount will be cleared.
7
 When you press the [Clear All Axes] soft key, all pulse amounts
displayed will be cleared. 8
MEMO

A1
A2
Z

251
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.1 BASICS FOR SETUP FOR MACHINING

5.1.5 Switching the Control Axis between Paths (Arbitrary

Axis Switching Function)
In multi-path systems, a control axis is normally controlled by each path.
The arbitrary axis switching function allows a specified control axis to be
1 controlled by another path.
The control axis switching mechanism is described using an example of a two-
path system as shown below:
2 Path 1

3 Turret 1

4
Control
axis
5 Workpiece

6 Turret 2

Path 2

7
Path 1 configuration Command behavior of each path Path 2 configuration

8 X1, Z X2

Path 1 releases Z

A1 X1 Z X2

Path 2 obtains Z

A2 X1 X2, Z

Fig. 5.1.5 Mechanism of Control Axis Switching between Paths

Z
• For the control axis switching settings, see "5.16 PROGRAM-
RELATED PARAMETERS" in "FANUC iHMI SETUP MANUAL"
(B-64647EN).
• A released control axis cannot be commanded by the CNC program.
 • A released control axis is displayed as "R" in the program execution
screen.
MEMO
For details, "8.2.2 Current Position/Distance Display Tile".
• An obtained control axis can be controlled by a path that obtained it.
• A control path can be switched between a path that released it and a
path that obtained it.

252
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.2 MDI MODE

5.2

5.2 MDI MODE

The MDI mode allows you to create and execute programs (MDI programs) to
setup for machining.
1
5.2.1 MDI Mode Overview 2
5.2.1

The MDI mode allows you to create and execute MDI programs necessary for the
setup before machining. You can perform basic program edits in the same way as
EDIT mode, and program edits during program execution. 3
• Change or delete words or blocks
• Move the cursor in word units or block units 4
• Edit programs during execution

5
5.2.2 Displaying the MDI Mode Base Screen
6
5.2.2

To display the MDI mode base screen, perform the following:

<1> Switch to MDI mode.

The MDI mode base screen is displayed. 7
Switch to MDI mode

8
A1
A2
Z

253
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.2 MDI MODE

5.2.3 MDI Mode Base Screen

5.2.3

This section describes the structure of the MDI mode base screen.

A B

1
C

2
3 D
E

G
4
F H
5
I

6 Fig. 5.2.3 MDI Mode Base Screen

Table 5.2.3 Name and Function of Each Part on the MDI Mode Base Screen
7 Name Description
A Current position/distance Displays the name, coordinate values, and
display tile remaining travel distance of each axis.
8 B Servo load meter display tile Displays the servo load meter for each control
axis.

A1 C Modal information display tile Displays the modal G codes, other command
values, and sequence numbers.
D Feed information display tile Displays the actual feedrate with numerical values

A2 E
and circular graph.
Spindle information display tile Displays the spindle information with numerical
values and circular/bar graphs.

Z F Status display tile Displays the status specific to the MDI mode.
G Program Display Tile Displays the program currently edited/executed.
H Key input buffer display tile Displays the key input buffer and guidance
messages.
I Soft keys You can display information and rewind.

254
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.2 MDI MODE

5.2.4 Switching Display of Modal Information Display Tile

5.2.4

In MDI mode, you can expand the display area of modal information to show more
information. If the display is expanded, the servo load meter display area is
hidden.
1
<1> Press the [Change Info] soft key.
Another set of soft keys appears.
2
3
<2> Press the [Load Meter] soft key.
The display contents of modal information change.
4
5
6
7
8
5.2.5 Editing MDI Programs
A1
5.2.5

You can create programs with a maximum of 511 characters including "O0000"
that will be inserted automatically.
Program edit in MDI mode will switch displays during edit and execution.
A2
5.2.5.1 To move the program cursor
On the program display tile, you can move the cursor to the start of the program. Z
<1> Press the [Rewind] soft key.
The cursor moves to the first line of the block.

255
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.2 MDI MODE

5.2.5.2 MDI mode state and display of program display tile

The program display tile will switch as follows during edit and execution.
5.2.5.1

During edit

1
2
3
4 Fig. 5.2.5.2 (a) Program Display Tile (During Edit)

During execution
5
6
7
8 Fig. 5.2.5.2 (b) Program Display Tile (During Execution)

5.2.5.3 Editing programs during execution

A1 5.2.5.2

The program can be edited during automatic operation stop state when parameter
No.3203#5 = 0 is set.

A2
Z

Fig. 5.2.5.3 Program Display Tile

256
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.2 MDI MODE

5.2.5.4 MDI program delete conditions (display O0000 and % only)

The conditions for the MDI program to be deleted are as follows:
5.2.5.3

• When you perform reset while parameter No.3203#7 = 1 (delete program with
reset)
• When you execute an EOR in an MDI program while parameter No.3204#6 = 0 1
(automatically delete program when EOR is executed)
• When you switch to MEM mode and execute an MEM program
2
• When you perform an edit operation in EDIT mode

3
5.2.6 Adding Fixed MDI to Favorites
4
5.2.6

You can create programs and register them as favorite fixed MDIs.

 • You can register up to 50 favorite fixed MDIs. 5

MEMO

<1> Create a program and press the [Add Favorite] soft key.
6
Time and date data is displayed and selected in the Add Favorite Fixed MDI
window. 7
8
<2> Enter the name of the program to be added and press the [OK] soft key.
The favorite fixed MDI is registered. A1
A2
Z

257
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.2 MDI MODE

• To cancel registration, press the [Cancel] soft key.

 • The operation will be canceled, and the window will close when you
switch the path or mode or you open/close the slide while the window

1 MEMO is displayed.
• You may enter up to 32 characters for the name.

2 5.2.6.1 Selecting favorite fixed MDIs

5.2.6.1

<1> Press the [Favorites] soft key.

3 The Favorites window to select a favorite fixed MDI is displayed.

4
<2> Select the name of the fixed MDI from the list and press the [OK] soft key.
5 The selected favorite fixed MDI is inserted into the MDI program, and the
window closes.

6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
• To cancel selection, press the [Cancel] soft key.
 • Hold down <↑> or <↓> to scroll the list.
• Press <PAGE UP> or <PAGE DOWN> to scroll per page. Hold down
MEMO
<PAGE UP> or <PAGE DOWN> to scroll multiple pages.

258
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.2 MDI MODE

5.2.7 Editing Favorite Fixed MDIs

5.2.7

You can select a fixed MDI registered as a favorite from the list to rename or
delete it.

5.2.7.1
5.2.7.1
Renaming favorite fixed MDIs
1
<1> Select a favorite fixed MDI to rename.
<2> Press the [Rename] soft key.
The Rename window is displayed.
2
3
<3> Enter a new name and press the [OK] soft key or <INPUT>. 4
The MDI is renamed, and the window closes.

5
6
7
8
A1
A2
• To cancel change, press the [Cancel] soft key.
 • Hold down <↑> or <↓> to scroll the list. Z
• Press <PAGE UP> or <PAGE DOWN> to scroll per page. Hold down
MEMO
<PAGE UP> or <PAGE DOWN> to scroll multiple pages.

5.2.7.2 Deleting favorite fixed MDIs

5.2.7.2

<1> Select a favorite fixed MDI to delete.

<2> Press the [Delete] soft key.
The delete confirmation window is displayed.

259
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.2 MDI MODE

<3> Press the [Yes] soft key.

The selected favorite fixed MDI is deleted, and the window closes.

1
2
3
4
5
6 • To cancel delete, press the [Cancel] soft key.
 • Hold down <↑> or <↓> to scroll the list.

7 MEMO
• Press <PAGE UP> or <PAGE DOWN> to scroll per page. Hold down
<PAGE UP> or <PAGE DOWN> to scroll multiple pages.

8
5.2.8 Outputting Favorite Fixed MDIs
5.2.8

Output registered favorite fixed MDIs to an external device.

A1
<1> Press the [File Export] soft key.
A2 The Favorites window to output a favorite fixed MDI is displayed.

Z
<2> Select the output destination in the folder tree and press the [OK] soft key.
The output file name input window is displayed.

260
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.2 MDI MODE

1
2
3
4
<3> Enter the name of the file to be output and press the [OK] soft key. 5
All registered favorite fixed MDIs are output, and the window closes.

6
7

• If a file with the same name already exists in the output destination,
8
 the Confirm Overwrite window will appear.
MEMO
Select [Overwrite] or [Rename].
• All registered favorite fixed MDI data will be output to a single file. A1

5.2.9 Inputting Favorite Fixed MDIs

A2
5.2.9

Input favorite fixed MDIs from an external device.

Z
<1> Press the [File Import] soft key.
The Favorites window to input a favorite fixed MDI is displayed.

261
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.2 MDI MODE

<2> Select an external device from where you want to input and the favorite fixed
MDI file to input.

1
2
3
4
5
<3> Press the [OK] soft key.
6 The selected favorite fixed MDI is input, and the window closes.

7  • All registered favorite fixed MDI data will be deleted, and data in the
input file will be registered.
NOTE

8
A1 • If the data in the input file exceeds the maximum allowed number of
registered favorite fixed MDIs (50), all data up to the maximum will be
input.
A2 • If the data set as the input data name exceeds the valid number of
characters (32 characters), all data up to the maximum will be input.
 • In the following cases, the input process will be canceled, and the data

Z MEMO
prior to the input process will remain.
When any data that exceeds the valid number of characters (512 1-
byte characters) is set in the input data preview
When any invalid character (prohibited character) or value is
included in the input data
When an invalid format is used for the input data

262
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.2 MDI MODE

5.2.10 Displaying Histories

5.2.10

MDI programs executed in MDI mode are saved as histories (up to ten per path).

 • When you turn off the device, histories are erased. 1

MEMO

2
3
4
5
6
7
Fig. 5.2.10 Example of an MDI program displayed as history 8
To switch between histories to display, press the [Previous History] or [Next
History] soft key. A1
 Restrictions
If the program's run time is short during MDI program execution, that program may
A2
not stay on the MDI history.
The following shows operation examples that may not leave a program on the
history:
Z
• When a program with an extremely short run time, such as single G90/G91
command, is executed
• When the run time of the target block is extremely short in a single-block
operation

263
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.3 JOG MODE

5.3

5.3 JOG MODE

The JOG mode allows you to perform JOG feed operations (feed operation of

1 continuous travel of the axis through manual operation).

2 5.3.1 Displaying the JOG Mode Base Screen

5.3.1

To display the JOG mode base screen, perform the following:

3 <1> Switch to JOG mode.

The JOG mode base screen is displayed.
4 Switch to JOG mode

5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

264
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.3 JOG MODE

5.3.2 JOG Mode Base Screen

5.3.2

In the JOG mode base screen, you can switch the axis to be displayed, preset
workpiece and relative coordinates, perform JOG feed operations, and change the
type of coordinates to be displayed.

A B 1
C 2
3
E
D
4
G

F H
5
6
Fig. 5.3.2 (a) JOG Mode Base Screen
Table 5.3.2 (a) Name and Function of Each Part on the JOG Mode Base Screen
7
Name Description
A Current position display tile Displays the current position and JOG feedrate of 8
each axis.
B Servo load meter display tile Displays the servo load meter for each control
axis. A1
C Manual feed modal display tile Displays the modal for auxiliary function only.
D Feed information display tile Displays the actual feedrate with numerical values
and circular graph.
A2
E Spindle information display tile Displays the spindle information with numerical
values and circular/bar graphs. Z
F Status display tile Displays the status information.
G Traveling direction guide Displays the guide that shows the traveling
display tile direction of the tools and table.
H Guidance message display tile Displays operation guidance and warning
messages.

• Information displayed on the tiles other than those explained in the

 subsequent sections are the same as the tiles provided in the MEM
mode base screen. For details, see "Chapter 8 MACHINING
MEMO
(PROGRAM EXECUTION)".

265
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.3 JOG MODE

 Current position display tile

The current position display tile in the JOG mode base screen is basically the
same with other base screens except for the remaining travel distance display
section in the MDI and MEM mode base screens. In the JOG mode base screen,
feedrate is displayed instead of the remaining travel distance.
1 B

2 C
A

3
4 Fig. 5.3.2 (b) Current Position Display Tile in JOG Mode Base Screen

5 Table 5.3.2 (b) Current Position Display Tile in JOG Mode Base Screen
Name Description
A Axis name Displays the name of each axis.
6 B Coordinate values Displays the coordinate values for each axis.
C Feedrate Displays the feedrate of each axis.

7  Manual feed modal display tile

The modal display in the JOG mode base screen shows modal only for the
auxiliary function.
8 The number of modals varies depending on the option or parameter settings.
Therefore, two modal display methods are available according to the number of
modals.
A1 The display method is automatically determined based on the option or parameter
settings.

A2
Z

266
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.3 JOG MODE

A D
B E

C 1
When there are not many modals to be displayed 2
B 3
A
D C
F
E
4
G
H
When there are many modals to be displayed
5
Fig. 5.3.2 (c) Modal Display Tile in JOG Mode Base Screen
6
Table 5.3.2 (c) Items Displayed on the Modal Display Tile in the JOG Mode Base
Screen 7
Item Description Note
A
B
Modal T code
Modal S code
Specified T code
Specified S code
8
C Modal M code Specified M code Up to five are set to be
displayed in the A1
parameter settings.
D Modal H code Specified H code
E Modal D code Specified D code A2
F Modal B code Specified second auxiliary Optional functions

G Modal HD.T code

code
Specified spindle position tool The parameter settings
Z
number (HD.T) are required.
H Modal NX.T code Specified next machining tool The parameter settings
number (NX.T) are required.

267
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.4 HND MODE

5.4

5.4 HND MODE

The HND mode allows you to perform feed by handle operation (axis feed

1 according to the amount of rotation of the manual pulse generator).

2  • To use the HND mode, the "first manual handle feed" option is
required. If this option is not available, HND mode will be changed to
MEMO INC mode.

3
5.4.1 Displaying the HND Mode Base Screen
4
5.4.1

To display the HND mode base screen, perform the following:

<1> Switch to HND mode.

5 The HND mode base screen is displayed.
Switch to HND mode

6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

268
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.4 HND MODE

5.4.2 HND Mode Base Screen

5.4.2

In the HND mode base screen, you can switch the axis to be displayed, preset
workpiece and relative coordinates, perform axis feed by handle operations, and
change the type of coordinates to be displayed.

A B 1
C 2
3
E
D
4
G

F H
5
6
Fig. 5.4.2 (a) HND Mode Base Screen
7
Table 5.4.2 (a) Name and Function of Each Part on the HND Mode Base Screen
Name Description
8
A Current position display tile Displays the current position of each axis.
B Servo load meter display tile Displays the servo load meter for each control
axis.
A1
C Manual feed modal display tile Displays the modal for auxiliary function only.
D Feed information display tile Displays the actual feedrate with numerical values A2
and circular graph.
E Spindle information display tile Displays the spindle information with numerical
values and circular/bar graphs. Z
F Status display tile Displays the status information.
G Traveling direction guide Displays the guide that shows the traveling
display tile direction of the tools and table.
H Guidance message display tile Displays operation guidance and warning
messages.

• Information displayed on the tiles other than those explained in the

 subsequent sections are the same as the tiles provided in the MEM
mode base screen. For details, see "Chapter 8 MACHINING
MEMO
(PROGRAM EXECUTION)".

269
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.4 HND MODE

 Current position display tile

The current position display tile in the HND mode base screen is basically the
same with other base screens except for the remaining travel distance display
section in the MDI and MEM mode base screens. In the HND mode base screen,
the remaining travel distance will not be displayed.
1 B

2
A
3
4 Fig. 5.4.2 (b) Current Position Display Tile in HND Mode Base Screen

5 Table 5.4.2 (b) Current Position Display Tile in HND Mode Base Screen
Name Description
A Axis name Displays the name of each axis.
6 B Coordinate values Displays the coordinate values for each axis.

 Manual feed modal display tile

7 The modal display in the HND mode base screen shows modal only for the
auxiliary function.
The number of modals varies depending on the option or parameter settings.
8 Therefore, two modal display methods are available according to the number of
modals.
The display method is automatically determined based on the option or parameter
A1 settings.

A2
Z

270
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.4 HND MODE

A D
B E

C 1
When there are not many modals to be displayed 2
B 3
A
D C
F
E 4
G
H
When there are many modals to be displayed
5
Fig. 5.4.2 (c) Modal Display Tile in the HND Mode Base Screen
6
Table 5.4.2 (c) Items Displayed on the Modal Display Tile in the HND Mode Base
Screen 7
Item Description Note
A
B
Modal T code
Modal S code
Specified T code
Specified S code
8
C Modal M code Specified M code Up to five are set to be
displayed in the A1
parameter settings.
D Modal H code Specified H code
E Modal D code Specified D code A2
F Modal B code Specified second auxiliary Optional functions

G Modal HD.T code

code
Specified spindle position tool The parameter settings
Z
number (HD.T) are required.
H Modal NX.T code Specified next machining tool The parameter settings
number (NX.T) are required.

271
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.5 INC MODE

5.5

5.5 INC MODE

The INC mode allows you to perform incremental feed operations (feed operation

1 in which the axis is moved one step at a time through manual operation).

2  • You cannot use the INC mode when the "first manual handle feed"
option is available. If this option is available, INC mode will be
MEMO changed to HND mode.

3
5.5.1 Displaying the INC Mode Base Screen
4
5.5.1

To display the INC mode base screen, perform the following:

<1> Switch to INC mode.

5 The INC mode base screen is displayed.
Switch to INC mode

6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

272
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.5 INC MODE

5.5.2 INC Mode Base Screen

5.5.2

In the INC mode base screen, you can switch the axis to be displayed, preset
workpiece and relative coordinates, perform incremental feed operations, and
change the type of coordinates to be displayed.

A B 1
C 2
3
E
D
4
G

F H
5
6
Fig. 5.5.2 (a) INC Mode Base Screen
7
Table 5.5.2 (a) Name and Function of Each Part on the INC Mode Base Screen
Name Description 8
A Current position display tile Displays the current position and incremental

B Servo load meter display tile

feedrate of each axis.
Displays the servo load meter for each control
A1
axis.
C
D
Manual feed modal display tile Displays the modal for auxiliary function only.
Feed information display tile Displays the actual feedrate with numerical values
A2
and circular graph.
E Spindle information display tile Displays the spindle information with numerical Z
values and circular/bar graphs.
F Status display tile Displays the status information.
G Traveling direction guide Displays the guide that shows the traveling
display tile direction of the tools and table.
H Guidance message display tile Displays operation guidance and warning
messages.

• Information displayed on the tiles other than those explained in the

 subsequent sections are the same as the tiles provided in the MEM
mode base screen. For details, see "Chapter 8 MACHINING
MEMO
(PROGRAM EXECUTION)".

273
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.5 INC MODE

 Current position display tile

The current position display tile in the INC mode base screen is basically the
same with other base screens except for the remaining travel distance display
section in the MDI and MEM mode base screens. In the INC mode base screen,
feedrate is displayed instead of the remaining travel distance.
1 B

2 C
A
3
4 Fig. 5.5.2 (b) Current Position Display Tile in INC Mode Base Screen

5 Table 5.5.2 (b) Current Position Display Tile in INC Mode Base Screen
Name Description

6 A
B
Axis name
Coordinate values
Displays the name of each axis.
Displays the coordinate values for each axis.
C Feedrate Displays the feedrate of each axis.
7  Manual feed modal display tile
The modal display in the INC mode base screen shows modal only for the

8 auxiliary function.
The number of modals varies depending on the option or parameter settings.
Therefore, two modal display methods are available according to the number of

A1 modals.
The display method is automatically determined based on the option or parameter
settings.

A2
Z

274
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.5 INC MODE

A D
B E

C 1
When there are not many modals to be displayed 2

B 3
A
D C
F
E 4
G
H
When there are many modals to be displayed
5
Fig. 5.5.2 (c) Modal Display Tile in INC Mode Base Screen
6
Table 5.5.2 (c) Items Displayed on the Modal Display Tile in the INC Mode Base
Screen 7
Item Description Note
A Modal T code Specified T code 8
B Modal S code Specified S code
C Modal M code Specified M code Up to five are set to be
displayed in the A1
parameter settings.
D
E
Modal H code
Modal D code
Specified H code
Specified D code
A2
F Modal B code Specified second auxiliary Optional functions
code
Z
G Modal HD.T code Specified spindle position tool The parameter settings
number (HD.T) are required.
H Modal NX.T code Specified next machining tool The parameter settings
number (NX.T) are required.

275
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.6 REF MODE

5.6

5.6 REF MODE

The REF mode allows you to perform manual reference point return operations

1 (moves the axis to the reference point through manual operation). While the feed
axis direction selection signal that corresponds to each axis is set to 1, the axis will
move to the reference point in the preset reference point return speed.

2
5.6.1 Displaying the REF Mode Base Screen
3
5.6.1

To display the REF mode base screen, perform the following:

<1> Switch to REF mode.

4 The REF mode base screen is displayed.
Switch to REF mode

5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

276
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.6 REF MODE

5.6.2 REF Mode Base Screen

5.6.2

In the REF mode base screen, you can switch the axis to be displayed, perform
reference point return operations, and change the type of coordinates to be
displayed.

A B 1
C 2
3
E
D
4
G

F H
5
6
Fig. 5.6.2 (a) REF Mode Base Screen
7
Table 5.6.2 (a) Name and Function of Each Part on the REF Mode Base
Screen 8
Name Description
A Current position display tile Displays the current position and reference point
return speed of each axis. A1
B Servo load meter display tile Displays the servo load meter for each control

C
axis.
Manual feed modal display tile Displays the modal for auxiliary function only.
A2
D Feed information display tile Displays the actual feedrate with numerical values
and circular graph. Z
E Spindle information display tile Displays the spindle information with numerical
values and circular/bar graphs.
F Status display tile Displays the status information.
G Traveling direction guide Displays the guide that shows the traveling
display tile direction of the tools and table.
H Guidance message display tile Displays operation guidance and warning
messages.

277
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.6 REF MODE

• Information displayed on the tiles other than those explained in the

 subsequent sections are the same as the tiles provided in the MEM
mode base screen. For details, see "Chapter 8 MACHINING
MEMO
1 (PROGRAM EXECUTION)".

2  Current position display tile

The current position display tile in the REF mode base screen is basically the
same with other base screens except for the remaining travel distance display

3 section in the MDI and MEM mode base screens. In the REF mode base screen,
feedrate is displayed instead of the remaining travel distance.

B
4
C
5 A

6
Fig. 5.6.2 (b) Current Position Display Tile in REF Mode Base Screen

7
Table 5.6.2 (b) Current Position Display Tile in REF Mode Base Screen

8 A Axis name
Name Description
Displays the name of each axis.
B Coordinate values Displays the coordinate values for each axis.
A1 C Feedrate Displays the feedrate of each axis.

 Manual feed modal display tile

A2 The modal display in the REF mode base screen shows modal only for the
auxiliary function.
The number of modals varies depending on the option or parameter settings.
Z Therefore, two modal display methods are available according to the number of
modals.
The display method is automatically determined based on the option or parameter
settings.

278
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.6 REF MODE

A D
B E

C
1

When there are not many modals to be displayed 2

B 3
A
D C
F
E 4
G
H
5
When there are many modals to be displayed

Fig. 5.6.2 (c) Modal Display Tile in REF Mode Base Screen
6
Table 5.6.2 (c) Items Displayed on the Modal Display Tile in the REF Mode Base
Screen 7
Item Description Note
A Modal T code Specified T code 8
B Modal S code Specified S code
C Modal M code Specified M code Up to five are set to be
displayed in the A1
parameter settings.
D
E
Modal H code
Modal D code
Specified H code
Specified D code
A2
F Modal B code Specified second auxiliary Optional functions
code Z
G Modal HD.T code Specified spindle position tool The parameter settings
number (HD.T) are required.
H Modal NX.T code Specified next machining tool The parameter settings
number (NX.T) are required.

279
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

5.7

5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

Machining simulation allows you to check how machining will be performed by the

1 program through animation drawings before you proceed to production machining.

 Advanced machining simulation function
There are the following two machining simulation functions available: "standard
2 function", which can be executed with the iHMI basic functions, and "advanced
function".
The advanced function allows you to perform a 5-axis machining simulation, which
3 has never been achieved with the standard function, and display the cutting
amount and air cut.

4 • To use the advanced function, the optional "advanced machining

simulation function" is required.

5 
NOTE
• When the advanced machining simulation function is used, the
following options cannot be used together. The following options must
be disabled:
Tool management function (64, 240, 1000 pairs)
6 Cycle time estimation function

7  Function list
The following table shows functions that can be executed in the standard
machining simulation function and advanced machining simulation function.
8
Table 5.7 Functions That Can Be Executed in Machining Simulations

A1 Function Machining simulation

Standard Advanced
function function
A2 Milling Milling ○ ○
Turning ○ ○

Z
Multi spindle ○ ○
Turning
○ ×
C-axis rotation simulation
(Not used)
T-type-based complex machining ○ ○
Complex machining
M-type-based complex machining ○ ○
Simultaneous 5-axis machining × ○
Workpiece canned machining ○ ○
simulation
Machining simulation
Background simulation during ○ ○
automatic operation
Support for various NC programs ○ ○
(MGi cycle and macro execution simulations)
Plan view display ○ ○

280
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

Function Machining simulation

Standard Advanced
function function
Side view display ○ ○
3D display
Graphic and program simultaneous display
○
○
○
○
1
Tool path coloring by tool × ○
Specified block coloring × ○ 2
Workpiece and tool path simultaneous display × ○

3
Tool hiding × ○
Workpiece geometry initialization ○ ○
Cutting surface display (cylinder, hollow cylinder) ○ ○
Thread real display
Machining surface high definition display
×
×
○
○
4
Program jump by selecting tool path × ○
Coordinate axis display ○ ○ 5
Current tool display including tip ○ ○
Status display

6
Current program block display ○ ○
Feedrate display ○ ○
Display zoom-in/out by touch operation ○ ○
Display rotation by touch operation
Display move by touch operation
○
○
○
○
7
Automatic scale ○ ○
Single block display ○ ○ 8
○ ○
Simulation speed override (Drawing speed
setting) A1
Air cut distance/time measurement × ○

A2
Cut amount check function × ○
Machining simulation pause ○ ○
3D model accuracy change × ○

Interference check in
Tool (cutting tool) -
workpiece (rapid traverse)
○ ○
Z
machining simulation Tool (cutting tool) - × ○
workpiece (no spindle rotation)
Support for multiple screen sizes ○ ○

○: Executable
×: Not executable

281
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

5.7.1 Displaying the Machining Simulation Screen

5.7.1

The machining simulation screen can be displayed from the EDIT mode base
screen or background edit screen (MEM mode base screen).

1 <1> In the EDIT mode base screen or background edit screen, press the [Change
Screen] soft key.
The machining simulation screen appears.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 • Each time you press the [Change Screen] soft key in the EDIT mode
base screen, the screen switches between the EDIT mode base

A1 screen and machining simulation screen.

• Each time you press the [Change Screen] soft key in the MEM mode
base screen, each MEM mode base screen changes as follows:

A2 Program execution screen (single path display)

↓

Z  Program execution screen (multi-path display)

MEMO
↓
Continuous machining screen
↓
Background edit screen
↓
Machining simulation screen

282
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

5.7.2 Machining Simulation Screen

5.7.2

This section describes the structure of the machining simulation screen.

A
1
C

2
B
3
D

4
E
5
Fig. 5.7.2 Machining simulation screen 6
Table 5.7.2 Name and Function of Each Part on the Machining Simulation Screen
7
Name Description
A Contents title display tile Displays the title and icons.
B Graphic display tile Displays the graphics of blanks and tools 8
as solid models.
When you press the [Change Drawing]
soft key, tool tracks will be displayed. A1
The axis and axis name that indicate the
view coordinates appear at the bottom
left. A2
C Additional information display tile Displays one of the following information:
• Current position (absolute coordinates)
• Current position (relative coordinates) Z
• Modal information
• Cutting amount (only when the
advanced function is enabled)
• Air cut (only when the advanced
function is enabled)
To change the display, select the target
soft key from the set of soft keys that
appear by pressing the [Change Screen]
soft key.
D Machining program display tile Displays the path and contents of the
selected machining program.
E Guidance message display tile Displays operation guidance and warning
messages.

283
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

5.7.2.1 Soft keys on the machining simulation screen

The soft keys on the machining simulation screen are used to perform operations
5.7.2.1

such as conducting machining simulation, changing displays, moving and

zooming in/out graphics.
Use [] and [] to switch the soft key pages.
1
2
Fig. 5.7.2.1 Soft Keys on the Machining Simulation Screen

3 Table 5.7.2.1 Description of the Soft Keys

Name Description
4 Switches between the EDIT mode base screen and machining simulation
screen.
You can also use this key to switch between each of the MEM mode base
5 [Change screens and machining simulation screen.
Screen]

6 If the 2-screen display function in the graphic display is enabled, these

soft keys are used to switch the display between the one screen and two
screens.
[1 -> 2 The [1 -> 2 Screen] soft key appears when the display has one screen,
7 Screen] and the [2 -> 1 Screen] soft key appears when the display has two
screens.

8
[2 -> 1
Screen]
A1 Displays the soft keys to switch display of current position/modal
information display tile.

A2 [Change Info]
You can switch between the animation drawing and tool track drawing of
the solid model. You cannot switch between these drawings during
Z simulation.
[Change
Drawing]
Deletes the tool tracks being drawn.
This is displayed during tool track drawing.

[Delete]
Initializes the machining blank used for animation drawing.
This soft key is displayed during animation drawing of the solid model.

[Initialize
Blank]

284
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

Name Description
Moves the program cursor to the first line.

[Rewind]
Performs machining simulation for the currently selected machining
1
program.

[Start]
Machining simulation will be performed consecutively for each block in
the machining program. 2
Pauses the machining simulation.

3
[Pause]
When you press this key while the machining simulation is stopped,
machining simulation will be performed for a single block.
4
If you press this key while the machining simulation is performed
[Single] consecutively, the machining simulation will stop when the simulation for
the executed block is finished. 5
Stops the machining simulation.

6
[Stop]
Automatically scales the display to show the entire machining blank
graphics in the graphic display tile.
7
[Auto]
Zooms in machining blank graphics.
8

[Zoom In]
A1
Zooms out machining blank graphics.
A2
[Zoom Out]
Displays the soft keys to move the graphics of the machining blank in a
planar motion.
Z
[Move]
Changes the behavior when the graphics are operated using the touch
panel.

[Change
Operation]
Displays the soft keys to select the drawing coordinates.

[Fixed
Rotation]

285
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

Name Description
Displays the soft keys to rotate the graphics of the machining blank.

1 [Arbitrary
Rotation]
Switches the graphic display of the machining blank between the front

2 and the back.

[Front/Back]

3 Switches between the 1/4 cut display and full display of the cylinder blank
and hollow cylinder blank.
This soft key is displayed during animation drawing of the solid model.

4 [Cut Display]
Displays the soft keys to adjust drawing speed.

5 [Drawing
Speed]

6 Displays the soft keys to enable/disable the tool track drawing.

7 [Drawing
Operation]
Displays the soft keys to specify all paths or selected paths for the tool

8 track drawing.

[Drawing

A1 Path]
Enables or disables the interference check.

A2 [Interfere ON/
OFF]

Z Stops or continues the simulation when interference occurs.

[Interfere
Stop/Cont]
Switches between enable/disable of the NC program conversion mode.

[Convert
Program]

286
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

Name Description
Displays the soft keys to adjust the drawing settings.

[Drawing
Setting] 1
Displays the soft keys to adjust the drawing accuracy.

2
[Drawing
Accuracy]
3
5.7.2.2
5.7.2.2
Switching the display between one screen and two screens
If the 2-screen display function in the graphic display is enabled, these soft keys
4
are used to switch the display between the one screen and two screens.
During machining simulation, the [1 -> 2 Screen]/[2 -> 1 Screen] soft key is not
available.
5
<1> Press the [1 -> 2 Screen] or [2 -> 1 Screen] soft key on the first page. 6
Every time you press the soft key, the display is toggled between tone screen
and two screens.
7
8
A1
A2
Z

287
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

Item One-screen display Two-screen display

Drawing
image

1
2 Number One Two (*1) (*2)
of work-

3 pieces
T-type Machining for the main/ Machining for the main/sub-spindle sides is
machin- sub-spindle sides is performed each on a different workpiece screen.

4 ing performed on the same

workpiece screen.
Only a tool that cuts the target workpiece is drawn
on each screen.
M-type Only drawing for one Machining for two workpieces is performed each

5 machin- workpiece is performed. on a different screen.

ing Only a tool that cuts the target workpiece is drawn
on each screen.

6 (*1) Which of the following machining simulations is drawn when two screens are
shown depends on the "SPINDLEn\SCREEN" setting.

• For T-type: Main spindle or sub-spindle

7 • For M-type: First workpiece or second workpiece
Drawing spindle selection with the G1998 command is ignored.

8 (*2) There are two workpieces when two screens are shown. A blank command code is
required for each type as shown below:

• For T-type: Main spindle and sub-spindle

A1 • For M-type: Display side of each workpiece
Change the selected spindle with the machining spindle selection command
(G1992) and specify a blank for each spindle.
A2 The following shows a program description example of using different
workpieces on Spindle 1 and Spindle 2.

Z G1992 S1;
G1904 R6. D200.E100. L200 A0. K0. W0.;


(Machining command)


G1992 S2;
G1904 R6. D200.E100. L200 A0. K0. W0.;


(Machining command)


288
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

5.7.2.3 Switching the operable graphic display between two screens (left and
right)
If the graphic display area has two screens, you can switch the operable area
5.7.2.3

between them (left and right).

1
<1> Press the [Left -> Right] or [Right -> Left] soft key on the first page.
Every time you press the soft key, the operable graphic display is toggled
between left and right. 2
The current operable graphic display shows white at the bottom of the display
area. 3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
The soft keys only available in the operable graphic display area are as follows:
• [Initialize Blank]
• [Delete]
A2
• [Auto]
• [Zoom In]/[Zoom Out]
Z
• [Front/Back]
• [Cut Display]
• Soft keys displayed when [Move] is pressed
• Soft keys displayed when [Fixed Rotation] is pressed
• Soft keys displayed when [Free Rotation] is pressed

289
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

5.7.2.4 Current position/modal information display tile

Information displayed in the current position/modal information display tile is as
5.7.2.4

follows:
 Current Position Display
1 A

2
3
4 B C D

Fig. 5.7.2.4 (a) Current Position Display

5 Table 5.7.2.4 (a) Name and Function of Each Part on the Current Position Display
Name Description
A Title area Displays the title of the current position ([ABSOLUTE] or
6 [RELATIVE]).
You can change the type of coordinates to be displayed to
either [ABSOLUTE] or [RELATIVE].
7 B Axis name Displays the axis name with one letter.
C Extension axis name/ The extended axis name is displayed with a maximum of

8 index two letters.

Displays the index with a maximum of one letter.
D Coordinate values Displays the coordinate value for each controlled axis.

A1
• For details on each item, see "8.2.2 Current Position/Distance

A2 !
CAUTION
Display Tile".
• In the machining simulation screen, distance and G codes will not
be displayed.

Z
 Modal Information Display

A B
C
D
E
F
G
H

Fig. 5.7.2.4 (b) Modal Information Display

290
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

Table 5.7.2.4 (b) Name and Function of Each Part on the Modal Information
Display
Name Description
A Modal G code Displays the specified G code.
B Sequence No. Displays the sequence number. 1
C Modal F code Displays the specified F code.
D
E
Modal S code
Modal M code
Displays the specified S code.
Displays the specified M code.
2
F Modal T code Displays the specified T code.
G Modal H code Displays the specified H code. 3
H Modal D code Displays the specified D code.

4
 Air cut display

• The cutting amount information is displayed only when the advanced

5
 function is enabled.
MEMO
For details on the advanced function, see "Advanced machining
simulation function".
6
7
A
8
B

C A1
Fig. 5.7.2.4 (c) Cutting Amount Display
A2
Table 5.7.2.4 (c) Name and Function of Each Part on the Cutting Amount Display
Name Machining simulation Displayed content
Z
operation
A Total Cutting Amount Executing/Paused Displays the cutting amount
(mm3, inch3) accumulated from the start of
simulation before a block where
the cursor is currently positioned.
It is updated in real time during
simulation.
Stopped Displays the total cutting amount
from the start to the end of
simulation.

291
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

Name Machining simulation Displayed content

operation
B Cut Amount in Path Executing/Paused Displays "-".
(mm3, inch3) Stopped Displays the cutting amount in a

1 position where the path is

selected. (*1)
C Cut Amount/Unit Time Executing/Paused Displays "-".

2 (mm3/s, inch3/s) Stopped Displays the cutting amount per

unit time in a position where the
path is selected. (*1)

3 (*1)If a machining simulation has never been executed before or a block has no tool path,
"-" is shown.
The guidance tile displays "There is no cutting amount information.".
4
• The cutting amount display is cleared when a simulation starts.
• The unit of path selection is the same as that of a path drawn in single
5  block execution.
• The cutting amount value may vary due to a change in the blank figure
MEMO calculation accuracy.
6 • The higher the calculation accuracy is, the more accurate cutting
amount value is gained.

7  Air cut display

8 • The air cut information is displayed only when the advanced function
 is enabled.
For details on the advanced function, see "Advanced machining
A1 MEMO
simulation function".

A2
A
Z B
C
D
E
F

Fig. 5.7.2.4 (d) Air Cut Display

292
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

Table 5.7.2.4 (d) Name and Function of Each Part on the Air Cut Display
Name Machining simulation Displayed content
operation
A Total air cut time (minute, Executing/Paused Displays the air cut time
second, millisecond) accumulated from the simulation
execution start before a block
1
where the cursor is currently
positioned.
It is updated in real time during
2
simulation.
Stopped Displays the total air cut time from
the start to the end of simulation.
3
B Time in Selected Path Executing/Paused Displays "-".
(minute, second,
millisecond)
Stopped Displays the air cut time in a 4
position where the path is
selected. (*1)
C Ratio (%) Executing/Paused Displays "-". 5
Stopped Displays the ratio of the air cut
time in a position where the path
is selected to the total air cut time 6
from the start to the end of
simulation. (*1)
D Total air cut distance Executing/Paused Displays the air cut distance 7
(mm, inch) accumulated from the simulation

8
execution start before a block
where the cursor is currently
positioned.
It is updated in real time during
simulation. A1
Stopped Displays the total air cut distance
from the start to the end of
simulation. A2
E Distance in Path Executing/Paused Displays "-".
(mm, inch) Stopped Displays the air cut distance in a
position where the path is
Z
selected. (*1)
F Ratio (%) Executing/Paused Displays "-".
Stopped Displays the ratio of the air cut
distance in a position where the
path is selected to the total air cut
distance from the start to the end
of simulation. (*1)

(*1)If a machining simulation has never been executed before or a block has no tool path,
"-" is shown.
The guidance tile displays "There is no air cut information.".

293
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

• The air cut display is cleared when a simulation starts.

• The unit of path selection is the same as that of a path drawn in single

 block execution.

1 MEMO
• The air cut time or distance value may vary due to a change in the
blank figure calculation accuracy.
• The higher the calculation accuracy is, the more accurate air cut time
or distance value is gained.
2
 Changing the view of the additional information display tile
3 Change the view of the additional information display tile.

4 <1> Press the [Change Info] soft key on the first page of soft keys.
The soft keys to switch display of the current position/modal information display
tile appear.
5
6
<2> Perform one of the following to switch the display:
• Press the [Position Absolute] soft key.
7 Position will be displayed in absolute coordinates.

8
A1 • Press the [Position Relative] soft key.
Position will be displayed in relative coordinates.
A2
Z
• Press the [Modal] soft key.
The screen switches to modal information display.

294
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

• Press the [Cutting Amount] soft key.

The screen switches to cutting amount display.
If you are drawing a tool path, the tool path color changes as follows:
• "Upper threshold tool path" is applied to areas where the value is greater
than "Upper threshold [mm³/s]" 1
• "Lower threshold tool path color" is applied to areas where the value is
smaller than "Lower threshold [mm³/s]"
• An intermediate color between "Upper threshold tool path" and "Lower
2
threshold tool path color" is applied to areas where the value is between
"Upper threshold [mm³/s]" and "Lower threshold [mm³/s]"
The tool path color does not change in rapid traverse areas.
3
4
5
• Press the [Air Cut] soft key.
The screen switches to air cut display.
If you are drawing a tool path, the tool path color changes as follows: 6
• "Air cut tool path color" is applied to air cut areas.
• "Cutting tool path color" is applied to non-air cut areas. 7
The tool path color does not change in rapid traverse areas.

8
A1
• When all items cannot be displayed within a single page, [Show Next
Page] will be displayed for modal information display, and [Show Next
Axis] will be displayed for current position display. Click the [Show A2
Next Page] or [Show Next Axis] soft key to display those items that
could not be displayed on the first page onto the next page.
• Press the [Back] soft key to return back to the first page of the soft Z
keys.
 • You can change the unit displayed in the air cut display tile or cutting
amount display tile between mm and inch by changing bit 2 of
MEMO
parameter No. 0.
If bit 2 of parameter No. 0 is changed after machining simulation, the
machining status and air cut/cutting amount information of the blank is
cleared.
The unit input in the machining simulation (cutting amount/air cut)
screen that is displayed from the setting slide complies with the bit 2
setting of parameter No. 0.

295
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

5.7.2.5 Machining program display tile

Information displayed in the machining program display tile is as follows:
5.7.2.5

A
B
1
2
C

3
4
5
Fig. 5.7.2.5 Machining program display tile
6 Table 5.7.2.5 Machining Program Display
Name Description
7 A Program storage folder Displays the folder path where the displayed program is
path stored.
B Program number/ Displays the program number or optional program name.
8 optional program name
C Program text display Displays the program text.

A1  Program displayed during multi-edit

If you move to the machining simulation screen when editing multiple programs
simultaneously on the EDIT mode base screen, the displayed program is as
A2 follows:
• When editing multiple programs simultaneously: The focused program is
displayed. Since machining simulation is executed on a single path, the program
Z on the selected path is displayed.
• When editing multi-path programs simultaneously: The main program on the
selected path is displayed.

296
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

5.7.2.6 Thread real display

With the advanced machining simulation function, you can display the thread after
threading like a real one.
The following figure shows the thread display difference between with and without
the advanced function setting.
1
2
3
4

When the advanced function is disabled When the advanced function is enabled 5
Fig. 5.7.2.6 Thread Display Example
6
 • For details on the advanced function, see "Advanced machining
simulation function".
7
MEMO

8
5.7.3 Performing Machining Simulation
A1
5.7.3

You can perform machining simulation for the machining program displayed in the
machining program display tile.
There are two ways to perform a machining simulation; consecutive simulation of
each block within the machining program and single block simulation. A2
 To consecutively simulate each block
<1> Press the [Start] soft key on the first page.
Machining simulation will be performed consecutively for each block in the
Z
selected machining program.

297
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

 To simulate a single block only

<1> Press the [Single] soft key on the first page while the machining simulation is
stopped.
Machining simulation will be performed for a single block.
1
2
• When the machining simulation is stopped, you may select another

3  machining program on the Program Manager slide.

• If you press the [Single] soft key while the machining simulation is
MEMO performed consecutively, the machining simulation will stop when the
simulation for the block currently executed is finished.
4
 Executing a simultaneous 5-axis machining simulation
5 With the advanced machining simulation function, you can execute a
simultaneous 5-axis machining simulation.
The following shows a program example.
6
<IMP-BLADE>

7
G49
S1000T4M6
G54
G43.5
G00X-32.1297Y-79.6253Z32.3199I-0.0127J0.0490K0.9987
8 G00X-32.1011Y-79.7359Z30.0645I-0.0127J0.0490K0.9987
G00X-32.0725Y-79.8464Z27.8091I-0.0127J0.0490K0.9987
G00X-32.0438Y-79.9570Z25.5537I-0.0127J0.0490K0.9987
G00X-32.0152Y-80.0676Z23.2983I-0.0127J0.0490K0.9987

A1 G00X-31.9866Y-80.1781Z21.0429I-0.0127J0.0490K0.9987
G00X-31.9580Y-80.2887Z18.7875I-0.0127J0.0490K0.9987
G00X-31.9293Y-80.3993Z16.5321I-0.0127J0.0490K0.9987
G00X-31.9007Y-80.5098Z14.2767I-0.0127J0.0490K0.9987

A2 G00X-31.8721Y-80.6204Z12.0213I-0.0127J0.0490K0.9987
G00X-31.8434Y-80.7309Z9.7659I-0.0127J0.0490K0.9987
G00X-31.8148Y-80.8415Z7.5105I-0.0127J0.0490K0.9987
G01X-31.7895Y-80.9394Z5.5131I-0.0127J0.0490K0.9987F900

Z
G01X-31.7768Y-80.9884Z4.5144I-0.0127J0.0490K0.9987F900
G01X-31.0387Y-81.1347Z4.5590I-0.0127J0.0490K0.9987F1500
G01X-30.7016Y-80.9376Z4.5812I-0.0127J0.0490K0.9987F1500
G01X-30.6084Y-80.8315Z4.5877I-0.0141J0.0473K0.9988F1500
G01X-30.5152Y-80.7254Z4.5941I-0.0155J0.0457K0.9988F1500
G01X-30.4220Y-80.6193Z4.6006I-0.0170J0.0440K0.9989F1500

 • For details on the advanced function, see "Advanced machining

simulation function".
MEMO

298
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

5.7.4 Operations on the Machining Simulation Screen

5.7.4

The following operations can be performed on the machining simulation screen.

• Rewinding a machining program
• Initialize the blank used for the drawing
1
• Move the displayed position of the graphics of the machining blank
• Switching the drawing coordinates
• Rotate the graphics of the machining blank
2
• Zooming in/out the graphics of the machining blank
• Automatic scaling of the graphics of the machining blank
3
• Switching display between cylinder blank/hollow cylinder blank
• Move the cursor with MDI keys 4
• Switch the blank color
• Switching the display direction of graphics 5
5.7.4.1 Rewinding a machining program
5.7.4.1

Move the cursor to the first block of the selected machining program. 6
<1> Press the [Rewind] soft key on the first page. 7
The cursor moves to the first word in the first block of the program (= program
name).
8
A1
5.7.4.2 Initializing the machining blank
Initialize the machining blank used for machining simulation.
5.7.4.2

A2
<1> Press the [Initialize Blank] soft key on the first page.
The executed results of the machining simulation are erased, and the graphics Z
of the machining blank will be redrawn.

299
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

5.7.4.3 Moving the displayed position of machining blank graphics

Move the displayed position of the graphics of the machining blank.
5.7.4.3

<1> Press the [Move] soft key on the second page.

1 The soft keys to move the graphics of the machining blanks in a planar motion
appear.

2
3 <2> Press the [Upper], [Lower], [Left], [Right], or [Center] soft key.
The graphics of the machining blank will move in the corresponding direction.

4
5 Table 5.7.4.3 Movement of the Displayed Position of Graphics
Name Description

6 The graphics of the machining blank will move upward.

7 [Upper]
The graphics of the machining blank will move downward.

8 [Lower]
The graphics of the machining blank will move left.
A1
[Left]
A2 The graphics of the machining blank will move right.

Z [Right]
The center of the graphics of the machining blank will move to the center
of the graphic display tile. Scaling will not be changed.

[Center]
Returns to the second page of the soft keys.

[Back]

300
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

5.7.4.4 Switching the drawing coordinates

Select the drawing coordinates to display the graphics.
5.7.4.4

<1> Press the [Fixed Rotation] soft key on the second page.
The soft keys to select the drawing coordinates appear. 1
2
<2> Press the soft key to switch the drawing coordinates.
3
4
Table 5.7.4.4 Switching the Drawing Coordinates
Name Description
5
Selects the XY plane.
6
[XY]
Selects the ZY plane. 7
[ZY] 8
Selects the YZ plane.

[YZ]
A1
Selects the XZ plane.
A2
[XZ]
Selects the ZX plane. Z
[ZX]
Selects the isometric coordinates in which the +Z axis faces upward.

[Isometric XY]
Selects the isometric coordinates in which the +Z axis faces upward.
However, the view will be opposite.

[Isometric XY]

301
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

Name Description
Selects the isometric coordinates in which the +X axis faces upward.

1 [Isometric YZ]
Ends the switching of the drawing coordinates.

2 [Back]

5.7.4.5 Rotating the graphics of the machining blank

3 5.7.4.5

You can rotate the graphics of the machining blank in an arbitrary direction.

4 <1> Press the [Arbitrary Rotation] soft key on the second page.
The soft keys to rotate the graphics of the machining blank appear.

5
6
<2> Press the soft key to rotate the graphics of the machining blank.
Each time you press the soft key, the graphics of the machining blank will rotate
7 in the corresponding direction.

8
A1 Table 5.7.4.5 Rotation of the Graphics
Name Description
A2 The graphics of the machining blank will rotate in a counterclockwise
direction with the right-hand side (when facing the screen) as the rotation
axis.
Z [Upper]
The graphics of the machining blank will rotate in a clockwise direction
with the right-hand side (when facing the screen) as the rotation axis.

[Lower]
The graphics of the machining blank will rotate in a counterclockwise
direction with the upper direction of the screen as the rotation axis.

[Left]
The graphics of the machining blank will rotate in a clockwise direction
with the upper direction of the screen as the rotation axis.

[Right]

302
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

Name Description
The graphics of the machining blank will rotate in a counterclockwise
direction with the near side (when facing the screen) as the rotation axis.

[CW]
The graphics of the machining blank will rotate in a clockwise direction
1
with the near side (when facing the screen) as the rotation axis.

[CCW]
2
Ends the rotation of the graphics.

3
[Back]

5.7.4.6 Zooming in/out the graphics of the machining blank 4

You can zoom in/out to display the graphics of the machining blank.
5.7.4.6

5
 To zoom into the graphics
<1> Press the [Zoom In] soft key on the second page.
The drawing scale will be enlarged each time you press this soft key.
6
7
 To zoom out from the graphics
8
<1> Press the [Zoom Out] soft key on the second page.
The drawing scale will be reduced each time you press this soft key.
A1
A2
5.7.4.7 Automatic scaling of the graphics of the machining blank
5.7.4.7

You can perform automatic scaling so that the entire graphics of the machining Z
blank will be displayed within the graphic display tile.

<1> Press the [Auto] soft key on the second page.

303
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

5.7.4.8 Switching the display between the blank cutting surface and cylinder
blank/hollow cylinder blank
You can display the cutting surface of the blank.
The cutting surface display can be adjusted even during machining simulation.
The soft keys displayed when the [Cut Display] soft key is pressed switch
1 automatically depending on the blank figure currently displayed, showing the
cutting surface in a different method.
Then, pressing the [Cut Display] soft key again displays the soft keys according to
2 the current blank figure.
If you change the blank figure while the cutting surface is displayed, the cutting
surface display is reset.
3 If you try to display the cutting surface while the blank is shown transparent, the
transmission display is temporarily reset.
After the cutting surface display is reset, the blank is displayed at the set
4 transmission rate.

For rectangular blanks

5 You can select the YZ plane, ZX plane, or XY plane for the cutting surface.
Use the soft key to enable or disable the cutting surface.
A semi-transparent plane is displayed for the enabled cutting surface.
6 If you return to the set of [Cut Display] soft keys, only the cutting surface state will
remain. Up to two cutting surfaces can be enabled simultaneously.

7 The default cutting surface is located passing through the center of the blank, and
you can adjust it using the soft key only within the displayed blank area.
A travel distance per soft key is 1/50 of the length of the blank corresponding to
8 the moving axis.
The length target varies depending on the plane: Blank width for the YZ plane,
blank depth for the ZX plane, and blank height for the XY plane. Even if the cutting
A1 surface is enabled or disabled, the position of the cutting surface is retained. The
cutting surface is set at the default position right after power-on. If you change the
blank figure, the cutting position returns to the default.
A2
For non-rectangular blanks
When a non-rectangular blank, such as a cylinder blank or hollow cylinder blank,
Z is displayed, you can cut 1/4 of the blank from the workpiece center to display.
The cutting starting angle can be specified with the soft keys.

You can switch between the 1/4 cut display and full display of the cylinder blank
and hollow cylinder blank.
In the setting slide, you can set whether to allow changing of the starting angle for
the cut display.
For details on the setting method, see "5.7.7 Changing Settings for Machining
Simulation".

304
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

<1> Press the [Cut Display] soft key on the second page.

<2> Press any soft key to move the blank or change the display. 1
2

Table 5.7.4.8 (a) Soft Keys Displayed When the [Cut Display] Soft Key Is Pressed 3
(For Rectangular Blanks)
Name Description 4
Sets or resets the YZ plane to a cutting surface.
The transmission display is reset when the cutting surface is enabled.
5
[YZ]
Moves the YZ plane in the +X direction by 1/50 of the rectangular blank
width.
6
[+X] 7
Moves the YZ plane in the -X direction by 1/50 of the rectangular blank
width.
8
[-X]
Sets or resets the ZX plane to a cutting surface. The transmission display
is reset when the cutting surface is enabled.
A1
[ZX] A2
Moves the ZX plane in the +Y direction by 1/50 of the rectangular blank
width.
Z
[+Y]
Moves the ZX plane in the -Y direction by 1/50 of the rectangular blank
width.

[-Y]
Sets or resets the XY plane to a cutting surface.
The transmission display is reset when the cutting surface is enabled.

[XY]

305
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

Name Description
Moves the XY plane in the +Z direction by 1/50 of the rectangular blank
width.

1 [+Z]
Moves the XY plane in the -Z direction by 1/50 of the rectangular blank
width.
2
[-Z]

3
Table 5.7.4.8 (b) Soft Keys Displayed When the [Cut Display] Soft Key Is Pressed
(For Cylinder Blanks/Hollow Cylinder Blanks)
4 Name Description
Ends the cut display.

5 If the transmission rate is set, the blank is displayed again at the set rate.

[OFF]
6 Sets the starting angle of the cut display to 0°.
If the blank is displayed transparent, the transmission display is reset.

7 [0°]
Sets the starting angle of the cut display to 90°.

8 If the blank is displayed transparent, the transmission display is reset.

[90°]
A1 Sets the starting angle of the cut display to 180°.
If the blank is displayed transparent, the transmission display is reset.

A2 [180°]
Sets the starting angle of the cut display to 270°.

Z If the blank is displayed transparent, the transmission display is reset.

[270°]

• Make sure to switch the display for cylinder blank and hollow cylinder


NOTE
blank before you perform machining simulation.
• If the starting angle for the cut display is changed to off, it will be 0
degrees the next time the machining simulation screen is displayed.

306
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

5.7.4.9 MDI key operations on the machining simulation screen

You can move the cursor using the MDI keys on the machining simulation screen.
5.7.4.8

The basic operation is as follows.

1
 • You cannot move the cursor during machining simulation or
emergency stop.
NOTE
2
Movement by Cursor Move Keys
3
Table 5.7.4.9 (a) Movement by Cursor Move Keys

<↑>
MDI keys Operation
The cursor moves one block above. Scrolls upward.
4
<↓> The cursor moves one block below. Scrolls downward.
5
Movement by Page Switch Keys
Table 5.7.4.9 (b) Movement by Page Switch Keys 6
MDI keys Operation
<PAGE UP> The cursor moves to the top end block of the previous page.
When the movement goes beyond the first block, the cursor 7
will be moved to the first block.
<PAGE DOWN> The cursor moves to the block of the next page. When the
movement goes beyond EOR, the cursor will be moved to the 8
block with EOR. If the cursor cannot move to the EOR block of
the next page, it will be moved to the top end block. If the
cursor can move to the EOR block of the next page, it will be A1
moved to the bottom end block.

A2
5.7.4.10 Switching the blank color
On the setting slide, you can switch the color of the blank displayed on the graphic Z
5.7.4.9

display tile between gray and green. For details on the setting method, see "5.7.7
Changing Settings for Machining Simulation".

5.7.4.11 Switching the display direction of graphics

You can switch the display direction of graphics on the graphic display tile
5.7.4.10

between the front and the back.

307
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

<1> Press the [Front/Back] soft key.

Every time you press it, the display direction is toggled between the front and
the back.

1
2
 • Right after you move to the simulation screen, the front is shown.
• If you switch to the tool track drawing when the back is displayed,
MEMO the back display status is released.
3
5.7.4.12 Operating graphics using the touch panel
4 5.7.4.11

You can perform the following operations on the touch panel for the graphics of
the machining blank. There are the two operation methods: Parallel shift mode

5 and rotation mode.

• Zooming out on the machining blank
• Zooming in on the machining blank
6 • Parallel shifting the machining blank
• Rotating the machining blank
7
8  • The operation method varies depending on whether or not the model
can support multi-touch operation.
MEMO

A1  Switching the operation mode

You can switch the touch panel operation mode between the parallel shift mode
A2 and rotation mode.

<1> Press the [Change Operation] soft key.

Z Every time you press it, the operation mode is switched to another.

308
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

 How to operate graphics on models that support multi-touch operation

Table 5.7.4.12 (a) For Models That Support Multi-touch Operation
Operation Behavior in parallel shift mode Behavior in rotation mode
Pinch Zoom out Zoom out
Stretch Zoom in Zoom in 1
Drag Parallel shift Rotation
• Parallel shifts the graphics in
the direction of being slided.
• Rotates the graphics in the
direction of being slided. 2
This is the same behavior as
when you press the [Upper],
[Lower], [Left], or [Right] soft 3
key of the [Arbitrary Rotation]
soft key.
4
 How to operate graphics on models that do not support multi-touch
operation 5
Table 5.7.4.12 (b) For Models That Do Not Support Multi-touch Operation
Operation Behavior in parallel shift mode Behavior in rotation mode 6
Tap Zoom out Zoom out
Double tap Zoom in Zoom in
Drag Parallel shift Rotation
7
• Parallel shifts the graphics in • Rotates the graphics in the
the direction of being slided. direction of being slided.
This is the same behavior as 8
when you press the [Upper],
[Lower], [Left], or [Right] soft
key of the [Arbitrary Rotation] A1
soft key.

A2
Z

309
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

• Stretch is an operation of touching the touch panel with two fingers

and moving them away from each other.

1
2 • Pinch is an operation of touching the touch panel with two fingers and
moving them toward each other.
3 
MEMO

4
• Drag is an operation of sliding the finger while it touches the touch
5 panel.

6
7
5.7.4.13 Interference check
8 5.7.4.12

When the interference check is enabled, if interference is detected, the "Tool and
workpiece interfered during rapid traverse feed." message appears, pausing or
continuing the machining simulation. A location where the blank interferes with the
A1 tool is displayed in the same color as the tool.
You can use the soft keys to enable/disable the interference check and stop/
continue the check when interference occurs.
A2
• For details of other display tiles, see "5.7.2 Machining Simulation

Z Screen".
• For details of soft keys, see "5.7.2.1 Soft keys on the machining
simulation screen".
 • To support single path, two spindles, you must set a value from the
range 16 to 20 for parameter No.14706 as the workpiece coordinates
MEMO
for the main spindle side. When you are using a sub-spindle, you must
also set a value from the range 16 to 20 for parameter No.14707 (in
addition to No.14706) as the workpiece coordinates for the sub-
spindle side.

310
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

 Enabling/disabling the interference check

You can select whether or not to run the interference check during machining
5.7.4.13

simulation drawing.

<1> Press the [Interfere ON/OFF] soft key. 1

Every time you press it, the interference check is toggled between enabled/
disabled.
2
3
 • The interference check enable/disable status is retained even
when the device is turned off. 4
MEMO

 Changing the behavior when interference occurs

5
Select whether to stop or continue the machining simulation when interference
5.7.4.14

occurs. 6
<1> Press the [Interfere Stop/Cont] soft key.
Every time you press it, the simulation is toggled between stopped/continued. 7
8

• Even if you press the [Interfere Stop/Cont] soft key when the A1
 interference check is disabled, the simulation is not toggled
between stopped/continued.
MEMO • The interference check enable/disable status is retained even A2
when the device is turned off.

Z
5.7.4.14 Switching the drawing speed
You can change the drawing speed for machining simulation.
5.7.4.15

<1> Press the [Drawing Speed] soft key.

The soft keys to switch the drawing speed appear.

311
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

<2> Press the [Speed+] or [Speed-] soft key.

To increase the drawing speed
Each time you press the [Speed+] soft key, drawing speed will increase.

1
To decrease the drawing speed
2 Each time you press the [Speed-] soft key, drawing speed will decrease.

3
4
 • Drawing speed is divided into ten steps.
• Drawing speed is the maximum right after the machining simulation
MEMO screen is displayed.
5
6 5.7.5 Tool Track Drawing
5.7.5

You can draw tool tracks on the graphic display tile and then execute machining
simulations.
7
8
A1
A2
Z

Fig. 5.7.5 Tool Track Drawing

• You can change the tool path color at a timing of tool change. Four
different tool path colors can be specified in the setting slide. For
 example, the first color is used when machining simulation starts, the
second color is used after the first tool change is performed, and the
MEMO
third color is used after the next tool change is performed. When all
the colors are used up, it returns to the first color.

312
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

5.7.5.1 Switching the drawings

You can switch between the animation drawing and tool track drawing of the solid
5.7.5.1

model.

1
<1> Press the [Change Drawing] soft key.
The display will change each time you press the [Change Drawing] soft key.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
<2> Press the [Start] soft key.
Machining simulation starts.

313
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

• If you press the [Change Drawing] soft key during machining

simulation, the following behavior is applied:
When switching from the Machining Simulation (Animation)

1 screen to the Machining Simulation (Tool Path) screen

The display will switch to path drawing only. Since the blank
machining process is running background, if you change the

2  display back to the animation screen, you can check the blank
machining status.
MEMO When switching from the Machining Simulation (Tool Path)
screen to the Machining Simulation (Animation) screen
3 The display will switch to animation drawing, and machining
simulation will continue.
If no tool data is defined in simulation on the tool path screen, the

4 simulation is stopped at a timing when switching to the animation

screen, showing a warning.

5  C axis turning track drawing position

If "TURNING_SIMULATION_C0" is enabled in the setting group
6 [Machining_Simulation] in the machine manufacturer setting file (Setting_data.txt),
the C axis turning track is drawn at the C axis coordinate value "0".

7  • For details on "TURNING_SIMULATION_C0" settings, contact the

machine manufacturer.
MEMO

8
A1
A2
Z

When "TURNING_SIMULATION_C0" is disabled: C axis turning track drawing

position is at C axis coordinate value "100".

314
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

1
2
3
When "TURNING_SIMULATION_C0" is enabled: C axis turning track drawing 4
position is at C axis coordinate value "0".

Fig. 5.7.5.1 Difference in Track Drawing Positions According to

"TURNING_SIMULATION_C0" Settings
5
5.7.5.2 Deleting the tool track drawing 6
You can delete the tool tracks drawn by the machining simulation.
5.7.5.2

<1> Press the [Delete] soft key.

The tool track drawing is deleted.
7
8
A1
 • You can also press the [Delete] soft key to delete the tool track
drawing during machining simulation.
A2
MEMO

5.7.5.3 Specifying paths for the tool track drawing

5.7.5.3

You can specify whether to draw tool tracks for all paths or only selected paths.
Z
<1> Press the [Drawing Path] soft key on the second page.
The soft keys to specify the drawing paths appear.

315
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

<2> Press the soft key to select paths for the tool track drawing.

1 Table 5.7.5.3 Check box for specifying a path

Name Description
2 Draws tool tracks only for paths currently displayed.

3 [Selected
Path]
Draws tool tracks for all paths. Tracks can be drawn for up to four paths.
4
[All Paths]
5 Returns to the second page of the soft keys.

6 [Back]

5.7.5.4 Enabling/disabling the tool track drawing

7 5.7.5.4

You can enable/disable the tool track drawing.

8 <1> Press the [Drawing Operation] soft key on the second page.
The soft keys to enable/disable the tool track drawing appear.

A1
A2 <2> Press the [Drawing Enable] or [Drawing Disable] soft key.

316
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

Table 5.7.5.4 Tool Track Drawing Operation

Name Description
Enables the tool track drawing and starts drawing a tool rack.

[Drawing
1
Enable]
Disables the tool track drawing and stops drawing a tool track.
Drawn tool tracks do not disappear.
2
[Drawing
Disable]
3
Returns to the second page of the soft keys.
4
[Back]

5
 • After the machining simulation screen is displayed, drawing is
enabled. Press [Drawing Disable] to stop drawing a tool track. Press
6
MEMO [Drawing Enable] to restart drawing a tool track from the stop point.

5.7.5.5 Changing the selected tool path

7
You can change the selected tool path.
8
<1> Press the [Previous Path] or [Next Path] soft key.

A1
A2
Table 5.7.5.5 Soft Keys to Change the Selected Tool Path
Name Description
Changes the selected tool path to the previous one.
Z

[Previous Path]
Changes the selected tool path to the next one.

[Next Path]

317
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

5.7.5.6 Checking the program contents by selecting a tool path

The advanced function allows you to check the corresponding program contents
by selecting a tool path.
A tool path is selected in the following condition or method:

1 • There is a tool path processed by the program cursor position command after
the simulation.
• Long-tapping any tool path
2
3  • For details on the advanced function, see "Advanced machining
simulation function".
MEMO

4 B A

5
6
7
8
A1
A2 C D

Z Fig. 5.7.5.6 Tool Path Drawing Example

318
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

Table 5.7.5.6 (a) Items Displayed Related to Tool Path Selection

Item Description
A Selected block • When a tool path is selected after simulation stops
All tool paths drawn by the program cursor position
block command are highlighted with a specified color.
• When a tool path is selected by long-tapping
1
Tool paths drawn in the block, including the selected
tool path, are highlighted with a specified color.
2
The tool path is displayed in the color set in [Selected
Block Color] on the Machining Simulation (Tool Path
Color) window.
3
However, if there is only one tool path, the tool path is
displayed in the color set in [Path Selection Color].
For details, see "5.7.7 Changing Settings for Machining
4
Simulation" - " Tool path color".
B Selected tool path • When a tool path is selected after simulation stops
The first tool path drawn by the program cursor
5
position command is highlighted with a specified
color.
• When a tool path is selected by long-tapping
6
The selected tool path is highlighted with a specified
color.
7
The tool path is displayed in the color set in [Path
Selection Color] on the Machining Simulation (Tool Path
Color) window.
8
For details, see "5.7.7 Changing Settings for Machining

C Program name and block

Simulation" - " Tool path color".
"<Program path name> : <Program block contents>"
A1
information corresponding to the program cursor position is

D Program cursor position

displayed.
For details, see " Relationship between tool path
A2
selection and program cursor position" in the next
section.
Z
 Relationship between tool path selection and program cursor position
The relationship between the selected tool path and the program cursor position
varies as follows depending on whether the program drawing the tool path is a
main program or a subprogram:
• When the selected tool path is drawn by the main program
The program cursor position moves linked with the tool path selection.
• When the selected tool path is drawn by a subprogram
The program cursor position is hidden. Therefore, the selected block is also not
highlighted (Only the path selection is highlighted).

319
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

• When the program cursor position is hidden, the operation is restricted

as follows:
When you execute the key operation, the message “Cannot use

1 
cursors.” appears.
When you press the [Start] or [Single] soft key, the message
"Rewind the program." appears. Press the [Rewind] soft key.
MEMO
The program cursor position moves to the beginning.
2 • It may take time to move the program cursor position.
If this occurs, the message “Loading Program” appears in the program
path display area on the program display tile.
3
 Moving the selection of the tool path
4 To move the selection of the tool path, perform one of the following operations:
• Press the [Previous Path] or [Next Path] soft key.

5 • Press the <↑>, <↓>, <PAGE ↑> or <PAGE ↓> MDI key.

Using the [Previous Path] or [Next Path] soft key

6 The selection of the tool path will move to the previous or next one.
The action at the program cursor position changes as follows depending on
whether the program drawing the selected tool path is a main program or a
7 subprogram:
• Main program: The program cursor position moves accordingly.

8 • Subprogram: The program cursor position is hidden.

A1 • The soft key operation is limited as follows depending on the selected

block that has been executed.
When the tool path at the last block is selected, the [Next Path] soft
key is inactive.
A2  When the tool path at the first block is selected, the [Previous Path]
soft key is inactive.
MEMO
• If the end of subprogram command (M99) is executed in the main
Z program, the operation continues from the beginning of the main
program. Therefore, if you press the [Next Path] soft key at this block
position, the selection of the tool path moves to the first block.

Using the <↑>, <↓>, <PAGE ↑> or <PAGE ↓> MDI key
The program cursor position moves, and the selection of the tool path moves
accordingly.
This operation is available only when the program drawing the tool path is a main
program.

320
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

• If the move destination is one of the following, the program cursor

position moves, but the tool path is not highlighted.
Block that has never been executed after switching to the machining
simulation screen
Command block where a tool path is not drawn by the subprogram 1
 call (M98)
• If you try to move the tool path selection when simulation has been
MEMO
executed at least once after switching to the machining simulation 2
screen and a tool path can be displayed, the message "There is no
corresponding path." appears without highlighting the tool path.
However, if the cursor moves to a block where a tool path is drawn
after a series of key operation, the tool path is highlighted.
3

5.7.5.7 Changing the drawing settings

4
The advanced function allows you to change the following drawing setting items:
• Workpiece and tool path simultaneous display 5
• Tool hiding
This is possible only for animation drawing. 6
These settings will remain until the power is turned off.

7
 • For details on the advanced function, see "Advanced machining
simulation function".
MEMO
8
<1> Press the [Drawing Setting] soft key.
The soft keys to change the drawing settings appear. A1
A2
<2> Press any of the soft keys to change the drawing settings.
Z

Name Description
Shows/hides the tool path.
It is hidden after power-on.
The soft key name changes as follows according to the display state of
[Path OFF->ON]/ the tool path.
[Path ON->OFF] • [Path OFF->ON]: Pressing this key shows the tool path when it is
hidden (Workpiece and tool path simultaneous display)
• [Path ON->OFF]: Pressing this key hides the tool path when it is shown.

321
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

Name Description
Shows/hides the tool.
It is shown after power-on.
The soft key name changes as follows according to the display state of

1 [Tool ON->OFF]/
[Tool OFF->ON]
the tool.
• [Tool ON->OFF]: Pressing this key hides the tool when it is shown.
• [Tool OFF->ON]: Pressing this key shows the tool when it is hidden.

2
5.7.6 Converting the Machining Simulation Results into
3 5.7.6
an NC Program
You can convert the machining simulation results into an NC program.

4 <1> Press the [Convert Program] soft key.

An icon indicating that the NC program conversion mode is enabled is
5 displayed in the contents title display tile.
<2> Start the [Start] or [Single] soft key on the first page to perform machining
simulation.
6 A window appears for you to enter a program name for saving machining
simulation results.

7
8
 • You cannot convert the results in the middle of the program.

A1 MEMO
• Only programs stored in CNC_MEM can be converted.

A2 <3> Enter the program name and press the [OK] soft key.
Machining simulation starts, and the results are output.

322
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

1
2
3
4

<4> After you complete all NC program conversion, press the [Convert Program] 5
soft key and disable the NC program conversion mode.
The NC program conversion mode icon shown in the contents title display tile
will disappear.
6
• If a program with the same name already exists in the copy 7
destination, the Confirm Overwrite window will appear. To copy and

 overwrite the program, select [Overwrite]. To copy the program by

changing its name, select [Rename]. 8
MEMO • If a protected program with the same name already exists in the copy
destination, the Rename Confirmation window will appear. To copy the
program by changing its name, select [Rename].
A1
5.7.6.1 Displaying the machining simulation screen when the NC program
conversion mode is enabled
A2
When the NC program conversion mode is enabled, the [Drawing Speed] soft key
5.7.6.1

is hidden, not allowing you to change the drawing speed. Z

When the NC program conversion mode is disabled, the [Drawing Speed] soft key
is shown, allowing you to change the drawing speed.
The displayed drawing speed icon indicates the drawing speed of the machining
simulation when the NC program conversion mode is disabled.

323
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

5.7.7 Changing Settings for Machining Simulation

5.7.7

The following settings related to the machining simulation screen can be changed
on the setting slide.
• Change the starting angle for the cut display
1 • Change the blank display color

2  • Any changes you make to the settings will be reflected the next time
the machining simulation screen displays.
MEMO
3
<1> Press the [Setting Slide] soft key.
4 The setting slide appears.
<2> Press [Program] in [Group] and then press [Machining Simulation] in

5 [Category].
The machining simulation window appears.

6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

324
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

<3> Change settings.

1
2
3
The following settings can be changed. 4
Settings Description
Change Angle Cutout
Display
You can set whether to allow changing of the starting angle
for the cut display. Enabling this setting allows you to 5
change the starting angle for the cutout display by pressing
the [Cut Display] soft key.
Blank Figure Color You can set the color of the blank for animation drawing. 6

5.7.7.1 Setting the advanced function

7
The following items can be set in the advanced machining simulation function:
• Blank 8
• Blank figure color
• Blank Figure Calc. Precision A1
• Tool path color
• Tool Path Selection A2
• Tool Path
• Cutting amount/air cut Z
• Tool Path Selection
• Cutting Amount
• Air Cut

To display each setting window, select one of the following items in the "Program"
group on the setting slide:
• Machining Simulation (Blank)
• Machining Simulation (Tool Path Color)
• Machining Simulation (Cutting Amount/Air Cut)

325
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

1
2
3
4
5 Fig. 5.7.7.1 (a) Setting Items for the Advanced Machining Simulation Function

6  Blank

7
8
A1
A2 Fig. 5.7.7.1 (b) Machining Simulation (Blank) Window

326
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

The following settings can be changed.

Table 5.7.7.1 (a) Setting Items for Machining Simulation (Blank)

Item Description
Blank figure color You can specify the color of the blank for animation drawing. 1
A change in the setting is reflected after the setting slide is closed.
Blank Figure Calc. Specify the blank figure calculation precision between Lv1 and Lv4.
Precision • To increase the simulation speed: 2
*Lv1 (Fast) - Lv4 (Precise) Select a setting value with a smaller Lv number. However, the
drawing accuracy will be lower.
• To increase the drawing accuracy: 3
Select a setting value with a larger Lv number.
However, the simulation speed will be slower.
The higher the calculation precision is, the higher the 4
interference check accuracy is.
When the drawing speed is slow, the gap in the simulation speed
between different settings will be smaller. 5
A change in the setting is reflected during the next simulation.

6
 Tool path color

7
8
A1
A2
Fig. 5.7.7.1 (c) Machining Simulation (Tool Path Color) Window Z

327
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

The following settings can be changed.

Table 5.7.7.1 (b) Setting Items for Machining Simulation (Tool Path Color)
Item Description
1 Tool Path • Path Selection Color Specify the colors of the tool path and selected block
Selection • Selected Block Color when a tool path is selected.
For details, see "5.7.5.6 Checking the program
2 contents by selecting a tool path".
These items are linked to the items with the same
names on the Machining Simulation (Cutting Amount/
3 Air Cut) window.
Tool Path Rapid Traverse Color Specify the rapid traverse tool path color.

4
Cut Feed Colors Limits the number of cut feed colors (Color 1 to 4).
For example, to change the cut feed color alternately
every time a tool path is changed, set the number of
colors to 2. Every time a tool is changed, Color 1 and
5 Color 2 swap each other. (*1)
Cut Feed Color 1 to 4 Specify the cut feed tool path color.

6 Every time a tool is changed, the color changes

as follows: (*1)
Color 1 -> Color 2 -> Color 3 -> Color 4 -> Color 1 -> ...

7 (When the number of colors is set to 4)

(*1) Tool change: Including when the tool selection command (T/D code) or a Gxxxx tool
definition command is executed
8
 Cutting amount/air cut

A1
A2
Z

Fig. 5.7.7.1 (d) Machining Simulation (Cutting Amount/Air Cut) Window

328
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

The following settings can be changed.

Table 5.7.7.1 (c) Setting Items for Machining Simulation (Cutting Amount/Air Cut)
Setting Description
Tool Path • Path Selection Color Specify the color of the tool path or selected block 1
Selection • Selected Block Color when a tool path is selected.
For details, see "5.7.5.6 Checking the program
contents by selecting a tool path". 2
These items are linked to the items with the same
names on the Machining Simulation (Tool Path Color)
window. 3
Cutting The color specified in this item is applied when the [Cutting Amount] soft key is
Amount pressed.
• Upper threshold [mm³/s] Set the upper limit or lower limit of the cutting amount. 4
• Lower threshold [mm³/s] Specify a positive real value.
If an invalid value or no value is set, it is treated as 0.
The threshold setting unit (mm³/s, inch³/s) complies 5
with the bit 2 (INI) setting of parameter No. 0000.
• Upper threshold tool path Specify the color of the tool path when the cutting
color amount is above the upper limit or below the lower limit 6
• Lower threshold tool path if the cutting amount is displayed.

Air Cut
color
The color specified in this item is applied when the [Air Cut] soft key is pressed.
7
Air cut tool path color Specify the air cut tool path color when the air cut is

Cutting tool path color

displayed.
Specify the non-air cut tool path color when the air cut
8
is displayed.

A1
A2
Z

329
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

5.7.8 Configurable Blank Figures

5.7.8

To perform machining simulation (animation drawing), you need to configure the

blank figure settings.
These data can be set in the "drawing definition" block input in a machining
1 program.
The configurable blank figures are as follows:

2  Rectangular (G code: G1902)

Setting item

3 Table 5.7.8 (a) Setting Items for Rectangular

Item Description Setting area
B Width Width of the rectangular
4 blank. X-axis direction
length (positive value)

5 D Length Length of the

rectangular blank. Y-
axis direction length
(positive value)
6 H Height Height of the
rectangular blank. Z-
axis direction height
7 (positive value)
I Work Origin X X-axis direction
distance from the
8 lower-left corner of the
rectangular to the
workpiece origin
A1 (positive/negative
value)
J Work Origin Y Y-axis direction
A2 distance from the
lower-left corner of the
rectangular to the

Z workpiece origin
(positive/negative
value)
K Work Origin Z Z-axis direction
distance from the
lower-left corner of the
rectangular to the
workpiece origin
(positive/negative
value)

330
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

Setting example
Table 5.7.8 (b) Setting Example of Rectangular
Item Value Displayed blank figure
B Width 100
D Length 100
1
H Height 70
I Work Origin X 50 2
J Work Origin Y 50
K Work Origin Z 0
3
4
 Cylinder (around Z axis) (G code: G1900)
Table 5.7.8 (c) Setting Items for Cylinder (Around Z Axis) 5
Item Description Setting area
D Diameter Diameter of the cylinder
blank (positive value)
6
L Length Length of the cylinder blank
(positive value) 7
K Work Origin Z Blank face thickness (Z-
axis distance between side
face and workpiece origin) 8
W Work Origin Blank back side face
Z(Spn 2) thickness (Z-axis distance
between back side face A1
and workpiece origin)

Setting example A2
Table 5.7.8 (d) Setting Example of Cylinder (Around Z Axis)
Item Value Displayed blank figure Z
D Diameter 50
L Length 100
K Work Origin Z 0
W Work Origin 0
Z(Spn 2)

331
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

 Cylinder (around X axis) (G code: G1906)

This is used to perform simulation where a workpiece rotates around X axis in
the machining center.
The setting items are the same as for cylinder (around Z axis).

1  Cylinder (around Y axis) (G code: G1756)

This is used to perform simulation where a workpiece rotates around Y axis in
2 the machining center.
The setting items are the same as for cylinder (around Z axis).

3  Hollow cylinder (around Z axis) (G code: G1901)

Table 5.7.8 (e) Setting Items for Hollow Cylinder (Around Z Axis)
4 Item Description Setting area
D Diameter Diameter of the cylinder
blank (positive value)
5 E Inner Inner diameter of the
Diameter cylinder blank (positive
value)
6 L Length Length of the cylinder
blank (positive value)

7 K Work Origin Z Blank face thickness (Z-

axis distance between
side face and workpiece
origin)
8 W Work Origin Blank back side face
Z(Spn 2) thickness (Z-axis
distance between back
A1 side face and workpiece
origin)

A2 Setting example
Table 5.7.8 (f) Setting Example of Hollow Cylinder (Around Z Axis)
Z Item Value Displayed blank figure
D Diameter 100
E Inner Diameter 80
L Length 200
K Work Origin Z 0
W Work Origin 0
Z(Spn 2)

332
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

 Hollow cylinder (around X axis) (G code: G1907)

This is used to perform simulation where a workpiece rotates around X axis in
the machining center.
The setting items are the same as for hollow cylinder (around Z axis).

 Hollow cylinder (around Y axis) (G code: G1757)

1
This is used to perform simulation where a workpiece rotates around Y axis in
the machining center.
The setting items are the same as for hollow cylinder (around Z axis).
2
 Prism (around Z axis) (G code: G1903) 3
Table 5.7.8 (g) Setting Items for Prism (Around Z Axis)
Item Description Setting area 4
R Number of Number of the corners of the
Corner prism blank.
Positive integer equal to or greater 5
than 3 and equal to or lower than
99
D Diameter Diameter of the prism blank 6
(positive value)
L Length Length of the prism blank (positive
value) 7
A Angle of Angle of one corner of X axis and
Attachment blank
8
A1
A2

K Work Origin Z Blank face thickness (Z-axis Z

distance between side face and
workpiece origin)
W Work Origin Blank back side face thickness (Z-
Z(Spn 2) axis distance between back side
face and workpiece origin)

333
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

Setting example
Table 5.7.8 (h) Setting Example of Prism (Around Z Axis)
Item Value Displayed blank figure
R Number of 6
1 Corner
D Diameter 100

2 L
A
Length
Angle of
100
30
Attachment
3 K Work Origin Z 0
W Work Origin 0
Z(Spn 2)
4
5  Prism (around Y axis) (G code: G1758)
This is used to perform simulation where a workpiece rotates around Y axis in
the machining center.
6 The setting items are the same as for prism (around Z axis).

7
8
A1
A2
Z

334
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

 Hollow prism (around Z axis) (G code: G1904)

Table 5.7.8 (i) Setting Items for Hollow Prism (Around Z Axis)
Item Description Setting area
R Number of Number of the corners of the
Corner prism blank. 1
Positive integer equal to or greater
than 3 and equal to or lower than
99 2
D Diameter Diameter of the prism blank
(positive value)
E Inner Hole diameter of a hollow prism 3
Diameter blank (positive value)
L Length Length of the prism blank (positive
value) 4
A Angle of Angle of one corner of X axis and
Attachment blank
5
6
7

K Work Origin Z Blank face thickness (Z-axis 8

distance between side face and
workpiece origin)
W Work Origin Blank back side face thickness (Z- A1
Z(Spn 2) axis distance between back side
face and workpiece origin)
A2
Z

335
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

Setting example
Table 5.7.8 (j) Setting Example of Hollow Prism (Around Z Axis)
Item Value Displayed blank figure
R Number of 6
1 Corner
D Diameter 100

2 L
E
Length
Inner Diameter
100
20
A Angle of 30
3 Attachment
K Work Origin Z 0
W Work Origin 0
4 Z(Spn 2)

5  Hollow prism (around Y axis) (G code: G1759)

This is used to perform simulation where a workpiece rotates around Y axis in
the machining center.
6 The setting items are the same as for hollow prism (around Z axis).

7  Free cylinder blank (around Z axis) (G code: G1970 to G1976)

Draw a blank where its figure input as +X side cutting surface on ZX plane of a
cylinder rotates around Z axis.
8 Start point (G code: G1970)
Table 5.7.8 (k) Setting Items for Start Point
A1 Item Description
DX Start Point DX X-axis coordinate value of the start point of the free
A2 figure (positive value)
Z Start Point Z Z-axis coordinate value of the start point of the free
figure
Z W Work Origin Z(Spn Blank back side face thickness (Z-axis distance
2) between back side face and workpiece origin)

Line (G code: G1971)

Table 5.7.8 (l) Setting Items for Line
Item Description
D Linear Direction Select the direction of the straight line from the menu
displayed on the soft keys.
DX End Point X-axis coordinate value of the end point of the straight
Coordinate DX line

336
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

Item Description
Z End Point Z-axis coordinate value of the end point of the straight
Coordinate Z line
A Angle Angle of the straight line
L Last Connection [Tangent]: Tangent to the preceding figure
[Nothing]: Not tangent to the preceding figure (Default)
1
M Next Connection [Tangent]: Tangent to the following figure
[Nothing]: Not tangent to the following figure (Default) 2
Arc CW/CCW (G code: G1972/G1973)
Table 5.7.8 (m) Setting Items for Arc CW/CCW
3
Item Description
D End Point X-axis coordinate value of the end point of the arc 4
Coordinate DX
Z End Point
Coordinate Z
Z-axis coordinate value of the end point of the arc
5
R Radius Radius of the arc
CDX Center Point CDX X-axis coordinate value of the center of the arc 6
CZ Center Point CZ Z-axis coordinate value of the center of the arc
L Last Connection [Tangent]: Tangent to the preceding figure
[Nothing]: Not tangent to the preceding figure (Default) 7
M Next Connection [Tangent]: Tangent to the preceding figure
[Nothing]: Not tangent to the following figure (Default)
8
Chamfer (G code: G1974)

Table 5.7.8 (n) Setting Items for Chamfer

A1
Item Description
C Chamfer Chamfer (radius value) A2
Corner R (G code: G1975) Z
Table 5.7.8 (o) Setting Items for Corner R
Item Description
R Corner Radius Corner R radius (radius value, positive value)

337
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

5.7.9 Configurable Tool Figures

To perform machining simulation (animation drawing), you need to configure the
tool figure settings.
Input or view tool geometry size data and execute a cycle or draw an animation.

1 The configurable tools and data are as follows:

Table 5.7.9 (a) Configurable Tools and Data

2 Tool Types Configurable data
Tool mounting position Tool geometry size data

3 General Tool A: Cut Edge Angle

B: Nose Angle

4
5
6 Thread Tool B: Nose Angle

7
8
Grooving Tool W: Tip Width
A1 L: Tip Length

A2
Z
Button turning L: Tip Length
Tool

338
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

Tool Types Configurable data

Tool mounting position Tool geometry size data
Point Corner A: Cut Edge Angle
Straight Tool B: Nose Angle

1
2

Drilling Tool B: Nose Angle

3
4
5

Chamfering D: Cutter Diameter 6

Tool

7
8
Flat End Mill — A1
Tool

A2
Z
Ball End Mill —
Tool

339
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

Tool Types Configurable data

Tool mounting position Tool geometry size data
Tap Tool —

1
2
3 Reamer Tool —

4
5
6 Bore Tool —

7
8
A1 Face Mill Tool —

A2
Z
Versatile Tool W: Tip Width
L: Tip Length

340
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

5.7.10 Settings for Machining Simulation in Command

Synchronization between Multiple Paths
In multi-path systems, the following settings are required to correctly execute
multi-path system machining simulation when rotating a workpiece using a
command from any other path than its own. 1
• Drawing control mode command for machining simulation in synchronization
between multiple paths
Specify one of the following modes to reflect the move command on the source 2
(a path that executes the command) to tool drawing on the destination (a path
where the positional relationship between the tool and the workpiece is affected
by the command from another path): 3
C-axis rotation drawing
This is used to simulate by reflecting a command to the positional relationship
between the tool and the workpiece on a path where the workpiece rotation
4
Cs-axis command has not been executed.
• Drawing control mode cancel command for machining simulation in 5
synchronization between multiple paths
This is used to cancel the drawing control mode command for machining
simulation in synchronization between multiple paths. 6
 Command format
Drawing control mode command (G1994)
7
The machining simulation function performs drawing by reflecting the move of the
q axis on the source (a path that executes the command) to the r axis on the
destination (Path P) using the drawing control mode S.
8
The details of the command format are as follows:
Table 5.7.10 (a) Format of the Drawing Control Mode Command A1
Format G1994 Pp Qq Rr Ss9
Description p Destination path number:
Path to which the travel distance is reflected (You cannot specify the same
A2
path number as the source)
q Source axis:
Target axis number on the source path (You can specify only one of the basic
Z
three axes (X, Y, Z) or C axis. This is required.)
r Destination axis:
Target axis number on the destination path (You can specify only one of the
basic three axes (X, Y, Z) or C axis. This is required.)
s Drawing control mode:
Specify one of the following modes:

341
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

2 C-axis rotation:
This mode is used to simulate by reflecting a command to the positional
relationship between the tool and the workpiece on a path where the
workpiece rotation Cs-axis command has not been executed

1
(See Fig. 5.7.10 (a)).
The coordinate values and coordinate system of the axis on the source (a
path that executes the command) are synchronized with those of the axis
on the destination (Path P).
2
Drawing control mode cancel command (G1995)
3 This is used to cancel the drawing control mode command for machining
simulation in synchronization between multiple paths.
The details of the command format are as follows:
4
Table 5.7.10 (b) Format of the Drawing Control Mode Cancel Command

5 Format
Description
G1995 Pp
p Destination path number:
Path to which the travel distance is reflected

6
 Operations that cancel the drawing control mode

7 The following operations cancel the drawing control mode:

• Performing an operation while the machining simulation screen is displayed

8 • Opening/closing the machining simulation screen

• Switching the mode
• Switching to the Home screen
A1 • Emergency stop ON/OFF
• Power OFF
A2
Z  Even if you perform the following operation, the drawing control mode is
not canceled (but retained):
MEMO • Opening/closing a slide

342
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

 Command execution example

The following shows a command execution example for each drawing control
mode:

Drawing control mode S = 2 (C-axis rotation)

This is a 2-path lathe system with a turret each above and below a workpiece. 1
Path 2 moves as follows when the workpiece spindle is controlled by the C axis on
Path 1:
NC command
2
Animation drawing Actual machine
Path 1 Path 2
䐂 䐂 Tool (Path 1) Tool (Path 1) 3
Workpiece Workpiece

4
Start reflecting the third axis
(C axis) coordinates and the
workpiece coordinates to
5
those on Path 2. Tool (Path 2) Tool (Path 2)

M100P12; M100P12;
6
G1994 P2.Q3. M101P12;
R3. S2.; M code for waiting
M101P12;
7
Cα
α ; 䐂 The tool (Path 1) Tool (Path 1)
䐂 Between these rotates The
commands, the
third axis (C axis)
relatively. Workpiece workpiece
rotates by 8
coordinates and +α°.
the workpiece
coordinates on
Path 1 are
A1
reflected to those The tool (Path 2)
on Path 2. moves to the
relative position
accordingly.
Tool (Path 2)
A2
G1995 P2.; 䐂

Finish reflecting the axis

coordinates and the workpiece
Z
coordinates to Path 2.

Fig. 5.7.10 (a) Execution Example of the Drawing Control Mode S = 2 Command

343
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 5 SETUP FOR MACHINING 
5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION

 Function restrictions
There are the following restrictions on this function:
• The drawing timing may be a little different between the source path and the
destination path.
1 • For the S2 mode, the tool on the destination path is cleared before the source
axis is moved, and it reappears after it is moved. The move of the tool on the
destination path is not drawn.
2 • The coordinates of the destination axis do not change.
• This function cannot be used together with the program coordinate switch
3 function.

4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

344
 SETTING TOOL 1

6
INFORMATION (TOOL 2

SLIDE) 3
4
5
The tool slide allows you to reference and update offset data assigned to tools.

6.1 TOOL SLIDE OVERVIEW .................................................................. 346

6
6.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF TOOL SLIDE ............................................. 347
6.3 UPDATING OFFSET DATA ................................................................ 363 7
8
A

345
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.1 TOOL SLIDE OVERVIEW

6.1

6.1 TOOL SLIDE OVERVIEW

The tool slide allows you to view and update offset data assigned to tools.

1 You can also reference tool geometry size data.

Use the Tool Manager function provided on the home screen to set the
2 !
CAUTION
tool shape size data or tool management data when you want to mount
and make settings for different types of tools.

3
Offset data can be updated by the following methods:

4 • By direct input
• By entering the difference (+ Input)
• By Entering Relative Coordinate Values (Input Counter)
5 • By Entering with Absolute Coordinate Values (Measure)
• By Directly Entering the Tool Offset Measured Value (Tool Offset Measured
6 Value Direct Input B)
• By Importing/Exporting Tool Offset Data (File Import/File Export)

7
8
A1
A2
Z

346
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF TOOL SLIDE

6.2

6.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF TOOL

SLIDE
1
6.2.1 Opening/Closing the Tool Slide
2
6.2.1

 Opening the tool slide

<1> On the operation screen, press the Tool Slide soft key.
The tool slide is displayed. 3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
 • You can also open the tool slide by pressing <MESSAGE>.
MEMO A2
 Closing the tool slide Z
<1> Press the Tool Slide soft key.
The tool slide closes and returns to the operation screen.

347
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF TOOL SLIDE

6.2.2 Displayed Contents on the Tool Slide

6.2.2

6.2.2.1 Table display and coordinate values display

The tool slide has two types of display: table display and coordinate values
6.2.2.1

1 display.
• Table display: Offset number, tool type, tool name, tip (virtual tool tip direction),
and offset data (offset value, shape, wear, etc.) are displayed in table format.
2 • Coordinate values display: Coordinate values are displayed along with the
contents of table display.
3 Press the [Layout] soft key to switch between table display and coordinate values
display.

4
[Layout]

5
6 Table Display Coordinate Values
Display
7 Fig. 6.2.2.1 (a) Switching between Table Display and Coordinate Values Display
 Table Display

8
A1 A

A2
Z

Fig. 6.2.2.1 (b) Table Display

348
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF TOOL SLIDE

Table 6.2.2.1 (a) List of Items in Table Display

Name Description
A Data Table Tile Displays the currently set offset data in table
format.

B
See the following section "Data table tile".
Guidance message display tile Displays warnings and offset information.
1
When you select the cell of each offset data, a
guidance message appears. (*1)
If data is entered outside the range set in the
2
parameter, a warning message appears.

(*1) The functions that cause guidance messages in the tool slide and the 3
priorities for displaying the guidance messages are as follows:

Table 6.2.2.1 (b) Priorities and Functions That Cause Guidance Messages 4
Priority Function that causes a guidance message
1 (Priority: High) Tool offset measured value direct input B 5
2 Fine tune
3 (Priority: Low) Misoperation prevention function
6
 Data Table Tile
This section displays the offset number, tool type, tool name, tip (virtual tool tip
7
direction), and offset data (offset value, shape, wear, etc.) in table format.
• Use <↑>, <↓>, <PAGE UP>, or <PAGE DOWN> to scroll up or down when all 8
table rows cannot be displayed on a single screen.

• Use <←> and <→> or <HOME> and <END> to scroll left or right when all table A1
columns cannot be displayed on a single screen.

A2
Z

349
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF TOOL SLIDE

6.2.2.2 Checking tool offset information

6.2.2.2

A B

1
2
3
4
5
Fig. 6.2.2.2 (a) Data Table Tile
6 A. Tool number, tool type, tool name
The [No.] column displays the offset number.
7 • For M-type: Offset number of the tool length/tool diameter offset data.
• For T-type: Offset number of the shape/wear offset data.
8 If the selection is made by T/H/D codes, the following marks are indicated on the
left of the numerical values.

A1
A2
Z

Fig. 6.2.2.2 (b) Offset Icon

350
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF TOOL SLIDE

 • "Tool Compensation Number" is displayed instead of "No." depending

on the settings.
MEMO

1
Icons that display as tool types indicate the following tools.
Table 6.2.2.2 (a) Tool Types
2
Icon Tool type/ Initial setting Icon Tool type/ Initial setting
name name name name
General Tool GeneralTool Tap Tool TapTool 3
Threading
Tool
ThreadTool Reamer Tool ReamerTool
4
Grooving Tool GrooveTool Boring Tool BoringTool
5
Button turning ButtonTool Face Mill Tool FaceMillTool
Tool

Point Corner StraightTool Thread SideThread

6
Straight Tool Cutting Side

Versatile Tool VersatileTool

Tool
Back Tool BackTool
7
Drilling Tool DrillTool Angle Cutting AngleTool 8
Tool

Chamfering
Tool
ChamferTool Drilling Side
Tool
SideDrill
A1
Flat End Mill FlatEndTool Probe Probe
Tool A2
Ball End Mill BallEndTool
Tool
Z
The tool [Type]/[Name] is obtained from the tool database.
• The value is not updated even if the tool type is changed in the
! maintenance display.
CAUTION • To update the value, the Tool Manager function must be started.
• When only the tool type is obtained, the initial setting name will be
displayed.

B. Offset data input fields

These are the fields where you can enter each offset value.

351
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF TOOL SLIDE

Table 6.2.2.2 (b) For M-type

Title of input field Description
Offset Value Displays the offset value for the offset data.
Offset Value (Shape/ Displays the offset value for the shape/wear offset data.
1 Wear) (*)
Tool Length (*) Displays the offset value for the tool length shape/wear offset
data.
2 Tool Diameter Displays the offset value for the tool diameter shape/wear offset
(Radius/Diameter) data.
(*)
3 Corner R (*) Displays the offset value for the corner R shape/wear offset data.
Tip(*) Displays the virtual tool tip direction.

4 Table 6.2.2.2 (c) For T-type

Title of input field Description

5 X Axis Displays the offset value for the X axis offset data.
Z Axis Displays the offset value for the Z axis offset data.
Y Axis (*) Displays the offset value for the Y axis offset data.
6 Tip R (*) Displays the offset value for the tip R (radius/diameter in a
standard machine).

7 E Axis (*)
5th Axis (*)
Displays the offset value for the 4th axis offset data.
Displays the offset value for the 5th axis offset data.
Tip(*) Displays the virtual tool tip direction.
8 Table 6.2.2.2 (d) When the Complex Machining Offset Is Valid
Title of input field Description
A1 X Axis Displays the offset value for the X axis offset data.
Z Axis Displays the offset value for the Z axis offset data.

A2 Y Axis (*)
Tip R (Diameter/
Displays the offset value for the Y axis offset data.
Displays the offset value for the tip R.
Radius) (*)

Z Corner R (*) Displays the offset value for the corner R offset data.
E Axis (*) Displays the offset value for the 4th axis offset data.
5th Axis (*) Displays the offset value for the 5th axis offset data.
Tip (*) Displays the virtual tool tip direction.

*: Displayed only when the option is enabled.

You can set the input range to prevent an accident due to mistype made when
entering each offset value.
Specify the input range in parameter Nos. 10000 to 10303.

The valid offset data input range is based on the minimum setting unit of each
axis.

352
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF TOOL SLIDE

If no input range is set, the valid input range is determined by the minimum setting
unit.
When you select the cell of each offset data, a guidance message appears.
If the entered value is outside the valid range, a warning message appears.
See "■ Input prohibition when a change in the input value amount exceeds the
limit". 1
If you change the input range while the tool slide is displayed, the change is
applied when you select another cell or re-display the tool slide. 2
It is not reflected immediately.

The following apply to operations that change the input range while the tool slide 3
is displayed:
• Change the parameter using G10
• Change the parameter using signal operation
4
• Change the parameter on another application
5
The following apply to operations that re-display the tool slide:
• Open/close the tool slide 6
• Change the path
• Display the iHMI screen again after displaying another application
7
 Settings to enable the unintended operation prevention function
The allowable value range and setting value to enable the unintended operation 8
prevention function for each item are as follows:
Table 6.2.2.2 (e) Allowable Values and Setting Values to Enable the
Unintended Operation Prevention Function
A1
Item Allowable value Setting value to enable the unintended
operation prevention function A2
Start 0 to the maximum • Other than 0
number of tool offset • Start is equal to or smaller than End.
End
pairs (*1) • Less than the maximum number of tool offset Z
pairs
• Not duplicated to other Start to End setting
values
Lower Limit Value according to the • Lower Limit is smaller than Upper Limit.
Upper Limit minimum setting unit

(*1) The maximum number of tool offset pairs refers to the number of offsets
available in the entire system. This is different from the maximum number of tool
offsets used for each path.

353
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF TOOL SLIDE

The unintended operation prevention function becomes disabled under the

following conditions:
• Both Start and End are "0".
• Lower Limit is equal to Upper Limit.
1
Settings other than enabled and disabled ones are incorrect. For incorrect offsets,
the input range is not limited due to the unintended operation prevention function.
2
If "0" is set to Start, only the offset number set to End is judged as incorrect.

3 If there is even one duplicate in the range between setting groups, all numbers
contained in the duplicate groups are judged incorrect. Even when the setting
range is the same between groups, if there is a duplicate, the settings are
4 regarded as incorrect. However, for a group with "0" set to Start, numbers
excluding the End number are not judged incorrect.

5 Example 1: For the following settings, all numbers 1 to 40 are judged incorrect:
Group 1: 1 to 20, 0.0 to 1.0
Group 2: 20 to 40, 0.0 to 1.0
6
Example 2: For the following settings, only offset number 21 is judged incorrect:
Group 1: 0 to 21, 0.0 to 1.0
7 Group 2: 1 to 40, 0.0 to 1.0

* For the following settings, the setting values for group 1 (1 to 40) are valid:
8 Group 1: 1 to 40, 0.0 to 1.0
Group 2: 0 to 21, 0.0 to 1.0

A1 The conditions to be judged incorrect and the corresponding guidance messages

are as follows:
• Displayed guidance message: Incorrect input range (the upper/lower limit is
A2 incorrect).
Table 6.2.2.2 (f) Condition to be judged incorrect and message target range
Z Condition (setting value) to be Message target range
judged incorrect Column Row
Items in Start: "0" and End: Other Number set to End All items for the
the range than "0" numbers
Start: Other than "0" and Number set to Start
End: "0"
Start > End Numbers between End
and Start
Value set to End exceeding Numbers between Start
the maximum number of and End
tool offset pairs (*1)

354
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF TOOL SLIDE

Condition (setting value) to be Message target range

judged incorrect Column Row
Other than Lower Limit > Upper Limit Numbers between Start Items with the
items in and End containing the incorrect values set
the range incorrect values
1
(*1) The maximum number of tool offset pairs refers to the number of offsets
available in the entire system. This is different from the maximum number of tool
offsets used for each path. 2
• Displayed guidance message: Incorrect input range (the offset number is
duplicated). 3
Table 6.2.2.2 (g) Condition to be judged incorrect and message target range

Condition (setting value) to be Message target range 4

judged incorrect Column Row
Items in
the range
There is a duplicate in the
range between the setting
Numbers in the set
range including the
All items for the
numbers
5
groups. duplicate

6
Even if multiple incorrect settings are found for the same offset, only one guidance
message appears.
7
Example 1: For the following settings, the guidance message "Incorrect input
range (the upper/lower limit is incorrect)." appears for offset 21.
Group 1: 0 to 21, 0.0 to 1.0 (Incorrect setting: Start: "0" and End: Other than "0") 8
Group 2: 1 to 40, 0.0 to 1.0 (Incorrect setting: There is a duplicate in the range
between the setting groups (groups 1 and 2).)
A1
Example 2: For the following settings, the guidance message "Incorrect input
range (the offset number is duplicated)." appears for offsets 1 to 40.
Group 1: 10 to 21, 2.0 to 1.0 (Incorrect setting: Lower Limit > Upper Limit) A2
Group 2: 1 to 40, 0.0 to 1.0 (Incorrect setting: There is a duplicate in the range
between the setting groups (groups 1 and 2).)
Z

355
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF TOOL SLIDE

 Coordinate Values Display

B C
A

1
E
2
D
3 F

4
G
5
6 Fig. 6.2.2.2 (c) Coordinate Values Display
Table 6.2.2.2 (h) List of Items in Coordinate Values Display

7 Name Description
A Absolute coordinate values tile Displays the absolute coordinate values.
B Relative coordinate values tile Displays the relative coordinate values.
8 C Machine coordinate values tile Displays the machine coordinate values.
D Modal tile Displays the modals (H/D/T).

A1 E Actual speed tile Displays the actual speed of the selected spindle.
F Table display tile Displays the same contents of the data table tile.
G Guidance message display tile Displays warnings and offset information.
A2
 Input prohibition when a change in the input value amount exceeds the
Z limit".
You can set the input range in parameter No. 24305 to prevent an accident due to
mistype made when entering each offset value in the tool slide.
For example, if the original value is 100.0 and parameter No. 24305 is set to 2.0,
the valid value range is between 98.0 and 102.0.
If the entered value is outside the valid range, a warning message appears.

Input prohibition is enabled when the signal G579.2 is set to "0".

The signal G579.2 enables/disables limitation for all paths.

The target data are different for each path as follows:

356
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF TOOL SLIDE

Table 6.2.2.2 (i) Limitation Target Data

Path Data Limitation description
For T-type X-axis offset value If there is tool geometry/wear
Z-axis offset value compensation, there will be input
Y-axis offset value
Nose R compensation
limitations to each tool offset value.
1
amount
4th axis (E-axis) offset value
5th axis offset value 2
For M-type Tool length offset value If there are different geometry/wear
Tool diameter compensation
amount
types, there will be input limitations to
each tool offset value. 3
Corner R compensation
amount
When the X-axis offset value When the offset memory switch 4
complex Z-axis offset value function is enabled, there will be
machining tool Y-axis offset value limitations to both Offset Memory 1 and
offset is valid Nose R compensation Offset Memory 2 for the data shown 5
amount left.
4th axis (E-axis) offset value
5th axis offset value 6
There are input limitations to the following operations:
• [+ Input] soft key
7
• [Undo]/[Redo] soft keys
• [+ Adjust]/[- Adjust] soft keys
8
• <INPUT>
Operations ([Input Counter] soft key, [Measure] soft key) other than the above are A1
excluded.
This also does not apply to when data from an external device is imported to a file.
A2
• Use the parameter No. 24305 setting to limit the change in the


input value amount.
• Parameter No. 24305 can be set for each path to limit each target
Z
data on the corresponding path.
MEMO
• If parameter No. 24305 is set to a value equal to or less than 0, the
input range is not limited.

6.2.2.3 Tool slide soft keys

Use [<] and [>] to switch the soft key pages.
6.2.2.3

Fig. 6.2.2.3 Soft keys

357
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF TOOL SLIDE

Table 6.2.2.3 Information List for Each Function

Name Description
Switches between table display and coordinate values display.

1
[Layout]
Displays the window to preset the relative coordinates of the current
2 position as the specified value.

3 [Preset
Relative]
Displays the soft keys to perform geometry/wear filtering.
4
[Geometry/
5 Wear] (*1)
Switches to geometry data display.
The [Geometry] soft key appears when wear data is displayed.
6
Geometry

7 (*1)
Switches to wear data display.
The [Wear] soft key appears when geometry data is displayed.

8
Wear (*1)
Displays the window to search tools by tool number.
A1
A2 [Search]
Displays the Measure window. (T-type dedicated function)

Z
[Measure]
Displays the Input Counter window.

[Input
Counter]
You can add/deduct the fine tune amount to/from the offset data value in
the selected cell.

[Fine Tune]

358
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF TOOL SLIDE

Name Description
Displays the + Input window.

[+ Input] 1
Displays the Tool Manager screen to set the name and type of the
selected tool. For details, see "FANUC iHMI Home Screen OPERATOR'S
MANUAL" (B-64644EN). 2
[Tool
Manager]
Displays the Spindle Unit Compensation screen.
3
4
[SP Unit
Comp.]
(*1)The [Geometry/Wear], [Geometry], or [Wear] soft key is displayed according to the 5
settings made by the machine manufacturer.

6.2.2.4 Display for multi-path systems 6

For multi-path systems, information on the tools for the currently selected path is
6.2.2.4

displayed. When you switch the path, the tool slide display also changes to show
the information on the tools for the path you switched to. 7
The currently selected path is indicated at the location shown below.
Path Status
8
A1
A2
Z
Fig. 6.2.2.4 Path Status

6.2.3 Selecting Cells

6.2.3

When updating the offset data, you can select cells using the following methods:
• Moving the cursor
• Tap operation

359
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF TOOL SLIDE

 Moving the cursor

Move the cursor using <←>, <→>, <↓>, <↑>, <PAGE UP>, <PAGE DOWN>,
<HOME>, or <END>.
 Tap operation
1 Tap the cell in the data section to move the cursor to that position.

2 6.2.4
6.2.4
Searching by Tool Number
Move the cursor to the row specified with the tool number (No.).

3 <1> Press the [Search] soft key.

The Search window is displayed.
4
5 <2> Enter the search number in the Search window and press the [OK] soft key.
If the entered number is found by the search, the window closes, and the
6 cursor moves to the corresponding row.

7
8
A1
A2
Z

6.2.5 Geometry/Wear Filtering

6.2.5

The data to be displayed on the tool slide can be filtered as follows:

• Only display geometry data
• Only display wear data
• Display both geometry and wear data

360
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF TOOL SLIDE

<1> Press the [Geometry/Wear] soft key.

The soft keys to perform geometry/wear filtering appear.

1
 • If the [Geometry] or [Wear] soft key is displayed in the [Geometry/
Wear] soft key position, pressing the [Geometry] or [Wear] soft key 2
MEMO will display geometry data only or wear data only, respectively.

3
<2> Press the soft key to switch the display.

4
5
Table 6.2.5 Geometry/Wear Filtering
Name Description 6
All Displays both geometry data and wear data.
Geometry Only displays geometry data.
Wear Only displays wear data.
7
8
6.2.6 Undoing/Redoing Operations on the Tool Slide
6.2.6

You can undo and redo operations on the tool slide, such as changing values in
A1
the data table or configuring the filtering settings.
Up to 20 histories are available on each path for these operations that can be
undone/redone (You can undo/redo up to the last 20 actions).
A2
Whether undo/redo actions are supported or not is as shown in the table below.

361
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF TOOL SLIDE

Table 6.2.6 Whether Undo/Redo Actions Are Supported or Not

Supported/Not Operation
supported
Target • Inputting data (direct input/measurement input/+ input/counter
1 input/fine tune)
• Filtering
Not supported • Changing the selected cell (MDI key cursor operation/touch)
2 • Switching the tab (offset memory switch)
• Changing the tool offset from screens other than tool offset
slides in the Tool Manager application, conventional screens,

3 MTB applications, and programs

• Tool offset measured value direct input B
• Inputting/outputting tool data files
• Changing the layout
4
5  • Inputting data simultaneously in multiple cells, such as counter input,
is counted as one history. Therefore, only one undo/redo action can
MEMO undo/redo changes made in multiple cells.

6
To undo/redo an operation, perform the following.

7 <1> Perform an operation that supports undo/redo actions.

<2> To undo the operation, press the [Undo] soft key.
To cancel the undone operation, press the [Redo] soft key.
8
A1
• When you perform the following operations, the histories of
A2 operations that can be undone/redone are cleared on the operation
target path.
Edit offset data by not using the tool slide.

Z The input unit is changed by parameter setting/change and G20/

G21.

 A value restored by parameter change is out of range. (The

warning message "Could not execute" appears.)
MEMO A cell where an operation that can be undone/redone was
performed is shown/hidden by parameter change.
• Even if you perform the following operations, the histories of
operations that can be undone/redone are not cleared.
The tool slide is opened/closed.
The application is switched to another, such as the Home screen.
The mode is changed to the tool offset write mode.

362
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.3 UPDATING OFFSET DATA

6.3

6.3 UPDATING OFFSET DATA

Offset data can be updated by the following methods:
• By direct input 1
• By entering the difference (+ Input)
• By Entering Relative Coordinate Values (Input Counter) 2
• By Entering with Absolute Coordinate Values (Measure)
• By Directly Entering the Tool Offset Measured Value (Tool Offset Measured
Value Direct Input B)
3
• By Importing/Exporting Tool Offset Data (File Import/File Export)
4
If you attempt to update the offset data that is protected, the message
!
CAUTION
"Protected" will be displayed. For details on the protection conditions,
see the manuals provided by the machine manufacturer.
5
6
6.3.1 By Direct Input
6.3.1

You can change the offset value in the cell currently selected with the cursor.
<1> Move the cursor to a cell where you want to input offset data.
7
8
A1
A2
Z

363
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.3 UPDATING OFFSET DATA

<2> Enter the numerical value and press <INPUT>.

 Cell select mode and cell edit mode

There are two states for the table: cell select mode and cell edit mode. The
1 operation performed when you press the MDI keys will be different between these
modes.
Table 6.3.1 Table Input Operation
2 Operation Cell select mode Cell edit mode
Number Clears the string that is already Enters the number at the cursor
3 entered, enters the number, and
then switches to cell edit mode.
position.

Alphabet Clears the string that is already Enters the alphabet at the cursor
4 entered, enters the alphabet, and position.
then switches to cell edit mode.
Symbol Clears the string that is already Enters the symbol at the cursor
5 entered, enters the symbol, and
then switches to cell edit mode.
position.

<SPACE> Input space. Input space.

6 <INPUT> – Normal:
Confirms the input value and
then switches to cell select
7 mode.
No input value (blank):
format error.
8 Abnormal:
Displays a warning and
remains in cell edit mode.

A1 The input value or equation is

selected entirely.
<INSERT> – –

A2 <ALTER> Moves the cursor leftwards. Moves the cursor to the start of
the cell.
<CAN> – Deletes the left of the cursor.
Z When the cursor is at the start of
the cell, no operation is
performed.
<DELETE> – Deletes the right of the cursor
(Invalid if the cursor is at the end).
<ESC> – Discards the input value that has
not been confirmed and then
switches to cell select mode.
<TAB> – Discards the input value that has
not been confirmed and then
moves to the cell on the right.

364
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.3 UPDATING OFFSET DATA

Operation Cell select mode Cell edit mode

<↑> Moves the selected cell to the one Discards the input value that has
above. not been confirmed and then
moves to the cell above.
<↓> Moves the selected cell to the one Discards the input value that has
below. not been confirmed and then
1
moves to the cell below.
<←> Moves the selected cell to the one Moves the cursor to the left.
on left.
2
<→> Moves the selected cell to the one Moves the cursor to the right.
on right.
3
<PAGE UP> Moves to the previous page. Discards any value that has not
been confirmed.
<PAGE DOWN> Moves to the next page. Discards any value that has not 4
been confirmed.
Pressing a soft Operation is performed according The soft key will be displayed in
key to the function of the soft key. gray. 5
Changing paths Cell select mode in the switched Discards the input value that has
path. not been confirmed for the current
path (before switching) and then 6
switches to cell select mode of
the path (after switching).
Tapping any cell Selects the cell that you tapped. When the tapped cell is another 7
other than the cell that can be edited
one selected Discards any input value that
has not been confirmed and
then switches to cell select
8
mode.
When the tapped cell is the
original cell
A1
Moves the cursor to the tapped
position.
Tapping any other cell A2
Remains in cell edit mode.
Closes the slide. Closes the slide.
(opening another
Discards the input value that has
not been confirmed and then Z
slide) closes the slide.

6.3.2 Adding/Deducting the Fine Tune Amount

6.3.2

You can add/deduct the fine tune amount to/from the offset data value in the
selected cell. The fine tune amount is defined from the minimum setting unit x fine
tune scale.

<1> Move the cursor to a cell where you want to fine tune offset data and press the
[Fine Tune] soft key.
The soft keys to fine tune the data appear.

365
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.3 UPDATING OFFSET DATA

<2> Press the appropriate fine tune scale soft key.

1
2
Name Description
3 Set the fine tune scale to 1 times.

4 [Scale x1]
Set the fine tune scale to 10 times.
5
6 [Scale x10]
Set the fine tune scale to 100 times.

7
[Scale x100]
Deducts the fine tune amount from the offset data value in the
8 selected cell.

A1 [- Adjust]
Adds the fine tune amount to the offset data value in the selected
cell.
A2
[+ Adjust]

Z
<3> Press the [+ Adjust] or [- Adjust] soft key.
The cell value is updated.

The update value is calculated from the following formula:

[- Adjust]: Update value = Selected value - Fine tune amount
[+ Adjust]: Update value = Selected value + Fine tune amount

(Example)
In an OFC machine (Unit: mm), if you press [- Adjust] under the following
conditions, the value in the selected cell is updated to 9.9990.
Selected cell value: 10.0000 (before fine tune)
Fine tune scale: Scale x 10

366
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.3 UPDATING OFFSET DATA

Minimum setting unit: 0.0001

• About the guidance message display

When the set of [Fine Tune] soft keys is displayed, the set fine
tune scale and fine tune amount are shown.
The fine tune amount is displayed with the same number of 1
 decimal places as that of the minimum setting unit.
After returning to the first page, the fine tune scale and fine tune
MEMO
amount information is not shown. 2
If a warning occurs, the warning message appears on a high
priority. When it is cleared, the set fine tune scale and fine tune
amount are shown again. 3

6.3.3 By Entering the Difference (+ Input) 4

6.3.3

You can update the offset data by entering the difference from the currently set
value.
5
<1> Press the [+ Input] soft key.
The + Input window is displayed. 6
7
<2> Enter the difference (numerical value) in [Correction].
The result which is the sum of the current setting and offset is displayed. 8
A1
A2
Z

<3> Press the [OK] soft key.

The + Input window closes, and the result is reflected into the selected cell.

367
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.3 UPDATING OFFSET DATA

 • <INPUT> can also be used to confirm the value.

MEMO

1
6.3.4 By Entering Relative Coordinate Values
2 6.3.4
(Input Counter)
You can enter the current relative coordinate values for the offset value.

3 The following values are entered depending on the machine configuration and
selected cell.

4 Table 6.3.4 (a) For M-type

Selected cell Shape offset Wear offset

5 Shape offset Updates with the relative

coordinate values for the
Updates with 0.

selected axis.

6 Wear offset No update. Updates with the calculated

value (shape offset value
subtracted from the relative
coordinate values for the
7 selected axis).

Table 6.3.4 (b) For T-type

8 Selected cell Shape offset Wear offset
Shape offset Updates with the relative No update.
coordinate values for the
A1 selected axis.
Wear offset No update. Updates with the relative
coordinate values for the
A2 selected axis.

Z <1> Press the [Input Counter] soft key.

The Input Counter window is displayed.

368
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.3 UPDATING OFFSET DATA

<2> Use <↑> or <↓> to select the axis for which the relative coordinate values are
inserted.

1
2
<3> Press the [OK] soft key.
The Input Counter window closes, and the selected relative coordinate values
3
are reflected into the selected cell.

4
6.3.5 By Entering with Absolute Coordinate Values (Mea-
6.3.5
sure) 5
You can enter the target absolute coordinate values as offset data.
Even if a tool offset is already set, you do not need to cancel it.
6
<1> Press the [Measure] soft key.
The Measure window appears. 7
8
<2> Enter the [Target] in the Measure window.
The calculated value (difference between the absolute coordinate values and A1
the target value) is updated.

A2
Z
<3> Press the [OK] soft key.
The Measure window closes, and the calculated value is reflected into the
selected cell.

369
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.3 UPDATING OFFSET DATA

6.3.6 By Directly Entering the Tool Offset Measured Value

(Tool Offset Measured Value Direct Input B)
6.3.6

Set the difference between the machine coordinate values where the tool tip
touches the contact surface of the sensor and the reference position as the offset.
1
<1> Set the touch sensor at the home position of the machine.

2 <2> Perform manual reference point return.

<3> Select whether handle (HND) mode or jog (JOG) mode.

3 <4> Switch to tool offset write mode.

The tool slide is automatically displayed.
<5> Select the tool to measure.
4 <6> Select with the cursor the target tool offset number to write.
Depending on the settings, the cursor is selected automatically.
5
6
7
8
A1
<7> Through manual operation, move the tool close to the sensor.
<8> Use manual handle feed to move the tool so that the tip touches the contact
A2 surface of the sensor.
The calculation results will be set to the tool offset memory.
Z <9> Repeat steps 6 to 8 to set the offset for X and Z axes.
<10>Repeat step 5 to 9 for all required tools.
<11>When you finish setting the offset, exit the tool offset write mode.
<12>Remove the touch sensor.

 Operations when the offset memory switch is enabled

When the offset memory switch is enabled, the measured tool length offset value
is set to the offset memory corresponding to the currently selected coordinates.
When the tool slide automatically starts up, it is displayed with the offset memory
tab corresponding to the selected coordinates selected.

370
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.3 UPDATING OFFSET DATA

 Operations for multi-path systems

The tool slide is displayed automatically only when the tool offset write mode is
6.3.6.1

valid in the displayed path.

6.3.7 Inputting Tool Offset Data 1

6.3.7

Input tool offset data from an external device.

2
<1> Press the [File Import] soft key.
The Input window for tool offset data appears.
<2> Select an external device from where you want to input and the tool offset data
3
to input.
4
5
6
7

<3> Press the [OK] soft key.

8
The Input window for tool offset data closes, and the selected tool offset data is
displayed on the tool slide.
A1
6.3.8
6.3.8
Outputting Tool Offset Data A2
Output tool offset data to an external device.

<1> Press the [File Export] soft key.

Z
The Output window for tool offset data appears.

371
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.3 UPDATING OFFSET DATA

<2> Select the output destination in the folder tree and press the [OK] soft key.
The output file name input window is displayed.

1
2
3
4
5 <3> Enter the name of the file to be output and press the [OK] soft key.
The Output window for tool offset data closes, and the tool offset data displayed
on the tool slide is output to a file.
6
7
8  • If a file with the same name already exists in the output destination,
the Confirm Overwrite window will appear.
MEMO Select [Overwrite] or [Rename].

A1
6.3.9 Changing Tools
A2 6.3.9

You can run the tool change program to change the tools.

Z 6.3.9.1 Opening the tool change window

Changing tools is performed on the Tool Change window.
6.3.9.1

<1> Press the [Tool Change] soft key.

The Tool Change window appears.

372
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.3 UPDATING OFFSET DATA

1
2
3
4
6.3.9.2 Displayed contents on the tool change window
The Tool Change window consists of the Machining Position tab and Exchange
5
6.3.9.2

Position tab.

 The Exchange Position tab may not be displayed depending on the 6

MEMO
settings.

7
8
A1
A2
Z

Fig. 6.3.9.2 Tool Change Window

Table 6.3.9.2 Item List

Name Description
A Type tab Switches between the Machining Position tab and
Exchange Position tab.
B Operation guide Displays the operation steps to change the tool.
C Tool No. Enter the target tool number.

373
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.3 UPDATING OFFSET DATA

Name Description
D Guidance message Displays operation guidance and warning messages.

1 6.3.9.3 Changing tools

Specify the number of the tool you want to move to the machining position and
6.3.9.3

execute the tool change program.

2
<1> Select the Machining Position tab with <←>, <→>, or <TAB>.

3 <2> Enter the tool number in the [Tool No.] field according to the operation steps
shown on the operation guidance display tile.

4
5
6
7
8
<3> Press the <INPUT> key.
A1 The entered contents will be confirmed.

A2  • Press the [Back] soft key to return back to the tool number settings.
• To cancel the execution of the tool change program, press the
MEMO [Cancel] soft key.

Z
<4> Start the cycle.
When you start the cycle, the tool change program will start, and tool change
will be performed.

374
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.3 UPDATING OFFSET DATA

6.3.9.4 Moving to the exchange position

Specify the number of the tool you want to move to the exchange position and
6.3.9.4

execute the tool change program.

<1> Select the Exchange Position tab with <←>, <→>, or <TAB>. 1
<2> Enter the tool number in the [Tool Number] field according to the operation
steps shown on the operation guidance display tile.
2
3
4
5
6
<3> Press the <INPUT> key. 7
The entered contents will be confirmed.

8
 • Press the [Back] soft key to return back to the tool number settings.
MEMO
A1
<4> Start the cycle.
When you start the cycle, the tool change program will start, and tool change
A2
will be performed.
Z
 • To cancel the execution of the tool change program, press the
[Cancel] soft key.
MEMO

6.3.9.5 Input prohibition when a change in the input value amount exceeds
the limit
If a change in the input tool offset value exceeds the limit, the input is not allowed.
6.3.9.5

To prevent incorrect input, the tool offset value can be changed only within a range
specified in parameter No. 24305.
For example, if the original value is 100.0 and parameter No. 24305 is set to 2.0,
the valid value range is between 98.0 and 102.0.

375
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.3 UPDATING OFFSET DATA

If an input value is out of the range, a warning appears, not allowing the value
input.

There are limitations to the following data for each type:

1 For T-type
• X-axis offset value

2 • Z-axis offset value

• Y-axis offset value

3 • Nose R compensation amount

• 4th axis (E-axis) offset value

4 • 5th axis offset value

For M-type
5 • Tool length offset value
• Tool diameter compensation amount
6 • Corner R compensation amount

If there are different geometry wear types, there will be input limitations to each
7 tool offset value.

When the complex machining tool offset is valid

8 • X-axis offset value
• Z-axis offset value
A1 • Y-axis offset value
• Nose R compensation amount
A2 • 4th axis (E-axis) offset value
• 5th axis offset value
Z When the offset memory switch function is enabled, there will be limitations to both
Offset Memory 1 and Offset Memory 2 due to the above data.

Input limitation target operations

There are input limitations to the following operations:
• [+ Input] soft key
• [Undo]/[Redo] soft keys
• [- Adjust]/[+ Adjust] soft keys
• <INPUT>

376
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.3 UPDATING OFFSET DATA

• Operations ([Input Counter], [Measure], etc.) other than the above are
 excluded.
This also does not apply to when data from an external device is
MEMO
imported to a file.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

377
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 6 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL SLIDE) 
6.3 UPDATING OFFSET DATA

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

378
 SETTING 1

7
WORKPIECE 2

COORDINATES 3
4
5
Use the workpiece coordinates slide to set the workpiece origin offset amount.
The set workpiece origin offset amount can be checked.
6
7.1 WORKPIECE COORDINATES OVERVIEW ...................................... 380
7.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF WORKPIECE COORDINATES ................. 381
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE .................. 384
7
8
A

379
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.1 WORKPIECE COORDINATES OVERVIEW

7.1

7.1 WORKPIECE COORDINATES OVER-

VIEW
1 The following operations are available in the workpiece coordinates slide. This is
an optional function.

2 • Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Amount

• Setting the Workpiece Coordinates Shift Amount (for T-type Only)

3 • Visually Checking the Workpiece Origin Offset

• Inputting Using Measured Values

4 • Inputting the Results of the Correction Value Added to the Current Value
• Switching the Coordinates to Be Displayed in the Current Position
• Inputting a Workpiece by Measuring
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

380
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF WORKPIECE COORDINATES

7.2

7.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF WORK-

PIECE COORDINATES
1
7.2.1 Opening and Closing the Workpiece Coordinates
7.2.1
Slide 2
Open and close the workpiece coordinates slide.

<1> In the operation screen, press the [Workpiece Coordinates] soft key.
2
The workpiece coordinates slide appears.
4
5
6
7
8
A1

 • Pressing <OFS/SET> can also open the workpiece coordinates A2

slide.
MEMO

Z
 Closing the workpiece coordinates slide
Close the workpiece coordinates slide.

<1> Press the [Workpiece Coordinates] soft key.

The workpiece coordinates slide is closed, and the display returns to the
operation screen.

 • While the workpiece coordinates slide is displayed, if another soft

key is pressed, the workpiece coordinates slide is closed, and
MEMO another slide appears.

381
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF WORKPIECE COORDINATES

7.2.2 Displayed Contents of Workpiece Coordinates

7.2.2

The workpiece coordinates slide consists of the current position display tile,
graphic display tile, input table tile, and guidance message display tile.

1 A B

2
3
4 C

5
D

6 Fig. 7.2.2 Workpiece Coordinates Slide

Table 7.2.2 Item List of the Workpiece Coordinates Slide
7 Name Description
A Current position display tile Displays the current position of each axis.

8 B Graphic display tile Displays the graphic.

C Input Table Tile Displays the coordinate values of workpiece
coordinates.
A1 D Guidance message display tile Displays operation guidance and warning
messages.

A2 7.2.2.1
7.2.2.1
Soft keys

Z
Fig. 7.2.2.1 Soft Keys When the Workpiece Coordinates Slide Is Opened
Table 7.2.2.1 Description of the Soft Keys
Name Description
Switches to the soft key page for displaying the current position.

[Current
Position]

382
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.2 BASIC OPERATIONS OF WORKPIECE COORDINATES

Name Description
Displays the Preset Relative Coordinates window.

[Preset
Relative] 1
Displays a window for performing measurement input.

2
[Measure]
Switches to the soft key page for workpiece measurement.
2
[Workpiece
Measure] 4
Displays a window for performing + input.

5
[+ Input]
Switches to the soft key page for graphic. At the same time, the focus is
switched to the graphic display tile.
6
[Graphic]
Switches the coordinates selection tab.
7

[Tab]
8
7.2.2.2 Display for multi-path systems
7.2.2.2

For multi-path systems, the work origin offset amount of the currently selected
A1
path is displayed.
When you switch the path, the work coordinates slide display also changes to
show the work origin offset amount for the path you switched to.
A2
Z

383
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

7.3

7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE

COORDINATES SLIDE
1 The following operations are available in the workpiece coordinates slide.
• Visually Checking the Workpiece Origin Offset
2 • Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Amount
• Setting the Workpiece Coordinates Shift Amount (for Lathes Only)
3 • Inputting Using Measured Values
• Inputting the Results of the Corrected Value Added to the Current Value

4 • Switching the Coordinates to Be Displayed in the Current Position

• Switching control axes to be displayed in the current position

5 • Presetting the Relative Coordinate Values

• Inputting a Workpiece by Measuring

6
7.3.1 Visually Checking the Workpiece Origin Offset
7
7.3.1

 Workpiece coordinate graphic tile

In the graphic tile of the workpiece coordinates system, you can check the position
of each workpiece origin offset and current position of the machine coordinates.
8
A1
A2
Z

Fig. 7.3.1 (a) Workpiece coordinates graphic tile

384
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

 Workpiece coordinates graphic tile

The workpiece origin offset and current position of the machine coordinates are
displayed.

D C 1
2
A B

2
4
Fig. 7.3.1 (b) Position of Workpiece Origin Offset and Current Position of Machine
Coordinates
Table 7.3.1 (a) Names and Displayed Information of Coordinates 5
Name Description
A Workpiece coordinates Shows the coordinate position of the shifted workpiece 6
shift (SHIFT) (*) coordinates (T series only). This will not be displayed
when workpiece coordinates shift is disabled.
B External workpiece origin Shows the coordinate position of the external 7
offset (EXT) (*) workpiece origin offset. This will not be displayed
when external workpiece origin offset is disabled.
C Workpiece coordinates The colors in "Table 7.3.1 (b) Position of Workpiece 8
(Gxx: "xx" is a numeric Origin" are used to indicate the position of the
value between 54 and 59) workpiece origin in workpiece coordinates.
(*) A1
D Current position (machine Shows the current position of the machine coordinates
coordinates) with a yellow sphere.

*: Displayed only when the option is enabled.

A2
Table 7.3.1 (b) Position of Workpiece Origin
Color Workpiece coordinates Z
Cursor color Workpiece coordinates for the cursor position in the input table
Green Workpiece coordinates currently selected in modal
Gray All others

385
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

 Details of displayed information

• Workpiece coordinates are displayed in 3D.
Machining center type Lathe system

1
2
3 Fig. 7.3.1 (c) Screen Image

7.3.1.1 Rotating the workpiece coordinates graphic

4 7.3.1.1

You can rotate the graphics displayed in workpiece coordinates with the soft keys
or MDI keys. You may also shift them using the touch panel.

5 A. Up

6
C. Left D. Right
7 E. Center point

8
B. Down

A1
Fig. 7.3.1.1 Rotation Image

A2 <1> Press the [Graphic] soft key.

Keys to move the graphic will be displayed among the soft keys.

Z
<2> Press the [Upper], [Lower], [Left], or [Right] soft key or <↑>, <↓>, <←>, or <→>.
The graphic will rotate in the specified direction.

386
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

 Rotating the graphic with the touch panel

Keep pressing on the displayed graphic.
Press the area that corresponds to the direction in which you want the graphic to
rotate. The graphic will keep rotating while you are pressing.
Table 7.3.1.1 Coordinate Axes and Positions
1
Direction of Rotation Image Rotation Direction
A Rotates upward.
B Rotates downward.
2
C Rotates leftward.
D Rotates rightward. 2
E Center point of rotation.

4
 • Pressing at a location away from the center point will increase the
MEMO
amount of rotation.
5
7.3.1.2 Parallel shifting the workpiece coordinates graphic 6
You can parallel shift the graphics displayed in workpiece coordinates with the soft
7.3.1.2

keys or MDI keys. You may also shift them using the touch panel.
7
7 8 9
8
4 5 6
A1
1 2 3
Fig. 7.3.1.2 Correspondence between MDI Keys and Parallel Shift Directions
A2
<1> Press the [Graphic] soft key.
Keys to move the graphic will be displayed among the soft keys. Z

<2> Press [>] at the right most.

The second page of soft keys appears.
<3> Press the [Upper], [Lower], [Left], or [Right] soft key or <1> to <9>.
The graphic will shift horizontally in the specified direction.

387
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

Correspondence between key and shift direction when using MDI keys
<7>: Shift in upper left direction
<8>: Shift upward
<9>: Shift in upper right direction
1 <4>: Shift leftward
<6>: Shift rightward
<1>: Shift in lower left direction
2 <2>: Shift downward
<3>: Shift in lower right direction
<5>: Not used
3
 Parallel shifting the graphic with the touch panel

4 <1> Swipe the displayed graphic.

Swipe on the screen in the direction you want the graphic to parallel shift.

5
6 Upward

7
8 Leftward Rightward

A1 Downward

A2
Z 7.3.1.3 Zooming the workpiece coordinates graphic
You can zoom in/out the graphics displayed in workpiece coordinates with the soft
7.3.1.3

keys or MDI keys.

<1> Press the [Graphic] soft key.

Keys to move the graphic will be displayed among the soft keys.

388
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

 To zoom into the graphics

<1> Press the [Zoom In] soft key or <PAGE UP>.

1
 To zoom out from the graphics
<1> Press the [Zoom Out] soft key or <PAGE DOWN>. 2
2
 Zooming in the graphic with the touch panel
<1> Double-tap to zoom in the graphic.
4
The graphic is zoomed in.
 Zooming out the graphic with the touch panel 5
<1> Single-tap to zoom out the graphic.
The graphic is zoomed out. 6
7.3.2
7.3.2
Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Amount 7
Set the workpiece origin offset amount, external workpiece origin offset amount,
and additional workpiece coordinate amount.
Set them in the input table tile shown below. 8
A
A1
B
A2
Fig. 7.3.2 (a) Input Table Tile Z
Table 7.3.2 (a) Item List of the Input Table Tile
Name Description
A Coordinates selection tab Displays the type of workpiece coordinates that can
be displayed.
B Input Table Displays the offset amount of workpiece coordinates.

389
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

 Coordinates selection tab

The configuration of the coordinates selection tab is as follows.
Table 7.3.2 (b) Tab Types
Tab name Display contents when the tab is selected
1 displayed
SHIFT Displays the input table for workpiece coordinate shift.

2 G54 - G59 Displays the input table for external workpiece origin offsets and
workpiece origin offsets.
G54.1 Displays the input table for external workpiece origin offsets and

3 additional workpiece coordinates.

 How to observe the workpiece coordinate input table

In the workpiece coordinates base screen, several tiles are displayed to indicate
4 the current position, coordinate value input table, and graphics of the coordinates.
In the input table, you can check a list of coordinate offset values for the workpiece
coordinates.
5 Axis name

6
7
8 Type of coordinates Cursor Cell
Fig. 7.3.2 (b) Input Table

A1 Type of coordinates
The type of workpiece coordinates is displayed. The following table shows what is
displayed when you select a tab.

A2 Table 7.3.2 (c) Type of Workpiece Coordinates

Tab Operation
Z Workpiece origin Displays the input table for workpiece origin offsets and external
offset workpiece origin offsets.
Workpiece Displays the input table for workpiece coordinate shift.
coordinates shift
Additional Workpiece Displays the input table for external workpiece origin offsets and
Coordinates Offset additional workpiece coordinates.

390
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

Modal Information Icons

In the input table tile, a green icon is displayed on the left side of the input table for
workpiece coordinates that are selected in modal.

1
2
Fig. 7.3.2 (c) Example of G54 Selected in Modal

2
4
Fig. 7.3.2 (d) Example of G54.1P4 Selected in Modal
5
 Operation of inputting to the input table
<1> Move the cursor to a cell where you want to input offset data.
6
7
8
<2> Directly input numeric value.
<3> To confirm the data, press <INPUT>.
A1
A2
 • If the input value exceeds the allowable range, the value cannot be
entered, and a warning is displayed.
MEMO
Z
When you select the cell of each offset data, a guidance message appears.
The functions that cause guidance messages in the workpiece coordinates slide
and the priorities for the displayed guidance messages are as follows:
Table 7.3.2 (d) Priorities and Functions That Cause Guidance Messages
Priority Function that causes a guidance message
1 (Priority: High) Tool offset measured value direct input B
2 (Priority: Low) Misoperation prevention function

391
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

The warning messages are displayed when the misoperation prevention function
is enabled, disabled, and incorrect as shown below:
Table 7.3.2 (e) Misoperation prevention function setting and display range
Misoperation Message target range
1 prevention function
setting
Enabled Ranges set in parameter Nos. 10304 to 10315, 10328, 10329,
2 10331, and 10332
Disabled Range according to the minimum setting unit

3 Incorrect

You can set the input range to prevent an accident due to mistype made when
4 entering each offset value.
Specify the input range in parameter Nos. 10000 to 10303.

5 The valid offset data input range is based on the minimum setting unit of each
axis.
If no input range is set, the valid input range is determined by the minimum setting
6 unit.
When you select the cell of each offset data, a guidance message appears.
If the entered value is outside the valid range, a warning message appears.
7 See "■ Input prohibition when a change in the input value amount exceeds the
limit".

8 If you change the input range while the tool slide is displayed, the change is
applied when you select another cell or re-display the workpiece coordinates slide.
It is not reflected immediately.

A1 The following apply to operations that change the input range while the workpiece
coordinates slide is displayed:

A2 • Change the parameter using G10

• Change the parameter using signal operation

Z • Change the parameter on another application

The following apply to operations that re-display the workpiece coordinates slide:
• Open/close the workpiece coordinates slide
• Change the path
• Display the iHMI screen again after displaying another application

 Settings to enable the misoperation prevention function

The allowable value range and setting value to enable the misoperation
prevention function for each item are as follows:

392
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

Table 7.3.2 (f) Allowable Values and Setting Values to Enable the Misoperation
Prevention Function
Item Setting value to enable the unintended operation prevention
function
Start •
•
Other than 0
Start is equal to or smaller than End.
1
End
• Less than the maximum number of offset pairs

Lower Limit
• Not duplicated to other Start to End setting values
• Lower Limit is smaller than Upper Limit.
2
Upper Limit
2
The unintended operation prevention function becomes disabled under the
following conditions:
• Both Start and End are "0".
4
• Lower Limit is equal to Upper Limit.
5
Settings other than enabled and disabled ones are incorrect. For incorrect offsets,
the input range is not limited due to the unintended operation prevention function.
6
If "0" is set to Start, only the offset number set to End is judged as incorrect.
You cannot combine normal workpiece coordinates (G54 to G59) and additional
workpiece coordinates (G54.1P or above) into one group. If set, all coordinates in 7
the range are judged incorrect.

If there is a duplicate in the range between setting groups, the duplicate 8

coordinate is judged incorrect. Even when the setting range is the same between
groups, if there is a duplicate, the settings are regarded as incorrect.
Example 1: For the following settings, coordinates G54 to G59 are judged A1
incorrect:
Group 1: 54 to 56, 0.0 to 1.0
Group 2: 55 to 59, 0.0 to 1.0 A2
Example 2: For the following settings, only coordinate G55 is judged incorrect:
Group 1: 0 to 55, 0.0 to 1.0 Z
Example 3: For the following settings, coordinates G57 to G54.1P are judged
incorrect:
Group 1: 57 to 1020, 0.0 to 1.0

The conditions to be judged incorrect and the corresponding guidance messages

are as follows:
• Displayed guidance message: Incorrect input range (the upper/lower limit is
incorrect).

393
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

Table 7.3.2 (g) Condition (setting value) to be judged incorrect and message target
range

Condition (setting value) to be Message target range

judged incorrect Column Row
1 Items in Start: "0" and End: Other Coordinate number set All items for the
the range than "0" to End coordinate numbers
Start: Other than "0" and Coordinate number set
2 End: "0" to Start
Start > End Coordinate numbers
between End and Start
3 Value set to End exceeding Coordinate number set
the maximum number of to Start
tool offset pairs (*1)
4 Normal workpiece Coordinate numbers set
coordinates and additional between Start and End
workpiece coordinates are
5 set to one group.
Other than Lower Limit > Upper Limit Numbers between Start Items with the
items in and End containing the incorrect values set
6 the range incorrect values

(*1) The maximum number of tool offset pairs refers to the number of offsets available in
7 the entire system.
This is different from the maximum number of tool offsets used for each path.

8 • Displayed guidance message: Incorrect input range (the workpiece coordinate is

duplicated).

A1 Table 7.3.2 (h) Condition (setting value) to be judged incorrect and message target
range

Condition (setting value) to be Message target range

A2 judged incorrect Column Row
Items in There is a duplicate in the Coordinate numbers in All items for the
the range range between the setting the set range including numbers
Z groups. the duplicate
One group covers the Coordinate numbers in
range of another group. the duplicate range

Even if multiple incorrect settings are found for the same offset, only one guidance
message appears.

Example 1: For the following settings, the guidance message "Incorrect input
range (the upper/lower limit is incorrect)." appears for offset in G57.
Group 1: 0 to 57, 0.0 to 1.0 (Incorrect setting: Start: "0" and End: Other than "0")
Group 2: 1 to 59, 0.0 to 1.0 (Incorrect setting: There is a duplicate in the range
between the setting groups (groups 1 and 2).)

394
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

Example 2: For the following settings, the guidance message "Incorrect input
range (the workpiece coordinate is duplicated)." appears for offsets in G56 to G58.
Group 1: 56 to 58, 2.0 to 1.0 (Incorrect setting: Lower Limit > Upper Limit)
Group 2: 1 to 59, 0.0 to 1.0 (Incorrect setting: There is a duplicate in the range
between the setting groups (groups 1 and 2).)
1
7.3.3 Setting the Workpiece Coordinates Shift Amount
(for Lathes) 2
7.3.3

Set the workpiece coordinates shift amount.

For display contents and input operations of the input table, see "7.3.2 Setting the
Workpiece Origin Offset Amount".
2
4
7.3.4 Protecting the Workpiece Origin Offset Amount
from Being Edited
7.3.4

If offset data is protected, "Protected" is displayed when the data is edited. For
5
details on the protection conditions, see the manual provided by each machine
manufacturer.
6
7.3.5
7.3.5
Inputting Using Measured Values 7
Set the results calculated from the current coordinate value and the target value
as the workpiece coordinates offset amount.
Set and enter values in the measurement input window. 8
A1
A A2
B
Z
C

Fig. 7.3.5 (a) Measurement Input Window

395
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

Table 7.3.5 (a) Item List of the Measurement Input Window

Name Description
A Title display area Displays the window title at the left most.
The type of offset amount to be set (information in the
1 input table row) is displayed at the right most of the title
display area.
B Measurement input Calculates the work origin offset amount and external
2 area work origin offset amount. For the formula, see
"Measurement input area" described below.
C Guidance message Displays a warning message.
3 display

4  Title display area

Displays the window title at the left most.
The type of offset amount to be set (information in the input table row) is displayed
5 at the right most of the title display area.
Table 7.3.5 (b) Type of offset amount to be set

6 EXT
Type of offset amount to be set Description
External workpiece origin offset
G54, G55, G56, G57, G58, G59 Workpiece origin offset
7 SHIFT Workpiece coordinates shift
G54.1 P1 to G54.1 P300 Additional workpiece coordinates

8
 Measurement input area

A1 Formula displayed in the measurement input area

The formula displayed in the measurement input area is as follow.

A
A2
B

Z
Fig. 7.3.5 (b) Measurement Input Window
Table 7.3.5 (c) Item List of the Formula Displayed in the Measurement Input Area
Description
A Name of a value used in the formula
B Value used in the formula. Enter a value in a field with a white
background.

396
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

Item Names of Values Displayed in the Formula

The item names of values displayed in the formula are as follows.
Table 7.3.5 (d) Item Names of Values Displayed in the Formula
Value used in the formula Item name
Calculated value [Result] 1
Current value of absolute coordinates [Absolute]
Current value of machine coordinates
Target value of workpiece coordinates
[Machine]
[Target]
2
External workpiece origin offset amount EXT
Workpiece origin offset amount of work G54 to G59, G54.1P1 to G54.1P300 2
coordinates in modal * Work coordinates selected in the modal are
displayed.
4
 Operation of inputting using measured values
<1> Move the cursor to the workpiece coordinates offset amount you want to enter 5
and press the [Measure] soft key.
The Measure window appears.
6
7
8
A1
<2> Enter the target value of workpiece coordinates in the Measure window.
When the target value of workpiece coordinates is entered, the calculation
results are updated. A2
Z

<3> To set the calculation results as the offset amount, press the [OK] soft key.

397
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

7.3.6 Inputting the Results of the Corrected Value Added

to the Current Value
7.3.6

Enter the difference of the currently set value and set the calculation results in the
workpiece origin offset amount.
1 A

2 B

3 C

Fig. 7.3.6 (a) Input window

4 Table 7.3.6 (a) Item List of the Input Window
Name Description
5 A Title display area Displays the window title at the left most.
The type of offset amount to be set (information in
the input table row) and the name of axis to be set
6 (information in the input table column) are
displayed following the title.
B + Input area Displays the currently set value, correction value,
7 and calculated value as shown in the formula. For
the formula, see "+ Input area" described below.
C Guidance message Displays a warning message.
8 display

A1  Title display area

Displays the window title at the left most.
The type of offset amount to be set (information in the input table row) and the
A2 name of axis to be set (information in the input table column) are displayed
following the title.

Z Table 7.3.6 (b) Type of offset amount to be set

Type of offset amount to be set Description
EXT External workpiece origin offset
G54, G55, G56, G57, G58, G59 Workpiece origin offset
SHIFT Workpiece coordinates shift
G54.1 P1 to G54.1 P300 Additional workpiece coordinates

398
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

 + Input area
The formula displayed in the + input area is as follows:

B 1
Fig. 7.3.6 (b) + Input Window 2
Table 7.3.6 (c) Item List of the Formula Displayed in the + Input Area
Description 2
A Name of a value used in the formula
B Value used in the formula. Enter a value in a field with a white
background. 4
 Operation of inputting the result of the correction value added to the 5
current value
<1> Move the cursor to the workpiece coordinates offset amount you want to enter
and press the [+ Input] soft key.
6
The + Input window appears.
7
8
A1

<2> Enter the correction value in the + Input window. A2

When the correction value is entered, the calculated value is updated.

<3> To set the calculated value as the offset amount, press the [OK] soft key.

399
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

7.3.7 Switching the Coordinates to Be Displayed in the

Current Position
7.3.7

See "8.3.6 Switching Coordinate Values to Be Displayed in the Current Position".

1
7.3.8 Switching Control Axes to Be Displayed in the Cur-
rent Position
2 7.3.8

See "8.3.2 Switching Control Axes to Be Displayed in the Current Position".

3
7.3.9 Presetting the Relative Coordinate Values
7.3.9

You can reset the current position of the relative coordinates to zero or preset it to
4 a specified value.

5 A

6 B

C
7
8
D

A1 Fig. 7.3.9 Preset Relative Coordinates Window

Table 7.3.9 Item List of the Preset Relative Coordinates Window
A2 Name Description
A Title display area Displays the window title at the left most.

Z B Preset setting area Displays the axis name (including the extension axis name or
index) and relative coordinate values when the Preset Relative
Coordinates window is displayed.
Up to five axes are displayed, and the sixth and subsequent
axes can be displayed by scrolling the screen vertically.
If axes are five or less, the window is reduced to a size enough
for the number of axes actually displayed.
C Guidance Displays a warning message.
message display

400
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

Name Description
D Soft keys Displayed when the [Preset Relative] soft key is pressed in the
workpiece coordinates slide.
Set the relative coordinate value in all axes to 0.
1
[All Axes 0 Input]
Set the relative coordinate value of the cursor position to 0. 2

[0 Input]
2

 Operation of presetting the relative coordinate values 4

<1> Press the [Preset Relative] soft key in the workpiece coordinates slide.
The Preset Relative Coordinates window appears. 5
6
<2> Move the cursor to the relative coordinate value of an axis you want to preset
and enter the relative coordinate value. 7
To set it to 0, move the cursor to the target and press the [0 Input] soft key.
To set all axes to 0, press the [All Axes 0 Input] soft key.
8
A1
A2
Z

<3> Press the [OK] soft key.

The entered relative coordinate value is set, and the Preset Relative
Coordinates window is closed.

401
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

7.3.10 Inputting a Workpiece by Measuring

7.3.10

You can input a workpiece by measuring the following positions:

• Face

1 • Center
• Circle Center

2 7.3.10.1 Inputting a workpiece by measuring the face

You can input a workpiece by measuring the face.
7.3.10.1

3  Displaying the Workpiece Measurement (Face) window

<1> Press the [Workpiece Measure] soft key.
4 Another set of soft keys appears.

5
<2> Press the [Face] soft key.
6 The Workpiece Measurement (Face) window appears.

7
 Displayed contents on the Workpiece Measurement (Face) window
8
A1
A2
A B C

Z
D

Fig. 7.3.10.1 Workpiece Measurement (Face) Window

402
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

Table 7.3.10.1 Item List

Name Description
A Current position The displayed contents can be switched among machine
display tile coordinates, absolute coordinates, and relative coordinates

B Machine coordinates
with soft key operation.
Displays the machine coordinates when the [Load Coord.]
1
record display tile soft key is pressed.
C Traveling direction
guide display tile
Displays the guide that shows the traveling direction of the
tools and table.
2
D Workpiece Used to measure the workpiece face.
measurement input 2
tile
E Guidance message Displays operation guidance and warning messages.
display tile 4
F Soft keys
Switches to the soft key page for displaying the current
position. 5
[Current Position]
6
Displays the Preset Relative Coordinates window.

7
[Preset Relative]
Displays the Tool Offset Select window.
8
[Select Offset] A1
Reverses the plus/minus sign of a correction value indicated
by the cursor.
A2
[Sign Inversion]
Clears the result of coordinates indicated by the cursor.
Z
[Clear Result]
Reflects the calculation result to [Result] on the workpiece
measurement input tile. It also reflects the current machine
coordinates to the machine coordinates record display tile.

[Load Coord.]

403
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

 Measuring the workpiece face

Measure the workpiece face in the workpiece measurement input tile.

<1> Enter a correction value in [Correction] for coordinates to be measured.

1
2
3
4
5  • You can also set a correction value by selecting the tool offset
number on the Tool Offset Select window. (See " Tool offset
MEMO select window".)

6
<2> Move the cursor to [Result] and press the [Load Coord.] soft key.

7
8
The calculation result is displayed in [Result].

A1
A2
Z

<3> Press the [OK] soft key.

The calculation result is set to the workpiece coordinates, and the Workpiece
Measurement (Face) window closes.

The item names of values displayed in the formula are as follows.

404
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

Value used in the Item name

formula
Current value of Machine coordinates
machine
coordinates
1
Correction value Correction
Result after
correction value is
Result (XXX) (*) 2
input
Value before Original Value (XXX) (*) 2
measurement

*: "XXX" shows one of the following coordinates types in a location indicated by the cursor in the
input table on the workpiece coordinates slide.
4
G54 to G59, G54.1P1 to G54.1P300

5
 Tool offset select window
You can set a correction value by selecting the tool offset number on the Tool
Offset Select window. 6
<1> Move the cursor to [Correction] for coordinates to be measured and press the
[Select Offset] soft key. 7
The Tool Offset Select window appears.
8

<2> Enter the tool offset number and press the [OK] soft key.
A1
The tool diameter or tool length of the selected tool offset number is set to a
correction value indicated by the cursor on the Workpiece Measurement (Face)
window, and the window closes.
A2
Z

• In tool offset memory B or C, an item to be set in the correction

value is different depending on the measured coordinate axis as
 follows:
First or second axis: Tool diameter of the selected tool offset
MEMO
number
Third axis: Tool length of the selected tool offset number

405
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

7.3.10.2 Inputting the center by measuring two points

You can inputting the center by measuring two points.
7.3.10.2

 Displaying the Workpiece Measurement (Center) window

1
<1> Press the [Workpiece Measure] soft key.

2 Another set of soft keys appears.

3
4 <2> Press the [Center] soft key.
The Workpiece Measurement (Center) window appears.

5
6  Displayed contents on the Workpiece Measurement (Center) window

7
8
A B C
A1
D

A2 E

Z F

Fig. 7.3.10.2 Workpiece Measurement (Center) Window

Table 7.3.10.2 Item List

Name Description
A Current position The displayed contents can be switched among machine
display tile coordinates, absolute coordinates, and relative coordinates
with soft key operation.
B Machine coordinates Displays the machine coordinates when the [Load Coord.]
record display tile soft key is pressed.

406
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

Name Description
C Traveling direction Displays the guide that shows the traveling direction of the
guide display tile tools and table.
D Workpiece Used to input the center by measuring two points.
measurement input
tile
1
E Guidance message Displays operation guidance and warning messages.
display tile
F Soft keys
2
Switches to the soft key page for displaying the current
position. 2
[Current Position]
Displays the Preset Relative Coordinates window.
4
5
[Preset Relative]
Clears the coordinate value and result of coordinates
indicated by the cursor. 6
[Clear Result]
Reflects the machine coordinates of coordinates indicated by
7
the cursor to the input section on the workpiece measurement
input tile. It also reflects the current machine coordinates to
the machine coordinates record display tile. 8
[Load Coord.]

 Inputting the center by measuring two points

A1
Input the center by measuring two points in the workpiece measurement input tile.
A2
<1> Move the cursor to the [1st Point] of the machine coordinates to be measured
and press the [Load Coord.] soft key.
The machine coordinates are set to the [1st Point] of the machine coordinates.
Z
<2> Move the cursor to the [2nd Point] of the machine coordinates to be measured
and press the [Load Coord.] soft key.
The machine coordinates are set to the [2nd Point] of the machine coordinates.

407
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

1
2
3 The calculation result is displayed in [Result].

4
5
6
7 <3> Press the [OK] soft key.
The calculation result is set to the workpiece coordinates, and the Workpiece
Measurement (Center) window closes.
8
The item names of values displayed in the formula are as follows.

A1 Value used in the Item name

formula

A2 Current value of machine

coordinates 1
[1st Point] of the machine coordinates

Current value of machine [2nd Point] of the machine coordinates

Z coordinates 2
Result after machine Result (XXX) (*)
coordinates are input
Value before Original Value (XXX) (*)
measurement

*: "XXX" shows one of the following headers in a location indicated by the

cursor in the input table on the workpiece coordinates slide.
Shift, G54 to G59

408
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

7.3.10.3 Inputting the circle center by measuring the hole or column

You can input the circle center by measuring the hole or column.
7.3.10.3

 Displaying the Workpiece Measurement (Circle Center) window

<1> Press the [Workpiece Measure] soft key. 1
Another set of soft keys appears.

<2> Press the [Circle Center] soft key. 2

The Workpiece Measurement (Circle Center) window appears.

4
5
 Displayed contents on the Workpiece Measurement (Circle Center)
window
6
7
8
A B C
A1
D

E A2

F
Z
Fig. 7.3.10.3 Workpiece Measurement (Circle Center) Window

Table 7.3.10.3 Item List

Name Description
A Current position The displayed contents can be switched among machine
display tile coordinates, absolute coordinates, and relative coordinates
with soft key operation.
B Machine coordinates Displays the machine coordinates when the [Load Coord.]
record display tile soft key is pressed.

409
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

Name Description
C Traveling direction Displays the guide that shows the traveling direction of the
guide display tile tools and table.
D Workpiece Used to input the circle center by measuring the hole or
1 measurement input
tile
column in four-point or three-point measurement.

E Guidance message Displays operation guidance and warning messages.

2 display tile
F Soft keys
Switches to the soft key page for displaying the current
3 position.

4 [Current Position]
Displays the Preset Relative Coordinates window.

5
[Preset Relative]
Switches the Workpiece Measurement (Circle Center)
6 window between the four-point measurement display and the
three-point measurement display.

7 [Measurement
Number]
Sets the current machine coordinates to the input section on

8 machine coordinates indicated by the cursor.

[Load Coord.]
A1
 Inputting the circle center by measuring the hole or column
A2 Input the circle center by measuring the hole or column in the workpiece
measurement input tile.

Z <1> Move the cursor to [Machine Coordinates 1] for coordinates to be measured

and press the [Load Coord.] soft key.
The machine coordinates are set to [Machine Coordinates 1].
<2> Similarly to step 1, set other machine coordinates.
For measurement between four points
Set machine coordinates to [Machine Coordinates 2], [Machine Coordinates 3],
and [Machine Coordinates 4].
For measurement between three points
Set machine coordinates to [Machine Coordinates 2] and [Machine
Coordinates 3].

410
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

1
2
The calculation result is displayed in [Result].
2
4
5
6
• When you press the [Measure Number] soft key, the Workpiece 7
 Measurement (Circle Center) window is switched between the
four-point measurement display and the three-point measurement
MEMO display. When the window is started, it is the four-point
measurement display.
8

<3> Press the [OK] soft key.

A1
The calculation result is set to the workpiece coordinates, and the Workpiece
Measurement (Circle Center) window closes.
The item names of values displayed in the formula are as follows.
A2

Value used in the Item name Z

formula
Current value of machine Machine Coordinates 1
coordinates 1
Current value of machine Machine Coordinates 2
coordinates 2
Current value of machine Machine Coordinates 3
coordinates 3
Current value of machine Machine Coordinates 4
coordinates 4
(For four-point
measurement only)

411
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

Value used in the Item name

formula
Measurement result Result (XXX) (*)
between four or three

1 points on the circle center

Value before Original Value (XXX) (*)
measurement

2 *: "XXX" shows the [Shift] or [G54 to G59] header in a location indicated by the cursor in the input
table on the work coordinates slide.

3
7.3.11 Undoing/Redoing Operations on the Workpiece
4 Coordinates Slide
7.3.11

You can undo and redo operations, such as changing values in the data table or
5 configuring the filtering settings on the workpiece coordinates slide.
Up to 20 histories are available on each path for these operations that can be
undone/redone (You can undo/redo up to the last 20 actions).
6 Whether undo/redo actions are supported or not is as shown in the table below.

Table 7.3.11 Whether Undo/Redo Actions Are Supported or Not

7 Supported/Not Operation
supported

8 Target Inputting data (direct input/measurement input/workpiece

measurement input/+ input)
Not supported • Changing the selected cell (MDI key cursor operation/touch)
A1 • Switching the tab (coordinates switch)
• Tool offset measured value direct input B

A2
 • Inputting data simultaneously in multiple cells, such as workpiece
measurement input, is counted as one history. Therefore, only one

Z MEMO undo/redo action can undo/redo changes made in multiple cells.

To undo/redo an operation, perform the following.

<1> Perform an operation that supports undo/redo actions.
<2> To undo the operation, press the [Undo] soft key.
To cancel the undone operation, press the [Redo] soft key.

412
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

• When you perform the following operations, the histories of

operations that can be undone/redone are cleared on all paths.
The CNC operation screen is exited (including power-off).
• When you perform the following operations, the histories of
operations that can be undone/redone are cleared on the operation 1
target path.
Edit offset data by not using the workpiece coordinates slide.
The input unit is changed by parameter setting/change and G20/ 2
G21.

 A value restored by parameter change is out of range. (The

warning message "Could not execute" appears.) 2
MEMO A cell where an operation that can be undone/redone was
performed is shown/hidden by parameter change.
The axis order is changed or an axis is shown/hidden by
parameter change.
4
The axis configuration is changed by arbitrary axis switching.
• Even if you perform the following operations, the histories of
operations that can be undone/redone are not cleared. 5
The workpiece coordinates slide is opened/closed.
The application is switched to another, such as the Home screen.
The mode is changed to the tool offset write mode. 6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

413
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 7 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES 
7.3 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE COORDINATES SLIDE

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

414
 MACHINING 1

8
(PROGRAM 2

EXECUTION) 3
4
5
This chapter describes how to execute machining programs and perform
machining.
6
8.1 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) OVERVIEW......................... 416
8.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EXECUTION
SCREEN............................................................................................... 417
7
8.3 OPERATING THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN....................... 437
8.4 MULTI-PATH INFORMATION DISPLAY.............................................. 452 8
8.5 REMOTE MACHINING......................................................................... 461
8.6 OPERATING THE CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE LIST SLIDE........... 464
8.7 RESTARTING PROGRAMS................................................................. 472 A
8.8 RESTARTING PROGRAMS - QUICK PROGRAM RESTART
FUNCTION ........................................................................................... 484
8.9 DISPLAYING TOOL TRACKS DURING MACHINING ......................... 499

415
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.1 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) OVERVIEW

8.1

8.1 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECU-

TION) OVERVIEW
1 The MEM mode allows you to execute machining programs and perform
machining.

2 You can perform the following operations which are required to execute programs:
• Displaying detailed information by switching the displayed contents of modal
information.
3 • Switching the control axes displayed in the current position, remaining distance,
and servo load meter.

4 • Searching for machining programs.

• Rewinding a machining program.

5 • Searching for a sequence number in a machining program.

• Switching the type of coordinate value (absolute coordinates, relative
coordinates, machine coordinates, and interruption move distance) displayed in
6 the current position.
• Providing overall display of coordinate values to be displayed in the current
position (absolute coordinates, relative coordinates, machine coordinates, and
7 remaining travel distance).
• Presetting workpiece coordinates. You can also check information required for
8 machining.
• Presetting relative coordinates.

A1 • Warnings can be displayed when you do not start the operation from the
beginning of the program.
• Warnings can be displayed at reset during program operation.
A2 • Warnings can be displayed when the mode is changed at the restart of
automatic operation.

416
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

8.2

8.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PRO-

GRAM EXECUTION SCREEN
1
8.2.1 Displayed Contents of the Program Execution
8.2.1
Screen 2
A B
2
C
4
E 5
D

G 6
F I
7
H

Fig. 8.2.1 Program Execution Screen

8
Table 8.2.1 List of Items in Program Execution Screen
Name Description
A1
A Current position/distance Displays the axis name, coordinate value,
display tile distance, and modal G code for each control
axis.
A2
B Servo load meter display tile Displays the servo load meter for each control
axis. Z
C Modal information display tile Displays the modal G codes, other command
values, and sequence number.
D Feed information display tile Displays the actual feedrate with numerical
values and circular graph.
E Spindle information display Displays spindle information in a numeric
tile value and circular chart, and also displays the
spindle load meter.
F Status display tile Displays the MEM mode specific status.
G Machining program display Displays a machining program currently being
tile executed.
H Message display tile Displays a guidance or warning.

417
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

Name Description
I Key input buffer display tile Displays the key input buffer.

8.2.1.1 Soft keys

1
8.2.1.1

2 Fig. 8.2.1.1 Soft Keys When the Program Execution Screen Is Opened
Table 8.2.1.1 Description of the Soft Keys
3 Name Description
Switches to the second page of soft keys for switching the current
position display.
4
[Current
Position]
5 Switches to the second page of soft keys for switching the preset display.

6 [Preset]
Switches to the second page of soft keys for switching the information
display.
7
[Change Info]

8 Switches the following screens in order.

• Program execution screen (single path display)
• Program execution screen (multi-path display)
[Change • Continuous machining screen
A1 Screen] • Background edit screen
• Machining simulation screen
* When the program execution screen (multi-path display) is not
A2 displayed, the next continuous machining screen will be displayed.
Moves the program cursor to the first line.

Z
[Rewind]
Searches for any machining program entered in the key input buffer.

[Search
Program]
Searches for a sequence number entered in the key input buffer.

[N Search]

418
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

8.2.2 Current Position/Distance Display Tile

8.2.2

Information displayed in the current position/distance display tile is as follows.

F
A
1
2
2
4
G B C D E

Fig. 8.2.2 Current position/distance display tile 5

Table 8.2.2 (a) Item List
Name Description 6
A Title area Displays the title of the current position and
distance.
B Axis name Displays the axis name with one letter. 7
C Extension axis name/ The extended axis name is displayed with a
index maximum of two letters.
Displays the index with a maximum of one 8
letter.
D Coordinate values Displays the coordinate value for each
controlled axis. A1
E Remaining travel Displays the distance for each control axis.
F G code Displays which code among G00, G01, G02,
G03, and G04 is being executed for the
A2
current coordinate value and remaining

G Axis status display

distance.
The status of each control axis is displayed as
Z
follow:
D: Removal of the axis
R: Releasing the axis (Arbitrary axis switching)
L: Machine lock
M: Mirror image

419
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

The axis status is displayed when the following information is displayed.

• Machine coordinates

 • Absolute coordinates

1 MEMO
• Relative coordinates
• Interruption (input)
• Interruption (output)
• Remaining travel
2
 Title area
3 Each title of the current position/distance display is displayed.

Current position display title

4 Interruption (Input)/Interruption (Output)

5  Axis name display

The axis name set in Axis name 1: Parameter (No.1020) is displayed.

6  Extension axis name and index display

The extension axis name or index, as well as Axis name 1, can be displayed.
When bit 0 (EEA) of parameter No.1000 is 1, you can extend the axis name up to
7 three characters by setting Axis name 2 (parameter No.1025) and Axis name 3
(parameter No.1026).

8 Extension axis name

The extended axis name is displayed with a maximum of two letters.
If the extension axis name is enabled, you can set the second and third axis
A1 names in addition to the first axis name.
For the second and third axis names, you can set any name with "0" to "9" and "A"
to "Z" using the ASCII code.
A2
Index
The index is displayed with a maximum of one letter.
Z If the extension axis name is enabled, you can set an index for the axis name.
For the index of the axis names, you can set any character with "0" to "9" and "A"
to "Z" using the ASCII code.

 Coordinate value and distance display

The coordinate value and distance for each control axis are displayed.

 Modal G code display in the current position/distance tile

The modal G codes in G code group 01, G04, or G31 commands specified in the
machining program will be displayed.
This display shows which command was used to specify the axis movement.

420
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

G04 and G31 are one shot G codes and will be displayed during execution of the
specified block.

Table 8.2.2 (b) List of Modal G codes displayed in the Current Position/
Distance Tile
1
G code displayed Description
G codes in G code G code group related to axis movement
group 01 2
G04 Dwell
G31 Skip function
2
8.2.3
8.2.3
Servo Load Meter Display Tile 4
Information displayed in the servo load meter display tile is as follows.

A
6
7
Fig. 8.2.3 (a) Servo load meter display tile
Table 8.2.3 Item List 8
Name Description
A Servo load meter Displays the load ratio (%) of each servo A1
motor in a bar chart.

 Servo load meter

The current load ratio (%) to the maximum load ratio of 200% is displayed in a bar
A2
chart.
The bar chart color changes according to the current load ratio (%).
Z
• If the load ratio (%) is between "1% and 100%", the bar chart is displayed in
green.
0 200

• If the load ratio (%) is between "101% and 150%", the bar chart is displayed in
yellow.
0 200

421
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

• If the load ratio (%) is between "151% and 200%", the bar chart is displayed in
red.
0 200

1 Fig. 8.2.3 (b) Servo load meter

2
8.2.4 Modal Information Display Tile
8.2.4

There are two display patterns depending on the option settings.

3 A

4 C
D
5 B E
F
G
6 H
I
J
7 L

8 Fig. 8.2.4 (a) Normal Modal Information Display Layout

A1 A

A2 B C

Z
E

L
I
F

G H J

Fig. 8.2.4 (b) Modal Information Display Layout with Additional Information

422
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

Table 8.2.4 (a) Item List

Name Description
A Sequence No. Displays the sequence number.
B Modal G code Displays the specified G code.
There are following differences from the single
path display:
1
• Modal G code for group 04 to be referenced
at the same time when displaying G code
group 11, which is more frequently specified,
2
is displayed.
• This is not supported for parameters (Nos.
3124 to 3127) that hide G code groups. 2
C
D
Modal F code
Modal S code
Displays the specified F code.
Displays the specified S code.
4
E Modal M code Displays the specified M code.
There are following differences from the single
path display:
5
• Even if bit 7 (M3B) of parameter No. 3404 is
set to 1 or bit 5 (M5B) of parameter No.
11630 is set to 1, only one modal M code is 6
displayed.
If multiple M codes are specified for the same
block, the M code first specified is displayed. 7
F Modal T code Displays the specified T code.
G
H
Modal H code
Modal D code
Displays the specified H code.
Displays the specified D code. (See "■
8
Showing/hiding the modal D code".)
I Modal HD.T code Displays the specified spindle position tool
number (HD.T).
A1
J Modal NX.T code Displays the specified next machining tool
number (NX.T). A2
K Modal B code Displays the specified second auxiliary code.
L Number of repetitions, Displays the number of repetitions in
number of executions subprogram calls and fixed cycles. Z
There are following differences from the single
path display:
• When multiple paths are displayed
simultaneously, the item name shows "L"
instead of "REPEAT".
<When the number of digits for the number of
repetitions command is 4 or less>

<When the number of digits for the number of

repetitions command is 5 or more>

423
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

 Showing/hiding the modal D code

The modal D code is displayed in machining center environments.
For lathe environments, if the following tool management option or extended tool
select function is enabled, the modal D code is displayed.
<Tool management options>
1 • Tool management function: 64 valid pairs option
• Tool management function: 240 valid pairs option
2 • Tool management function: 1000 valid pairs option
<Extended tool select function>
3 The extended tool select function is determined enabled when the following
parameter is set:
• Parameter TCT (No. 5040#3) = 1The extended tool select function is enabled (A
4 tool is changed through the automatic tool change unit (ATC)).
<Display status on lathe types>

5 Table 8.2.4 (b) Display status on lathe types setting

Tool management Extended tool select Displayed/not
option function displayed
6 Disabled Disabled Not displayed
Enabled Disabled Displayed

7 Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Displayed
Displayed

8  Displaying the number of repetitions and number of executions

Displays the number of repetitions in subprogram calls and fixed cycles.
A1 The remaining number of repetitions and specified number of repetitions are
displayed.
If the specified number of repetitions is 10,000 or more (5-or-more digits/up to
A2 eight digits), only the remaining number of repetitions is displayed.

When the number of digits for the number of repetitions command is 4 or less
Z
When the number of digits for the number of repetitions command is 5 or more

The number of repetitions is displayed when a subprogram call or fixed cycle

command is executed and remains displayed during the repeat execution. When
the specified number of repetitions is finished, the number of repetitions and the
title (REPEAT) disappear.
In a fixed cycle command for G code group 09 (G code group 10 in the lathe
system), if the fixed cycle is canceled by the G80 command or G code group 01
command, the number of repetitions disappears, including the title (REPEAT).

424
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

If no repeat is specified in a subprogram call or fixed cycle command, "0/0" is

displayed.

If a repeat is specified during the repeat execution, the information of the repeat
specified latter is displayed. When the repeat specified latter is finished, the repeat
information displayed originally is shown again. 1
Example: The number of repetitions when the following program O001 is executed
is as shown in the table. 2
2
4
Table 8.2.4 (c) Number of Repetitions When the Program O001 Is Executed 5
Sequence number of block Displayed number of repetitions
being executed
O0001/N003 Not displayed
6
O0010/N013 REPEAT n/5 (n: Remaining number of
repetitions) 7
O0100/N101 REPEAT m/10 (m: Remaining number of
repetitions)
O0010/N015 REPEAT n/5 (n: Remaining number of 8
repetitions)
O0001/N005 Not displayed
A1
8.2.5 Feed Information Display Tile
8.2.5

The display layout of feed information is as follows.

A2
A
Z

Fig. 8.2.5 (a) Feed information display tile

425
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

Table 8.2.5 (a) Item List

Name Description
A Actual feedrate Displays the actual feedrate in a numeric
value.
1 B Actual feedrate meter See " Actual feedrate meter" in the next
page.
C Dry run speed Displays the dry run speed in a numeric value.
2  Actual feedrate meter
The actual feedrate is displayed in a circular chart.
3 The circular chart displays the current actual feedrate against the actual feedrate
clockwise.

4
5 B

6 A

Fig. 8.2.5 (b) Feed information display tile

7 Table 8.2.5 (b) Item List
Name Description
8 A Maximum scale Displays the maximum actual feedrate in up to five digits.
The scale value is converted automatically according to the
input unit (mm/inch).
A1 For example, when the input unit is “inch (mm)” while the
machine unit is “mm (inch)”, the scale value will be converted to
“inch (mm)”.
A2 B Actual feedrate See "Actual feedrate unit" in the next page.
unit

Z Actual feedrate unit

The actual feedrate unit is determined by a combination of parameter settings as
shown in the following table:
Table 8.2.5 (c) Actual feedrate unit
Parameter setting Feed per minute Feed per rotation
mm mm/min mm/rev
inch inch/min inch/rev

426
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

 • For details on the parameter settings, contact the machine

manufacturer.
MEMO

1
8.2.6 Spindle Information Display Tile
8.2.6

The display layout of spindle information is as follows. 2

When the spindle does not support the spindle smart load meter, the normal
spindle load meter is displayed.

<Spindle Smart Load Meter Display> <Normal Spindle Load Meter>

2
A B A B
4
J J 5
C C
E
D
E
D
6
F G
7
H H

8
I

Display layout for one spindle A1

C D A F B C D A G B
A2
Z
E J I H E J H

Display layout for multiple spindles (up to three)

Fig. 8.2.6 (a) Spindle Information Display Tile Layout
Table 8.2.6 (a) Item List
Name Description
A Spindle name The spindle name (S) and extension spindle
name/index are displayed.
B Actual spindle speed Displays the actual spindle speed.

427
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

Name Description
C Spindle rotation direction icon Displays an icon indicating the spindle rotation
direction.
D Uniform peripheral speed An icon indicating the uniform peripheral speed
1 E
control mode icon
Actual Spindle Speed Meter
control mode is displayed.
Displays the actual spindle speed in a circular
chart.
2 F Spindle smart load meter Displays the spindle load ratio (%) in a bar
chart.
G Normal spindle load meter Displays the spindle load ratio (%) in a bar
3 chart.
H Current load ratio Displays the current spindle load ratio in %.

4 I Duration time Displays the machining available duration (in

seconds) with a time limit.
J Spindle speed override (*1) Displays the spindle speed override (%).

5 (*1)This is displayed only when the parameter No. 3106#5 (SOV) is 1.

6  Spindle name
The spindle name (S) and extension spindle name/index are displayed.
To use the extension spindle name/index, multi spindle control (optional function)
7 is required.

Extension spindle name

8 Spindle name 1 is represented as "S" and can be extended to up to three letters.

• Unless Spindle name 2 is set, Spindle name 3 is not enabled.

A1 • If Spindle name 2 is set to between '0' and '9', do not set Spindle name
3 to between 'A' and 'Z'.
! • If the last character of the spindle name is a number, '=' is required
A2 CAUTION between the spindle name and the command value.
• If the custom macro function is enabled, an extension spindle name
same as that of a reserved word cannot be used.

Z
Index
An index can be added next to 'S', which represents Spindle name 1.

Fig. 8.2.6 (b) Index

428
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

 Spindle rotation direction icon

The rotation direction (clockwise/counterclockwise) of the spindle is displayed with
an icon.

1
Vertical - Vertical - Horizontal - Horizontal -
Clockwise Countercloc Clockwise Countercloc
kwise kwise 2
Fig. 8.2.6 (c) Spindle rotation direction icon
 Uniform peripheral speed control mode icon 2
An icon indicating the uniform peripheral speed control mode is displayed.
To use this function, uniform peripheral speed control (optional function) is
required. 4
5
Fig. 8.2.6 (d) Uniform peripheral speed control mode icon
 Actual Spindle Speed Meter
The actual spindle speed is displayed in a circular chart. 6
Actual Spindle Speed: 0 Actual Spindle Speed: Actual Spindle Speed:
Middle Maximum
7
8

A
A1
Fig. 8.2.6 (e) Actual Spindle Speed Meter
Table 8.2.6 (b) Item List
A2
Name Description
A Maximum actual Displays the maximum actual spindle speed. Z
spindle speed

 Spindle smart load meter/spindle load meter

The spindle load ratio is displayed in a bar chart.
A different spindle load meter is displayed for each connected spindle.
The spindle smart load meter is displayed for the spindle that supports it,
otherwise, the normal spindle load meter is displayed.

429
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

Load Meter
The spindle smart load meter displays the current load ratio (%) to the maximum
load ratio (%) according to the specifications of the connected spindle in a bar
chart.
The normal spindle load meter displays the current load ratio (%) to the maximum
1 load ratio of 200 % in a bar chart.

Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Maximum

2 Output

0 200

3
4 A B

5 Fig. 8.2.6 (f) Load Meter

Table 8.2.6 (c) Item List

6 Name Description
A Load meter scale <Numeric value>
For the spindle smart load meter
7 "0" is displayed fixed, and a value is displayed as the maximum
output at the right edge of the meter according to the
specifications of each spindle.
8 For the normal spindle load meter
"200" is displayed as the maximum output.
<Dot>

A1 A dot is displayed in the border between "Area 1 and Area 2"

and between "Area 2 and Area 3".
B Spindle load Displays the spindle load ratio in a bar chart using different

A2 meter colors.
For the spindle smart load meter
Green:Continuous machining can be performed. (In Area 1)
Yellow: Machining can be performed within the allowable
Z continuous machining time. (In Area 2)
Red: Cut away is not recommended. (In Area 3)

<Colors in the bar chart>

• If the right edge of the bar chart is "in Area 1", the bar chart is displayed in
green.

0 200

430
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

• If the right edge of the bar chart is "in Area 2", the bar chart is displayed in
yellow.
0 200

1
• If the right edge of the bar chart is "in Area 3", the bar chart is displayed in red.
0 200 2

Fig. 8.2.6 (g) Colors in the Bar Chart

2
 Milling spindle information display
The following milling spindle information is displayed according to the parameter 4
settings.
A
5
B

C E
6
7
D

Fig. 8.2.6 (h) Milling Spindle Information

8
Table 8.2.6 (d) Item List

A
Name
Milling spindle name Displays "S".
Description
A1
B Actual milling Displays the actual milling spindle speed.

C
spindle speed
Actual milling Displays the actual milling spindle speed in a circular chart.
A2
spindle speed meter
D Milling spindle load Displays the milling spindle load ratio (%) in a bar chart. Z
meter
E Current load ratio Displays the current milling spindle load ratio in %.

431
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

8.2.7 Status Display Tiles

8.2.7

The status display tile display icons that indicate the state of the current
machining.

1 A B C D E F G H

2
3
Fig. 8.2.7 Icons in the Status Display Tile
Table 8.2.7 Item List
4 Name Icon Description
A Axis moving and Indicates whether the axis is moving or
5 dwelling status dwelling (suspended).
Axis moving or dwelling is displayed
depending on the situation.
6 B Auxiliary function
execution
Indicates whether the auxiliary function is
in execution or in execution completion
(completion wait) wait state.
7 status
C Tool retraction/ Indicates that the tool is retracting/
return status/ returning, reversing, re-forwarding, or
8 reverse in progress
status (retrace
ends reversing.

function)/re-forward

A1 in progress status
(retrace function)/
reverse end status
(retrace function) (*)
A2 D Single block in Indicates that the single block is in
progress status progress.
When the single block signal SBK
Z (Gn046.1) on the selected path is "1", this
icon is shown. When the single block
signal is "0", the icon is hidden.
E Manual handle Indicates that the manual handle retrace is
retrace in progress in progress. Icons indicating backward
status, backward move prohibited/inverse prohibited are
move prohibited/ also displayed.
inverse prohibited Either manual handle retrace in progress
status (*) or backward move/inverse prohibited will
be displayed depending on the situation.

432
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

Name Icon Description

F Rotary table A status icon indicating the offset number
dynamic fixture will be displayed during the rotary table
offset status (*) dynamic fixture offset mode.

1
2

G Workpiece This icon is displayed during the

2
placement error workpiece placement error compensation
compensation mode.
mode icon (*) The number on the upper right of the icon 4
indicates the workpiece placement error
compensation set number.
5
6
H AI contour and tool Indicates AI contour control I, II, tool tip
tip control mode
status (*)
control mode, smooth tool tip control
mode in progress.
7
AI contour control I, II, tool tip control
mode, or smooth tool tip control mode is
displayed depending on the situation. 8
*: Displayed only when the option is enabled.
A1
 • The rotary table dynamic fixture offset function cannot be used in 0i-F
MEMO
Plus.
A2
Z

433
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

8.2.8 Machining Program Display Tile

8.2.8

The machining program display tile displays a machining program.

1
2
3
4
5
6 Fig. 8.2.8 (a) Machining program display tile
 Machining program display tile
Information displayed in the machining program display tile is as follows:
7 A

8 B

A1
A2
C

Fig. 8.2.8 (b) Machining program display tile

Table 8.2.8 Item List
Name Description
A Program storage Displays a folder path storing the displayed program.
folder path

434
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

Name Description
B Program number/ Displays the program number or optional program name.
optional program
name
C Program text display Displays the program's content (text).
1
8.2.9
8.2.9
Machining Time/Remaining Time Display Tile 2
The machining time/remaining time display tile displays information related to the
machining time and remaining machining time.
2
 Machining time/remaining time display tile
Information displayed in the machining time/remaining time display tile is as
follows:
4
A
B 5
C

Fig. 8.2.9 Machining Time/Remaining Time Display Tile

6
Table 8.2.9 Item List
Name Description
7
A [Machining time] Displays the operating time while automatic operation is
enabled until one part is machined (does not include
when stopped or paused).
8
B [Remaining time] Displays the remaining time until machining of one part
will be completed. (*1)
The time calculated from the following formula is
A1
displayed:
Machining time entered in the program - A [Machining
time] A2
C Machining time/ Displays the remaining time until machining of one part
remaining time meter will be completed in a bar graph.
Z
(*1) The remaining machining time is displayed when any of the following conditions are
met:
• Condition 1: The machining time is entered in the program comment.
Example: When the machining time of program O3000 is 11 hours, 22 minutes, and
33 seconds
• Condition 2: The "cycle time stamp" option (J964) is enabled, and the program
machining time is stored in the NC using the cycle time stamp function.

435
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

8.2.10 Machining Scheduled End Time Display Tile

8.2.10

If the remaining machining time is displayed, the machining scheduled end time
display tile displays the scheduled time when the machining of one part will be
completed.
1
Fig. 8.2.10 Machining Scheduled End Time Display Tile
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

436
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.3 OPERATING THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

8.3

8.3 OPERATING THE PROGRAM EXECU-

TION SCREEN
The following operations available in the program execution screen. 1
• Switching the Displayed Contents of Modal Information
• Switching control axes to be displayed in the current position 2
• Searching for Any Machining Program
• Rewinding a machining program 2
• Searching for Sequence Number in a Machining Program
• Switching Coordinate Values to Be Displayed in the Current Position 4
• Switching displaying all of current position information
• Presetting Workpiece Coordinates 5
• Presetting Relative Coordinates
• Sequence No. Title Stop Function
6
• Protecting against unintended operation

7
8.3.1 Switching the Displayed Contents of Modal Informa-
tion
8.3.1

You can switch the standard modal information display to the expanded mode to
8
show more information.
A1
 Switching the Modal Information Display
You can expand the display area of modal information to show more information.
If the display is expanded, the servo load meter display area is hidden. A2
Z

437
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.3 OPERATING THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

Switching during standard modal

Before rewinding After switching

1
2
Switching when displayed information is increased
3 Before rewinding After switching

4
5
Fig. 8.3.1 Switching the Modal Information Display
6  Operation of switching the displayed contents of modal information
<1> Press the [Change Info] soft key in the MEM mode.
7 Another set of soft keys appears.

8
<2> Press the [Load Meter] soft key.
A1 The display contents of modal information change.

A2
Z 8.3.2 Switching Control Axes to Be Displayed in the Cur-
rent Position
8.3.2

If the total number of control axes is greater than the maximum number of axes to
be displayed simultaneously, not all control axis information can be displayed at
once. In this case, you can check the information of all the control axes by
switching the axes displayed in the current position.

 Switching Control Axes to Be Displayed in the Current Position

Control axis information switches according to the maximum number of axes to be
displayed simultaneously in the current position display area.
Control axis information to be switched is as follows.

438
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.3 OPERATING THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

• Axis name (extended axis name)

• Coordinate values
• Remaining travel
• Servo load meter
Maximum number of concurrent displayed axes: 5 axes, Total number of
1
axes: 6 axes

Displayed control axis: Axis 1 to 5 Displayed control axis: Axis 6 2

2
4
Fig. 8.3.2 Switching Control Axes to Be Displayed in the Current Position
5
 Operation of switching the control axis to be displayed
<1> Press the [Current Position] soft key in the MEM mode.
6
Another set of soft keys appears.
7
8
<2> Press the [Show Next Axis] soft key.
Displayed control axes change.
A1
A2
8.3.3
8.3.3
Searching for Any Machining Program Z
See "4.2.4 Searching Programs".

439
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.3 OPERATING THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

8.3.4 Rewinding a Machining Program

8.3.4

You can rewind the execution pointer of a machining program (move the cursor
position back to the beginning).

1  Rewinding a Machining Program

The machining program is rewound and the execution pointer is moved to the first
row.
2 Before rewinding After rewinding

3
4
5
Fig. 8.3.4 Rewinding a Machining Program

6  Operation of rewinding a machining program

To rewind a machining program, press the [Rewind] soft key or use the reset &
rewind signal.
7
Using the soft key
<1> Press the [Rewind] soft key in the MEM mode.
8 The execution pointer is moved to the first row block.

A1
A2 Using the reset & rewind signal
Turn on/off the signal to move the execution pointer to the first row block.

440
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.3 OPERATING THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

8.3.5 Searching for Sequence Number in a Machining Pro-

gram
8.3.5

You can search for any sequence number in the displayed machining program.

 Searching for Sequence Number in a Machining Program 1

The execution pointer is moved to the target sequence number in the machining
program.
2
Sequence number search

2
4
5
Fig. 8.3.5 Searching for Sequence Number in a Machining Program
 Operation of searching for sequence number in a machining program 6
Enter the sequence number in the key input buffer and press the [N Search] soft
key to search for the sequence number in the selected machining program.
7
<1> Enter the sequence number you want to search for in the key input buffer in the
MEM mode.
8
A1

<2> Press the [N Search] soft key.

A2
The guidance message display tile displays [Searching...] and the sequence
number is searched in the current and subsequent cursor positions.
If the search is hit, the target sequence number block is selected with the
Z
cursor.

441
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.3 OPERATING THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

8.3.6 Switching Coordinate Values to Be Displayed in the

Current Position
8.3.6

You can switch the position display in the current position display.

1  Switching coordinate values to be displayed in the current position

The title, axis name, and coordinate value corresponding to "Absolute
2 coordinates", "Relative coordinates", "Machine coordinates", "Interruption (Input)",
or "Interruption (Output)" are displayed.
"Interruption (Input)" or "Interruption (Output)" can be switched only when the

3 manual handle interruption option is enabled.

<Absolute coordinates> <Relative coordinates>

4
5
<Machine coordinates>
6
7
8
<Interruption (input)> <Interruption (output)>

A1
A2
Z Fig. 8.3.6 Switching Coordinate Values to Be Displayed
 Operation of switching coordinate values
You can select coordinate values to be displayed in the current position display
area by pressing an appropriate soft key.
<1> Press the [Current Position] soft key in the MEM mode.
Another set of soft keys appears.

442
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.3 OPERATING THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

<2> Press a soft key corresponding to coordinate values to be displayed.

Displayed coordinate values change.

1
Table 8.3.6 Item List
Name Description 2
Displays absolute coordinates.

2
[Absolute]
Displays relative coordinates.
4
[Relative]
Displays machine coordinates. 5
[Machine] 6
Displays interruption (input).

7
[Interrupt
(Input)]
Displays interruption (output). 8
[Interrupt
(Output)]
A1
A2
8.3.7 Switching to Overall Display of Current Position
Information (Absolute Coordinates, Relative Coordi-
nates, Machine Coordinates, Remaining Travel Dis-
Z
tance)
8.3.7

You can check four types of current position information simultaneously in the
base screen.
You can check "Absolute coordinates", "Relative coordinates", "Machine
coordinates", and "Distance" simultaneously.

443
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.3 OPERATING THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

1
2
3
4
5 Fig. 8.3.7 Displaying Overall Display

6  Operation of switching to overall display

You can switch the display method of the current position information between
individual display and overall display.
7
<1> Press the [Current Position] soft key in the MEM mode.

8 Another set of soft keys appears.

A1
<2> Press the [All] soft key

A2 The display switches to overall display.

8.3.8 Presetting Workpiece Coordinates

8.3.8

You can preset manually shifted workpiece coordinates to workpiece coordinates

which were offset by the workpiece origin offset amount from the machine origin
before the shift.

 Preset Workpiece Window

To preset workpiece coordinates, use the Preset Workpiece window.

444
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.3 OPERATING THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

B
1
2
C

Fig. 8.3.8 Preset Workpiece Window 2

Table 8.3.8 Item List
Name Description 4
A Title display area Displays the window title at the left most.
Displays workpiece coordinates to be preset (workpiece
coordinates selected in the modal) after the title. 5
B Preset setting Displays the axis name (including the extension axis name or
area index) and correction value when the Work Coordinate Preset
window is displayed.
All correction values are blank when the window is displayed.
6
Up to five axes are displayed, and the sixth and subsequent
axes can be displayed by scrolling the screen vertically.
If axes are five or less, the window is reduced to a size enough
7
for the number of axes actually displayed.
C Guidance
message display
Displays a warning message.
8
tile

A1
 Operation of presetting workpiece coordinates
Display the Work Coordinate Preset window and preset workpiece coordinates.
A2
<1> Press the [Preset] soft key in the MEM mode.
Another set of soft keys appears. Z

<2> Press the [Preset Workpiece] soft key.

The Work Coordinate Preset window appears.

445
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.3 OPERATING THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

<3> Move the cursor to the correction value area of an axis you want to preset and
enter the correction value.

1
2
3
4 • To set it to 0, move the cursor to the target and press the [0 Input] soft
key.

5  • To set all axes to 0, press the [All Axes 0 Input] soft key. 0 is set to all
axes.
MEMO

6
7 <4> Press the [OK] soft key.
The currently selected workpiece coordinates (workpiece coordinates
displayed right to the window title) are preset with the correction value
8 considered.

A1 8.3.9 Presetting Relative Coordinates

8.3.9

You can reset the current position of the relative coordinates to zero or preset it to
A2 a specified value.

 Preset Relative Coordinates Window

Z To preset relative coordinates, use the Preset Relative Coordinates window.

446
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.3 OPERATING THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

B A 1
2

D C
2
4
Fig. 8.3.9 Preset Relative Coordinates Window 5
Table 8.3.9 Item List of the Preset Relative Coordinates Window
Name Description
6
A Title display area Displays the window title at the left most.
B Preset setting area Displays the axis name (including the extension axis name
or index) and relative coordinate values when the Preset 7
Relative Coordinates window is displayed.
Up to five axes are displayed, and the sixth and
subsequent axes can be displayed by scrolling the screen
vertically.
8
If axes are five or less, the window is reduced to a size

C Guidance message
enough for the number of axes actually displayed.
Displays a warning message.
A1
display tile
D Soft keys Press the [Preset Relative] soft key to display. A2
[All Axes 0 Input] Set the relative coordinate value in all axes to 0.
[0 Input] Set the relative coordinate value of the cursor position to
0. Z
 Preset operation of relative coordinates
Display the Preset Relative Coordinates window and preset workpiece
coordinates.

<1> Press the [Preset] soft key in the MEM mode.

Another set of soft keys appears.

447
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.3 OPERATING THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

<2> Press the [Preset Relative] soft key.

The Preset Relative Coordinates window appears.

1
<3> Move the cursor to a correction value of an axis you want to preset and enter
the corrected value.
2
3
4
5 • To set it to 0, move the cursor to the target and press the [0 Input]
soft key.
• To set all axes to 0, press the [All Axes 0 Input] soft key. 0 is set to
6  all axes.
MEMO

7
8 <4> Press the [OK] soft key.
The currently selected relative coordinates are preset with the correction value

A1 considered.

A2
Z

448
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.3 OPERATING THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

8.3.10 Sequence No. Title Stop Function

8.3.10

During program execution, the block with the sequence number that was set
beforehand will be executed and then placed in a single block stop state.

1
2
2
4
5

Fig. 8.3.10 Sequence No. Title Stop Function

6
<1> Press the [Stop N Check] soft key in the MEM mode.
The Sequence No. Stop setting window appears. 7
8
<2> Enter the program number (0 number) to be stopped with the sequence
number stop function and press <INPUT>. A1
You may enter a program number in the range 0 to 99999999.

A2
Z
<3> Enter the sequence number and press <INPUT>.
You may enter a sequence number in the range 1 to 99999999.
0: Value that cannot be set as a sequence number due to specifications
-1: Value when the block matches the set program number and sequence
number (invalid sequence number)
<4> Press the [Apply] or [OK] soft key.
Update the conditions to stop the sequence number with the entered contents
(set with parameters No.8341 and No.8342).

449
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.3 OPERATING THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

 • When you press the [OK] soft key, the Sequence No. Stop setting
window will close.
MEMO

1
<5> Start the cycle.

2 If the block matches the program number and sequence number that was set
beforehand, that block will be executed and then placed in a single block stop
state. When this occurs, the sequence number set value (parameter No.8342)

3 will automatically change to -1.

4 8.3.11 Displaying and Setting Machining Information

8.3.11

You can display and set information related to machining while the continuous
machining screen is displayed. Items that can be displayed are [PART TOTAL],
5 [PART REQUIRED], [PARTS COUNT], [POWER ON], [RUN TIME], [CUTTING
TIME], [FREE PURPOSE], and [CYCLE TIME].

6 A

7
8
A1 B
Fig. 8.3.11 Machining Information Window
A2
Table 8.3.11 Item List
Z Name Description
A Machining information Displays the machining information.
setting area
B Guidance message Displays a warning message.
display tile

450
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.3 OPERATING THE PROGRAM EXECUTION SCREEN

 Displaying machining information

<1> Press the [Machining Info] soft key while the continuous machining screen is
displayed.

1
The Machining Information window appears.
<2> Enter the machining information.
2
Use the MDI keys to enter each value and press <INPUT> to confirm those
values. 2
<3> Press the [OK] soft key.

4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

451
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.4 MULTI-PATH INFORMATION DISPLAY

8.4

8.4 MULTI-PATH INFORMATION

DISPLAY
1 You can display and operate information about multiple paths (coordinates, states,
and programs) simultaneously in one screen.

2 The number of paths to be displayed simultaneously in information varies

according to the indicator size as shown in the table below.

3 Table 8.4 (a) Number of Paths That Can Be Displayed Simultaneously in

Information
Indicator size Number of paths to be displayed simultaneously
4 10.4-inch indicator 2 (2-path display)
15-inch indicator 3 (3-path display)

5 19-inch indicator

The paths to be displayed simultaneously and the display order are as follows:

6 When the settings are fixed

• 2-path display: Displaying Path 1 and Path 2 simultaneously in that order from
7 left to right of the screen
• 3-path display: Displaying Path 1, Path 2, and Path 3 simultaneously in that
order from left to right of the screen
8
When the settings depend on the parameters
The paths to be displayed simultaneously are determined in the settings of the
A1 multi-path group numbers and multi-path display order numbers.
Set a group number for paths to be displayed simultaneously in the same group.
The multi-path group numbers must be set sequentially starting from 1.
A2 The multi-path display order numbers for the same group must be set in order of
1, 2, and 3 from left to right.
The following are screen display examples of a 5-path system.
Z • Example 1
Set a multi-path group containing Path 1, Path 2, and Path 3 in that order.
Set a multi-path group containing Path 4 and Path 5 in that order.

Table 8.4 (b) Screen Display Example 1 of a 5-path System

Path Screen display
Setting item
1 2 3 4 5 (A number is a path number to be displayed.)

Group number 1 2 Group 1 Group 2

Order number 1 2 3 1 2

452
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.4 MULTI-PATH INFORMATION DISPLAY

• Example 2
Set a multi-path group containing Path 1 and Path 2 in that order.
Set a multi-path group containing only one path for Path 3.
Set a multi-path group containing Path 4 and Path 5 in that order.

Table 8.4 (c) Screen Display Example 2 of a 5-path System

1
Path Screen display
Setting item
1 2 3 4 5 (A number is a path number to be displayed.) 2
Group number 1 2 3 Group 1 Group 2 (*1) Group 3

2
Order number 1 2 1 1 2

4
(*1)The single path display is used for Path 3 in multi-path group 2, which contains only one path.

5
 • The maximum number of paths that can be controlled in the multi-path
display is ten.
MEMO
6
8.4.1 Displaying Multi-path Information 7
8.4.1.1 Switching between the single and multi-path screens
Soft keys to be used to switch between the single path screen and the multi-path
screen vary depending on the multi-path target path and display order settings
8
(fixed/depending on the parameters).
A1
 When the multi-path target paths and the display order are set to "fixed"
Press the [Change Screen] soft key to change the screen.
The screen changes in the following order because it also needs to switch to the A2
continuous machining screen and the background edit screen.

When the selected path is set as a multi-path target path Z

Debug operation screen (single path display)

Debug operation screen (multi-path display)

Continuous machining screen

Background edit screen

453
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.4 MULTI-PATH INFORMATION DISPLAY

When the selected path is not set as a multi-path target path

Debug operation screen (single path display)

1 Continuous machining screen

2
Background edit screen

3
 • The machining simulation screen and the multi-path screen cannot be
used simultaneously.
4
MEMO

Screen to be displayed first after power-on

5 When the mode is switched to the MEM mode for the first time after power-on, the
debug operation screen (single path display) appears.

6 Sharing of the single or multi-path display state

The single or multi-path display state is not shared between the MEM mode and
the EDIT mode.
7 If the mode is switched to the EDIT mode when the debug operation screen
(single path display) is displayed in the MEM mode, the multi-path edit screen
appears. When it is switched back to the MEM mode, the debug operation screen
8 (single path display) appears.

Screen transition when switching between the MEM and EDIT modes
A1 When the MEM mode is switched to the EDIT mode, the screen displayed last
time in the EDIT mode appears.
Similarly, when the EDIT mode is switched to the MEM mode, the screen
A2 displayed last time in the MEM mode appears.

Z  When the multi-path target paths and the display order are set to
"depending on the parameters"
Press the [Single->Multi] or [Multi->Single] soft key to change the screen.
If you press the [Single->Multi] soft key when the debug operation screen (single
path display) is displayed, the screen changes to the multi-path screen.
If you press the [Multi->Single] soft key when the multi-path screen is displayed,
the screen changes to the single path screen.

454
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.4 MULTI-PATH INFORMATION DISPLAY

• The [Single->Multi] soft key is not shown if the path selected with the
path select signal is not set in a multi-path group that displays two or
more paths simultaneously.
 • The single or multi-path display state does not change even when the
screen is switched to another. When you display the debug operation 1
MEMO
screen again, the screen is displayed in the last display state.
• To change to the continuous machining screen or the background edit
screen, use the [Change Screen] soft key. 2
Screen to be displayed first after power-on 2
When the mode is switched to the MEM mode for the first time after power-on, the
debug operation screen (single path display) appears.
If the path selected with the path select signal is not set in a multi-path group that 4
displays two or more paths simultaneously, the single path screen appears.
Then, if the path is switched to one set in a multi-path group that displays two or
more paths simultaneously, the multi-path screen appears. 5
Sharing of the single or multi-path display state
The single or multi-path display state can be shared between the EDIT mode base 6
screen and the debug operation screen.
If the screen is switched between single path display and multi-path edit display in
the EDIT mode base screen, the display state of the debug operation screen also 7
changes.

For example, if you perform the following procedure, the switch operation for the 8
single path edit screen in the EDIT mode base screen is also applied to the debug
operation screen.
<1> Display the debug operation screen with the multi-path display in the MEM A1
mode.
<2> Switch to the EDIT mode.
A2
The multi-path edit screen appears.
<3> Change it to the single path edit screen.
<4> Switch to the MEM mode.
Z
The debug operation screen with the single path display appears.

Screen transition when switching between the MEM and EDIT modes
A screen transition between the MEM mode and the EDIT mode varies depending
on the following conditions:
• Multi-path system
• The paths to be edited simultaneously and the display order depend on the
parameters.
• The multi-path edit function is enabled.
• The multi-path display function is enabled.

455
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.4 MULTI-PATH INFORMATION DISPLAY

When all conditions are met

When the debug operation screen (single or multi-path display) is displayed in the
MEM mode and then switched to the EDIT mode, the EDIT mode base screen
(single path edit/multi-edit or multi-path edit) always appears.
Similarly, when the EDIT mode base screen (single path edit/multi-edit or multi-
1 path edit) is displayed and then switched to the MEM mode, the debug operation
screen (single or multi-path display) always appears.
Meanwhile, when the mode is switched to the EDIT mode from the multi-path
2 display screen in the MEM mode, the multi-path edit screen in the EDIT mode
appears.
When the continuous machining screen or the background edit screen is
3 displayed and then switched to the EDIT mode, the screen displayed last time in
the EDIT mode appears.

4 When at least one of the conditions is not met

When the MEM mode is switched to the EDIT mode, the screen displayed last
time in the EDIT mode appears.
5 Similarly, when the EDIT mode is switched to the MEM mode, the screen
displayed last time in the MEM mode appears.

6  Operation target in the multi-path screen

The path selected with the path select signal can be operated.

7 The path icon with the blue background (cursor background) in the machining
program display tile indicates the operation target.

8  Available operations in the multi-path screen

In the multi-path screen, you can perform operations only for the operation target
selected with the path select signal.
A1 8.4.1.2 Changing the operation target and the screen by changing the path
(The paths and display order are set to "fixed")
A2 When the multi-path target paths and the display order are set to "fixed", the
operation target and the screen can be changed by changing the path as follows:

Z Use the path select signal to change the operation target and the screen.
The operation target changes to the path selected with the path select signal.
The screen changes as follows depending on the path selected with the path
select signal.
• If a path shown in the multi-path screen is selected, the screen remains the
same.
• If a path not shown in the multi-path screen is selected, the screen changes to
the single path screen.

456
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.4 MULTI-PATH INFORMATION DISPLAY

Path not shown in the multi-path screen

• For the 2-path display (displaying Path 1 and Path 2 simultaneously): Paths
other than Path 1 and Path 2
• For the 3-path display (displaying Path 1, Path 2, and Path 3 simultaneously):
Paths other than Path 1, Path 2, and Path 3 1
If the single path screen is displayed by changing to a path not shown in the multi-
path screen, the single path screen is applied for All paths. 2
To display the multi-path screen again, use the [Change Screen] soft key.

The following is an example of changing the screen of a 3-path system with the 2- 2
path display (displaying Path 1 and Path 2 simultaneously).
<1> Change the operation target from Path 1 to Path 2.
(Switching from a path shown in the multi-path screen to a path shown in the
4
multi-path screen)
With the multi-path screen being displayed, only the operation target changes
(The solid frame in the figure below indicates the operation target).
5
6
Path 1 Path 2 Path 1 Path 2
(*1)

7
(*1) Select Path 2 with the path select signal.

<2> Change the operation target from Path 2 to Path 3.

8
(Switching from a path shown in the multi-path screen to a path not shown in
the multi-path screen)
The screen changes to the single path screen (The solid frame in the figure
A1
below indicates the operation target).
A2
Path 1 Path 2 Path 3
(*1)
Z
(*1) Select Path 3 with the path select signal.

<3> Change the operation target from Path 3 to Path 1.

(Switching from a path not shown in the multi-path screen to a path not shown
in the multi-path screen)
The screen is switched to the single path screen for Path 1 (The solid frame in
the figure below represents the operation target).
To display the multi-path screen again, press the [Change Screen] soft key.

457
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.4 MULTI-PATH INFORMATION DISPLAY

Path 3 Path 1 Path 1 Path 2

(*1) (*2)

1
(*1) Select Path 1 with the path select signal.

2 (*2) Use the [Change Screen] soft key to display the multi-path screen.

Changing the path in other screens

3 If you changed the screen from the multi-path screen to one shown below and
then changed the path to one in the multi-path display on that screen, you can
also display the single path screen by returning to the path shown in the multi-path

4 screen and displaying the MEM base mode screen.

• Slide screen
• Information Center screen
5 • Screen other than iHMI applications
The following shows an operation example:
6 <1> Open the multi-path screen in a slide.
<2> Change the path to one not shown in the multi-path screen when the slide is
7 displayed.
<3> Change the path to one shown in the multi-path screen when the slide is
displayed (Switch it back to the path selected in step <1>).
8 <4> Close the slide.
The single path screen appears.
A1 8.4.1.3 Changing the operation target and the screen by changing the path
(The paths and the display order are set to "depending on the
A2 parameters")
When the multi-path target paths and the display order are set to "depending on
the parameters", the operation target and the screen can be changed by changing
Z the path as follows:

Use the path select signal to change the operation target and the screen.
The operation target changes to the path selected with the path select signal.
The screen appears for the multi-path group where the path selected with the path
select signal belongs.
If the only path in a multi-path group or a path not belonging to a multi-path group
is selected, the single path screen appears.

The following is an example of changing the screen of a 6-path system.

• Path 1 and Path 2 belong to multi-path group 1
• Path 3 and Path 4 belong to multi-path group 2

458
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.4 MULTI-PATH INFORMATION DISPLAY

• Path 5 belongs to multi-path group 3

• Path 6 does not belong to any multi-path group
<1> Change the operation target from Path 1 to Path 2.
(Switching within the same multi-path group)
With the screen for multi-path group 1 being displayed, only the operation 1
target changes (The solid frame in the figure below indicates the operation
target).
2
Path 1 Path 2
(*1)
Path 1 Path 2
2

(*1) Select Path 2 with the path select signal.

4
<2> Change the operation target from Path 2 to Path 3.
(Switching to another multi-path group) 5
The screen is switched to the screen for multi-path group 2 (multi-path screen
for Path 3 and Path 4) (The solid frame in the figure below represents the
operation target). 6

Path 1 Path 2 Path 3 Path 4

7
(*1)

8
(*1) Select Path 3 with the path select signal.

<3> Change the operation target from Path 3 to Path 5. A1

(Switching to another multi-path group)
The screen changes to the one for multi-path group 3 (single path screen for
Path 5) (The solid frame in the figure below indicates the operation target). A2

Path 3 Path 4 Path 5

Z
(*1)

(*1) Select Path 5 with the path select signal.

<4> Change the operation target from Path 5 to Path 6.

(Switching to a path not belonging to any multi-path group)
The screen is switched to the single path screen for Path 6 (The solid frame in
the figure below represents the operation target).

459
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.4 MULTI-PATH INFORMATION DISPLAY

Path 5 Path 6
(*1)

1
(*1) Select Path 6 with the path select signal.

2 <5> Change the operation target from Path 6 to Path 1.

(Switching to a path belonging to a multi-path group)
The screen is switched to the screen for multi-path group 1 (multi-path screen
3 for Path 1 and Path 2) (The solid frame in the figure below represents the
operation target).

4
Path 6 Path 1 Path 2
(*1)
5
6 (*1) Select Path 1 with the path select signal.

7
8
A1
A2
Z

460
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.5 REMOTE MACHINING

8.5

8.5 REMOTE MACHINING

The RMT mode allows you to perform DNC machining, which runs a program
stored in an external device.
1
The program execution information displays and functions are almost the same as
in the MEM mode.
2
The RMT mode specific machining information displays and functions include:
• Displaying a Program Running DNC Machining 2
• Selecting a DNC machining program

4
8.5.1 Name of Each Part
5
8.5.1

The program execution screen for the RMT mode is almost the same as for the
MEM mode program execution screen.

A B
6
C
7

E
8
D

G A1
F I A2
H
Z
Fig. 8.5.1 Program Execution Screen of RMT Mode
Table 8.5.1 Item List
Name Description
A Current position/distance Displays the axis name, coordinate value, distance,
display tile and modal G code for each control axis.
B Servo load meter display tile Displays the servo load meter for each control axis.
C Modal information display tile Displays the modal G codes, other command
values, sequence number, and information of tool
in use.
D Feed information display tile Displays the actual feedrate with numerical values
and circular graph.

461
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.5 REMOTE MACHINING

Name Description
E Spindle information display tile Displays the spindle information with numerical
values and circular/bar graphs.
F Status display tile Displays the RMT mode specific status.
1 G Program Display Tile Displays the device/path/program name of the
selected DNC machining program, and the
program of the machining DNC.
2 H Key input buffer display tile Displays the key input buffer.
I Message display tile Displays a guidance or warning.

3
8.5.2 Selecting a DNC Machining Program
4
8.5.2

You can select a DNC machining program in the Program Management Slide.

<1> Open the Program Manager slide while the program execution screen is
5 displayed in the RMT mode.
A list of programs that can run DNC machining is displayed.

6 <2> Select a DNC machining program from the list.

7
8.5.3 Displaying a Program Running DNC Machining
8.5.3

In the RMT mode, the program display tile displays the currently running DNC
8 machining program.

A1
A2
Z

Fig. 8.5.3 (a) Program Display Tile

462
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.5 REMOTE MACHINING

 Program Display Tile

Information displayed in the program display tile is as follows.

B
1
2
2
C 4
5
Fig. 8.5.3 (b) Program Display Tile
Table 8.5.3 Item List
6
Name Description
A Folder path and Displays a folder path containing a file selected as a DNC
file name display machining program. The file name is displayed after the path. 7
If the folder path is too long to fit on the display area, some
characters in the last part of it are omitted and replaced with
"...". 8
B Program name Displays the program name in a file selected as a DNC
display machining program.
If the program name is too long to fit on the display area, some
characters in the last part of it are omitted and replaced with
A1
"...".
The program name is displayed only while DNC machining is
running.
A2
C Currently running Displays a DNC machining program.
program of DNC The program is displayed only while DNC machining is
machining running.
Z
display

463
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.6 OPERATING THE CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE LIST SLIDE

8.6

8.6 OPERATING THE CUSTOM MACRO

VARIABLE LIST SLIDE
1 You can display custom macro variables as a list in the custom macro variable list
slide.

2
8.6.1 Opening/Closing the Custom Macro Variable List
3 8.6.1
Slide
8.6.1.1 Opening the custom macro variable list slide
4 8.6.1.1

<1> On the operation screen, press the [Custom Macro Variable List] soft key.
The custom macro variable list slide appears.
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z 8.6.1.2
8.6.1.2
Closing the custom macro variable list slide
<1> Press the [Custom Macro Variable List] soft key.
The custom macro variable list slide closes and returns to the operation screen.

464
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.6 OPERATING THE CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE LIST SLIDE

8.6.1.3 Displayed contents on the custom macro variable list slide

8.6.1.3

1
B
2
2
4
C

5
Fig. 8.6.1.3 Custom Macro Variable List Slide
6
Table 8.6.1.3 Item List
Sym
bol
Name Description 7
A Custom macro variable tab Switches the variable to be displayed on the tab.
B Custom macro variable display Displays custom macro variables. 8
tile
C Guidance Displays messages such as warnings.
A1
 • When the value is empty (blank), "Data (blank)" will be displayed. A2
MEMO

Z
8.6.2 Displaying the Custom Macro Variables as a List
8.6.2

You can display custom macro variables as a list.

<1> On the operation screen, press the [Custom Macro Variable List] soft key.
The custom macro variable list slide appears.

465
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.6 OPERATING THE CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE LIST SLIDE

<2> Select the tab that corresponds to the variable you want to display.

1
2
3
4
5
6  • If there is a name for a custom macro variable, the variable name will
also be displayed.
MEMO

7
8.6.3 Searching for Custom Macro Variables
8 8.6.3

You can search for custom macro variables by number or name.

A1 8.6.3.1 Searching by number

Search for a custom macro variable by number.
8.6.3.1

A2 <1> Press the [Number Search] soft key.

The Number Search window is displayed.
Z

466
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.6 OPERATING THE CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE LIST SLIDE

<2> Enter a macro variable number to search and press the [OK] soft key.

1
2
2
4
5
A tab containing the searched macro variable number is displayed, and the
focus moves to the target macro variable in the tab.
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
8.6.3.2 Searching by name
Search for a custom macro variable by name.
8.6.3.2

<1> Press the [Name Search] soft key.

The Name Search window is displayed.

467
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.6 OPERATING THE CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE LIST SLIDE

<2> Enter a macro variable name to search and press the [OK] soft key.

1
2
3
4
5
A tab containing the searched macro variable name is displayed, and the focus
6 moves to the target macro variable in the tab.

7
8
A1
A2
Z

8.6.4 Showing/Hiding the Custom Macro Variable Names

8.6.4

Show/hide the custom macro variable names.

<1> When the custom macro variable names are displayed in a single column,
press the [Name] soft key.
The custom macro variable names are hidden.

468
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.6 OPERATING THE CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE LIST SLIDE

<2> Press the [Name] soft key.

The custom macro variable names are displayed in three columns. 1
2

• The display will change as follows each time you press the [Name] 2
 soft key.
Displayed in single column, hidden, displayed in three columns,
MEMO
hidden, ... 4
 Operations when Custom Macro Variable Names are Displayed in Three 5
Columns on the Screen
Table 8.6.4 Operations when Custom Macro Variable Names are Displayed in
Three Columns on the Screen
6
Operation Controls used Screen movement
To switch the selected Press the <↑> or <↓> The cursor moves up or down. 7
custom macro variable key. If the cursor is at the end or top of
the column, and there is another
column adjacent to it, the cursor
moves to the next or prior custom
8
macro variable in that adjacent
column.
The cursor does not move between
A1
the very first and very last item of the

To display the hidden Press the <PAGE UP>

entire custom macro variable list.
The custom macro variable list
A2
custom macro variables or <PAGE DOWN> scrolls up or down.
above or below keys, or move the
handle on the scroll bar Z
up or down.
To display the hidden Press the <←> or <→> The adjacent column that was
custom macro variable key. hidden appears.
column on the right or
left

469
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.6 OPERATING THE CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE LIST SLIDE

8.6.5 Inputting a Custom Macro Variable File

8.6.5

Input a custom macro variable file from an external device.

<1> Press the [File Input] soft key.

1 The external input window appears.

2
<2> Select an external device from where you want to input and the custom macro
3 variable file to input.

4
5
6
7
8 <3> Press the [OK] soft key.
The external input window closes, and the custom macro variables described in

A1 the selected file are displayed in the custom macro variable list slide.

A2 8.6.6 Outputting a Custom Macro Variable File

8.6.6

Output a custom macro variable file to an external device.

Z <1> Press the [File Output] soft key.

The external output window appears.

470
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.6 OPERATING THE CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE LIST SLIDE

<2> Select the output destination in the folder tree and press the [OK] soft key.

1
2
2

The output file name input window is displayed.

4
<3> Enter the name of the file to be output and press the [OK] soft key.
The external input window closes, and the custom macro variables displayed in 5
the custom macro variable list slide are output to a file.

6
7

 • If a file with the same name already exists in the output destination,
the Confirm Overwrite window will appear.
8
MEMO Select [Overwrite] or [Rename].

A1
A2
Z

471
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.7 RESTARTING PROGRAMS

8.7

8.7 RESTARTING PROGRAMS

The program restart function (option) is used to restart a machining program from

1 a middle point after the occurrence of tool breakage, suspension of operation for
holidays, etc.

2
8.7.1 Opening/Closing the Utility Slide
3
8.7.1

8.7.1.1 Opening the utility slide

8.7.1.1

4 <1> On the operation screen, press the Utility Slide soft key.
The utility slide appears.

5
6
7
8
A1
A2
8.7.1.2 Closing the utility slide

Z
8.7.1.2

<1> Press the Utility Slide soft key.

The utility slide closes and returns to the operation screen.

472
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.7 RESTARTING PROGRAMS

8.7.1.3 Displayed contents on the utility slide

8.7.1.3

1
2
A

B
4
5
Fig. 8.7.1.3 Utility Slide
Table 8.7.1.3 Item List 6
Name Description
A Function display tile Displays the icon, name, and overview of each function
registered to the utility slide. 7
B Guidance message Displays an operation description or warning.
display tile
8
8.7.2
8.7.2
Opening the Program Restart Window A1
You can restart programs on the Program Restart window.

<1> On the utility slide, select the [Program Restart] soft key and press the [OK] soft
A2
key.
The Program Restart window is displayed.
Z

473
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.7 RESTARTING PROGRAMS

1
2
3
4
5
8.7.2.1 Displayed contents on the program restart window
8.7.2.1

6 A
B

7
8 C

A1 D

Fig. 8.7.2.1 Program Restart Window

A2 Table 8.7.2.1 Item List
Name Description
Z A Operation guidance Displays the program restart operation guidance. The
display tile running operation is highlighted.
B Operation message Displays the program restart procedures.
display tile
C Program restart area tile Displays the operation screen "Block Search", "Restore
Aux. Function”, or "Move to Restart Position". The tile
layout varies depending on each operation screen.
D Guidance message Displays an operation description or warning.
display tile

474
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.7 RESTARTING PROGRAMS

8.7.3 Operation Flow of Program Restart

8.7.3

Each program restart consists of the following three operations. By performing the
operations in order, you can restart the program.

<1> Block Search: 1

Specify a restart point and perform dry run to the restart block. (-> "8.7.4
Performing Dry Run to the Restart Block")
<2> Restore Aux. Function:
2
Execute the MSTB code in the MDI program to restore the auxiliary function.
(-> "8.7.5 Restoring the Auxiliary Function") 2
<3> Move to Restart Position:
Move the axis to the restart position. (-> "8.7.6 Moving to the Program Restart
Position") 4
The program restart screen changes as follows:
5
Utility Slide

Select [Program Restart] and press 6

[OK].

Block Search
[Close]
7
[Search]
8
Restore Auxiliary Function
<RESET> [Close]
[Back] [Next]
A1

<RESET>
Move to Restart Position
[Close]
A2
Fig. 8.7.3 Program Restart Screen Change Z
8.7.4 Performing Dry Run to the Restart Block
8.7.4

On the Dry Run to Restart Block screen in the Program Restart Window, search
for the program restart block and perform dry run to the block.

<1> Press the [Sequence No.] or [Block Counter] soft key and set the method of
specifying a program restart block.
Sequence No.
Set the method of specifying a restart block in Sequence No.
Block Counter
Set the method of specifying a restart block in Block Counter.

475
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.7 RESTARTING PROGRAMS

<2> Specify a program restart block.

1 To specify the sequence number

2
3
4
5
6 Name
[Restart Block]
Description
Displays the method of specifying a program restart block
("Sequence No.").

7 [Sequence No.] Enter the sequence number of a restart block.

[Repetition] Enter how many times to repeat before restarting the program.
[Restart Type] Displays the block counter search type.
8 Setting one of the following types:
• P Type: Press the [P Type] soft key to set.
This is used when machining is halted due to tool breakage.
A1 Machining can be restarted from any position.
• Q Type: Press the [Q Type] soft key to set.
This is used to restart machining when the power is
A2 temporarily turned off, emergency stop is used, or the
coordinate system is changed after operation stop.
You need to move the machine to the machining start point

Z and set the same modal information and coordinate system

as when the machining started.

476
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.7 RESTARTING PROGRAMS

To specify the block counter

1
2
2

Name Description 4
[Restart Block] Displays the method of specifying a program restart block

[Block Counter]
("Block Counter").
Enter the block counter of a restart block.
5
When you press the [Restore Restart Info] soft key, the block
counter value saved on the MEM mode base screen is
entered. 6
[Restart Type] Displays the block counter search type.
Setting one of the following types:
• P Type: Press the [P Type] soft key to set. 7
This is used when machining is halted due to tool breakage.
Machining can be restarted from any position.
• Q Type: Press the [Q Type] soft key to set. 8
This is used to restart machining when the power is
temporarily turned off, emergency stop is used, or the
coordinate system is changed after operation stop.
You need to move the machine to the machining start point
A1
and set the same modal information and coordinate system
as when the machining started.
A2
• If the block counter is not saved, pressing the [Restore Restart Info]
soft key enters "0".
Z
• When you place the cursor in [Restart Type], the [P Type] and [Q
 Type] soft keys appear.
• When you place the cursor in [Block Counter], the [Restore Restart
MEMO
Info] soft key appears.
• For how to save the block counter, see "8.7.4.1 Saving the block
counter".

<3> Press the [Search] soft key.

A search for the program restart block is executed, dry running to the block.

477
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.7 RESTARTING PROGRAMS

 • To cancel the search, press <RESET>.

• To redo the search after the program restart window is closed during a
MEMO search, you must first cancel the search.

1
2 • When the search is done, the Restore Aux. Function screen appears.
! If the restart block is located in the last half of the program, the search
CAUTION is not yet completed. Wait for the search to be finished before
3 performing the next operation.

4 8.7.4.1 Saving the block counter

You can save the block counter on the MEM mode base screen.
8.7.4.1

The saved block counter can be restored when you search using the block
5 counter on the Program Restart window.

6 <1> On the MEM mode base screen, press the [Save Restart Info] soft key on the
second page.
The block counter is saved.
7
8
8.7.5 Restoring the Auxiliary Function
A1 8.7.5

After the search for the program restart block is completed, execute the MSTB
code in the MDI program to restore the auxiliary function on the Restore Aux.
A2 Function screen.

Z 8.7.5.1
8.7.5.1
Displayed contents on the Restore Aux. Function screen

A B

Fig. 8.7.5.1 Restore Aux. Function screen

478
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.7 RESTARTING PROGRAMS

Table 8.7.5.1 Item List

Name Description
A MSTB code display tile Displays MSTB codes found in the search for the
program restart block.
B MDI program display tile Displays the MDI program. If the program restart
auxiliary function output is enabled, MSTB codes
1
found in the search for the program restart block are

C
input to the MDI program.
Key input buffer display tile Displays key input characters used when editing the
2
MDI program.

8.7.5.2 Executing MDI programs

2
Execute the MSTB code in the MDI program to restore the auxiliary function.
8.7.5.2

4
<1> Switch to MDI mode.
<2> Edit the MDI program. 5


• For how to edit the program, see "2.3.5.1 Key input buffer area" and
"5.2.5 Editing MDI Programs".
6
• When you press the [Paste MSTB] soft key, the displayed MSTB code
MEMO
is pasted to the MDI program.
7
<3> Start the cycle to execute the MDI program.
<4> Press the [Next] soft key.
8
The Move to Restart Position screen appears.
A1
 • When you press <RESET>, the screen returns to the Dry Run to
MEMO
Restart Block screen.
A2

8.7.6 Moving to the Program Restart Position Z

8.7.6

After executing the MDI program, move the axis to the restart position on the
Move to Restart Position screen as follows:

<1> Execute the MSTB code in overstore.(-> 8.7.6.2 Executing the MSTB code in
overstore)
<2> Set the moving axis. (-> 8.7.6.3 Setting the moving axis)
<3> Set the arbitrary axis approach. (-> 8.7.6.4 Setting the arbitrary axis approach)
<4> Move to the restart position. (-> 8.7.6.5 Moving to the restart position)

479
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.7 RESTARTING PROGRAMS

8.7.6.1 Displayed contents on the move to restart position screen

8.7.6.1

1
2
3
A C D E
4
Fig. 8.7.6.1 Move to Restart Position screen

5 Table 8.7.6.1 Item List

Name Description

6 A
B
Moving order
Axis
Displays the order of axes moving to the restart position.
Displays the axis name (including the extension axis
name or index).
7 The axis set to the arbitrary axis approach has a blue
background.
C Restart coordinate Displays the program restart coordinates.
8 D Restart distance Displays the distance to the restart coordinates.
E Machining program Displays a machining program being executed.
display tile
A1
8.7.6.2 Executing the MSTB code in overstore
Execute the overstore.
8.7.6.2

A2 Overstore is a function to execute an input MSTB code in cycle start.

Z <1> Switch to MEM or RMT mode.

<2> Press the [Overstore] soft key.
The Overstore window appears.

480
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.7 RESTARTING PROGRAMS

<3> Enter the code to output.

1
2

 • The number of digits (up to eight) that can be input varies depending
on the parameter settings.
2
MEMO • When you press the [Clear] soft key, all input fields becomes blank.

4
<4> Press <INPUT>.
The entered contents will be confirmed. 5
<5> Start the cycle.
When you start the cycle, the auxiliary function is output the PMC, and the
MSTB code becomes blank. 6
• Overstore can be used until the axis reaches the restart position. 7
 When the axis reaches the restart position, the [Clear] soft key is
displayed in gray.
MEMO • When you press <RESET>, the screen returns to the Dry Run to
Restart Block screen.
8

8.7.6.3 Setting the moving axis

A1
Set the order of axes moving to the restart position.
8.7.6.3

A2
<1> Press the [Moving Axis] soft key.
The Moving Axis window appears.
Z

481
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.7 RESTARTING PROGRAMS

<2> Enter the order of axes moving to the restart position.

1
2
3 The entered contents will be confirmed.
<3> Press the [OK] soft key.

4 The order of moving axes is set, and the Moving Axis window closes.

• You can use the [Moving Axis] soft key only before moving to the
5  restart position. After the axis starts moving to the restart position, the
[OK] soft key is displayed in gray.
MEMO • When you press <RESET>, the screen returns to the Dry Run to
6 Restart Block screen.

7 8.7.6.4 Setting the arbitrary axis approach

Set or cancel the axis moving in the arbitrary axis approach.
8.7.6.4

8 <1> Switch to MEM or RMT mode.

<2> Press the [Arbitrary Axis] soft key.
A1 The arbitrary axis approach soft key appears.

A2
<3> Press the soft key for the axis name you want to set as the arbitrary axis
Z approach.
The pressed axis name is set to the arbitrary axis approach.

482
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.7 RESTARTING PROGRAMS

• When you press the [Clear] soft key, the arbitrary axis approach is
canceled.
• Arbitrary axis approach can be used until the axis reaches the restart
position. When the axis reaches the restart position, all Axis Name soft
1
 keys and the [Clear] soft key are displayed in gray.
• Only one axis can be set to the arbitrary axis approach. While an axis
MEMO is set to the arbitrary axis approach, if you try to set another axis to the
arbitrary axis approach, the old one is canceled, and the new one is 2
set to the arbitrary axis approach.
• The axis set to the arbitrary axis approach has a blue background in
the axis name displayed on the Move to Restart Position screen. 2
8.7.6.5 Moving to the restart position 4
Move the axis to the restart position.
8.7.6.5

<1> Switch to MEM or RMT mode.

5
<2> Adjust the override.
<3> Enable the single block. 6
<4> Start the cycle.
The axis moves to the restart position. 7
<5> Revert the override to the original value.
<6> Disable the single block. 8
<7> Press the [Close] soft key.
The Program Restart Window closes.
A1
A2
Z

483
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.8 RESTARTING PROGRAMS - QUICK PROGRAM RESTART FUNCTION

8.8

8.8 RESTARTING PROGRAMS - QUICK

PROGRAM RESTART FUNCTION
1 The quick program restart function (option) is used to restart a machining program
from a middle point after the occurrence of tool breakage, suspension of operation

2 for holidays, etc.

3 8.8.1 Operation Flow of Quick Program Restart

The quick program restart function uses the following steps as in the case of
program restart function.
4 <1> Block Search:
Switch the display mode for restart point as needed.

5 Display mode
List display
Description
You can check the detailed information of a restart point.
Edit display You can select a program to be set for a restart point or select a restart
6 Creation display method and execute a creation display search.

<2> Restore Aux. Function:

7 Execute the MSTB code in the MDI program to restore the auxiliary function.

8  • For details on the operation, see “8.7.5 Restoring the Auxiliary

Function”.
MEMO

A1
<3> Move to Restart Position:
Move the axis to the restart position.
A2
 • For details on the operation, see “8.7.6 Moving to the Program Restart
Z MEMO
Position”.

The quick program restart screen changes as follows:

484
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.8 RESTARTING PROGRAMS - QUICK PROGRAM RESTART FUNCTION

Utility Slide

[OK] [Close]

Block Search
[Restart Point]
1
[Edit]
Block Search

[List]
Restart point edit display 2
<RESET> [Select Program]
Block Search
Restart point list display
<RESET>
[New]
2
[Detail] [List]

4
Block Search
Restart point creation display
[New]
[Move to Restart Position] [Select Program]

5
Block Search Block Search
Detailed display
window
Select Program Window
6
[Move to Restart Position] Block Search
Select Restart Method window 7
[OK]

8
<RESET>
Restore Aux. Function [Close]

A1
[Back] [Next]
<RESET> [Close]
Move to Restart Position
A2
[Start/End Point]
Move to Restart Position
Select Restart Block Start/
Z
End Point Window

Fig. 8.8.1 Quick Program Restart Screen Change

8.8.2 Quick Program Restart Window

To open the Quick Program Restart window, select [Quick Program Restart] on the
utility slide and press the [OK] soft key.
The Quick Program Restart window displays “Block Search (restart point list
display)” initially.

485
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.8 RESTARTING PROGRAMS - QUICK PROGRAM RESTART FUNCTION

8.8.2.1 Name and Function of Each Part on the Quick Program Restart
Window

1 B

2
C

3
4 D

Fig. 8.8.2.1 (a) Quick Program Restart Window

5
Table 8.8.2.1 (a) Name and Function of Each Part on the Quick Program Restart Window
6 Name Function
A Operation guidance Displays the quick program restart operation guidance.

7 B
display tile
Operation message
The running operation is highlighted.
Displays the quick program restart procedures.
display tile

8 C Program restart area tile Displays the operation screen "Block Search", "Restore Aux.
Function", or "Move to Restart Position".
The tile layout varies depending on each operation screen.

A1 D Guidance message
display tile
Displays an operation description or warning.

A2  Soft keys on the Quick Program Restart window

Block Search
Z The soft keys displayed for Block Search will vary by the cursor position or display
mode (restart point list/edit/creation display).

Fig. 8.8.2.1 (b) Soft Keys for Block Search (First Page)

Fig. 8.8.2.1 (c) Soft Keys for Block Search (Second Page)

486
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.8 RESTARTING PROGRAMS - QUICK PROGRAM RESTART FUNCTION

Table 8.8.2.1 (b) Soft Keys for Block Search

Name Function
First page
Shows Block Search in the restart point list display.
For details, see “Restart point list display”. 1
[List]
Shows Block Search in the restart point edit display. 2
This soft key becomes disabled when there is no restart point or there is no
editable restart point.

[Edit]
For details, see “Restart point edit display”. 2
Shows Block Search in the restart point creation display.
For details, see “Restart point creation display”.
4
[New]
When Block Search is shown in the restart point list display, the detailed 5
information for selected restart point is displayed.
For details, see “Restart Point Detail window”.

[Detail]
6
Displays the elapsed time or M code for waiting in the restart point list.

7
8
[M Code ->
Time]/[Time -> A1
M Code]
Changes to the single-path restart mode or multi-path restart mode.
For details, see "8.8.3 Multi-path quick program restart".
A2
Z

[Multi -> Single]/

[Single -> Multi]
Displays the Select Restart Method window.
For details, see “Select Restart Method window”.

[Restart Point]

487
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.8 RESTARTING PROGRAMS - QUICK PROGRAM RESTART FUNCTION

Name Function
Closes the Quick Program Restart window.

1 [Close]
Second page
Changes to the display for entering a sequence number.
2
3 [Sequence No.]
Changes to the display for entering a block number.

4
[Block No.]
Changes to the display for entering a block counter.
5
6 [Block Counter]
Changes to the display for entering an M code for waiting.

7
[M Code for
Waiting]
8 Displays the Select Program window.
For details, see “Select Program window”.

A1 [Select
Program]

A2 Searches for a program in an upward direction on the program preview screen.

Z [Search Up]
Searches for a program in a downward direction on the program preview screen.

[Search Down]
Switches focus between the creation/edit information input area and program
preview area.

[Select Target]

488
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.8 RESTARTING PROGRAMS - QUICK PROGRAM RESTART FUNCTION

Name Function
Displays the Select Restart Method window.
For details, see “Select Restart Method window”.

[Restart Point] 1
Closes the Quick Program Restart window.

2
[Close]

2
 Block Search
Restart point list display
To show the restart point list display on the Block Search screen, perform either of 4
the following operations.
• On the utility slide, select [Quick Program Restart] and press the [OK] soft key.
5
• Press the <RESET> key while one of the following screens is displayed.
Restart point edit display on the Block Search screen
Restart point creation display on the Block Search screen
6
Restore Aux. Function screen
Move to Restart Position screen
7
8
A1
A
C A2
Z
B

Fig. 8.8.2.1 (d) Restart point list display on the Block Search screen

489
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.8 RESTARTING PROGRAMS - QUICK PROGRAM RESTART FUNCTION

Table 8.8.2.1 (c) Name and Function of Each Part of Restart point list display on
the Block Search screen
Name Function
A Restart point list Restart points are listed with the following items:

1 • No.: Serial number of restart point (maximum three digits)

• Program Name: Program name of restart point
 O number program: All displayed (four or eight digits)

2  Arbitrarily named program: Up to nine characters displayed.

Subsequent characters shown as "...".
• Wait M Code: M code for waiting of restart point (maximum nine digits)

3  This can be changed to elapsed time only in the multi-path restart

mode.
 For multi-path systems or when a search by direct search method is

4 enabled, the following icon will be displayed at the left most position.
Restart point allowing multi-path restart

5 Restart point allowing a search by direct search method

6 • Elapsed Time: Execution time of restart point

 Displayed in HHHH:MM:SS format (maximum 2359:59:59).
 "0:MM:SS" displayed when H is 0.
7 • Seq Number: Sequence number of restart point (maximum eight digits)
• Block Number: Block number of restart point (maximum nine digits,
"*********" displayed for a number exceeding nine digits)
8 B Modal The following modal information is displayed.
information • G code (two)
 Workpiece coordinates group (group 14)
A1  Absolute/incremental group (group 03)
(Group 03 not displayed for T-type G code system A.)
• M code (maximum five)
A2 • T code (one)
C Program preview The following items of the block selected on the restart point list are
displayed.
Z • Program path
• Program name
• Program preview

Restart point edit display

Use the restart point edit display on the Block Search screen to edit a restart point
to conduct a search.
To display this screen, perform the following:
<1> Select a target restart point on the restart point list display on the Block Search
screen.
<2> Press the [Edit] soft key.

490
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.8 RESTARTING PROGRAMS - QUICK PROGRAM RESTART FUNCTION

1
B
A
2
2
C
4
Fig. 8.8.2.1 (e) Restart Point Edit Display on the Block Search Screen

5
Table 8.8.2.1 (d) Name and Function of Each Part of Restart Point Edit Display on
the Block Search Screen
Name Function 6
A Restart point edit The following items for editing a restart point are displayed.
item • Restart Block: Select the method of specifying a restart block from
the following options (edit items vary by the method). 7
 Sequence No.
 Block No.
 Block Counter 8
• Sequence No.: Enter the sequence number of restart block.
• Block No.: Enter the block number of restart block.
• Block Counter: Enter the block counter of restart block. A1
• Repetition: Enter how many times to repeat before restarting the

A2
program.
B Program preview The following items of an edited block are displayed.
• Program path
• Program name
• Program preview Z
C Key Input Buffer Enter a string searched from a program preview.

Restart point creation display

Use the restart point creation display on the Block Search screen to create a new
restart point to conduct a search.
To display this screen, press the [New] soft key on either of the following screens.
• Restart point list display on the Block Search screen
• Restart point edit display on the Block Search screen

491
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.8 RESTARTING PROGRAMS - QUICK PROGRAM RESTART FUNCTION

1
B
2 A

3
4 C

Fig. 8.8.2.1 (f) Restart Point Creation Display on the Block Search Screen
5
Table 8.8.2.1 (e) Name and Function of Each Part of Restart Point Creation

6 Display on the Block Search Screen

Name Function
A Restart point The following items for creating a new restart point are displayed.
7 creation item • Restart Block: Select the method of specifying a restart block from
the following options (creation items vary by the method).
 Sequence No.
8  Block No.
 Block Counter
 M Code for Waiting (only in the multi-path restart mode)
A1 • Program Name: Specify a program by tapping the edit box or
pressing the [Select Program] soft key and selecting a program from
the Select Program window.
A2 • Sequence No.: Enter the sequence number of restart block.
• Block No.: Enter the block number of restart block.
• Block Counter: Enter the block counter of restart block.
Z • Repetition: Enter how many times to repeat before restarting the
program.
B Program preview The following items of a newly created block are displayed.
• Program path
• Program name
• Program preview
C Key Input Buffer Enter a string searched from a program preview.

Restart Point Detail Window

To display the Restart Point Detail window, press the [Detail] soft key while the
restart point list display is shown on the Block Search screen.

492
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.8 RESTARTING PROGRAMS - QUICK PROGRAM RESTART FUNCTION

1
2
2
B
4
5
Fig. 8.8.2.1 (g) Restart Point Detail Window

Table 8.8.2.1 (f) Name and Function of Each Part on the Restart Point Detail
6
Window
Name Function 7
A Detailed The following items for a restart point are displayed.

8
information • Program Name (maximum 32 characters)
• Repetition: Sequence repeat count corresponding to the sequence
number
• Current Block No. (maximum nine digits)
• Block Counter (maximum nine digits) A1
• Sequence No. (maximum eight digits)
• M Code for Waiting (maximum eight digits, only in the multi-path
restart mode) A2
• Multiplicity (maximum two digits)
• Caller: The following items for a caller are displayed.
 Sequence No. (maximum eight digits) Z
 Block No. (maximum nine digits)
 Program Name (maximum 32 characters)
B Modal information The modal information of a restart point is displayed.

Select Program Window

To display the Select Program window, perform either of the following operations
while the restart point edit display or restart point creation display is shown on the
Block Search screen.
• Tap the “Program Name” edit box.
• Press the [Select Program] soft key.

493
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.8 RESTARTING PROGRAMS - QUICK PROGRAM RESTART FUNCTION

1
C
2 B

3
4
5 Fig. 8.8.2.1 (h) Select Program Window

6 Table 8.8.2.1 (g) Name and Function of Each Part on the Select Program Window
Name Function
7 A Folder path Displays the folder path selected in the folder tree.
B Folder tree Displays the device and folder where a selected program exists.

8
C Program list Displays programs in the folder selected in the folder tree.

A1
Fig. 8.8.2.1 (i) Soft Keys on the Select Program Window
A2
Table 8.8.2.1 (h) Soft Keys on the Select Program Window
Z Name Function
Displays the submenu for changing host, allowing a change of destination to any
of the following options.
• Host 1
• Host 2
[Change Host]
• Host 3
Displays the submenu for sorting, allowing programs in the program list to be
sorted with the following conditions.
• Name
• Comments
[Sort]
• Change date
• Size
• Sort order (ascending/descending)

494
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.8 RESTARTING PROGRAMS - QUICK PROGRAM RESTART FUNCTION

Select Restart Method window

Select the method of restarting program and conduct a block search.
To display the Select Restart Method window, press the [Restart Point] soft key on
either of the following screens.
• Restart point list display on the Block Search screen
1
• Restart point edit display on the Block Search screen
• Restart point creation display on the Block Search screen
2
• In the following situations, only “Search” can be selected as a restart
method. 2
 The Select Restart Method window is displayed from the restart
point edit display or restart point creation display.
MEMO
The Select Restart Method window is displayed after selecting a
point allowing multi-path restart on the restart point list display.
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Fig. 8.8.2.1 (j) Select Restart Method Window (Search/Direct Jump Selection)
Z

495
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.8 RESTARTING PROGRAMS - QUICK PROGRAM RESTART FUNCTION

1
2
3
4
5 Fig. 8.8.2.1 (k) Select Restart Method Window (Search/Direct Search Selection)

6 Method
Table 8.8.2.1 (i) Restart Method Function Comparison
Modal/position information, Note
etc.

7 Search Restored automatically. As well as the blocks stored in the program

restart memory, you can also select other blocks
as restart point.
8 Direct jump Not restored (operator needs Faster than the search method.
to restore manually).
Direct search Restored automatically. • This can be selected only when all the
A1 conditions for parameter settings, etc. are met
and also a point allowing direct search is
selected as a restart point.
A2 • Faster than the search method.

Z Table 8.8.2.1 (j) Operations in the Select Restart Method Window

Operation Soft key/MDI key operation
Executing a search/direct jump/ Select a restart method and then press the [OK] soft key.
direct search When the process is completed, the Restore Aux. Function
screen appears.
Canceling a search Press the <RESET> key.
The restart point list display of the Block Search screen
returns.

 • Executing a search/direct jump/direct search during emergency stop

does not start the process until the emergency stop state is canceled.
MEMO

496
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.8 RESTARTING PROGRAMS - QUICK PROGRAM RESTART FUNCTION

 Restore Aux. Function screen

For details on the Restore Aux. Function screen, see “8.7.5 Restoring the Auxiliary
Function”.

 Move to Restart Position screen

For details on the Move to Restart Position screen, see "8.7.6 Moving to the
1
Program Restart Position".
2
 Select Restart Block Start/End Point Window
Select a start/end point of restart block as a destination of tool (suppression
motion setting). 2

 • Parameter setting is required to use this function. 4

For details, contact the machine manufacturer.
MEMO

5
To display the Select Restart Block Start/End Point window, perform the following:
<1> Switch to the MEM or RMT mode. 6
<2> Press the [Start/End Point] soft key on the Move to Restart Position screen.

7
8

Fig. 8.8.2.1 (l) Select Restart Block Start/End Point Window

A1

To set the suppression motion, select “Start” or “End” and then press the [OK] soft A2
key.

497
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.8 RESTARTING PROGRAMS - QUICK PROGRAM RESTART FUNCTION

8.8.3 Multi-path quick program restart

For multi-path systems, when program restart is executed in a single path,
program restart is also executed automatically in other paths. This action is called
“multi-path quick program restart”.

1  Quick program restart operation mode

The quick program restart operation is performed in either of the following two
2 modes, depending on the multi- or single-path target.
• Multi-path restart mode

3 • Single-path restart mode

Switching between these modes can be performed by the [Single -> Multi]/
[Multi -> Single] soft key.
4
 Conditions for entering the multi-path restart mode

5 When all the following conditions are met, the multi-path restart mode is entered
when the Quick Program Restart screen is opened.
• Use a multi-path system.
6 • Specify a multi-path restart group number as a parameter of selected path.

7  Conditions for executing the multi-path restart mode

In the multi-path restart mode, quick program restart can be executed when either
of the following conditions is met.
8 • Select a point allowing multi-path quick program restart on the restart point list
display on the Block Search screen.

A1 • Select "Sequence No." or "M Code for Waiting" as the method of specifying a
restart block on the restart point creation display on the Block Search screen.

A2
Z

498
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.9 DISPLAYING TOOL TRACKS DURING MACHINING

8.9

8.9 DISPLAYING TOOL TRACKS DURING

MACHINING
Use the machining drawing function to display automatic operation tool tracks. 1
2
8.9.1 Showing/Hiding the Machining Drawing Function
2
8.9.1

You can show or hide display tool tracks during automatic operation.

<1> Press the [Change Info] soft key.

Another set of soft keys appears. 4
5
<2> Press the [Machining Drawing] soft key.
6
7
<3> Press the [Drawing ON] or [Drawing OFF] soft key.

Table 8.9.1 Showing/Hiding Machining Drawing

A1
Name Description
Displays the machining drawing tile to show tool tracks during A2
automatic operation.

[Drawing ON]
Z
Displays the feed information display tile and spindle information
display tile. Tool tracks are not shown during automatic operation.

[Drawing
OFF]

499
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.9 DISPLAYING TOOL TRACKS DURING MACHINING

8.9.2 Machining Drawing Tile

8.9.2

In the machining drawing tile, a machining blank line and a tool track during
automatic operation are drawn. The axis and axis name that indicate the view
coordinates and the icon that indicates the parallel shift/rotation mode appear at
1 the bottom left.

2
3
4
5
6
7 Fig. 8.9.2 Machining Drawing Tile
Lines are drawn using the following colors:
8 Table 8.9.2 Drawing Method
Name Solid/dot Color
A1 Blank Solid Green
Fast feed path Dot Red

A2 Cutting feed path Solid Light blue

Z 8.9.3 Operations in the Machining Drawing Tile

8.9.3

You can perform the following operations when a tool track is displayed in the
machining drawing tile.
• Automatically scale the tool track
• Zoom in or out the tool track
• Move the displayed position of the tool track
• Switching the drawing coordinates
• Rotate the tool track
• Delete, start, and stop the tool track drawing
• Specify paths for the tool track drawing

500
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.9 DISPLAYING TOOL TRACKS DURING MACHINING

<1> Press the [Drawing Setting] soft key.

The soft keys to configure the drawing settings appear. 1

2
Table 8.9.3 Description of the Soft Keys
2
Name Description
Automatically scales the display to show the entire tool track graphics
in the machining drawing tile. 4
[Auto]
Zooms in the tool track graphic.
5
6
[Zoom In]
Zooms out the tool track graphic.
7
[Zoom Out]
8
Displays the soft keys to move the graphics of the tool track in a
planar motion.
A1
[Move]
Displays the soft keys to select the drawing coordinates.
A2
[Fixed
Rotation]
Z
Displays the soft keys to move the graphics of the tool track.

[Arbitrary
Rotation]
Displays the soft keys to delete, start, and stop the tool track drawing.

[Drawing
Operation]

501
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.9 DISPLAYING TOOL TRACKS DURING MACHINING

Name Description
Displays the soft keys to specify the drawing paths.

1 [Drawing
Path]
Changes the graphic operation on the touch panel on models that
2 support touch operation.

3 [Change
Operation]

4 8.9.3.1 Automatic scaling of the graphics of the tool track

You can automatically scale the display to show the entire tool track graphics in
8.9.3.1

5 the machining drawing tile.

<1> Press the [Auto] soft key.

6
7
8.9.3.2 Zooming in/out the graphics of the tool track
8 8.9.3.2

You can zoom in/out to display the graphics of the tool track.

 To zoom into the graphics

A1 <1> Press the [Zoom In] soft key.
The drawing scale will be enlarged each time you press this soft key.
A2
Z  To zoom out from the graphics
<1> Press the [Zoom Out] soft key.
The drawing scale will be reduced each time you press this soft key.

502
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.9 DISPLAYING TOOL TRACKS DURING MACHINING

8.9.3.3 Moving the displayed position of tool track graphics

Move the displayed position of tool track graphics.
8.9.3.3

• If you move the displayed position, a tool track you have drawn is

!
deleted, and drawing is started from the position to which the graphic
is moved. For this reason, if you want to check the behavior of the
1
CAUTION entire machining program, move the graphic before executing
automatic operation.
2
<1> Press the [Move] soft key.
The soft keys to move the graphics of the tool track in a planar motion appear.
2
4
<2> Press the [Upper], [Lower], [Left], [Right], or [Center] soft key.
The tool track graphic will shift in the specified direction.
5
6
Table 8.9.3.3 Movement of the Displayed Position of Graphics 7
Name Description
Shifts the tool track graphic upward.
8
[Upper]
A1
Shifts the tool track graphic downward.

A2
[Lower]
Shifts the tool track graphic leftward.
Z
[Left]
Shifts the tool track graphic rightward.

[Right]
Moves the center of the graphics of the tool track to the center of the
machining drawing tile. Scaling will not be changed.

[Center]

503
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.9 DISPLAYING TOOL TRACKS DURING MACHINING

Name Description
Ends the movement of the displayed position of graphics.

1 [Back]

2 8.9.3.4 Switching the drawing coordinates

Select the drawing coordinates to display the graphics of the tool track.
8.9.3.4

3
• If you specify the drawing coordinates, a tool track you have drawn is
deleted, and drawing is started from the position to which the
4 !
CAUTION
coordinates are specified. For this reason, if you want to check the
behavior of the entire machining program, specify the coordinates
before executing automatic operation.

5
<1> Press the [Fixed Rotation] soft key.
6 The soft keys to select the drawing coordinates appear.

7
<2> Press the soft key to switch the drawing coordinates.
8
A1
Table 8.9.3.4 Switching the Drawing Coordinates

A2 Name
Selects the XY plane.
Description

Z
[XY]
Selects the ZY plane.

[ZY]
Selects the YZ plane.

[YZ]

504
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.9 DISPLAYING TOOL TRACKS DURING MACHINING

Name Description
Selects the XZ plane.

[XZ] 1
Selects the ZX plane.

2
[ZX]
Selects the isometric coordinates in which the +Z axis faces upward.
2
[Isometric XY] 4
Selects the isometric coordinates in which the +Z axis faces upward.
However, the view will be opposite.
5
[Isometric XY]
Selects the isometric coordinates in which the +X axis faces upward.
6
[Isometric YZ] 7
Ends the switching of the drawing coordinates.

8
[Back]

8.9.3.5 Rotating the graphics of the tool track A1

Rotate the graphics of the tool track in an arbitrary direction with the workpiece set
8.9.3.5

to the center.
A2
• If you rotate the graphic, a tool track you have drawn is deleted, and
! drawing is started from the position to which the graphic is rotated. For Z
CAUTION this reason, if you want to check the behavior of the entire machining
program, rotate the graphic before executing automatic operation.

<1> Press the [Arbitrary Rotation] soft key.

The soft keys to rotate the graphics of the tool track appear.

505
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.9 DISPLAYING TOOL TRACKS DURING MACHINING

<2> Press the soft key to rotate the graphics of the tool track.
Each time you press the soft key, the graphics of the tool track will rotate in the
corresponding direction.

1
Table 8.9.3.5 Rotation of the Graphics
2 Name Description
The graphics of the tool track will rotate in a counterclockwise
3 direction with the right-hand side (when facing the screen) as the
rotation axis.

[Upper]
4 The graphics of the tool track will rotate in a clockwise direction with
the right-hand side (when facing the screen) as the rotation axis.

5 [Lower]
The graphics of the tool track will rotate in a counterclockwise
6 direction with the upper direction of the screen as the rotation axis.

[Left]
7 The graphics of the tool track will rotate in a clockwise direction with
the upper direction of the screen as the rotation axis.

8 [Right]
The graphics of the tool track will rotate in a counterclockwise
A1 direction with the near side (when facing the screen) as the rotation
axis.

A2 [CW]
The graphics of the tool track will rotate in a clockwise direction with
the near side (when facing the screen) as the rotation axis.

Z
[CCW]
Ends the rotation of the graphics.

[Back]

506
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.9 DISPLAYING TOOL TRACKS DURING MACHINING

8.9.3.6 Delete, start, and stop the tool track drawing

You can delete, start, or stop the tool track drawing.
8.9.3.6

This is used when partially checking the behavior of the machining program.

<1> Press the [Drawing Operation] soft key. 1

The soft keys to delete, start, and stop the tool track drawing appear.

2
<2> Press the [Delete], [Drawing Enable], or [Drawing Disable] soft key. 2
4
Table 8.9.3.6 Tool Track Drawing Operation
Name Description 5
The tool track drawing is deleted.

6
[Delete]
Starts the tool track drawing if you press the [Drawing Enable] soft key 7
when it is stopped by pressing the [Drawing Disable] soft key.

[Drawing
8
Enable]
Stops the tool track drawing.
This soft key is used to stop only the tool track drawing without
A1
stopping automatic operation.

[Drawing
Disable]
A2
Returns to the first page of the soft keys.
Z
[Back]

 • If the machining drawing tile is displayed, the tool track drawing starts
without pressing the [Drawing Enable] soft key.
MEMO

507
 B-64644EN-1/09
CHAPTER 8 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) 
8.9 DISPLAYING TOOL TRACKS DURING MACHINING

8.9.3.7 Specifying paths for the tool track drawing

You can specify whether to draw tool tracks for all paths or only selected paths.
8.9.3.7

<1> Press the [Drawing Path] soft key on the MEM mode base screen.
1 The soft keys to specify the drawing paths appear.

2
<2> Press the soft key to select paths for the tool track drawing.
3
4
Table 8.9.3.7 A check box for specifying a path

5 Name Description
Draws tool tracks only for paths currently displayed.

6
[Selected
Path]
7 Draws tool tracks for all paths. Tracks can be drawn for up to four
paths.

8 [All Paths]

A1
A2
Z

508
A
1

APPENDIX 2
3
4
5
This section describes the element data used in contouring programming.

A.1 XY PLANE GEOMETRY ..................................................................... 510 6

A.2 YZ PLANE GEOMETRY ..................................................................... 513
A.3
A.4
XC PLANE GEOMETRY ....................................................................
ZC PLANE GEOMETRY .....................................................................
516
519
7
A.5 ZX PLANE GEOMETRY ..................................................................... 522
8
A
4
5
A

509
 B-64644EN-1/09
A APPENDIX 
A.1 XY PLANE GEOMETRY

A.1 XY PLANE GEOMETRY

5 G1200 Start
Defines the start point of the contouring geometry on the XY plane.

2 Element data Description

Start Point X First coordinate value of the start point of the contouring

5 Coordinate X
Start Point Y
geometry
Second coordinate value of the start point of the contouring
Coordinate Y geometry

2
 • The series of geometries that form the contouring geometry must be
5 MEMO
positioned between the start point (G1200) and end point (G1206).

2 G1201 Linear
Defines the straight line of the contouring geometry on the XY plane.
5
Element data Description

2 Linear Direction D Select the direction of the straight line displayed on the soft keys.
[Right]: Enter a "right" linear direction
[R-up]: Enter an "upper right" linear direction
[Up]: Enter an "up" linear direction
A [L-up]: Enter an "upper left" linear direction
[Left]: Enter a "left" linear direction
[L-down]: Enter a "lower left" linear direction
4 [Down]: Enter a "down" linear direction
[R-down]: Enter a "lower right" linear direction
End Point X First coordinate value of the end point of the straight line
5 Coordinate X
End Point Y Second coordinate value of the end point of the straight line
Coordinate Y
A Angle A Angle of the straight line
Last Connection L [Tangent]: Tangent to the preceding geometry
[None]: Not tangent to the preceding geometry
Next Connection M [Tangent]: Tangent to the following geometry
[None]: Not tangent to the following geometry

510
 B-64644EN-1/09
A APPENDIX 
A.1 XY PLANE GEOMETRY

G1202 Arc (CW)

Defines the clockwise arc of the contouring geometry on the XY plane.

Element data Description

End Point X First coordinate value of the arc end point 2
Coordinate X
End Point Y Second coordinate value of the arc end point
Coordinate Y 2
Arc Radius R Radius of the arc
Center Point
Coord. CX
CX First coordinate value of the arc center
3
Center Point CY Second coordinate value of the arc center
Coord. CY
Last Connection L [Tangent]: Tangent to the preceding geometry
4
[None]: Not tangent to the preceding geometry
Next Connection M [Tangent]: Tangent to the following geometry 5
[None]: Not tangent to the following geometry
Path Type U [Long Path]: Create the arc with long path
[Short Path]: Create the arc with short path 6

G1203 Arc (CCW) 7

Defines the counterclockwise arc of the contouring geometry on the XY plane.
8
Element data Description
End Point
Coordinate X
X First coordinate value of the arc end point
A
End Point Y Second coordinate value of the arc end point
Coordinate Y
Arc Radius R Radius of the arc
4
Center Point CX First coordinate value of the arc center
Coord. CX 5
Center Point CY Second coordinate value of the arc center
Coord. CY
Last Connection L [Tangent]: Tangent to the preceding geometry A
[None]: Not tangent to the preceding geometry
Next Connection M [Tangent]: Tangent to the following geometry
[None]: Not tangent to the following geometry
Path Type U [Long Path]: Create the arc with long path
[Short Path]: Create the arc with short path

511
 B-64644EN-1/09
A APPENDIX 
A.1 XY PLANE GEOMETRY

G1204 Chamfering
Defines the amount of chamfering in the contouring geometry on the XY plane.

Element data Description

5 Chamfering C Chamfering amount (radius value, positive value)
Amount

2
G1205 Corner R
5 Defines the corner R radius of the contouring geometry on the XY plane.

2 Element data
Corner R Radius R Corner R radius
Description

5
G1206 End
2 Defines the end point of the contouring geometry on the XY plane.

5  • The series of geometries that form the contouring geometry must be

positioned between the start point (G1200) and end point (G1206).
MEMO

2
A
4
5
A

512
 B-64644EN-1/09
A APPENDIX 
A.2 YZ PLANE GEOMETRY

A.2 YZ PLANE GEOMETRY

G1300 Start 2
Defines the start point of the contouring geometry on the YZ plane.

Element data Description 2

Start Point Y First coordinate value of the start point of the contouring
Coordinate Y
Start Point Z
geometry
Second coordinate value of the start point of the contouring
3
Coordinate Z geometry
Program
Coordinate
Q [Coordinate 1]: Program coordinates 1
[Coordinate 2]: Program coordinates 2
4
5
 • The series of geometries that form the contouring geometry must be
positioned between the start point (G1300) and end point (G1306).
MEMO
6
G1301 Linear 7
Defines the straight line of the contouring geometry on the YZ plane.

Element data Description 8

Linear Direction D Select the direction of the straight line displayed on the soft keys.
[Right]: Enter a "right" linear direction
[R-up]: Enter an "upper right" linear direction
A
[Up]: Enter an "up" linear direction
[L-up]: Enter an "upper left" linear direction
[Left]: Enter a "left" linear direction 4
[L-down]: Enter a "lower left" linear direction
[Down]: Enter a "down" linear direction
[R-down]: Enter a "lower right" linear direction 5
End Point Y First coordinate value of the end point of the straight line
Coordinate Y
End Point Z Second coordinate value of the end point of the straight line A
Coordinate Z
Angle A Angle of the straight line
Last Connection L [Tangent]: Tangent to the preceding geometry
[None]: Not tangent to the preceding geometry
Next Connection M [Tangent]: Tangent to the following geometry
[None]: Not tangent to the following geometry

513
 B-64644EN-1/09
A APPENDIX 
A.2 YZ PLANE GEOMETRY

G1302 Arc (CW)

Defines the clockwise arc of the contouring geometry on the YZ plane.

Element data Description

5 End Point Y First coordinate value of the arc end point
Coordinate Y
End Point Z Second coordinate value of the arc end point
2 Coordinate Z
Arc Radius R Radius of the arc

5 Center Point
Coord. CY
CY First coordinate value of the arc center

Center Point CZ Second coordinate value of the arc center

2 Coord. CZ
Last Connection L [Tangent]: Tangent to the preceding geometry
[None]: Not tangent to the preceding geometry
5 Next Connection M [Tangent]: Tangent to the following geometry
[None]: Not tangent to the following geometry
Path Type U [Long Path]: Create the arc with long path
2 [Short Path]: Create the arc with short path

5 G1303 Arc (CCW)

Defines the counterclockwise arc of the contouring geometry on the YZ plane.
2
Element data Description

A End Point
Coordinate Y
Y First coordinate value of the arc end point

End Point Z Second coordinate value of the arc end point

4 Coordinate Z
Arc Radius R Radius of the arc
Center Point CY First coordinate value of the arc center
5 Coord. CY
Center Point CZ Second coordinate value of the arc center
Coord. CZ
A Last Connection L [Tangent]: Tangent to the preceding geometry
[None]: Not tangent to the preceding geometry
Next Connection M [Tangent]: Tangent to the following geometry
[None]: Not tangent to the following geometry
Path Type U [Long Path]: Create the arc with long path
[Short Path]: Create the arc with short path

514
 B-64644EN-1/09
A APPENDIX 
A.2 YZ PLANE GEOMETRY

G1304 Chamfering
Defines the amount of chamfering in the contouring geometry on the YZ plane.

Element data Description

Chamfering C Chamfering amount (radius value, positive value) 2
Amount

2
G1305 Corner R
Defines the corner R radius of the contouring geometry on the YZ plane. 3
Element data
Corner R Radius R Corner R radius
Description
4
5
G1306 End
Defines the end point of the contouring geometry on the YZ plane. 6
 • The series of geometries that form the contouring geometry must be
positioned between the start point (G1300) and end point (G1306).
7
MEMO

8
A
4
5
A

515
 B-64644EN-1/09
A APPENDIX 
A.3 XC PLANE GEOMETRY

A.3 XC PLANE GEOMETRY

5 G1500 Start
Defines the start point of the contouring geometry on the XC plane.

2 Element data Description

Start Point X First coordinate value of the start point of the contouring

5 Coordinate X
Start Point C
geometry
Second coordinate value of the start point of the contouring
Coordinate C geometry

2 Rotation Axis
Name
Y Name of the rotation axis
[C]: C axis
[A]: A axis

5 [B]: B axis
[E]: E axis

2  • The series of geometries that form the contouring geometry must be

positioned between the start point (G1500) and end point (G1506).
MEMO
5
G1501 Linear
2
Defines the straight line of the contouring geometry on the XC plane.

A Element data Description

Linear Direction D Select the direction of the straight line displayed on the soft keys.
[Right]: Enter a "right" linear direction
4 [R-up]: Enter an "upper right" linear direction
[Up]: Enter an "up" linear direction
[L-up]: Enter an "upper left" linear direction
5 [Left]: Enter a "left" linear direction
[L-down]: Enter a "lower left" linear direction
[Down]: Enter a "down" linear direction
A [R-down]: Enter a "lower right" linear direction
End Point X First coordinate value of the end point of the straight line
Coordinate X
Start Point C Second coordinate value of the end point of the straight line
Coordinate C
Angle A Angle of the straight line
Last Connection L [Tangent]: Tangent to the preceding geometry
[None]: Not tangent to the preceding geometry
Next Connection M [Tangent]: Tangent to the following geometry
[None]: Not tangent to the following geometry

516
 B-64644EN-1/09
A APPENDIX 
A.3 XC PLANE GEOMETRY

G1502 Arc (CW)

Defines the clockwise arc of the contouring geometry on the XC plane.

Element data Description

End Point X First coordinate value of the arc end point 2
Coordinate X
End Point C Second coordinate value of the arc end point
Coordinate C 2
Arc Radius R Radius of the arc
Center Point
Coord. CX
CX First coordinate value of the arc center
3
Center Point CC Second coordinate value of the arc center
Coord. CC
Last Connection L [Tangent]: Tangent to the preceding geometry
4
[None]: Not tangent to the preceding geometry
Next Connection M [Tangent]: Tangent to the following geometry 5
[None]: Not tangent to the following geometry
Path Type U [Long Path]: Create the arc with long path
[Short Path]: Create the arc with short path 6

G1503 Arc (CCW) 7

Defines the counterclockwise arc of the contouring geometry on the XC plane.
8
Element data Description
End Point
Coordinate X
X First coordinate value of the arc end point
A
End Point C Second coordinate value of the arc end point
Coordinate C
Arc Radius R Radius of the arc
4
Center Point CX First coordinate value of the arc center
Coord. CX 5
Center Point CC Second coordinate value of the arc center
Coord. CC
Last Connection L [Tangent]: Tangent to the preceding geometry A
[None]: Not tangent to the preceding geometry
Next Connection M [Tangent]: Tangent to the following geometry
[None]: Not tangent to the following geometry
Path Type U [Long Path]: Create the arc with long path
[Short Path]: Create the arc with short path

517
 B-64644EN-1/09
A APPENDIX 
A.3 XC PLANE GEOMETRY

G1504 Chamfering
Defines the amount of chamfering in the contouring geometry on the XC plane.

Element data Description

5 Chamfering C Chamfering amount (radius value, positive value)
Amount

2
G1505 Corner R
5 Defines the corner R radius of the contouring geometry on the XC plane.

2 Element data
Corner R Radius R Corner R radius
Description

5
G1506 End
2 Defines the end point of the contouring geometry on the XC plane.

5  • The series of geometries that form the contouring geometry must be

positioned between the start point (G1500) and end point (G1506).
MEMO

2
A
4
5
A

518
 B-64644EN-1/09
A APPENDIX 
A.4 ZC PLANE GEOMETRY

A.4 ZC PLANE GEOMETRY

G1600 Start 2
Defines the start point of the contouring geometry on the ZC plane.

Element data Description 2

Start Point Z First coordinate value of the start point of the contouring
Coordinate Z
Start Point C
geometry
Second coordinate value of the start point of the contouring
3
Coordinate C geometry
Reference Position X
(X axis)
Position of the machining plane (surface) in the contouring
geometry
4
Program Q [Coordinate 1]: Program coordinates 1
Coordinate [Coordinate 2]: Program coordinates 2 5
Rotation Axis Y Name of the rotation axis
Name [C]: C axis
[A]: A axis
[B]: B axis
6
[E]: E axis
7
 • The series of geometries that form the contouring geometry must be
MEMO
positioned between the start point (G1600) and end point (G1606).
8

G1601 Linear A
Defines the straight line of the contouring geometry on the ZC plane.
4
Element data Description
Linear Direction D Select the direction of the straight line displayed on the soft keys.
[Right]: Enter a "right" linear direction
5
[R-up]: Enter an "upper right" linear direction
[Up]: Enter an "up" linear direction
[L-up]: Enter an "upper left" linear direction A
[Left]: Enter a "left" linear direction
[L-down]: Enter a "lower left" linear direction
[Down]: Enter a "down" linear direction
[R-down]: Enter a "lower right" linear direction
End Point Z First coordinate value of the end point of the straight line
Coordinate Z
End Point C Second coordinate value of the end point of the straight line
Coordinate C
Angle A Angle of the straight line

519
 B-64644EN-1/09
A APPENDIX 
A.4 ZC PLANE GEOMETRY

Element data Description

Last Connection L [Tangent]: Tangent to the preceding geometry
[None]: Not tangent to the preceding geometry
Next Connection M [Tangent]: Tangent to the following geometry

5 [None]: Not tangent to the following geometry

2 G1602 Arc (CW)

Defines the clockwise arc of the contouring geometry on the ZC plane.

5 Element data Description

End Point Z First coordinate value of the arc end point

2 Coordinate Z
End Point C Second coordinate value of the arc end point
Coordinate C

5 Arc Radius R Radius of the arc

Center Point CZ First coordinate value of the arc center
Coord. CZ
2 Center Point CC Second coordinate value of the arc center
Coord. CC
Last Connection L [Tangent]: Tangent to the preceding geometry
5 [None]: Not tangent to the preceding geometry
Next Connection M [Tangent]: Tangent to the following geometry
[None]: Not tangent to the following geometry
2 Path Type U [Long Path]: Create the arc with long path
[Short Path]: Create the arc with short path

A
G1603 Arc (CCW)
4 Defines the counterclockwise arc of the contouring geometry on the ZC plane.

5 Element data Description

End Point Z First coordinate value of the arc end point
Coordinate Z
A End Point C Second coordinate value of the arc end point
Coordinate C
Arc Radius R Radius of the arc
Center Point CZ First coordinate value of the arc center
Coord. CZ
Center Point CC Second coordinate value of the arc center
Coord. CC
Last Connection L [Tangent]: Tangent to the preceding geometry
[None]: Not tangent to the preceding geometry

520
 B-64644EN-1/09
A APPENDIX 
A.4 ZC PLANE GEOMETRY

Element data Description

Next Connection M [Tangent]: Tangent to the following geometry
[None]: Not tangent to the following geometry
Path Type U [Long Path]: Create the arc with long path
[Short Path]: Create the arc with short path
2
G1604 Chamfering 2
Defines the amount of chamfering in the contouring geometry on the ZC plane.

Element data Description 3

Chamfering C Chamfering amount (radius value, positive value)
Amount
4
G1605 Corner R 5
Defines the corner R radius of the contouring geometry on the ZC plane.

Element data Description

6
Corner R Radius R Corner R radius
7
G1606 End
8
Defines the end point of the contouring geometry on the ZC plane.

A
 • The series of geometries that form the contouring geometry must be
positioned between the start point (G1600) and end point (G1606).
MEMO
4
5
A

521
 B-64644EN-1/09
A APPENDIX 
A.5 ZX PLANE GEOMETRY

A.5 ZX PLANE GEOMETRY

5 G1400 Start
Defines the start point of the contouring geometry on the ZX plane.

2 Element data Description

Start Point DX Second coordinate value (diameter value) of the start point of the

5 Coordinate DX
Start Point Z
contouring geometry
First coordinate value of the start point of the contouring
Coordinate Z geometry

2 Program
Coordinate
Q [Coordinate 1]: Program coordinates 1
[Coordinate 2]: Program coordinates 2

5
 • The series of geometries that form the contouring geometry must be
positioned between the start point (G1400) and end point (G1406).
MEMO
2
5 G1401 Linear
Defines the straight line of the contouring geometry on the ZX plane.

2 Element data Description

Linear Direction D Select the direction of the straight line displayed on the soft keys.

A [Right]: Enter a "right" linear direction

[R-up]: Enter an "upper right" linear direction
[Up]: Enter an "up" linear direction
[L-up]: Enter an "upper left" linear direction
4 [Left]: Enter a "left" linear direction
[L-down]: Enter a "lower left" linear direction
[Down]: Enter a "down" linear direction
5 [R-down]: Enter a "lower right" linear direction
End Point DX Second coordinate value of the end point of the straight line
Coordinate DX
A End Point Z First coordinate value of the end point of the straight line
Coordinate Z
Angle A Angle of the straight line
Last Connection L [Tangent]: Tangent to the preceding geometry
[None]: Not tangent to the preceding geometry
Next Connection M [Tangent]: Tangent to the following geometry
[None]: Not tangent to the following geometry

522
 B-64644EN-1/09
A APPENDIX 
A.5 ZX PLANE GEOMETRY

G1402 Arc (CW)

Defines the clockwise arc of the contouring geometry on the ZX plane.

Element data Description

End Point DX Second coordinate value of the arc end point 2
Coordinate DX
End Point Z First coordinate value of the arc end point
Coordinate Z 2
Arc Radius R Radius of the arc
Center Point
Coord. CDX
CDX Second coordinate value of the arc center
3
Center Point CZ First coordinate value of the arc center
Coord. CZ
Last Connection L [Tangent]: Tangent to the preceding geometry
4
[None]: Not tangent to the preceding geometry
Next Connection M [Tangent]: Tangent to the following geometry 5
[None]: Not tangent to the following geometry

6
G1403 Arc (CCW)
Defines the counterclockwise arc of the contouring geometry on the ZX plane. 7
Element data Description
End Point DX Second coordinate value of the arc end point 8
Coordinate DX
End Point
Coordinate Z
Z First coordinate value of the arc end point
A
Arc Radius R Radius of the arc
Center Point
Coord. CDX
CDX Second coordinate value of the arc center 4
Center Point CZ First coordinate value of the arc center
Coord. CZ 5
Last Connection L [Tangent]: Tangent to the preceding geometry
[None]: Not tangent to the preceding geometry
Next Connection M [Tangent]: Tangent to the following geometry A
[None]: Not tangent to the following geometry

523
 B-64644EN-1/09
A APPENDIX 
A.5 ZX PLANE GEOMETRY

G1404 Chamfering
Defines the amount of chamfering in the contouring geometry on the ZX plane.

Element data Description

5 Chamfering C Chamfering amount (radius value, positive value)
Amount

2
G1405 Corner R
5 Defines the corner R radius of the contouring geometry on the ZX plane.

2 Element data
Corner R Radius R Corner R radius
Description

5
G1406 End
2 Defines the end point of the contouring geometry on the ZX plane.

5  • The series of geometries that form the contouring geometry must be

positioned between the start point (G1400) and end point (G1406).
MEMO

2
A
4
5
A

524
 B-64644EN-1/09

INDEX 1

Numerics By Entering with Absolute Coordinate Values 2

3D Manual Feed ............................................... 244 (Measure) ......................................................... 369
3D manual feed screen .................................... 245
C 3
A Calculating the cutting condition ....................... 178
Abbreviations .................................................... p-1 Calling Up Frequently Used Information and Setting
Adding an element to the contouring Screens from the Slide ....................................... 17 4
program .................................................... 209, 224 Change ............................................................. 144
Adding Edit Areas ............................................ 191 Changing an element in the contouring
Adding Fixed MDI to Favorites ......................... 257 program .................................................... 209, 226 5
Adding/Deducting the Fine Tune Amount ........ 365 Changing fixed sentences for machining ......... 130
Adjusting the Contouring Figure Drawing ........ 216 Changing Paths While Editing Multi-path Programs
APPENDIX ....................................................... 509
Simultaneously ................................................. 197 6
Changing Program and Folder Names ............... 63
Automatic scaling of the graphics of the machining
blank ................................................................. 303 Changing Screens ...................................... 24, 126
Automatic scaling of the graphics of the tool Changing Settings for Machining Simulation .... 324 7
track ................................................................. 502 Changing the Contouring Program ................... 229
Changing the Cycle Input ................................. 200
B Changing the Host PC ........................................ 83 8
BACKGROUND EDIT ...................................... 201 Changing the program edit method setting ...... 107
Background Edit Screen .................................. 201 Changing tools ......................................... 372, 374
BASIC OPERATION ............................................ 6 Checking Program Capacity ............................... 79 A1
BASIC OPERATIONS .......................................... 5 Checking tool offset information ....................... 350
BASIC OPERATIONS OF THE PROGRAM
MANAGER SLIDE .............................................. 49
Clearing the 3D manual feed pulse amount ..... 250
Closing the custom macro variable list slide .... 464
A2
BASIC OPERATIONS OF TOOL SLIDE .......... 347 Closing the setting slide ..................................... 26
BASIC OPERATIONS OF WORKPIECE
COORDINATES ............................................... 381
Closing the utility slide ...................................... 472
Common Display on the Base Screen ................. 8
Z
BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT
Configurable Blank Figures .............................. 330
SCREEN ............................................................ 99
Configuring the settings on the setting window/NC
BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE PROGRAM
setting screen ..................................................... 27
EXECUTION SCREEN .................................... 417
Confirm Overwrite .............................................. 57
BASICS FOR SETUP FOR MACHINING ........ 240
Confirm overwrite window .................................. 57
By Direct Input .................................................. 363
Consecutive search .......................................... 125
By Directly Entering the Tool Offset Measured Value
Contouring Figure Base Screen ....................... 206
(Tool Offset Measured Value Direct Input B) ... 370
Contouring program information display .......... 207
By Entering Relative Coordinate Values (Input
Counter) ........................................................... 368 Converting the Machining Simulation Results into
an NC Program ................................................ 322
By Entering the Difference (+ Input) ................. 367
Copy ................................................................. 151

i-1
 B-64644EN-1/09

Copy result preview window .............................223 Displayed contents on the setting slide .............. 27
Copy, Cut, Delete, and Paste ...........................147 Displayed contents on the tool change
Copying Programs ..............................................60 window ............................................................. 373
Copying the Contouring Figure .........................218 Displayed Contents on the Tool Slide .............. 348
CREATING CONTOURING PROGRAMS ........205 Displayed contents on the utility slide .............. 473
1 Creating Drawing Commands ...........................134 Displaying a Program Running DNC
Creating Free Figure Blanks .............................136 Machining ......................................................... 462
2 Creating New Programs ....................................117 Displaying and Setting Machining
Information ....................................................... 450
Creating New Programs and Folders ..................56
Displaying help about input items .................... 139
Current position display tile ...................................8
Displaying Histories .......................................... 263
Current Position/Distance Display Tile ..............419
3 Current position/modal information display
Displaying Multi-path Edit ................................. 195
tile .....................................................................290 Displaying the 3D manual feed screen ............ 244
Cut ....................................................................152 Displaying the Contouring Figure Base
4 Cutting Condition Calculation Function .............177
Screen .............................................................. 205
Displaying the Custom Macro Variables as a
Cutting condition calculation tile ........................180
List .................................................................... 465
5 Cutting condition calculation tile when selecting
estimated spindle output ...................................185
Displaying the HND Mode Base Screen .......... 268
Displaying the INC Mode Base Screen ............ 272
D Displaying the JOG Mode Base Screen ........... 264
6 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, NOTE, Displaying the Machining Simulation Screen ... 282
AND MEMO .......................................................s-1 Displaying the machining simulation screen when
Delete ........................................................147, 152 the NC program conversion mode is enabled .. 323
7 Delete, start, and stop the tool track drawing ....507 Displaying the machining time in the program
Deleting an element from the contouring list ....................................................................... 52
program .............................................................209 Displaying the MDI Mode Base Screen ........... 253
8 Deleting Edit Areas ...........................................192 Displaying the Program Edit Screen .................. 99
Deleting Edit Areas from the Multi-path Program Displaying the Program Manager Slide .............. 49
Multi-edit Screen ...............................................196 Displaying the REF Mode Base Screen ........... 276
A1 Deleting favorite fixed MDIs ..............................259 DISPLAYING TOOL TRACKS DURING
Deleting fixed sentences for machining ............131 MACHINING ............................................. 484, 499

A2 Deleting Programs and Folders ..........................62

Deleting the tool track drawing ..........................315
E
Edit Area when Edit Screen is Divided ............. 190
DESCRIPTION IN THIS MANUAL .................... p-1
EDIT Mode Base Screen ................................. 101
Z Display for multi-path systems ..................359, 383
EDIT mode base screen message area ........... 106
Displayed Contents of the Program Execution
Screen ...............................................................417 Editing Comments for Programs ........................ 64
Displayed Contents of Workpiece Editing Favorite Fixed MDIs ............................. 259
Coordinates .......................................................382 Editing MDI Programs ...................................... 255
Displayed contents on the custom macro variable EDITING MULTI-PATH PROGRAMS
list slide .............................................................465 SIMULTANEOUSLY ........................................ 194
Displayed contents on the move to restart position EDITING MULTIPLE PROGRAMS
screen ...............................................................480 SIMULTANEOUSLY ........................................ 189
Displayed contents on the program restart EDITING PROGRAMS ..................................... 141
window ..............................................................474 Editing Programs .............................................. 204
Displayed contents on the Restore Aux. Function Editing programs ........................................ 97, 165
screen ...............................................................478 Editing programs during execution ................... 256

i-2
 B-64644EN-1/09

Editing the program using cutting condition Inputting a Custom Macro Variable File ........... 470
calculation ........................................................ 179 Inputting a Workpiece by Measuring ................ 402
Element input window ...................................... 136 Inputting a workpiece by measuring the face ... 402
Element input window ([Start Point]) ................ 211 Inputting all programs ......................................... 72
Element input window (Arc (CCW)) ................. 214 Inputting Favorite Fixed MDIs .......................... 261
Element input window (Arc (CW)) .................... 213 Inputting fixed sentences for machining ........... 133 1
Element input window (Chamfer) ..................... 216 Inputting Programs ............................................. 71
Element input window (Corner R) .................... 215
Element input window (Line) ............................ 212
Inputting programs individually ........................... 71
Inputting the center by measuring two points ... 406
2
Enabling the sequence number automatic insert Inputting the circle center by measuring the hole or
function ............................................................. 108
Enabling/disabling the tool track drawing ......... 316
column .............................................................. 409
Inputting the Results of the Corrected Value Added
3
Entering Characters ........................................... 22 to the Current Value ......................................... 398
Entering Elements in the Contouring
Program ........................................................... 210
Inputting Tool Offset Data ................................ 371
Inputting Using Measured Values .................... 395
4
Executing MDI programs .................................. 479 Insert ................................................................ 141
Executing the MSTB code in overstore ............ 480 Insert Cycle Time ............................................. 155 5
Insert, Change, and Delete .............................. 141
F Inserting Fixed Sentences for Machining ......... 127
Feed Information Display Tile .......................... 425
Figure copy screen (mirror) .............................. 222
Inserting M Codes ............................................ 126 6
Interference check ............................................ 310
Figure copy screen (parallel) ............................ 220
Figure copy screen (rotation) ........................... 221
Fixed sentence information tile ........................ 128
J 7
JOG MODE ...................................................... 264
JOG Mode Base Screen .................................. 265
G
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS .............................. s-2
8
K
Geometry/Wear Filtering .................................. 360 Key input buffer area .................................. 23, 107
Graph compare window ................................... 187
L
A1
Guidance Display ............................................... 25
Guidance messages .......................................... 41 LEARNING COMMON OPERATIONS USED ON

H
THE OPERATION SCREEN .............................. 16
Linking an Image to a Program .......................... 68
A2
Help Display ....................................................... 25
Highlighting the Program Being Edited with
Specified Colors ............................................... 169
M
MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION) ......... 415
Z
HND MODE ...................................................... 268 MACHINING (PROGRAM EXECUTION)
HND Mode Base Screen .................................. 269 OVERVIEW ...................................................... 416
Machining Drawing Tile .................................... 500
I Machining Program Display Tile ....................... 434
iHMI CNC OPERATION SCREEN FEATURES .. 2 Machining program display tile ......................... 296
iHMI CNC OPERATION SCREEN OVERVIEW .. 1 Machining Scheduled End Time Display Tile ... 436
INC MODE ....................................................... 272 MACHINING SIMULATION .............................. 280
INC Mode Base Screen ................................... 273 Machining Simulation Screen ........................... 283
Initializing the machining blank ........................ 299 Machining Time/Remaining Time Display
Input prohibition when a change in the input value Tile .................................................................... 435
amount exceeds the limit ................................. 375 MANAGING PROGRAM STORAGE FILES ....... 95

i-3
 B-64644EN-1/09

MANAGING PROGRAMS ..................................47 OPERATING THE CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE

MANAGING PROGRAMS WITH THE PROGRAM LIST SLIDE ...................................................... 464
MANAGER SLIDE ..............................................53 OPERATING THE PROGRAM EXECUTION
MANUALS RELATED TO iHMI ........................ p-2 SCREEN .......................................................... 437
MDI key operations on the machining simulation Operation Flow of Program Restart ................. 475
1 screen ...............................................................307 Operation Guidance/Warning Messages ........... 41
MDI MODE ........................................................253 Operations in each mode when program is
2 MDI Mode Base Screen ....................................254 opened ............................................................... 56
MDI Mode Overview .........................................253 Operations in the Element Input Window ......... 224
MDI mode state and display of program display Operations in the Machining Drawing Tile ....... 500
tile .....................................................................256 OPERATIONS IN WORKPIECE
3 MDI program delete conditions (display O0000 and COORDINATES SLIDE ................................... 384
% only) ..............................................................257 Operations on the Contouring Figure Base
Misoperation Prevention Function Setting ..........29 Screen .............................................................. 208
4 Modal Information Display Tile ..........................422 Operations on the Machining Simulation
Mounting/Unmounting Large-Capacity Memory Screen .............................................................. 299
HDD/SSDs ..........................................................95 Outputting a Custom Macro Variable File ........ 470
5 Mounting/Unmounting the Memory Card ............96 Outputting all programs ...................................... 77
Moving the Cursor .............................................119 Outputting Favorite Fixed MDIs ....................... 260
Moving the displayed position of machining blank Outputting fixed sentences for machining ........ 132
6 graphics ............................................................300 Outputting Programs .......................................... 74
Moving the displayed position of tool track Outputting programs individually ........................ 74
graphics ............................................................503 Outputting Tool Offset Data ............................. 371
7 Moving to the exchange position ......................375 OVERVIEW OF PROGRAM EDIT ..................... 98
Moving to the Program Restart Position ...........479 Overview of setting items ................................... 28
Moving to the restart position ............................483
8 P
N Parallel shifting the workpiece coordinates
Name of Each Part ............................................461 graphic ............................................................. 387
A1 NAME OF EACH PART ON THE BASE Paste ................................................................ 153
SCREEN ...............................................................7 Paste Key-in ..................................................... 155
Performing Dry Run to the Restart Block ......... 475
A2 O Performing Machining Simulation .................... 297
Opening and Closing the Workpiece Coordinates
PREFACE ......................................................... p-1
Slide ..................................................................381
Z Opening Programs ..............................................55
Presetting Current Position (Relative
Coordinates) ..................................................... 243
Opening the custom macro variable list slide ...464
Presetting Relative Coordinates ....................... 446
Opening the Program Restart Window .............473
Presetting the Relative Coordinate Values ...... 400
Opening the setting slide ....................................26
Presetting Workpiece Coordinates ........... 242, 444
Opening the tool change window ......................372
Program Character Edit ................................... 161
Opening the utility slide .....................................472
Program display tile ............................................ 14
Opening/Closing the Custom Macro Variable List
Program display/edit area ........................ 102, 163
Slide ..................................................................464
Program Manager Slide ..................................... 50
Opening/Closing the Setting Slide ......................26
Program manager slide information in each
Opening/Closing the Tool Slide ........................347
mode .................................................................. 51
Opening/Closing the Utility Slide .......................472
PROGRAM MANAGER SLIDE OVERVIEW ...... 48
Operating Functions with the Soft Keys ..............22
Program Multi-edit Screen ............................... 189
Operating graphics using the touch panel ........308

i-4
 B-64644EN-1/09

Program path display area ............................... 102 Searching for Sequence Number in a Machining
Program Storage Files ....................................... 95 Program ............................................................ 441
Protecting the Workpiece Origin Offset Amount from Searching Programs ......................................... 118
Being Edited ..................................................... 395 Searching Strings ............................................. 121
Selecting a DNC Machining Program ............... 462
R Selecting Cells .................................................. 359 1
Redo ................................................................. 154 Selecting favorite fixed MDIs ............................ 258
REF MODE ...................................................... 276 Selecting multiple programs ............................... 54
REF Mode Base Screen .................................. 277 Selecting Programs and Folders ........................ 53 2
Registering fixed sentences for machining ...... 129 Selecting the Program to Edit ........................... 203
REMOTE MACHINING ............................ 452, 461
Rename confirmation window ............................ 59
Sequence No. Title Stop Function .................... 449
Servo Load Meter Display Tile ......................... 421
3
Renaming favorite fixed MDIs .......................... 259 Setting a Program to Read Only ........................ 67
Replace and Replace All .................................. 157
Replace operation ............................................ 159
SETTING SLIDE ................................................ 26
Setting the arbitrary axis approach ................... 482
4
Reset key operations ....................................... 119 Setting the M198 Operation Folder .................... 81
RESTARTING PROGRAMS ............................ 472
Restoring the Auxiliary Function ...................... 478
Setting the moving axis .................................... 481 5
Setting the operation confirmation of misoperation
Restrictions on creating free figure blanks ....... 139 prevention ........................................................... 29
Restrictions on strings that can be specified .... 158 Setting the valid offset data input range ............. 30 6
Rewind and End Search .................................. 126 Setting the Workpiece Coordinates Shift Amount
Rewinding a Machining Program ..................... 440 (for Lathes) ....................................................... 395
Rewinding a machining program ...................... 299 Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Amount .... 389 7
Rotating the graphics of the machining blank .. 302 SETTING TOOL INFORMATION (TOOL
Rotating the graphics of the tool track .............. 505 SLIDE) .............................................................. 345
Rotating the workpiece coordinates graphic .... 386 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATES ....... 379 8
SETUP FOR MACHINING ............................... 239
S Showing/Hiding the Custom Macro Variable
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ................................. s-1 Names .............................................................. 468 A1
Save Contouring Program window ................... 227 Showing/Hiding the Machining Drawing
Saving the block counter .................................. 478 Function ............................................................ 499
Saving the Contouring Program ............... 210, 227 Soft Key Operations ........................................... 16 A2
Saving the contouring program to a Soft keys ........................................... 207, 382, 418
subprogram ...................................................... 228 Soft keys on the machining simulation
Saving the contouring program to the selected screen ............................................................... 284 Z
program ............................................................ 227 Sorting fixed sentences for machining ............. 132
Screen displayed during program character Sorting Programs in the Program List ................ 80
edit ................................................................... 162 Specifying paths for the tool track
Search above the cursor position ..................... 123 drawing ..................................................... 315, 508
Search below the cursor position ..................... 124 Spindle Information Display Tile ................. 10, 427
Searching by name .......................................... 467 Starting and Ending Background Edit .............. 202
Searching by number ....................................... 466 Starting the Cycle Input .................................... 200
Searching by Tool Number .............................. 360 Status Display Tiles .......................................... 432
Searching for Any Machining Program ............ 439 String search conditions ................................... 123
Searching for Custom Macro Variables ........... 466 Switch the Work Mode ......................................... 3
Searching for Programs ..................................... 65 Switching Control Axes to Be Displayed in the
Current Position ........................................ 400, 438

i-5
 B-64644EN-1/09

Switching Coordinate Values to Be Displayed in the UPDATING OFFSET DATA ............................. 363
Current Position ................................................442 USING OPERATION ASSISTANCE
Switching Display of Modal Information Display FUNCTIONS ...................................................... 25
Tile ....................................................................255 USING THE CYCLE INPUT ............................. 200
Switching Information Displayed on the Base
1 Screen ...............................................................240 V
Switching Modes While Editing Multiple Programs Visually Checking the Workpiece Origin
2 Simultaneously ..................................................192
Switching show/hide of soft keys ........................16
Offset ................................................................ 384

Switching the blank color ..................................307 W

Switching the Coordinates to Be Displayed in the Warning messages ............................................ 44

3 Current Position ................................................400 When the cursor is on the folder tree ................. 53
When the cursor is on the program list .............. 53
Switching the display between one screen and two
screens .............................................................287 Windows ............................................................. 22
4 Switching the display direction of graphics .......307 WORK MODES .................................................... 3
Switching the Displayed Contents of Modal WORKPIECE COORDINATES OVERVIEW ... 380
Information ........................................................437
5 Switching the drawing coordinates ...........301, 504 X
XC PLANE GEOMETRY .................................. 516
Switching the drawing speed ............................311
Switching the drawings .....................................313 XY PLANE GEOMETRY .................................. 510
6 Switching the operable graphic display between two
Y
screens (left and right) ......................................289
Switching to Overall Display of Current Position YZ PLANE GEOMETRY .................................. 513

7 Information (Absolute Coordinates, Relative

Z
Coordinates, Machine Coordinates, Remaining
Travel Distance) ................................................443 ZC PLANE GEOMETRY .................................. 519

8 System Configuration to Use Multi-path Edit

Function ............................................................194
Zooming in/out the graphics of the machining
blank ................................................................. 303
Zooming in/out the graphics of the tool track ... 502

A1 T
Table display and coordinate values display ....348
Zooming the workpiece coordinates graphic .... 388
ZX PLANE GEOMETRY .................................. 522
To move the program cursor .............................255

A2 To switch display of current position/distance

display tile .........................................................240
To switch the axis displayed on current position/

Z distance display tile ...........................................241

TOOL SLIDE OVERVIEW ................................346
Tool slide soft keys ...........................................357
Tool Track Drawing ...........................................312
Touch panel operations ....................................119

U
Undo .................................................................154
Undo and Redo .................................................153
Undoing/Redoing Operations on the Tool
Slide ..................................................................361
Undoing/Redoing Operations on the Workpiece
Coordinates Slide ..............................................412

i-6
 B-64644EN-1/09

REVISION RECORD
Edition Date Contents of Revision
09 Sep., 2021 • Addition of new functions. 1
08 Jan., 2021 • Addition of new functions.
• Correction of errors
07 Jan., 2020 • Addition of new functions. 2
06 Aug., 2017 • Addition of new functions.
05
04
Jun., 2017
Apr., 2017
• Addition of new functions.
• Addition of new functions.
3
03 Feb., 2017 • Addition of new functions.
02 Jan., 2017 • Addition of new functions. 4
• Correction of errors
01 May, 2016 -
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

r-1
 B-64644EN-1/09

* B - 6 4 6 4 4 E N - 1 / 0 9 *